Is SP 21 2005 PDF
Is SP 21 2005 PDF
Is SP 21 2005 PDF
Whereas the Parliament of India has set out to provide a practical regime of right to
information for citizens to secure access to information under the control of public authorities,
in order to promote transparency and accountability in the working of every public authority,
and whereas the attached publication of the Bureau of Indian Standards is of particular interest
to the public, particularly disadvantaged communities and those engaged in the pursuit of
education and knowledge, the attached public safety standard is made available to promote the
timely dissemination of this information in an accurate manner to the public.
1 +, 1 +
01 ' 5
Jawaharlal Nehru
! $ ' +-
Satyanarayan Gangaram Pitroda
! > 0 B
BharthariNtiatakam
SP 21 : 2005
SP 21 : 2005
FIRST PUBLISHED MARCH 1985
FIRST REVISION NOVEMBER 2009
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS
UDC 691:006.3/.8
ii
Members
SHRI V. K. SETHI
SHRI B. S. GUPTA
SHRI J. C. ARORA
Director & Head (Civil Engg)
[Representing Director General (Ex-officio)]
Member Secretary
SHRI D. BHADRA
Scientist B (Assistant Director), Civil Engg, BIS
iii
iv
Building Construction Practices including Painting, Varnishing and Allied Finishes, CED 13
FOREWORD
Users of various Civil Engineering Codes felt the need for explanatory handbooks and other
compilations based on Indian Standards. The need was further emphasized in view of the publication
of the National Building Code of India in 1970 and its implementation. The Expert Group set up in
1972 by Department of Science and Technology, Government of India carried out in depth studies in
various of Civil Engineering and Construction Practices. During the preparation of the Fifth Five
Year Plan in 1975, the Group was assigned the task of producing a Science and Technology Plan for
research, development and extension work in the sectors of housing and construction technology.
One of the items of this plan was the formulation of design handbooks, explanatory handbooks and
design aids based on the National Building Code and various Indian Standards and other activities in
the promotion of the National Building Code. The Expert Group gave high priority to this item and
on the recommendation of the Department of Science and Technology, the Planning Commission
approved the following two projects which were assigned to the Bureau of Indian Standards
(erstwhile Indian Standards Institution):
a) Development programme on code implementation for building and civil engineering
construction, and
b) Typification for industrial buildings
A Special Committee for Implementation of Science and Technology Projects (SCIP) consisting of
experts connected with different aspects was set up in 1974 to advise the BIS Directorate General in
identifying the Handbooks and for guiding the development of the work. Under the first project, the
Committee had identified several subjects for preparing explanatory handbooks/compilations covering
appropriate Indian Standards/Codes/Specifications. One of the compilations suggested was the
Handbook on Summaries of Indian Standards for Building Materials, SP 21, first published in 1983
for the standards referred in Part 5 of National Building Code of India.
Ensuring the quality and effectiveness of building materials used in the construction and storage are as
important as the other phases of building activity like planning, designing and constructing the
building itself. Therefore, the Handbook gives a brief summary of the contents of Indian Standards
on building materials to indicate such aspects as quality requirements, dimensions, range of
properties, limitations on use, etc. This, however, does not cover the standards relating to paints and
other specifications not of direct concern to buildings. This Handbook assists the professional
Engineer/Architect, etc to choose the material for the purpose of their design and estimation. The
general format of the summaries is, scope; range of sizes; important requirements regarding physical,
mechanical and other properties; reference to appropriate methods of testing and other related material
specifications.
It may be noted that the Handbook does not form part of any Indian Standard on the subject and does
not have the status of an Indian Standard. Wherever, if there is any dispute about the interpretation or
opinion expressed in this Handbook, the provisions of the latest version of the Standards only shall
apply; the provisions of this Handbook should be considered as only supplementary and informative.
As many of the Indian Standards referred in the Handbook have been revised and many new
Standards have been formulated since its first publication, it was decided to revise this Handbook.
This revised version, while basically retaining the structure of 1983 version, explicitly provides for:
a) The summaries of all the latest available Indian Standards on Building Materials including
those formulated after the first publication of Handbook (this takes into account all the
standards published till 31 December 2004)
b) More user friendly version by suitable rearrangements of standards within the chapter.
The Handbook is based on the draft prepared by Shri K. Raghavendran, Former Deputy Director
General, Bureau of Indian Standards. The Draft Handbook scrutinized within BIS, was circulated for
review to Shri A.K. Sarkar, Former Chairman-cum-Managing Director, National Building
Construction Company, Building Materials and Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi, Central
Building Research Institute, Roorkee and Central Public Works Department, New Delhi and views
expressed by them were taken into consideration while finalizing the Handbook.
vi
CONTENTS
Page
SECTION 1...................CEMENT AND CONCRETE . 1-81
SECTION 2...................BUILDING LIMES . 1-15
SECTION 3...................STONES .. 1-12
SECTION 4...................WOOD PRODUCTS FOR BUILDING .. 1-22
SECTION 5...................GYPSUM BUILDING MATERIALS 1-11
SECTION 6...................TIMBER . 1-25
SECTION 7...................BITUMEN AND TAR PRODUCTS .. 1-16
SECTION 8...................FLOOR, WALL, ROOF COVERINGS AND FINISHES . 1-51
SECTION 9...................WATER PROOFING AND DAMP PROOFING MATERIALS .. 1-14
SECTION 10.................SANITARY APPLIANCES AND WATER FITTINGS ... 1-235
SECTION 11.................BUILDERS HARDWARE 1-48
SECTION 12.................WOOD PRODUCTS .. 1-59
SECTION 13.................DOORS, WINDOWS AND SHUTTERS .. 1-35
SECTION 14.................CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT . 1-19
SECTION 15.................STRUCTURAL STEELS ........... 1-27
SECTION 16.................LIGHT METAL AND THEIR ALLOYS ..1-16
SECTION 17.................STRUCTURAL SHAPES .. 1-25
SECTION 18.................WELDING ELECTRODES AND WIRES 1-21
SECTION 19.................THREADED FASTENERS AND RIVETS ... 1-51
SECTION 20.................WIRE ROPES AND WIRE PRODUCTS .. 1-7
SECTION 21.................GLASS 1-8
SECTION 22.................FILLERS, STOPPERS AND PUTTIES . 1-6
SECTION 23.................THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS 1-26
SECTION 24.................PLASTICS .. 1-21
SECTION 25.................CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ... 1-11
SECTION 26.................WIRING ACCESSORIES .. 1-34
SECTION 27.................GENERAL .. 1-4
vii
SP 21 : 2005
SECTION 1
1.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
AGGREGATES
IS
383 : 1970
Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete (second revision)
1.5
IS
2116 : 1980
1.7
IS
9142 : 1979
1.8
CEMENT
IS
269 : 1989
1.10
IS
455 : 1989
1.11
IS
1489 :
(Part 1) : 1991
1.12
(Part 2) : 1991
1.13
IS
3466 : 1988
1.14
IS
6452 : 1989
1.15
IS
6909 : 1990
1.16
IS
8041 : 1990
1.17
IS
8042 : 1989
1.18
IS
8043 : 1991
1.19
IS
8112 : 1989
1.20
IS
12269 : 1987
1.21
IS
12330 : 1988
1.22
2185
1.23
(Part 2) : 1983 Hollow and solid lightweight concrete blocks (first revision)
1.25
1.27
IS
4996 : 1984
1.28
IS
5751 : 1984
1.29
IS
5758 : 1984
1.30
IS
5820 : 1970
1.32
IS
6072 : 1971
1.33
IS
6073 : 1971
1.34
IS
6523 : 1983
1.35
1.2
SP 21 : 2005
Title
Page
IS
9893 : 1981
1.36
IS
10388 : 1982
1.37
IS
12440 : 1988
1.38
IS
12592 : 2002
1.39
IS
13356 : 1992
1.40
IS
13990 : 1994
Precast reinforced concrete planks and joists for flooring and roofing
1.42
IS
14143 : 1994
Prefabricated bricks panel and partially precast joist for flooring and roofing
1.44
IS
14201 : 1994
Precast reinforced concrete channel unit for construction on floors and roofs.
1.46
IS
14241 : 1995
1.48
ASBESTOS CEMENT
PRODUCTS
IS
459 : 1992
1.50
IS
1592 : 2003
1.51
IS
1626
Asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing
fittings :
(Part 1) : 1994
1.55
(Part 2) : 1994
1.57
(Part 3) : 1994
1.58
IS
2096 : 1992
1.59
IS
2098 : 1997
1.60
IS
6908 : 1991
Asbestos cement pipes and fittings for sewerage and drainage (first revision)
1.61
IS
8870 : 1978
1.63
IS
9627 : 1980
1.64
IS
13000 : 1990
1.66
IS
13008 : 1990
1.67
CONCRETE
PIPES
IS
458 : 2003
1.68
IS
784 - 2001
1.69
IS
1916 : 1989
Steel cylinder pipe with concrete lining and coating (first revision)
1.71
IS
4350 : 1967
1.72
IS
7319 : 1974
1.74
IS
7322 : 1985
1.76
1.3
SP 21 : 2005
Title
TREATMENT OF CONCRETE
Page
JOINTS
IS
1834 : 1984
1.77
IS
1838
IS
IS
(Part 1):1983
1.78
(Part 2):1984
1.79
11433
1.80
(Part 1):1985
General requirements
12118
(Part 1):1987
General requirements
Note
IS 2645:2003 Integral cement water proofing compounds is covered under
damp-proofing materials (see section 9)
1.4
1.81
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Requirements
3.
63 mm
40 mm
20 mm
16 mm
12.5 mm
10 mm
40 mm
80 mm
100
100
63 mm
85 to 100
100
40 mm
0 to 30
85 to 100
100
95 to 100
20 mm
0 to 5
0 to 20
85 to 100
100
30 to 70 95 to 100
16 mm
85 to 100
100
- 90 to 100
12.5 mm
85 to 100
100
0 to 5
0 to 5
0 to 20
0 to 30
0 to 45
85 to 100
10 to 35
4.75 mm
0 to 5
0 to 5
0 to 10
0 to 20
0 to 5
2.36 mm
0 to 5
10 mm
1.5
20 mm 16 mm
100
12.5 mm
100
- 90 to 100
25 to 55 30 to 70
o to 10
100
0 to 10
-
40 to 85
0 to 10
-
SP 21 : 2005
3.2 Coarse Aggregates for Mass Concrete Shall be in sizes specified in the following table.
Class and Size
IS Sieve Designation
Large, 80-40 mm
Medium, 40-20 mm
Small, 20-4.75 mm
Percentage Passing
160 mm
90-100
80 mm
0-10
80 mm
90-100
40 mm
0-10
40 mm
90-100
20 mm
0-10
20 mm
90-100
4.75 mm
0-10
2.36 mm
0-2
3.3 Fine Aggregates Grading in zones I to IV shall be within the follwoing limits:
IS Sieve
Designation
Grading
Grading
Grading
Zone I
Zone II
Zone III
Zone IV
10 mm
100
100
100
100
4.75 mm
90-100
90-100
90-100
95-100
2.36 mm
60-95
75-100
85-100
95-100
1.18 mm
30-70
55-90
75-100
90-100
600 micron
15-34
35-59
60-79
80-100
300 micron
5-20
8-30
12-40
15-50
150 micron
0-10
0-10
0-10
0-15
3.4 All-in Aggregates When available, grading shall be according to the following table:
IS Sieve Designation
20 mm
80 mm
100
40 mm
95-100
10
20 mm
45-75
95-100
4.75 mm
25-45
30-50
600 micron
8-30
10-35
150 micron
0-6
0-6
Note 1 For methods of tests, refer to all parts of IS : 2386 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete:
Note 2 Description and physical characteristics of aggregates for concrete is given in Appendix C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 383:1970 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources
for concrete (second revision).
1.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
2.1 General The sand shall be hard, durable, clean
and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and
shall not contain the amount of clay, silt and fine dust
more than specified in 2.3 (a).
b)
Organic impurities.
2.4. Grading
(a) The particle size grading of sand for use in mortars shall be within the limits as specified below:
IS Sieve Designation
4.75 mm
100
2.36 mm
90 to 100
1.18 mm
70 to 100
600 micron
40 to 100
300 micron
5 to 70
150 micron
0 to 15
(b) Various sizes of particle of which the sand is composed shall be uniformally distributed throughout the mass.
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 2386 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete Part 1:1963 Particle size and shape;
Part 2 : 1963 Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2116:1980 Specification for sand for masonry mortars (first revision).
1.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
2.4.3 Loss on Ignition Loss on ignition of aggregates except cinder aggregates shall not exceed 4 percent by dry mass. For cinder aggregates, loss on ignition shall be as specified in IS 2686:1977* .
2.3 Uniformity of Mass The bulk density of successive supplies of lightweight aggregate shall not differ
by more than 10 percent from that of the sample
submitted for acceptance tests.
(1)
Size
Designations
(2)
i)
Fine aggregate
(4.75 to 0 mm)
ii)
Coarse aggregate
(12.5 to 4.75 mm)
(10 to 2.36 mm)
iii)
20
mm
12.5
mm
10
mm
4.75
mm
2.36
mm
1.18
mm
300
microns
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
100
85-100
40-80
10-35
100
90-100
100
40-80
80-100
0-20
5-40
0-10
0-20
100
90-100
65-90
35-65
10-25
1.8
SP 21 : 2005
Note For methods of tests refer to IS 2185 (Part 2):1983 Concrete masonry units Part 2 Hollow and solid light weight
concrete blocks (first revision), IS 2386:1963 Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete, (Part 1) Particle size and shape, (Part
2) Organic Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities, Part 3 Specific gravity, density, voids, absorption and
bulking, (IS 2686:1977 Cinder aggrerate for use in lime concrete, and IS 4032:1985 Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic
cement (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 9142:1979 Specification for artificial lightweight aggregates for concrete
masonry units.
1.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Physical Requirements
3.1 Fineness Specific surface of cement shall not be
less than 225 m2 /kg.
3.2 Soundness Unaerated expansion shall be not more
than 10 mm by 'Le Chatelier' method and 0.8 percent by
autoclave test; if it fails, aerated sample shall not show
more of than 5 mm and 0.6 percent when tested by 'Le
Chatelier' method and autoclave method respectively.
3.3 Setting Time The setting time of the cements,
when tested by the vicat apparatus shall conform to the
following requirements:
a) 72 1 hour :
b) 168 2 hours :
c) 672 4 hours :
Sl. No.
Characteristics
(1)
i)
Requirement
(2)
(3)
by the formula
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Note For method of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical test for hydraulic cement; and IS: 4032-1985
Methods of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 269:1989 Specification for ordinary portland cement, 33 grade (fourth
revision).
1.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Chemical Requirement
Percent, Max
Magnesium oxide (MgO)
8.0
3.0
1.5
Loss on ignition
5.0
Insoluble residue
4.0
Notes1Total chloride content in cement shall not
exceed 0.05 percent by mass for cement used in
prestressed concrete structures and long span reinforced
concrete structures. (Method of test for determination
of chloride content in
cement is given in
IS 12423:1988.)*
Notes 2. Granulated slag conforming to IS
12089:1987 has been found suitable for the manufacture
of Portland slag cement.
3. Physical Requirements
a) 72
1h
b) 168
2h
c) 672
4h
For detailed information, refer to IS 455:1989. Specification for portland slag cement
(fourth revision).
1.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Physical Requirements
4.1 Fineness Specific surface shall be not less than
300 m2/kg.
4.2 Soundness Expansion of unaerated sample
i)
Not more than 10 mm by 'Le Chateliers' method.
2.1 Pozzolana
ii)
2.1.1 Fly ash used in the manufacture of Portland pozzolana cement shall conform to IS 3812 : 1981*.
2.1.2 Fineness and average compressive strength in
lime reactivity of fly ash shall not be less than 320
30 min, Min
Final setting
a)
At 72 1h
16 MPa, Min
b)
At 168 2h
22 MPa, Min
c)
At 672 4h
33 MPa, Min
TABLE 1
SI No.
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Characteristic
(2)
Requirement
(3)
5.0
6.0
3.0
x+
4.0(100 x )
100
For detailed information , refer to IS 1489 (Part 1) 1991 Specification for portland pozzolana cement Part 1
:1991 Fly ash based (third revision).
1.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.1 Pozzolana
(i)
(ii)
a) At 72 1h
16 MPa , Min
2h
c) At 672 4 h
22 MPa , Min
b) At 168
33 MPa , Min
Characteristic
Requirement
(2)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
(3)
5.0
6.0
3.0
x+
4.0(100 x )
100
For detailed information, refer to IS 1489(Part 2):1991 Specification for Portland pozzolana
cement Part 2 calcined clay based (third revision).
1.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
v)
vi)
Characteristic
Requirements
15
90 min
24 h
10 mm
1 percent
2.5 MPa
5 MPa
6 percent
60 percent
original flow
of
Note For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031. Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement.
1.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b) At 72 1 hours
For detailed information, refer to IS 6452:1989 Specification for High alumina cement for
structural use (first revision).
1.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Sulphuric anhydride
4 percent, Max
Magnesium oxide
10 percent, Max
Sulphide sulphur
6 percent, Min
1.5 percent, Max
4. Physical Requirements
4.1 Fineness It shall have a fineness (specific
surface) of not less than 400 m2/kg.
4.2 Soundness Expansion not more than 5 mm by Le
Chatelier method
4.3 Setting Time Initial setting time: Not less than 30
minutes, final setting time: not more than 10 hour.
4.4 Compresssive Strength
a)
72
1 hours
b)
168
2 hours
c)
672
4 hours
Note For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, and IS 4032:1985
Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement (first revision)
1.16
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope
24 hours 30
minutes
3. Physical Requirements
b)
72 1 hours
For detailed information, refer to IS 8041: 1990 Specification for rapid hardening portland
cement (second revision).
1.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1 Scope
1.1 Manufacture and chemical and physical
requirements of white Portland cement.
NoteWhite Portland cement is generally used for architectural
and decorative purposes and is generally meant for nonstructural use. It is made from raw materials containing very
little iron oxide and magnesium oxide.
Characteristic
(2)
Requirements
(3)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Note For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032:1985
Methods of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement. (first revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 8042:1989 Specification for white Portland cement
(second revision).
1.18
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Physical Requirements
3.1 Fineness Specific surface shall not be less
than 350 m2/kg.
3.2 Soundness and Setting Time Shall be as laid down
IS 269:1989.
3.3 Compressive Strength
a)
b)
c)
For detailed information, refer to IS 8043:1991 Specification for hydrophobic Portland cement
(second revision).
1.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Physical Requirement
Characteristic
(2)
Requirement
(3)
C a o - 0 .7 S O 3
2 .8 S iO 2 + 1 .2 A I 2 O 3 + 0 .6 5 F e 2 O 3
ii) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide
vi)
Note 1 For specific chemical and physical requirements of cement used for railway sleepers, refer to the standard.
Note 2 For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032:1985
Methods of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement. (first revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 8112:1989 Specification for 43 Grade ordinary portland
cement (first revision).
1.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b)
a)
3. Physical Requirements
b)
c)
27 MPa
37 MPa
53 MPa
Characteristic
(2)
Requirement
(3)
iii)
iv)
v)
percent by mass
vi)
Note 1 For specific chemical and physical requirements of cement used for railway sleepers, refer to the standard.
Note 2 For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS
4032:1985 Methods of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement. (first revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 12269:1987 Specification for 53 Grade ordinary portland
cement.
1.21
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Physical Requirement
3.1 Fineness Specific surface not less than
225 m2/kg
3.2 Soundness Unaerated cement-expansion not more
than 10 mm by Le Chatelier method and not more than
0.8 percent by autoclave method.
3.3 Setting Time
a)
72 1h,
10 MPa
b)
168 2h,
16 MPa
c)
672 4h,
33MPa
Sl No.
(1)
i)
Characteristic
(2)
Requirement
(3)
CaO - 0.7SO 3
2.8S1O 2 + 1.2AI 2 O 3 + 0.65Fe 2 O 3
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Note For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032 : 1985
Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement. (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 12330:1988 Specification for sulphate resisting Portland
cement.
1.22
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Terminology
2.1 Hollow (Open or Closed Cavity) BlockA block
having one or more large holes or cavities which either
pass through the block (open cavity) or do not
effectively pass through the block (closed cavity) and
having the solid material between 50 and 75 percent of
the total volume of the block calculated from the overall
dimensions.
a) Grade A
b) Grade B
c) Grade C
(see Table 2)
3. Dimension
Length
Height
Width
1.23
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 MINIMUM FACE SHELL AND WEB THICKNESSES
All dimensions in millimetres.
Nominal Block
Width
Face Shell
Thickness, Min
Thickness of
Web, Min
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
100 or less
25
25
25
25
25
30
30
25
30
Over 200
35
30
38
Grade
(1)
(2)
A (3.5)
A
A
A
B
(4.5)
(5.5)
(7.0)
(2.0)
B (3.0)
B (5.0)
C (1.5)
D (5.0)
D (4.0)
(3)
Not less than 1500
Minimum
Average
Compressive
Strength of
Units at 28
Days N/mm2
Minimum
Strength of
Individual
Units at
28 days
N/mm2
(4)
(5) .
3.5
2.8
4.5
5.5
7.0
2.0
3.6
4.4
5.6
1.6
3.0
5.0
1.5
2.4
4.0
1.2
5.0
4.0
4.0
3.2
Note 1
For requirements regarding materials, surface texture, texture and finish, refer to the standard.
Note 2
For detailed information, refer to IS 2185 (Part 1):1979 Specification for concrete mansory
units : Part 1 Hollow and solid concrete blocks (second revision).
1.24
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Height
100 or 200 mm
Width
3. Classification
3.1 Load bearing lightweight concrete masonry units
hollow (open and closed cavity) or solid shall conform
to the following two grades
a) Grade AThese are used below and above
ground level in damp-proof course, in exterior
walls that may or may not be treated with a
suitable weather-protective coating and for
interior walls.
b) Grade B These are used above ground level
in damp-proof course, in exterior walls that are
treated with a suitable weather-protective
coating and for internal walls.
3.2 Nonload bearing lightweight concrete masonry
units, hollow (open and closed cavity) or solid shall be
used in interior walls, partitions, panels and for exterior
panel walls in steel or reinforced concrete frame
construction when protected from weather by rendering
or by some other efficient treatment.
4. Physical Requirements
4.1 General All units shall be sound and free from
cracks or other defects.
4.2 Block Density Shall not exceed 1 600 kg/m3
4.3 Compressive Strength See Table 1.
4.4 Water Absorption See Table 1.
4.5 Drying ShrinkageLoad Bearing
Grade A
Grade B
0.09 percent, Ma x
1.25
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
Type and Grade
Absorption
Minimum Compressive
Strength
Average of
8 units, Min
(2)
(1)
Hollow,load bearing
Grade A
Grade B
Hollow, Non-load bearing
Solid ,load bearing
Grade A
Grade B
N/mm 2
7.0
5.0
4.0
12.5
8.5
N/mm2
5.5
4.0
3.5
Kg/m3
320
-
10.8
7.0
320
Note 1
For requirements regarding materials, manufacture, surface texture and finish refer to the standard.
Note 2
For detailed information, refer to IS 2185 (Part 2) 1983 Specification for concrete masonry
units : Part 2 Hollow and solid lightweight concrete blocks (first revision).
1.26
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Height
Width
4. Physical Requirements
Note 1
Actual dimensions shall be 10mm short of
the nominal dimensions (or 6 mm short in special cases where
finer jointing is specified).
Note 2
In addition, block shall be manufactured in
half lengths of 200, 250 or 300 mm to correspond to the full
lengths.
(1)
Density in Ovendry
Condition
(2)
Compressive Strength,
Min
Grade 1
(3)
Thermal
Conductivity
Air Dry
Condition
Grade 2
(4)
(5)
i)
kg/m 3
451 to 550
N/mm 2
2.0
N/mm 2
1.5
W/m.k
0.21
ii)
551 to 650
4.0
3.0
0.24
iii)
652 to 750
5.0
4.0
0.30
iv)
751 to 850
6.0
5.0
0.37
v)
851 to 1 000
7.0
6.0
0.42
Note 1 For requirements regarding materials surface texture and finish refer to the standard.
Note 2 For methods of test, refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2185 (Part 3) 1984 Specification for concrete masonry
units: Part 3 Autoclaved cellular (aerated) concrete blocks (first revision).
1.27
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Classification
a) Line Posts Line posts are intermediate posts
forming the majority in a post-and-wire system
and are intended to carry the fencing wire
between the strainer posts.
b) Strainer Posts Posts notched on three sides
and used with struts or braces as strainers at
the corners or ends, or at intermediate
positions in a line of fence.
c) Strut or Brace Member used in inclined
position for supporting the strainer post.
3. Shape and Dimension
3.1 Shall be square, rectangular, circular or any
polygonal in section. May be of uniform section or
tapering on two sides or tapering on all four sides. The
700 N
2 500 N
450 N
Note 1 For typical details and dimensions of line post, strainer post and brace for fencing intended for various uses, for
recommendations for manufacture of reinforced concrete under field conditions and for recommendations for erection of fence
posts, refer to the standard.
Note 2 For method of tests, refer to Appendix C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4996:1984 Specification for reinforced concrete fence
posts (first revision).
1.28
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 5751:1984 Specification for precast concrete coping blocks
(first revision).
1.29
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Dimensions
150 300
125 250
100 250 mm
b) Splayed kerbs
150 300
125 250 mm
c)
Half-batter kerbs
150 300
125 x 250 mm
d) Half-section kerbs
150 x 125 mm
300 150
6. Tests
250 125
250 100 mm
b) Channels
Type of Product
a)
Rectangular kerbs
b)
Splayed kerbs
c)
Half-batter kerbs
d)
e)
f)
Half-section kerbs
Channels
Edgings
250 125 mm
Dimensions (mm)
150 300
125 250
100 250
150 300
125 250
150 300
125 250
150 125
250 125
50 250
50 200
50 150
1.30
750
600
100
750
600
750
600
200
600
180
720
040
SP 21 : 2005
6.1.1 If tests are carried out after a longer period, the
load to be supported shall be increased by the ageing
factor given below
Age of sample (months)
3
Ageing factor
1.1
6
1.15
12
1.20
For detailed information, refer to IS 5758:1984 Specification for precast concrete kerbs
(first revision).
1.31
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Tests
TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION
Class
Description
EHV
HVP
HV
Unreinforced, flat
LV
Unreinforced, flat
TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS
Class
Type No.
Shape
L
Dimensions
W
T
T'
EHV
1
2
With peak
Do
450
600
230
230
50
50
75
75
450
750
HVP
1
2
Do
Do
300
450
180
180
40
40
65
65
300
350
HV
1
2
1
2
3
Flat
Do
Do
Do
Do
300
450
250
300
450
180
180
150
180
180
40
40
40
40
40
300
350
200
200
200
LV
Note 1
Note 2
Note 1 For manufacturing details with regard to the aspects such as mixing, moulding, protection from frost and reinforcement
details, refer to 5 of the standard.
Note 2 For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 5820:1970 Specification for precast concrete cable covers.
1.32
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Gross Density(kg/m3)
Class
Compressive
Strength,
Min
(kgf/cm2)
Thermal
Conductivity
Max
(kcal/m/h/oC)
70
0.36
60
0.32
50
0.26
35
0.21
20
0.18
Note 1 For methods of tests, refer to IS 3809 1979 Specification for fire resistance test for structures (first revision) and
relevant partsof IS 6441 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products .
Note 2 For details of manufacture with regard to aspects such as reinforcement, formation of cells of cellular concrete
(method of autoclavation) and finish, refer to 6 of the standard.
Note 3 For structural requirements, refer to 8 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6072:1971 Specification for autoclaved reinforced cellular
concrete wall slabs.
1.33
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class
7.5 Compressive
Conductivity
Strength
and
Thermal
Class
Compressive
Strength, Min
(kgf/cm2)
Thermal
Conductivity Max
(kcal/m/h/oC)
70
0.36
60
0.32
50
0.26
35
0.21
20
0.18
For detailed information, refer to IS 6073:1971 Specification for autoclaved reinforced cellular
concrete floor and roof slabs.
1.34
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Requirements
3.1 Materials
3.1.1 Cement Ordinary Portland cement or Portland
slag cement or Portland pozzolana cement or rapid
hardening Portland cement or high strength ordinary
Portland cement.
3.1.2 Aggregates Well graded mixture of coarse and
fine aggregates. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall
be 10mm.
3.1.3 Concrete Not weaker than M 20
(see IS 456 : 2000) *
3.1.4 Reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose
mill scale, loose rust, mud, oil grease or any other coating
which may reduce the bond between the concrete and
the steel. A slight film or rust may not be regarded as
harmful but the steel shall not be visibly pitted by rust.
* Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
(fourth revision)
Note For requirements in regard to manufacture (construction and finish, positioning of reinforcement, casting, curing, etc),
arrangements for fixing of hinges to frames, arrangements for door and window fixtures and erection along with illustrations refer
to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6523:1983 Specification for precast reinforced concrete
door and window frames (first revision).
1.35
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.2.1.2 Lug sills Lug sills are those with the ends
projecting into the masonry wall. There are no vertical
joints at the juncture of the sills and the jambs which is
one of the advantages of the lug sill over the slip sill.
Note 2
For details of manufacture, or aspects such as construction, finish, mould, reinforcement, occuring etc, refer to
5 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 9893:1981 Specification for precast concrete lintels and
sills.
1.36
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Materials
2.1 CementThis shall conform to either IS 269:1989*
or IS 8041 : 1990 or IS 8112 : 1989
200 to 500 mm
Width
0.5 to 2.5 mm
Thickness
0.2 to 0.35 mm
Width
Thickness
(2)
1 500
1 750
2 000
Tolerances
(1)
(3)
Depth of
Corrugation
(4)
Pitch of
Corrugation
(5)
1 000
6.5
48
146
10
+ free
0.5
+3
6
+6
2
For detailed information, refer to I S 10388:1982 Specification for corrugated coir, woodwool,
cement roofing sheets.
1.37
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.2 For 200, 150 and 100 mm nominal thick walls, the
blocks shall be of 300 200 150 mm, 300 150 150
mm and 300 100 150 mm nominal size respectively.
3.3 For accommodating vertical reinforcement required
in earthquake resistant construction special block of
half-width and with semi-circular recess in it (see Fig.1
of the standard) shall be used. These dimensions are
suitable for 200 mm thick wall. Similar blocks shall be
made for walls of thickness greater than 200 mm.
3.4 Tolerances The maximum variation in the length
of the units shall not be more than 5 mm and maximum
variation in height and width of units not more
than 3 mm. The faces of blocks shall be flat and
rectangular, opposite faces shall be parallel, and all arises
shall be square. The bedding surfaces shall be at right
angles to the faces of the blocks.
4. Classification See Table 1.
300 mm
Height
150 mm and
Width
5. Physical Requirement
Class
Designation
Minimum strength of
Individual Blocks N/mm2
5.0
3.5
6.0
4.2
7.0
5.0
9.0
6.3
10
10.0
7.5
*For 100 mm wide blocks (for 100 mm thick walls) the miminum strength may be 3.5 N/mm2.
Note 1 For details of materials refer to 5 of the standard.
Note 2 For details of manufacture in regard to mould, mix, placing, compaction, curing and drying refer to 6 of the standard.
Note 3 For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.
For detailed information refer to IS 12440:1988. Specification for precast concrete stone masonry
blocks.
1.38
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Physical Requirements
Grade
Type/Shape of Cover
Designation Frame
Light Duty
LD-2.5
Medium Duty MD-10
Heavy Duty HD-20
Extra Duty
EHD-35
Type
Load
in
kN
Diameter
of Block
mm
LD-2.5
Rectangular, square
and circular
25
300
MD-10
Rectangular and
circular
100
300
HD-20
Circular, lamphole,
square and rectangular
(scrapper manhole)
200
300
EHD-35
350
300
For detailed information, refer to IS 12592 :2002 Specification for precast concrete manhole
covers and frames.
1.39
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b)
5 mm
10 mm
2 mm
4. Design
4.1 The minimum compressive strength of cement
mortar cubes having area of face equal to 50 cm2 shall
be 25 N/mm2. The recommended mix proportion is 1 part
of cement to 1.5 to 2.5 parts of sand by mass. Water
cement ratio should be 0.35 to 0.45.
1.40
SP 21 : 2005
5. Tests
5.1 Strength of Mortar For cubes of size 70.6 mm
shall be not less than 25 N/mm2.
5.2 Water Tightness Test When filled with water, the
For detailed information, refer to IS 13356:1992 Specification for precast ferrocement water
tanks up to 10 000 litres capacity.
1.41
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Dimension
Tolerance
Length
5 mm
Width
3 mm
Thickness
2 mm
2 mm
1 mm
1.42
SP 21 : 2005
I) : 1982, at 200 mm c/c as transverse reinforcement. In
the absence of detailed design same reinforcement may
be used for spacing of joist smaller than 1.5 m.
Reinforcement for RCC joist shall be provided as per
design (see IS 13994 : 1994).
For detailed information, refer to IS 13990:1994 Specification for precast reinforced concrete
planks and joists for roofing and flooring
1.43
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1.44
SP 21 : 2005
2.4 Tolerances Tolerances on various dimensions
of the panel shall be as given below
Dimension
Length of panel
Width of panel
Thickness of panel
Tolerance
10 mm
5 mm
4 mm
3 Reinforcement
3.1 Reinforcement required for brick panel shall consist
of 2 bars of required diameter embedded in the
longitudinal joints.
For detailed information, refer to IS 14143:1994 Specification for prefabricated brick panel
and partially precast concrete joist for flooring and roofing.
1.45
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Tolerance
Length
5 mm
2.1 Shape
Width
3 mm
3 mm
3 mm
1.46
SP 21 : 2005
3.2.1 Main reinforcement of the channel units shall
comprise two bars of required diameter as per the design placed at the bottom of two legs of channel unit.
Two bars of mild steel Grade 1 conforming to IS 432
(Part 1): 1982,* 6 mm shall be provided at top corners to
support the stirrups (see Fig 2). Stirrups of 3 mm at the
rate of 300 mm c/c along the length of the channel unit
(see Fig 2) shall be provided.
* Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel
wire for concrete reinforcement, Part 1 Mild steel and medium
tensile steel bars (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS14201:1994 Specification for precast reinforced concrete
channel units for construction of floors and roofs.
1.47
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.2 Dimensions
1.48
SP 21 : 2005
3. Reinforcement
* Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars hard-drawn steel wire
for concrete reinforcement : Part 1 Mild steel bars (third revison).
** High strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete
reinforcement (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 14241:1995 Specification for precast reinforced concrete
L-panel for roofing.
1.49
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.1 The load bearing capacity of corrugated and semicorrugated sheets shall be not less than 5 N/mm width
of specimen.
(1)
Types of
Sheets
(2)
i) Corrugated
Depth of
Corrugation
D
(3)
48
ii) Semi-corrugated 45
Pitch of
Corrugation
Tolerances P
(4)
(5)
Tolerances B
(6)
(7)
Tolerances C
(8)
(9)
Nominal
Thickness
Tolerances T
(10)(11)
+3
-5
146
+6
-2
1050
+10
-5
1010
+10
-5
+3
-5
338
+6
-2
1100
+10
-5
1014
+10
-5
Length of
Sheet
Tolerances A
(12) (13)
+free
-0.5
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
+free 1500
-0.5 1750
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
Tolerances
(14)
+5
-10
+5
-10
1. Tolerance given in this table for pitch of corrugation relates to measurement over six pitches for corrugated
sheets and three pitches for semi corrugated sheets.
2. Nominal lengths other than those specified in col 13 may also be manufactured by mutual agreement between
Note Corrugated sheets of overall width 1086 mm and effective width 1016 mm with tolerances and other parameters same
as in this table 1 may also be manufactured by mutual agreement between the manufacturer as the purchaser (see Fig 1A of the
standard)
Note 1 For method of measurement of different dimensions of sheets, refer to 5 of the standard.
Note 2 For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913: 2003 Methods of tests for absestos cement products (second revision).
For detailed informatoin refer to IS 459:1992 Specification for corrugated and semi-corrugated
asbestos cement sheets (third revision).
1.50
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
(4)
From 50 to 100
ii)
1.75
3.5
iii)
1.5
(2)
2.1 Classification
2.1.1 Pipes of Nominal Diameter Up to 1 000 mm
Pipes of nominal diameter up to 1 000 are classified
according to the works hydraulic test pressure give in
Table 1.
TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION
Classes
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
(3)
i)
Pipes
Sl.No
BP
WP
(1)
2.
BP
TP
(2)
10
15
20
25
(3)
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
2.3 Characteristics
2.3.1 Geometrical Characteristics
NOTES
1. Pipes of class 12, 18, 24, 30, 35 and 36 corresponding to
works hydraulic test pressure of 1.2, 1.8, 2.4, 3.0, 3.5 and
3.6 MPa respectively may also be manufactured. In such
cases, detailed dimensions shall be arrived at between the
manufacturer and the purchaser.
2. For pipes of nominal diameter from 600 mm to 1 000
mm, the procedure given in 3.2.2 may also be used.
1.51
SP 21 : 2005
Nominal Thickness (mm)
Tolerance (mm)
Up to and including 10
1.0
Over 10 up to and including 20
1.5
Over 20 up to and including 30
2.0
Over 30 up to and including 60
3.0
Over 60 up to and including 90
3.5
Over 90
4.0
Notes
50
60
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
Note
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
850
900
1 000
follows
For all length
+50
20
mm
Tolerances
mm
50 to 300
0.6
350 to 500
0.8
600 to 700
1.0
750 to 1000
1.5
Note Such tolerances for sizes above 1 000 mm would be as
agreed to between the manufacturer and the user.
1.52
SP 21 : 2005
2.3.3.3 Bending
3. JOINTS
3.1 Type Two types of joints are normally provided
with asbestos cement pressure pipes and they are (a)
asbestos cement coupling with rubber sealing rings, and
(b) cast iron detachable joints with rubber sealing rings
and bolts and nuts.
3.2 Characteristics
1.53
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 4 CLASIFICATION AND DIMENSIONS OF ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES
All dimensions are in millimitres
Sl.
Nom
Class 10
No.
Dia
Thickness
(1)
(2)
1)
50
2)
Class 15
External
Diameter
Class 20
Thickness
Class 25
External
Diameter
Thickness
E xternal
Diameter
Thickness
External
Diameter
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
9.5
69.0
9.5
69.0
11.0
(8)
(9)
(10)
71.5
13.5
76.5
60
9.5
79.0
9.5
79.0
11.0
81.5
13.5
86.5
3)
80
9.5
99.5
9.5
99.5
4)
100
9.5
120.0
10.0
121.0
11.0
101.5
13.5
106.5
13.5
126.5
16.5
132.5
5)
125
9.5
145.0
11.0
147.0
14.0
152.5
17.5
159.5
6)
150
9.5
171.0
13.0
176.5
16.5
183.0
21.0
191.0
7)
200
16.5
233.5
22.0
242.5
27.5
253.5
8)
250
17.0
284.5
23.0
294.5
28.5
305.5
9)
300
20.0
340.5
27.0
352.5
34.5
366.5
10)
350
21.0
392.0
27.5
405.0
35.0
419.0
11)
400
24.0
448.0
32.0
463.0
39.5
478.0
12)
450
26.5
498.0
35.5
515.0
44.0
532.0
13)
500
29.0
554.5
39.0
572.5
48.5
591.5
14)
600
35.0
665.5
46.0
686.5
58.0
710.5
15)
700
38.0
769.0
51.5
795.0
65.5
823.0
16)
750
40.5
824.0
55.0
853.0
70.0
882.0
17)
800
43.5
880.0
59.0
910.0
75.0
941.0
18)
850
46.0
935.0
62.5
767.0
79.5
1000.0
19)
900
48.5
990.0
66.0
1024.0
84.0
1059.0
20)
1000
54.0
1101.0
73.5
1138.0
93.5
1177.0
Notes
1 External diameters at finished ends of the pipes specified in the table are already in practical use and are specified the purpose
of interchangeability. Due to inherent characteristics of the manufacturing process and common moulds for all classes, external
diameter may not be equal to internal diameter plus twice the thickness in all cases.
2. For nominal diameters 700 to 1 000 mm for Classes 15 to 25, the barrel thickness shall not be less than the thickness
mentinoed above. The same may be verified from bursting test pieces.
3. For pipes of nominal diameter above 1 000 mm data/details hall be as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
Note For methods of tests, refer to standard and IS 5913:2003 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (second
revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1592 : 2003 Specification for asbestos cement pressure
pipes (fourth revision).
1.54
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b)
Loose socket,
c)
Plain bend,
d)
Swan neck,
e)
Sanitary bend,
f)
h)
j)
k)
Shoe,
Slotted vent cowl, and
W.C. connectors,
3.3 Tolerances
g)
n)
4. Physical Requirements
3. Dimensional Requirements
3.1 Nominal Diameter and Thickness The nominal
diameter of the pipes and pipe fittings corresponds to
the internal diameter (bore), tolerances not being taken
into account.
3.2 Length
3.2.1 Nominal Length The nominal lengths of pipes
correspond to the useful lengths of the socketed pipes
exclusive of internal depth of socket, not taking tolerance
into account, and shall be 500, 1000, 1500, 1830, 2000
2440 and 3000 mm.
Nominal Diameter
mm
Deviation
mm
50 to 60
5.5l
80 to 150
4.5l
1.55
SP 21 : 2005
4.2.2 Hydraulic bursting test (optional for pipes
only) the pipe shall indicate a minimum bursting stress
of 5 MN/m2
4.2.3 Longitudinal bursting test The unit
longitudinal bending stress shall not be less than
12.5 MN/m2.
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Method of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision)
For detailed information refer to IS 1626 (Part 1):1984 Specification for asbestos cement building
pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roof fittings: Part 1 Pipes and pipe fittings
(second revision).
1.56
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.1 Tolerances
3. Dimensional Requirements
On length
10 mm
On profile
10 mm
On thickness 1.5 mm
a)
b)
c)
4. Physical Requirements
4.1 When tested for impermeability, the specimen shall
not show during 24 h of test any formation of drops of
water, except traces fo moisture on the lower surface.
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1626 (Part 2) : 1994 Specification for asbestos cement
building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roof fittings: Part 2 Gutters and
gutter fittings (Second Revision).
1.57
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Ridges
1) Serrated adjustable ridges,
2) Plain wing adjustable ridges,
3) One piece plain angular ridges,
4) Unserrated adjustable ridges for hips,
5) Close fitting adjustable ridges, and
6) Northlight adjustable ridges.
b) Eaves filler pieces
c) Ridge finials,
d) Apron pieces
e) Barge boards for corner pieces, curved barge
boards,
f) Rooflights,
g) North light curves or ventilator curves,
h) Cowl type ventilator curves,
j) Expansion joints for semi-corrugated sheets and
fittings like ridges and northlight curve.
k) Louvres, S type,
m) Radial exhaust, and
n) Curved sheets.
Length 10 mm
2.3.2
3. Physical Requirement
3.1 All the finished products shall be inspected for
freedom from visual defects.
3.2 The surface of fittings intended to be exposed to
the weather shall be generally of smooth finish and the
finish should permit any minor variation of the surface
appearance due to the method of manufacture, which
does not impair the performance of the fittings.
3.2.1 The fittings shall be clean with straight and regular
edges.
3.3 When tested for impermeability, the specimen shall
not show during 24 hours of test any formation of drops
of water, except traces of moisture on the lower surface.
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1626(Part 3):1994 Specification for asbestos cement
building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roof fittings: Part 3 Roof fitings
(second revision).
1.58
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.1
4. Tests
3.2
3.3
Tolerances
3.3.1 On thickness
(a) From 3 mm to 5 mm 0.5 mm
(b) From 6 mm and above 0.1 mm
where 'e' is nominal thickness of sheet.
Class
of Sheet
TABLE 1 CLASIFICATION
Minimum Bending strength in N/mm2
Description
of Sheet
Minimum
Density
g/cc
(1)
1
2
(2)
Loading Parallel
to the Fibre of Sheet
(3)
(5)
Semi-compressed
Fully compressed
13
20
16
28
1.2
1.6
600
610
1200
1200
1800
1830
2400
2440
3000
3050
1200
1220
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of test for asbestos cement products (first revision).
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b)
4. Tests
4.1 Load Bearing Capacity Average of two
specimens not less than 20 kg for Class A boards and
15 kg for Class B and Class C boards.
Further, the breaking load of either of the specimens
shall not be less than 15 kg for Class A boards and 10 kg
for Class B and Class C boards.
4.2 Water Absorption Test The amount of water
absorbed by the specimen shall not exceed 40 percent
of its dry weight.
a) From 3 mm to 5 mm 0.5 mm
TABLE 1DIMENSIONS OF ASBESTOS CEMENT BUILDING BOARDS
Class of Board
(1)
Length
Width
Thickness
mm
mm
mm
(2)
2440
(2400)
1830
(1800)
1220
(1200)
B
2440
(2400)
1830
(1800)
1220
(1200)
C
2440
(2400)
1830
(1800)
1220
(1200)
Note Values which are not in brackets are preferred sizes .
(3)
(4)
1220
(1200)
1220
(1200)
1220
(1200)
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asebstos cement products (first revision).
For detialed information, refer to IS 2098:1997 Specification for asbestos cement building boards
(first revision).
1.60
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
:1.5 mm
b)
Lower deviation
: Free
6. Tests
4. Fittings
4.1 General appearance and finish shall comply with the
requirements of 2.
Upper deviation
100 mm
2.8 kN
125 mm
4.2 kN
150 mm
6.0 kN
1.61
a)
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF PIPES
Nominal
Diameter
mm
(1)
100
15.0
15.0
15.0
125
15.0
15.0
15.0
150
15.0
15.0
17.5
200
15.0
17.5
25.0
250
15.0
22.5
30.0
300
17.5
27.5
35.0
350
21.5
31.5
41.5
400
23.5
36.5
48.5
450
26.5
40.0
53.5
500
30.0
45.0
60.0
600
36.5
53.5
71.5
700
41.5
63.5
83.5
750
45.0
67.5
90.0
800
48.5
71.5
96.5
850
51.0
76.5
102.5
900
53.5
81.5
108.5
1000
60.0
90.0
120.0
Class 2
(3)
Class 3
(4)
Thickness
(1)
mm
(2)
mm
Up to and including 10
-1.5
-2.0
-2.5
-3.0
-3.5
Over 90
-4.0
On External
Diameter at
Finished Ends
On Nominal
Length
(3)
mm
(4)
mm
+50
- 20 for 100 to
300mm nominal
diameter and
+ 50
- 40 for nominal
diameter greater
than 300 mm
Note Nominal length of the pipes shall be 3 m for nominal diameters upto 200 mm and 4 m for greater diameters.
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 6908:1991 Specification for asbestos cement pipes and
fittings for sewerage and drainage (first revision).
1.62
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3 mm
mm
50
m
2,3,4
m
2
mm
9.0
mm
1.5
80
80
2,3,4
9.5
1.5
100
100
2,3,4
9.5
1.5
125
125
2,3,4
10.0
1.5
150
150
2,3,4
10.0
1.5
mm
+50
-20
+50
-20
+50
-20
+50
-20
+50
-20
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 8870 :1978 Specification for asbestos cement cable conduits
and troughs.
1.63
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Physical Properties
a) Diameter 0.6 mm
b) Thickness
Nominal Thickness
mm
Up to and including 10
1.5
c)
Length
Tolerances
mm
2.0
d) Deviation in straightness
3. Classification
50 mm Dia
5.5 l mm
Hydraulic Test
Pressure N/mm2
0.5
10
1.0
BP
BP
TP
WP
2
1.5
4
3.0
5. Tests
5.1 Hydraulic Pressure Tightness Test The pipe shall
not indicate any loss or visible sweating on the outside
surface of the pipe, when the hydraulic test pressure as
given in 3 is maintaianed for 30 seconds. The test time
may be reduced to 10 seconds without changing the
class provided that the internal pressure is increased by
10 percent.
6. Joints
a) Asbestos cement couplings with rubber
sealing rings; and
b) Cast iron detachable joints with rubber sealing
rings and bolts and nuts.
6.1 Cast iron detachable joints shall conform to
IS 8794:1988*.
6.2 Rubber rings used in jointing shall comply with the
Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers
(first revision).
* Cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (first revision).
1.64
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES
Sl.
No.
Nominal
Diameter
Class 5
Thickness
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Class 10
(2)
mm
(3)
mm
External
Diameter
(4)
mm
50
80
100
125
150
200
9.5
9.5
9.5
9.5
9.5
9.5
69.0
99.0
119.0
144.0
169.0
219.0
Thickness
(5)
mm
9.5
9.5
11.0
11.0
11.5
15.0
External
Diameter
(6)
mm
69.0
99.0
122.0
147.0
173.0
230.0
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of test for asbestos cement products (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 9627:1980 Specification for asbestos cement pressure
pipes (light duty).
1.65
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
16
28
1.2
1.6
4.3
Tolerances
a) Thickness
From 3 mm to 5 mm 0.5 mm
From 6 mm and above 0.1 e mm
where e is nominal thickness of sheet.
b) Length and Width Shall not vary from the
nominal dimensions for length and width by
more than 5 mm.
c) Straightness of Edges Shall be not more
than 2mm/m for the relevant dimension (length
or width)
d) Squareness of EdgesThe tolerance on
squareness of the edges shall be not more
than 3 mm/m.
5. Tests Shall be done for thickness, straightness
of edges, squareness of edges, bending stress and
density.
610
1 200
1 220
1 800
1 830
2 400
2 440
3 000
3 050
asbestos
1220
mm
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of test for asbestos cement products (first revision).
1.66
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Sl
No.
Characteristics
dimensions in millimetres.
Nominal
Dimension
i)
ii)
Depth of corrugation
Pitch of corrugation
20
75
iii)
Overall width
1 015
iv)
Nominal thickness
4.2
v)
Length of sheet
1
1
2
2
Tolerances
2.0
1.5
10
5
+Free
0.2
500
750
000
250
10
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 13008:1990 Specification for shallow corrugated asbestos
cement sheets.
1.67
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.1 Dimension
3.2 Tolerances
The following tolerances shall be permitted :
Sl. No.
Dimensions
i) Overal length
ii) Internal diameter of pipes:
a) Up to and including 300 mm
b) Over 300 mm and up to
and including 600 mm
c) Over 600 mm
iii) Barrel wal thickness:
a) Up to and including
30 mm
b) Over 30 mm up to and
including 50 mm
Tolerances
: 1 percent of
standard length
: 3 mm
: 5 mm
: 10 mm
:
:
:
+2
mm
1
+ 3 mm
1.5
:
:
:
:
+ 4 mm
2
+ 5 mm
2.5
+6
mm
3
+7 mm
3.5
Note 1 For requirements of materials, design, reinforcement, spigots and sockets refer to the standard.
Note 2 For methods of tests refer to IS 3597 : 1998 Methods of test for concrete pipes (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 458 : 2003 Specification for precast concrete pipes (with
and without reinforcement) (fourth revision).
1.68
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Minimum
Core
Thickness
Nominal Internal
Diameter of
Pipe
Minimum
Core
mm
mm
mm
200
35
1 300
75
250
35
1 400
75
300
35
1 500
80
350
35
1 600
85
400
35
1 700
90
450
35
1 800
95
500
35
1 900
100
600
40
2 000
105
700
40
2 100
110
800
45
2 200
115
900
55
2 300
120
1 000
60
2 400
125
1 100
65
2 500
130
1 200
70
3.3
Tolerance
1.69
SP 21 : 2005
4.1 The maximum permissible deviation from the straight
on internal surfaces of any pipe throughout its length,
shall not exceed 5 mm for every metre length.
4.2 Pipes shall be free from local depressions or bulges
greater than 5 mm extending over a length, in any
direction, greater than twice the thickness of barrel.
5. Tests
Tolerances
In areas within
600 mm of an
end of the Pipe
mm
Over rest
of the pipe
mm
a)
Upto 900 mm
b)
12
12
12
upto 1600mm
c)
Over 1600 mm
Note For requirements regarding materials, design manufacture of special and joints refer to the standard.
Note For methods of tests and test details, refer to the standard and IS 3597 : 1998 .Methods of test for concrete pipe
( second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1784 : 2001 Specification for Prestressed concrete pipes
(including specials) (second revision).
1.70
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY
a) Plain ends
1) For butt welded joints with collar upto
700 mm dia, and
2) For simple butt welded jointing above 800
mm dia.
b) Flanged ends; and
c) Spigot and socket ends ( conforming to
relevant Indian Standard) for joints with rubber
rings.
2. Classification
Class
Test Pressure
Class 1
0.5 MPa (or 50 m head)
Class 2
1.0 MPa (or 100 m head)
Class 3
1.5 MPa (or 150 m head)
Class 4
2.0 MPa (or 200 m head)
Class 5
2.5 MPa (or 250 m head)
Special class Above 2.5 MPa(or above 250 m head), the
exact test pressure being specified by the purchaser.
3. Dimension
3.1 Diameter The internal diameter of finished pipes
shall be 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800,
900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 300, 1 400, 1 500, 1 600, 1 700,
1 800, 1 900, 2 000, 2 100, 2 200, 2 300, 2 400, 2 500, 2 600,
2 700, 2 800, 2 900, and 3 000 mm
Tolerance on internal diameter shall be 3 mm for pipes
of diameter 300 mm and under, and 6 mm or 1 1/2
percent of internal diameter, whichever is less, for pipes
of diameter exceeding 300 mm.
3.2 Length The recommended length is 6 m. The
overall length of the pipe shall not vary by more than 1
percent of the agreed length.
450
500 to
900
3.0
5.0
1 000 to 1 100
6.0
1 200 to 1 500
8.0
1 600 to 1 800
10.0
1 900 to 2 200
12.0
2 300 to 2 600
14.0
2 700 to 3 000
16.0
Minimum
Thickness of
Coating
mm
15
20
25
mm
25
25
25
Note For requirements of material, design and manufacture and methods of tests, refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1916 : 1989 Specification for steel cylinder pipes with
concrete lining and coating (first revision).
1.71
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Tests
mm
80 to 100
Permissible
Deviation from
Nominal Internal
Diameter
+3 mm
300 mm
Rate of
Infiltration per metre
Length of the Pipe
l/ minute
60
150 to 250
120
300 to 900
300
1.5
+6 mm
400 mm
3 mm
over 400 mm
+1.5 percent
0.75 percent
(2)
2.0
(3)
25
(4)
Butt, rebated or ogee
30
2.5 or 3.0
35
2.5 or 3.0
40
2.5 or 3.0
2.5 or 3.0
45
50
1.72
SP 21 : 2005
Nominal Internal
Diameter
mm
Minimum
Length
Minimum
Thickness
mm
mm
80
100
150
250
13
25
150
300
350
400
16
30
150
450
500
600
700
19
35
200
19
45
200
800
900
19
45
200
Note For detailed requirements on manufacture, finish, methods of tests and typical sketches refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4350: 1967 Specification for concrete porous pipe for
under drainage.
1.73
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
IS 7319 : 1974
1. Scope Requirements for perforated non-reinforced concrete pipes for use in underdrainage work
Note Reinforced cement concrete perforated concrete pipes
may be supplied by mutual agreement between the purchaser
and the supplier.
Note These pipes are used for underdrainage work in
infiltration galleries, reclaiming water logged areas and for
similar other purposes
2. Classification
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
80
25
100
25
150
25
200
25
225
(5)
(6)
(7)
25
50
25
75
1 560
37.5
75
1 560
50
100
1 560
25
10
50
100
1 670
250
25
10
50
100
1 670
300
30
10
75
150
1 790
350
32
10
75
150
1 880
400
32
10
75
150
2 020
450
35
10
75
150
2 230
1.74
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 TOLERANCES
a) Overall length
b) Internal diameter of pipes or socket:
+ 3 mm
1.5 mm
+ 6 mm
3 mm
+ 1.5 percent
0.75 percent
2) 400 mm
3) over 400 mm
c) Barrel wall thickness :
1) up to 25 mm
1.5 mm
2) Over 25 up to 35 mm
2.0 mm
3) Over 35 up to 50 mm
3.0 mm
4) Over 50 mm
d) Deviation from Straight : The deviation from straight shall not exceed 3mm for every metre run.
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 456: 2000 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (fourth revision) and
IS 3597 : 1998 Methods of test for concrete pipes (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 7319 : 1974 Specification for perforated concrete pipes.
1.75
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Minimum Thickness
of Steel Plate for Shell
mm
200 to 500
600 to
mm
2.5
900
5.0
1 000 to 1 100
6.0
1 200 to 1 500
8.0
1 600 to 1 800
10.0
Nominal Internal
Diameter
the
Dimensions
Tolerances
Arm length
Arm length (specified)
Internal diameter
300 mm and under
over 300mm
40 mm
10 mm
Angular deviation
3 mm
6 mm or 1 mm
(which ever is less)
1
Nominal Thickness
of Flange
mm
200 to 300
mm
15
350 to 450
18
500 to 600
20
700 to 1 100
25
1 200 to 1 800
32
* Steel cylinder pipe with cocrete lining and coating (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 7322 : 1985 Specification for specials for steel cylinder
reinforced Concrete pipes.
1.76
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Grades
a) Grade A ( Ordinary ), and
b) Grade B (Fuel Resistant)
Grade A is suitable for concrete comstructions other
than those which are subjected to spillage of
kerosine or other petroleum oils.
Grade B is suitable for use in construction where
resistance to kerosine or other petroleum
oils is required.
4. Physical Requirements See Table 1.
Characteristic
Requirement
(2)
(3)
i)
180C
ii)
iii)
Extensibility, Min
6 mm
iv)
Penetration, at 250c,
15 Min
50 Max
v)
(iv)
15 Max
1 Max
For detailed information, refer to IS 1834 : 1984 Specification for hot applied sealing compounds
for joint in concrete (first revision).
1.77
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.2
Tolerances
On length
5 mm
On width
3 mm
On thickness
5 mm
3. Physical requirements
Characteristic
Requirement
(2)
(3)
i)
Resistance to handling
ii)
Recovery
iii)
Compression
iv)
Extrusion
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
Water absorption
Density
Bitumen content
Weathering
ix)
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 10566 : 1983 Methods of test for preformed fillers for expansion joints in concrete
paving and structural construction.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1838(Part 1) :1983 Specification for preformed fillers for
expansion Joint in concrete pavement and structures (non extruding and resilient type):
Part 1 Bitumen impregnated fibre (first revision).
1.78
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 1838(Part 2) :1984 Specification for preformed fillers for
expansion joint in concrete pavement and structure (Non extruding and resilient type)
Part 2 CNSL aldehyde resin and coconut pith.
1.79
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
mortar.
4.5 Test for Cyclic Adhesion Adhesion and cohesion
shall be considered satisfactory if after three cycles the
total area(lengthx depth) of failure does not exceed
100 mm2 per specimen.
4.6 Test for Adhesion in Peel
After the test the sealant shall be cut open with a clean
sharp knife; there shall be no substantial transfer of the
sealant onto the knife blade.
4. Test Requirements
4.3 Mass loss after heat ageing The mass loss, which
includes volatile content, shall not exceed 10 percent.
The sealant shall exhibit no cracks bubbles or chalking.
4.4 Staining There shall be no staining on the test
Note For Methods of test , refer to IS 11433 (Part 2) : 1986 One-part gun-grade polysuphide- based joint sealants, Part 2 Methods of
test
For detailed information, refer to IS 11433 Part 1: 1985 Specifications for one-part gun-grade
polysulphide-based joint sealants: Part 1 General requirements
1.80
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Test Requirements
4.1
Rheological Properties
For detailed information, refer to IS 12118:1987 Specification for two -part polysulphidebased sealants: Part1 General requirements.
1.81
SECTION 2
BUILDING LIMES
2.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
IS
712 : 1984
IS
IS
Page
2.3
2686 : 1977
2.6
3068 : 1986
2.7
IS
3115 : 1992
2.8
IS
3182 : 1986
Broken brick (Burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar
(second revision)
2.9
IS
4098 : 1983
2.10
IS
4139 : 1989
2.11
IS 10360 : 1982
2.12
IS 10772 : 1983
2.13
IS
2.14
12894 : 2002
2.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class D
2. Classification
Class E
Class A
Class B
Class C
SL.
No.
Class F
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
(2)
(3)
Calcium and
magnesium oxides
percent, Min
(on ignited basis)
Magnesium oxides,
percent (on ignited
basis) Max
Min
Silica, alumina and
ferric oxide, percent
Min (on ignited basis)
Unhydrated magnesium
oxide, percent, Max
(on ignited basis)
Insoluble residue
in dilute acid and
alkali percent
Max (on ignited basis)
Carbondioxide, percent,
Max (on oven dry basis)
Free moisture content
percent, Max
Available lime as CaO,
percent, Min.(drybasis)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
60
70
70
85
85
85
85
50
70
70
20
10
10
20
6
10
6
10
15
10
10
25
10
10
75
75
2.3
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 PHYSICAL REQUIRMENTS
SL.
Characteristics
Class
No.
A
(1)
i)
ii)
(2)
Fineness
a) Residue on 2.36 mm
IS Sieve, percent,
Max.
b) Residue on300 micron
IS Sieve, percent,
Max.
c) Residue on 212
micron IS Sieve,
percent, Max
Residue on slaking
a) Residue on 850
micron IS Sieve,
percent, Max
b) Residue on 300 micron
IS Sieve,
percent, Max
Setting time
a) Initial set, Min, h
b) Final set. max, h
iv) Compressive strength,
Min, N/mm 2
a) at 14 days
b) at 28 days
v)
Transverse strength
at 28 days,
N/mm2 , Min
vi) Workability bumps,
Max
vii) Volume yield ml/g
Min
viii) Soundness, Le
Chaterlier expansion,
mm, Max
ix) Popping &
pitting
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
10
10
Nil
10
10
2
48
2
48
1.75
2.8
1.0
1.25
1.75
0.7
1.25
1.75
0.7
1.0
1.75
0.7
1.25
1.75
0.7
1.25
1.75
0.7
12
10
12
10
1.7
1.4
10
10
Free
from
pop
and
pits
Free
from
pop
and
pits
Free
from
pop
and
Free
from
pop
and
Free
from
pop
and
iii)
2.4
pits
pits
pits
SP 21 : 2005
5. Packing The hydrated lime shall be supplied,
in suitable containers, such as jute bags lined with
polythene or high density polythene woven bags lined
with polythene or craft paper bags, preferably
containing 50 kg of lime.
For detailed information, refer to IS 712: 1984 Specification for building limes
(third revision).
2.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Grading
IS Sieve
Designation
10 mm
3. Classes
a) Class A for general purposes
Percentage
Passing
100
4.75 mm
80
2.36 mm
60
1.18 mm
40
600 micron
30
300 micron
25
150 micron
16
5. Characteristics
5.1 Sulphate Content Shall not exceed 1 percent
when expressed as sulphur trioxide.
5.2 Loss on ignition Shall not exceed 10 percent for
class A, 20 percent for class B and 25 percent for
Class C.
Note For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2686 :1977 Specification for cinder as fine aggregates
for use in lime concrete(first revision).
2.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Characteristic
Requirement
1 100 - 1 350
50
20
1
Percent Passing
(By Mass)
75 mm
37.5 mm
19.0 mm
4.75 mm
100
95-100
45- 75
0- 5
Note For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and IS 2386: 1963 Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete.
IS 5640: 1970 Methods of test for determining aggregate impact value of soft coarse aggregates.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3068:1986 Specification for broken brick (burnt clay)
coarse aggregate for use in lime concrete (second revision).
2.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.2
3. Types
Type A Block with both faces keyed for
plastering
Tolerances
Dimensions
Actual Sizes
Length
390 mm
Width
90,190, 290 mm
Height
90, 190 mm
Note For methods of test, refer to IS 2185 (Part 1):1979 Concrete masonry units Part 1 solid and hollow concrete blocks
(second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 3115:1992 Specification for lime based blocks
(second revision ).
2.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.
2.4 - 2.7
5
15
1
3. Physical Requirements
IS Sieve
4.75 mm
2.36 mm
1.18 mm
600 m
300 m
150 m
75 m
For detailed information, refer to IS 3182:1986 Specification for broken brick (burnt clay) fine
aggregate for use in lime mortar (second revision).
2.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
Type
Use
(1)
LP7
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
(2)
(3)
5
22
Characteristic
Requirment
Type of Mixture
LP40
(1)
(2)
i)
LP20
LP7
(3)
(4)
(5)
15
15
2
24
2
36
2
48
2
4
65
1
2
65
0.3
0.7
65
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 1514 : 1990 Methods of sampling and test for quick lime and hydrated lime (first revision).
IS 1727 : 1967 Methods of test for pozzolanic materials (first revision),relevent parts of IS 4031: Methods of physical tests for hydraulic
cement, and IS 6932 (Part 2): 1973 Methods of tests for building limes.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4098:1983 Specification for lime pozzolana mixture (first
revision)
2.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Physical Characteristics
7.5
10
15
20
Average
Compressive
Strength (N/mm2)
Not less than
7.5
10
15
20
7.5
10
15
20
0.06
0.06
0.04
0.04
less than
10
15
20
Note For method of test, refer to Appendix A of the standard and IS 3495 :1992 Methods of test for burnt clay building bricks
(first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 4139:1989 Specification for calcium silicate bricks
(second revision).
2.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Note For method of tests, refer to IS 2185 (Part 1): 1997 Concrete masonry units Part 1 Hollow and solid concrete blocks IS 2690
(Part 2):1992 Burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part 2 Handmade (second revision), and IS 9284:1979 Method of test for abrasion resistance of
concrete,
For detailed information, refer to IS 10360:1982 Specification for lime pozzolana concrete
blocks for paving.
2.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Classification
Sl
No
Type 1
Type 2
Characteristics
(1)
Type 3
i)
Requirements
(2)
(3)
25
v)
20
iv)
v)
Note
Characteristics
Requirements
(2)
Fineness, residue by mass on 150-micron
IS Sieve, percent Max.
Setting time, hours
a) Initial, Min
b) Final, max
Compressive strength
a) Average of at least 3 mortar cubes
at 7 days, N/mm 2, Min
b)Average of at least 3 mortar cubes
at 28 days N/mm 2. Min.
c)Average of at least 3 mortar
cubes at 90 days, N/mm2 , Min
Water retention, percent, Min.
Soundness, expansion mm , Max.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
(3)
(4)
(5)
0.5
24
0.5
24
0.5
24
2.5
1.0
0.4
6.0
2.5
1.0
8.0
4.0
1.5
70
10
70
10
70
10
Types 1, 2 and 3 may be obtained with the pozzolana having lime reactivity values of 70 50 and 30 kgf/cm2 respectively.
Note For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 1514:1990 Methods of sampling and tests for quicklime and hydrated lime
(first revision) IS 1727:1967 Method of test for pozzolanic material (first revision). Various parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical
tests for hydraulic cement IS 4098:1983 Lime-pozzolana mixture (first revision), and Various parts of IS 6932 Methods of test for
building limes.
For detailed information, refer to IS 10772 : 1983 Specification for quick setting lime pozzolana
mixture.
2.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. General Requirements
2.1 Visually the bricks shall be sound, compact and
uniform in shape. The bricks shall be free from visible
cracks, warpage and organic matter.
2.2 The bricks shall be solid and with or without frog
10 to 20 mm deep on one of its flat side. The shape and
size of the frog shall conform to either Fig. 1A or
Fig. 1B of the standard.
3. Classification
3.1 Pulverized fuel ash - lime bricks shall be classified
on the basis of average wet compresive strength as given
in Table 1.
Table 1 Classes of Pulverized Fuel Ash-Lime
Bricks
Class
Desingnation
(1)
30
25
20
17.5
15
12.5
10
7.5
5
3.5
(2)
30.0
25.0
20.0
17.5
15.0
12.5
10.0
7.5
5.0
3.5
Kgf/cm2
(Approx)
(3)
(300)
(250)
(200)
(175)
(150)
(125)
(100)
(75)
(50)
(35)
Width (W)
mm
110
50
Height (H)
mm
701/3 length brick
701/2 width brick
2.14
SP 21 : 2005
Note For methods of tests, refer to various part of IS 3495 :1992 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (third revision) and
IS 4139:1989. Calcium silicate bricks (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 12894:2002 Specification for pulverized fuel ash-lime
bricks (first revision).
2.15
SECTION 3
STONES
2.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
IS 1127 : 1970
Page
3.3
IS 1128 : 1974
3.4
IS 1130 : 1969
3.5
IS 3316 : 1974
3.6
IS 3620 : 1979
3.7
IS 3622 : 1977
3.8
IS 6250 : 1981
3.9
IS 6579 : 1981
3.10
IS 9394 : 1979
Stone lintels
3.11
3.2
3.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.2 Tolerances
a) For stones required in ashlar masonry
1)
Length and breath
5 mm
10 mm
2)
Height
5 mm
b) For stones required for other than ashlar masonry
1)
Length and breath
5 mm
10 mm
2)
Height
5 mm
(1)
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF
Type of Masonry
Length
mm
(2)
(3)
i)
S l.No.
i)
iii)
iv)
v)
597
297
697
347
347
797
397
397
394
194
194
494
244
244
90
90
90
140
90,140
90,140
190
90,140,190
90,140,190
240
90,140,190
90,140,190
290
90,140,190,240
90,140,190,240
390
90,140,190,240,290
90,140,190,240,290
440
90,140,190,240,290
90,140,190,240,290
490
90,140,190,240,290
90,140,190,240,290
590
90,140.190,240,290
90,140,190,240,290
May be of any size and shape but not less than 150 mm in any direction.
a) 890,990,
1090,1190,
90, 190, 290, 390, 490
90, 140, 190
1290
b) 1390,1490,
190, 290, 390, 490, 590
1590,1690,
vi)
vii)
viii)
Kerb stones.
297
1790
The dimensions depend on the particulars of the curve
190,290,390,
490,590,690,
790
390,490,590,
690,790
100,150,200
300, 400, 500
For detailed information, refer to IS1127:1970 Specification for dimensions and workmanship
of natural building stones for masonry work (first revision).
3.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. General Requirements
4. Tolerances in Thickness
+5 mm upto 25 mm thickness and
5 mm for thickness above 25 mm.
Breadth
Thickness
(1)
(2)
(3)
15 to 60 cm in stages of 5 cm
60 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm
100 to 150 cm in stages of 10 cm
15 to 60 cm in stages of 5 cm
30 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm
30 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm
15 to 95 mm in stages of 10mm
- do25 to 95 mm in stages of 10 mm
Characteristics
Requirements
(1)
(2)
(3)
i)
Water absorption
ii)
Transverse strength
70 kgf/cm 2
iii)
Durability
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 2):1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural
building stones.Part 2 Transverse strength (first revision), IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination for water absorption,
apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS 1126:1974 Method of test for determination
of durability of natural building stones (first revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 1128:1974 Specification for limestone (slab and tiles)
(first revision).
3.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5.2 Slabs
(b) coloured
5.3 Tiles
+ 4 percent for length and width and
for thickness see 4.2.
Sizes
Width
i)
Thickness
Moisture absorption
after 24 hours immersion
in cold water.
Hardness
Blocks
30 to 250 cm 30 to 100 cm
30 to 100 mm
ii)
Slabs
70 to 250 cm 30 to 100 cm
20 to 150 mm
Max 0.4%
by weight
Min 3
Min 2.5
a)
b)
c)
Note For method of tests, refer to IS 1122:1974 Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural building stones
(first revision), and IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of
natural building stones (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1130:1969. Specifications for marble (blocks, slabs and
tiles.
3.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Dimensions
4.1 Slabs The slabs shall be rectangular or square
and of specified dimensions. The tolerance in length
and breadth shall be 2 mm and thickness 1mm. The
bottom face may be rough but the top surface shall be
fine dressed and joint faces shall be dressed back square
with the top surface for at least 50 mm, without
hollowness or spalling off.
3. Strength Requirements
3.1 Compressive Strength Shall not be less than
1 000 kgf/cm2.
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121Part 11974 Method test for determination of strength properties of natural building
stones. Part 1 Compressive strength (first revision), IS 1122:1974 Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural
building stones (first revision) and IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and
porosity of natural building stones (first revision).
3.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
SI.
No.
(1)
3. Dimensions
Length
mm
Breadth
mm
Thickness
mm
390
190
190
490
190
190
590
290
290
Characteristic
(2)
Requirement
(3)
i)
Water absorption
ii)
Specific gravity
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 1) : 1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural
building stones : Part 1 Compressive strength (first revision) and IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption,
apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 3620:1979 Specifications for laterite stone block for
mansonry (first revision).
3.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. General Requirements
3. Dimensions
3.1 Rough Cut Sandstone slabs and tiles of rough
cut edges shall be of sizes as specified below:
Length
Breadth
15 to 360 cm
in stages of
5 cm
15 to 90 cm
in stages of
5 cm
Thickness
15 to 100 mm
in stages of
5 mm
Characteristic
(1)
(2)
Requirement
(3)
i)
Water absorption
ii)
Transverse strength
iii)
Resistance to wear
iv)
Durability
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 2):1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural
building stones: Part 2 Transverse strength (first revision), IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption,
apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision), IS 1126:1974 Method of test for determination for
durability of natural building stones (first revision) and IS 1706:1972 Method of determination of resistance to wear by abrasion of
natural building stones (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 3622:1977 Specifications for sandstone (slabs and tiles)
(first revision).
3.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Breadth
Thickness
mm
mm
mm
600
300
15 Min
500
250
15 Min
Characteristic
(2)
Water absorption
Requirement
(3)
a) Maximum average 2 percent by mass.
b) Variation should not exceed 20 percent bet
ween individual sample.
ii)
Modulus of rupture
iii)
Depth of softening
iv)
Permeability
v)
vi)
Note This requirement is related to the conditions of atmospheric pollution and the slate tiles be subjected to this requirement
only if required by the purchaser.
Note For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to E of the Standard and IS 4122:1967 Method of test for surface softening of
natural building stones.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6250:1981 Specification for roofing slate tiles
(first revision).
3.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Materials
2.1 The coarse aggregates used for WBM construction
shall be any one of the followingxa) Crushed or broken rock,
b) Crushed or broken slag, and
c) Broken brick aggregate.
5. Physical Requirements
5.1 Abrasion (Los Angeles) Value Shall not be more
than 40 percent for wearing surface, 50 percent for base
course and 60 percent for sub-base course.
Grading No.
(1)
1
100
55 to 80
25 to 60
0 to 15
0 to 5
100
90 to 100
50 to 80
0 to 15
0 to 5
100
95 to 100
30 to 65
0 to 10
0 to 5
Note For coarse aggregates susceptible to degradation during rolling, the above grading may not hold good.
*Common burnt clay building bricks (fifth revision)
Note For methods of tests refer to relevant parts of IS 2386:1963 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete and IS 5640:1970
Method of test for determining aggregate impact value of soft course aggregates.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6579:1981. Specification for coarse aggregate for water bound
macadam (first revision).
3.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Characteristics
(2)
Requirements
(3)
Specific gravity
2.6 Min
1.0 Max
11.0 Min
i v ) Durability
4.1 Stone LintelsShall be of rectangular crosssection. The width shall be equal to the thickness of the
wall and the depth shall not be less than 100 mm. The
length shall be limited to a maximum clear span of
2.65 m. A tolerance of 1.5 mm shall be allowed on all
dimensions of 1.2 m. or less and 3 mm on all dimension
more than 1.2 m.
4.2 Throating A 16mm 8 mm throating shall be
provided to the soffit of the external lintel.
4.3 Lintel Bearing Stone lintels shall be well bonded
into the masonry on either side of the opening. The
bearing length on either side shall not be less than the
depth of the lintel or half the width of the supporting
masonry whichever is more. The bearing length shall be
increased for exceptionally heavy loads and for long
spans. Bed blocks shall be provided if the clear span
exceeds 2 m.
5. Workmanship The edges of the stone lintels
shall be dressed as per IS 1129:1972*. The exposed
surface of the lintel shall be finished as specified.
Note For design details of stone lintels, 5 of the standard
may be refered to.
*Recommendation for dressing of natural building stones
(first revision).
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 2):1972 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural
building stones :Part 2 Transverse strength (first revision), IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption,
apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS 1126:1974 Method of test for determination
of durability of natural building stones (first revision).
3.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
OF
GRANITE
Requirements
Pink Granite
0.15, Max
0.15, Max
2.58 to 2.63
2.60 to 2.68
2 .75
2 .75
0.50 Max
0.50, Max
1.02 to 2.50
1 to 2
1 000-1 500
1 300-2 200
90 kg/cm 2
90 kg/cm 2
280-425
300-540
6 to 7
6 to 7
80 to 100
85 to 110
50 to 60
46 to 61
5 000 Min
5 000 Min
Not greater than 2 m m o n t h e
Not greater than 2 mmo n t h e
average and 2.5 mm for any indivi - a v e r a g e a n d 2.5 mm for any indivi
dual specimen
dual specimen
.
Note For methods of test, refer to relevant parts of IS 1121:1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of
natural building stones, (first revision) IS 1124:1974 Methods of test for dertermination of water absorption, apparent specific
gravity and proposity of natural building stones (first revision), IS 1706:1972 Method for determination of resistance to wear by
abrasion of natural building stones (first revision), IS 12608:1989 Methods of test for hardness of rock IS 13030:1991 Methods of
test for laboratory determination of water content, porosity, density and related properties of rock material, IS 13311 (Part 1):1992
Methods of non-destructive testing of concrete: Part 1 Ultrasonic pulse velocity and IS 13630 (Part 13):1993 Methods of test for
ceramic tiles: Part 13 Determination of scratch hardness of surface according to Mohs.
For detailed information, refer to IS 14223 (Part 1) : 1995 Specification for polished building
stones: Part 1 Granite.
3.12
SECTION 4
2.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
BRICKS
IS 1077 : 1992
4.3
IS 2180 : 1988
4.4
IS 2222 : 1991
4.5
IS 2691 : 1988
4.6
IS 3583 : 1988
4.7
IS 3952 : 1988
Burnt clay hollow bricks for walls and partitions (second revision)
4.8
IS 4885 : 1988
4.9
IS 5779 : 1986
4.10
IS 6165 : 1992
4.11
IS 13757 : 1993
4.12
4.13
4.14
IS 1464 : 1992
4.15
IS 1478 : 1992
4.16
IS
TILES
IS
654 : 1992
2690
(Part 1) : 1993
4.17
(Part 2) : 1992
4.18
IS 3367 : 1993
Burnt clay tiles for use in lining irrigation and drainage works (second revision)
4.19
IS 3951
(Part 1) : 1975
4.20
4.21
4.22
(Part 2) : 1975
IS 13317 : 1992
4.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.
Dimensions
2.
190 90 90 mm
190 90 40 mm
Classification
Class
Designation
Non-Modular
230 110 70 mm
230 110 30 mm
35
35.0
30
30.0
25
25.0
20
20.0
17.5
17.5
15
15.0
12.5
12.5
10
10.0
7.5
7.5
5
3.5
Non-Modular size
mm
a)
Length
3 800 80
4 600 80
5.0
b)
Width
1 800 40
2 200 40
3.5
c)
3. General Quality Shall be hand or machinemoulded and shall be free from cracks and flaws and
nodules of free lime. Hand-moulded bricks of 90 mm or
70 mm height shall be moulded with a frog 10 to 20 mm
deep on one of its flat sides. Bricks of 40mm hieght as
well as those made by extrusion process may not be
provided with frogs. The bricks shall have smooth
rectangular faces with sharp corners and uniform colour.
6.
Height 1 800 40
(For 90 mm high bricks)
800 40
(For 40 mm high bricks)
1 400 40
(For 70 mm high bricks)
600 40
(For 30 mm high bricks)
Physical Requirements
Note For methods of tests, refer to relevent parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Methods of tests of burnt clay buildings bricks
(third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1077:1992 Specification for common burnt clay bricks
(fifth revision).
4.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.
Dimensions
190 mm 90 mm 90 mm, and
190 mm 90 mm 40 mm
5.
Dimensions
Average Compressive
Strength
mm
190
90,40
Less than
N/mm2
40
40.0
45
45
45.0
Tolerances
6.
Tolerance on
Individual Bricks
mm
4
2
Physical Requirements
Note Methods for tests, refer to the standard and relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks
(third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 2180:1988 Specification for heavy duty burnt clay building
bricks (third revision).
4.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.
6.
Physical Requirement
Modular
190 mm 90 mm 90 mm
Non-modular
230 mm 110 mm 70 mm
Tolerances
Dimensions
mm
Tolerances on Individual
mm
70, 90
+4
110,190
+7
230
+ 10
Note For the method of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Methods of test of burnt clay building bricks (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 2222:1991 Specification for burnt clay perforated building
bricks (third revision).
4.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5.
Physical Requirements
3.
4.
Tolerances
Dimension
mm
Tolerances
mm
190
90,40
+3
+2
Note For the methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks.
(third revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 2691:1988 Specification for burnt clay facing bricks
(second revision).
4.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.
Dimensions
Tolerances
5.
Dimensions
mm
Total Tolerance
for 20 Bricks
mm
190
80
90,40
40
Physical properties
190 mm 90 mm 90 mm and
190 mm 90 mm 40 mm
Note The bricks shall not be provided with frogs.
Note For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks
(third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 3583:1988 Specification for clay paving bricks
(second revision).
4.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5.
Dimensions
General Requirements
Types
a) Type A
4.
b) Type B
c) Type C
Width
mm
Height
mm
190
190
90
290
90
90
290
140
90
Min
Max
290
190
140
5680
3720
2740
5920
3880
2860
90
1760
1840
Dimension of Bricks
mm
Modular Size
mm
290
300
190
200
140
150
90
100
Dimensions
Length
mm
Overall Measurements of
20 Bricks (mm)
Tolerances
Note For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, and relevant parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Method of test for
burnt clay building bricks (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 3952:1988 Specification for burnt clay hollow bricks for
walls and partitions (second revision).
4.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.1 Dimensions
190 mm 90 mm 90 mm, and 190 mm 90 mm
40 mm
4.
Note For oval and other special shaped sewers, bricks may
be tapered suitably.
Physical properties
2.2. Tolerance
Dimensions Total Tolerance for 20 Bricks
mm
mm
190
80
90, 40
40
Note For method of the tests refer to the relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks
(third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 4885:1988 Specification for Sewer bricks (first revision).
4.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5.
Physical Properties
Dimensions
190 mm 90 mm 90 mm and
190 mm 90 mm 40 mm
380 8 cm
Width
180 4 cm
Height
for 90 mm high
180 4 cm
for 40 mm high
80 4 cm
Note For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 5779:1986 Specification for burnt clay soling bricks
(first revision).
4.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.
Shape
a) Closers
Snapheader closer
King closer
Queen closer
Half round coping
Saddle back coping
290 90
290 90 145
c) Bullnose Bricks
Single bullnose or
bullnose header
ii) Double bullnose
iii) Bullnose stretcher
iv) Bullnose mitre
v) Bullnose double
vi) Bullnose on end
mm
mm
190
230
90
110
90
70
Shape
Major Overall
Dimensions
mm
e) Plinth bricks
90 90 90
190 90 90
190 40 90
b) Copings
i)
ii)
mm
Major Overall
Dimensions
mm
i)
ii)
iii)
Dimensions
i)
Plinth stop
ii)
Plinth stretcher
iii) Plinth internal return
iv) Plinth header
v)
Plinth internal return
vi) Plinth external return
i)
ii)
i)
190 90 90
190 90 90
f) Culvert bricks
Culvert 10 cm
Culvert 20 cm
d) Corner bricks
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Squint 300
Birdsmouth 300
Header splay
Single cant or plinth header
Double cant
190 90 90
Note For exact shape of clay bricks and detailed dimensions, refer to Fig. 1 to 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6165:1992 Specification for dimensions for special shapes
of clay bricks (first revision)
4.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.
Modular
Non-Modular
: 230 mm 110 mm 70 mm
230 mm 110 mm 30 mm
Classification
Class
Designation
: 190 mm 90 mm 90 mm
190 mm 90 mm 40 mm
2.
Dimensions
30
30.0
25
25
20
20.0
17.5
17.5
15
15.0
12.5
70 mm 110 mm 70 mm
230 mm 50 mm 70 mm
Non-modular size
a) Length
3 800 80
4 600 80
12.5
b) Width
1 800 40
2 200 40
10
10.0
c) Height
1 800 40
1 400 40
7.5
7.5
5.0
3.5
3.5
6.
Physical Requirements
For detailed information, refer to IS 13757:1993 Specification for burnt clay fly ash building
bricks.
4.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.
190 190 50
190 140 50
140 140 50
140
90
50
90 90 50
2.2 Tolerances
Dimensions
Total Tolerance
for 20 Jallies
190 mm
140 mm
80 mm
100 mm
90 mm
40 mm
Physical Requirements
50 mm
For detailed information, refer to IS 7556:1988 Specification for Burnt clay allies (first revision)
4.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Characteristic
Requirement
Class AA
Class A
20
0.80(for 410 235 mm)
0.90 (for 420 250 mm
and 425 260 mm)
3. General Quality.
3.1. Shall be free from irregularities, such as twists,
bends, cracks and laminations. The roofing tile shall be
free from impurities like particles of stone, lime or other
foreign materials. When struck, the tile shall give a
characteristic ringing soud and when broken the
fracture shall be clean and sharp at the edges. The Class
AA tile shall be of uniform colour.
3.2. Shape Placed on either face on a plane surface,
gap at corners shall not exceed 6 mm.
3.3. Lugs At least 2 batten lugs and 2 eave lugs of
thickness not less than 15 mm at bottom and 10 mm at
top shall be provided. Projection shall be 7 to 12 mm for
batten lugs and not less than 10 mm for eave lugs.
3.4. Tie-down hole 1.6 to 2 mm diameter.
4. Dimensions
Overall Length
mm
Overall Width
mm
410
42 0
425
235
250
260
Value for
Length
mm
Value for
Width
mm
410 235
630 to 650
410 to 430
420 250
670 to 690
420 to 440
425 260
690 to 710
430 to 450
Strength Requirement
Note For typical details of Manglaore tile see Fig 1of the
when tested
standard.
Note For the methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 654:1992 Specification for clay roofing tiles, Mangalore
pattern (third revision).
4.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b)
c)
d)
(1)
i)
Characteristic
Requirement for
Class AA
Class A
(3)
(4)
18
20
(2)
Water absorption percent (for ridge
and ceilling tiles), Max
ii)
For detailed information, refer to IS 1464:1992 Specification for clay ridge and ceiling tiles
(second revision).
4.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.
TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF
FLOORING TILES
SI.No.
Characteristic
Requirements for
Class 1 Class 2 Class 3
i)
ii)
iii)
Water absorption
percent, Max
10
19
24
Dimensions
i)
150 150 15 mm
ii)
150 150 20 mm
iii)
200 200 20 mm
iv)
200 200 25 mm
v)
250 250 30 mm
Flexural strength,
kg/cm width, Min
a)
Average
3.5
2.5
b)
Individual
3.0
2.0
5.
Impact maximum
height in mm of
drop of steel ball:
a)
15 mm thick
25
20
15
b)
20 mm thick
60
50
40
c)
25 mm thick
75
65
50
d)
30 mm thick
80
70
60
Tolerances
a)
b)
For details information, refer to IS 1478:1992 Specifications for clay flooring tiles
(second revision).
4.16
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2690 (Part 1):1993 Specification for burnt clay flat terracing
tiles: Part 1 Machine-made (second revision).
4.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
(Second Revision)
1. Scope Requirements for hand-made burnt clay
flat terracing tiles.
2. General Quality Shall be uniform in shape
and sizes and shall be free from irregularities, such as
twists, bends, cracks and particles of stones.
3.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2690 (Part 2):1992 Specification for burnt clay flat terracing
tiles: Part 2 Hand-made (second revision).
4.18
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Sl. No.
3.
5.
(1)
(2)
Requirements
Class 105
Class 75
(3)
(4)
i)
10.5
7.5
ii)
15.0
20.0
iii)
1.5
1.2
iv)
3.0
3.0
Note For methods of test, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and relevant parts of IS 3495 Methods of tests of burnt clay
building bricks (third revision).
For detailed information refer to IS 3367:1993 Specification for burnt clay tiles for use in lining
irigation and drainage works (second revision).
4.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
(First Revision)
1. Scope Requirements for dimensions, quality
and strength requirements of hollow clay filler tiles
having perforations parallel to their length and intended
for use in floors and roofs.
3.
3.1 Dimensions
Length
mm
Width
mm
Height
mm
350, 300
80, 90
250, 200
100, 110
740
Note 1 Typical shapes of hollow clay filter tiles are shown in Fig. 4 of the standard.
Note 2 For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3951 (Part 1):1975 Specification for hollow clay tiles for
floors and roofs:Part 1 Filler type (first revision).
4.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.
3.1 Dimensions
Length 290 and 390 mm
For detailed information, refer to IS 3951 (Part 2) : 1975 Specification for hollow clay tiles for
floors and roofs: Part 2 Structural type (first revision).
4.21
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Characteristic
Requirement
Half Round Tiles
Class AA
(1)
(2)
i)
Flat Tiles
Class A
Class AA
Class A
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
19
24
19
24
a) Average
b) Individual
3.
Overall width
Overall height
Wide end
Narrow end
Wide end
Narrow end
250
250
105
120
85
95
50
60
40
45
Size I
SIze II
200
250
175
200
145
160
20
25
20
25
Flat Tile
When the half round or flat country tile is placed
on a plane surface, the gap at the corners shall be not
more than 8 mm. The cross-section of the half round
and flat country tiles shall be such as to give the tile
structural rigidity. The overall minimum overlap in both
the type of tiles shall be 60 mm length length wise.
There is no overlap width wise in these tiles. The
tolerances in length and width shall be below
5 percent.
For detailed information, refer to IS 13317:1992 Specification for clay roofing country tiles,
half round and flat tiles.
4.22
SECTION 5
GYPSUM BUILDING
MATERIALS
2.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
IS
Page
2095
(Part I) : 1996
5.3
(Part 3) : 1996
5.5
2547
(Part I) : 1976
5.7
(Part 2) : 1976
5.9
IS
2849 : 1983
5.10
IS
8272 : 1984
5.11
IS
5.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Gypsum wallboards
The paper covered edges of gypsum wall boards are
Gypsum Board with reduced water
square, tapered, bevelled or rounded. The paper covered
Absorption Rate,
edges of gypsum baseboard are square or rounded. The
c) Gypsum wallboard with improved core
ends of gypsum plaster board are square-cut.
Cohesion at high temperatures
5. Requirements
d) Gypsum plaster baseboard, and
5.1 Dimensions See Table 1.
e) Gypsum plaster baseboard with improved core
*Gypsum plaster boards : Part 1Plain gypsum plaster boards
cohesion at high temperatures
(second revision)
+ Specification for by product gypsum for use in plaster block
3. Material Gypsum plaster shall conform to
and board.
IS 2547 (Part 1) : 1976*. By product gypsum conforming
+
to IS 12679:1987 shall be used for the preparation of
plaster.
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS
Type of
Width
Length
Thickness
Board
mm
mm
mm
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Wallboard
Baseboard
Length Thickness
0
-5
0
-6
0.6
a) Non-Perforated 0
-8
b) Perforated
0
-8
0
-6
0
-16
0.6
Gypsum Wallboard
Tolerance in mm
Width
Type of Board
Thickness Breaking
Load, Min
Transverse Longitudinal
Direction
Direction
mm
Gypsum Baseboard
(1)
Plaster board
0.6
5.3
(2)
9.5
12.5
15.0
(3)
140
180
220
(4)
360
500
650
19.0
250
750
23.0
300
850
25.0
9.5
12.5
380
125
165
1,000
180
235
SP 21 : 2005
5.4 Water Absorption Shall be subject to mutual
agreement between purchaser and manufacturer.
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 2542 (Part 2/Sec 1 to 8) : 1981 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and product:
PART 2 Gypsum products (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 2095 (Part 1) : 1996 Specification for gypsum plaster
boards: Part 1 Plain gypsum plaster boards (second revision).
5.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Finish
The surface of the boards shall be true and free from
imperfection that would render the board unfit for use.
The edge shall be straight and the corners shall be
square.
6. Tests
6.1 Visual Inspection All boards shall be sound,
free from cracks, broken-edges and such other
imperfections that would render them unfit for use.
6.2 Thickness To be measured as per IS 2542.
6.3 Transverse/Flexural Strength
6.3.1 Deflection shall not exceed 19 mm under a load
of 340 N.
6.3.2 Flexural strength See Table 2.
6.3.3 Impact strength When tested by Charpy test,
shall have a value as per Table 2.
6.4 Jolting test None of the sample should show
crack or chipping off from the surface before 80 cycles
of jolting.
See Table 1.
4.4 Density
4.5 Tolerances
a)
Length
+ 0 mm
-6
b) Width
+ 0 mm
-5
c) Thickness
1.0 mm
TABLE 1. DIMENSIONS AND OTHER PROPERTIES OF FIBROUS
PLASTER BOARD AND GRG BOARD
Board
Thickness
Length
Width
Mass of Plaster
(T)
(L)
(W)
per m2 of Board, kg
mm
mm
mm
Min
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Fibrous
12
1200
400
Gypsum
1500
600
Plaster
1800
900
2000
8,10
and
12
3 0 00
Board
GRG Board
GYPSUM
Density
kg/m3
Min
(6)
10
834
1000
4-10
2500
1200
6-15
1200
4,6
8-20
10-25
12-30
5.5
SP 21 : 2005
6.5 Free Moisture Shall not exceed 2 percent.
Minimum Flexural
Average Impact
Minimum Impact
Strength
Mpa
Strength on
Either Side
Mpa
N/mm2
Strength
N/mm2
Strength on
Either Side
15
17
18
N/mm2
14
Note For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B on the standard, relevant parts of IS 2380 Methods of test for wood
particle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic matarials, IS 2542 (Part 2): Methods of tests for gupsum plaster, concrete and
products: Part 2 gypsum products.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2095 (Part 3) : 1996 Specification for gypsum plaster
boards: Part 3 Reinforced gypsum plaster boards (second revision).
5.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Classification
a) Plaster of paris,
b) Retarded hemihydrate gypsum plaster
Plaster of Paris
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
i)
35
35
40
47
(ii)
2/3 of SO3content
2/3 of SO 3content
iii)
Soluble magnesium
salts, expressed as
percentage of MgO,
Max
Soluble sodium salts,
expresed as percentage
of Na2 O, Max
Loss on ignition,
percent by mass
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
3.0 Max
2.0 Max
iv)
v)
vi)
Not greater
than 9
and less
than 4
Retarded
Hemihydrate
Gypsum Plaster
Not greater
than 9
and less
than 4
3*
5.7
Anhydrous
KeenesPlaster
Gypsum Plaster
SP 21 : 2005
4. Physical Requirements See Table 2.
(1) (2)
i)
Setting time
minutes:
a)Plaster sand
mixture
b)Neat
plaster
ii)
Transverse
strength
kg/cm2,Min
iii) Soundness
iv)
Mechanical
resistance of
set neat
plaster
v)
Residue on 90
mm sieve
percenage, Max
Expansion on
setting
percentage, Max
vi)
Type A (short)
time setting
(3)
Anhydrous
Gypsum Plaster
Type B (long
time setting
(4)
Keenes Plaster
(5)
(6)
45-120
120-900
20-40
60-180
20-360
5.0
4*
20-360
2.0
2.0
0.20 at 24 h
0.5 at 96 h
Note For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard, IS 1288:1982 Methods of test for mineral gypsum
(second revision) and relevant parts of IS 2542 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2547 (Part 1):1976 Specification for gypsum building
plaster: Part 1 Excluding premixed light weight plasters .
5.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
a) Browning plaster,
b) Metal lathing paster,
c) Bonding plaster
Type B Final coat plaster Finish plaster.
2. Classification
Particulars
UnderCoat Plasters
(TypeA)
Browning
Plaster
(1)
I)
(2)
(3)
Metal
Lathing
Plaster
(4)
Bonding
Plaster
0.25
0.25
No upper limit
640
850
0.93
770
1 040
1.0
2
770
1 040
1.0
(5)
Finish
Plaster
(6)
0.25
Diameter of the
indentation shall not be
less than 4 mm and not
more than 5.5 mm.
NoteFor methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and relevant parts of IS 2542 Methods of test for Gypsum
plaster, Concrete and Products.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2547 (Part 2): 1976 Specification for gypsum building
plasters: Part 2 Premixed lightweight plasters .
5.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Requirements
a)
b)
c)
3.1 Dimensions
3.2 Tolerances
Length
Height and Breadth
3.0 mm
1.5 mm
Length
Height
Breadth
700 Max in
multiples
of 100
Note
700 Max in
multiples
of 100
60
75
80
100
125
150
15
20
25
15
Elliptical or
Rectangular Holes
t
20
20
30
20
Note For the Methods of tests, refer to IS 2542 (Part 2)-1981 Methods of test for Gypsum plaster, concrete and productsPart 2 gypsum products (first revision) and IS 3808:1979 Method of test for non-combustibility of building materials (first revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 2849:1983 Specification for non- load bearing gypsum
partition blocks (solid and hollow types) (first revision).
5.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Properties
3.1 Fineness Residue retained on 600 micron
sieve shall not be more than 1 percent by mass.
3.2 Compressive Strength Compressive strength
o f t h e p l a s t e r, s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n
7.6 N/mm2.
3.3 Initial Setting TimeShall be between 20 and
35 minutes.
For detailed information, refer to IS 8272:1984 Specification for gypsum plaster for use in the
manufactures of fibrous plaster boards (first revision).
5.11
SECTION 6
TIMBER
2.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
TIMBER CLASSIFICATION
IS
399 : 1963
6.3
IS : 12896 : 1990
6.5
CONVERSION AND
GRADING
IS
190 : 1991
6.7
IS
876 : 1992
Wood poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines (third revision)
6.8
IS
1326 : 1992
6.10
IS
1331 : 1971
6.11
IS
2372 : 2004
6.13
IS
3337 : 1978
6.14
IS
3629 : 1986
6.15
IS
3731: 1985
6.17
IS
4891 : 1988
6.18
IS
4895 : 1985
6.20
IS
5246 : 2000
6.21
IS
6056 : 1970
Jointed wood poles for over head power and telecommunication lines
6.22
IS
7308 : 1999
6.24
IS
10394 : 1982
6.2
6.25
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
North Zone
II East Zone
High
Moderate
Low
IV West Zone
V South Zone
6.3
SP 21 : 2005
4.6 Comparative Strength Coefficients The
figure for comparative strength coefficients for various
uses for all the timbers have been arrived at by suitably
grouping the various important mechanical properties
that come into play for any particular use and giving
due weightage to the relative importance of these
properties.
Note1 For classification of timbers according to their uses for various zone, refer to Table I to V of
the standard.
Note 2 For key for field indentification of commercial timber ( soft woods and hard woods) based on their general properties, refers
to IS 4970 :1973. key for indentification of commercial timbers ( first revision) their zonal distibution (revised)
For detailed information, refer to IS 399: 1963 Specification for classification of commercial
timbers and their zonal distribution (revised).
6.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.1.2
Group I
Strength coefficient : More than or equal to 80
Weight
Between 75-115
Durability
I or II
3.1.3
Group II
Strength coefficient : More than or equal to 70
Weight
70-125
Durability
I, II or III (with treatbility
(a), (b) or (c) see 5)
Species of this groups are given in Annex C of
the standard. Species which are comparable to Group
II species in respect of strength, weight, seasoning,
working and finishing characters but fall short only in
treatability, that is, belong to durability III, with
treatability (d) or (e) or whose durability/treatability
data are not available shall be grouped in to Group II(A).
These species are also given in Annex C of the
standardd. Doors made out of the timbers of Group
II(A) will require special preservative treatment after
fabrication.
3. Timber / Spices
3.1 ShuttersTimbers species for the manufacture of
door an window shutters shall have adequate strength,
weight, retention of shape, ease of working, ability to
season well, finish smooth and shall be sufficiently
durable and/or treatable. In addition, for hgih class
polished door shutters, it shall have excellent appearance
and figure and shall have good gloss after polishing.
The timber species shall be classified into the following
four groups based on strength coefficient, weight
(expressed as a percentage of teak), durability and
treatability, appearance, figure and polish adaptability,
keeping also in view their seasoning behaviour, retention
of shape and workability.
3.1.4
Group III
Strength : More than or equal to 60
coefficient
Weight
: 65-125
Durability : Any class or not know
3.1.1
Super Group
Strength More than or equal to 80
coefficient
Weight Between 75-115
Durability I or II
In addition, these shall be excellent in figure
appearance, smooth finishing and polishing. Species of
this group are given in Annex A of the standard.
6.5
SP 21 : 2005
3.2.1 Group I
Strength coefficient : 80 or more
Durability
: I
Species of this group are given in Annex E of the standard.
III
3.2.2 Group II
Strength coefficient : 70 or more
Durability : I, II [with treatability
(a), (b), or (c) or III with treatability (a), or (b)]
3.2.3 Group III
Strength coefficient 65 or more
Durability I, II (with any treatability class) or
III [with treatability (a), (b) or (c)]
Species of this group are given in Annex G of the standard.
Less than 60
For detailed information, refer to IS 12896 : 1990 Specification for Indian timbers for door and
window shutters and frames.
6.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Species
Trade
Name
Botanical Name
Chir
Cypress
Deodar
Fir
Pinus roxburghi
Cupressus torulosa
Cedrus deodara
Abies spp
(Other than Abies densa)
Pinus Wallichaiana
Pinus insularis
Abies densa
Picea simthiana
Kail
Khasi pine
Red fir
Spruce
Abbreviated
symbol
CHR
CYP
DEO
FIR
KAL
KPI
RFI
SPR
200 mm 125 mm
200 mm 200 mm
250 mm 150 mm
4. Measurement
Note For methods of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS 3364 (Part 2): 1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation
of defects in timber: (Part 2) Converted timber (first revision).
For detail information refer to IS 190:1991 Specifications for Coniferous sawn timber (baulks
and scantilings) (fourth revision).
6.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Group B -
Group C -
Class 5 -
Class 6 -
Class 7 -
7. Defects
Note -
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
Class 4
6.8
6.9
1.5
1.5
1.8
1.8
2.0
9.0
10.0
12.0
14.0
(5)
(7)
(8)
(6)
Class 3, Group
Class 4, Group
Class 5, Group
Class 6, Group
Class 7, Group
mm mm mm
mm
360
670
630
580
560
540
510
480
380
700
660
610
590
560
530
500
(12) (13)
mm
420
780
720
680
660
630
600
550
(14)
mm
mm mm mm
mm
mm mm mm mm
290
600
560
520
500
480
460
430
310
630
590
550
530
500
480
450
mm
For detailed information, refer to IS 876: 1992 Specification for wood poles for overhead power and Telecommunication
lines (Third Revision).
1.2
7.0
(4)
(3)
mm mm mm
1.2
6.0
(2)
(1)
mm mm mm
Class 2, Group
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
SP 21 : 2005
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope Covers the requirements of nonconiferous sawn timber in the form of baulks and
scantling.
2. Species Refer to Annex A and Annex B of the
standard for the species of timber covered.
3. Dimensions and Measurements
Cross Section
200 mm 100 mm,
200 mm 125 mm
200 mm 200 mm
Note For method of measurement of defects in timber refer to IS 3364 (Part 2) : 1976 Method of measurement and evaluation
of defects in timber. Part 2 Converted timber ( first revision).
For detailed informtion, refer to IS 1326 : 1992 Non-coniferous sawn timber (baulks and
scantlings) (Second Revision).
6.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMRY OF
b)
c)
Thickness
1.0
1.5
2
2.5
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
4.0
x
x
x
x
x
5.0
6.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x = preferred
8.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
size of
10.0
12.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
the width
14.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
6.11
16.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
18.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
20.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
22.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
24.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
26.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
28.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
30.0
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
SP 21 : 2005
3.2 Grading for Non-Structural Use Based on
permissible and prohibited defects cut sizes of timber
for non-structural use shall be of two grades, namely,
Grade 1 and Grade 2.
4. Defects
For detailed information, refer to IS 1331 : 1971 Specification for cut sizes of timbers
(second revision).
6.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Abies pindrow
Cedrus deodara
picea smithiana
Pinus kesiya
pinus roxburghii
Pinus wallichiana
Tectona grandis
Pseudotsuga taxifolia
Pinus radiata
5. Treatment
5.1 Following treatments are recommended
Trade Name
Fir
Deodar
Spruce
Khasi pine
Chir
Kail
Teak
Douglas fir
Radiata pine
3. Grading of Timber
3.1 Colling tower timbers shall be of three grades,
namely, select grade, Grade I and Grade II depending on
the defects permitted.
3.2 Prohibited Defects (for All Grades) Timber with
loose grain, reaction wood, heartwood, rot warp, worm
holes which are likely to affect strength, pitch pockets,
centreheart (pith), shakes twisted grain and wane.
a)
b)
Timber Species
Depth Minimum
Sapwood
Abies pindrow
Cedrus deodara
Picea smithiana
Pinus kesiya
Pnus roxburghii
Pinus wallichiana
Tectona grandia
Douglas fir
Radiata pine
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
Heartwood
5* m m
10
mm
5* m m
20 m m
20 m m
10 m m
Needs no treatment
5* m m
20 m m
For detailed information, refer to IS 2372:2004 Specification for timber for cooling towers
(Second revision).
6.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Diameter at Diameter at
the Top
the Butt End
cm
cm
1 Over
2 Over
3 Over
Over 15 upto 20
Over 11.5 upto 15
Over 7.5 upto 11.5
Length
m
3 to 9
3 to 9
3 to 9
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
6. Permissible Defects
6.1 Surface Cracks
For detailed information, refer to IS 3337: 1978 Specifications for ballies for general purposes.
6.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Second Choice
Group A Ping
Dhaman (Madras)
Maniawaga Dhaman
(West Bengal,Gurjan,
Oak (West Bengal)
Kusum (Bihar),Behera
6.15
SP 21 : 2005
as listed in Table 1.
d) Sapwood of all classes of ability after through
treatement with preservatives.
Limit (Ft)
N/mm2
Above
12, 600
18.0
Above
12.0
Above
8.5
PERMISSIBLE STRESS.
Grade 1
(Standard Location)
Inside Outside
Wet
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
0 mm
3 mm
3 mm
6 mm
0 mm
10 mm
a)
ii)
4.1
(1)
6. Defects
N/mm
i)
1.16
0.84
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
7.5
7
7
10
4.5
8.5
7
10
5.5
2.25
2.75
For detailed information, refer to IS 3629 : 1981Specification for structural timber in buildings
(first revision).
6.16
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Grades
Grade 1
5. Permissible
Evaluation
Defects
and
Their
5.1 Curvature
5.2 Taper
5.3 Wane
5.4 Knots
5.5 Holes
5.6 Shakes
5.7 Checks and Splits
5.8 Other DefectsFor extent of defects permitted, refer
to 6 of the standard
Note For methods of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber, refer to IS 3364 (Part 2) : 1976 Methods of
and evaluation of defects in timber Part 2 Converted timber (first revision).
measurement
For detailed information refer to IS 3731 : 1985 Specification for teak squares (first revision).
6.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Roof trusses,
Roof purlins, rafters, floor beams, etc;
Partitions framing, covering;
Centering; and
Door / window/ventilators
3. Tolerances
a) (i) For measurement
up to 100 mm
0 to +3mm
(ii) Measurement
above 100 mm
b)
3 to + 6 mm
0 to +10 mm
Thickness in mm
Width in mm
20
25
30
40
40
40
50
50
50
60
60
60
80
80
80
100
100
100
120
120
140
140
160
160
35
40
50
60
60
60
80
80
80
100
100
100
120
120
120
140
140
140
160
160
160
80
100
120
140
100
120
140
Note1 For truss spans marginally above 20 m, preferred cut sizes of structural timber maybe allowed.
Note2 Preferred length of timber : 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5 and 3 m.
160
160
60
80
100
120
100
6.18
140
140
140
140
160
160
160
180
200
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 3 PREFERRED CUT SIZES OF STRUCTURAL TIMBER FOR PARTITION
FRAMING AND COVERING
Thickness in mm
Width in mm
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
80
Note Preferred length of timber
40
50
60
40
50
60
40
50
60
40
50
60
40
50
60
40
60
50
60
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
240
240
240
240
240
240
20
25
25
30
35
40
50
60
Width in mm
30
35
40
50
50
50
50
50
60
60
60
60
60
80
80
80
80
80
80
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
120
120
140
160
160
160
180
200
220
240
240
240
Note Preferred timber lengths (wall opening module of 100 mm) for frames 590, 790, 890, 990, 1 190, 1 290,1 990
and 2090 mm. Preferred timber length for shutters 460, 500, 700, 800, 900, 1 100, 1 200, 1 905 and 2 005 mm
For detailed information, refer to IS 4891 : 1988 Specification for preferred cut sizes of
structural timber (first revision).
6.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
L
P
2.5
Where
3.1
Curvature
3.2
Shakes
3.3
Flutes
3.4
Knots
3.5
Length
3.6
Twist
Mid girth 1 m
For detailed Information, refer to IS 4895 : 1985.Specification for Teak logs (first revision)
6.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Grades
6. Permissible Defects
Grade 1
Botanical Name
Abies pindrow Royale
Cedrus deodara D.Don
Cupressus torulasa D.Don
Picea Smithiana Boiss
Pinus excelsa Wall
Pinus Khasya Royle
Pinus Roxburg Sargent
Abbreviation
6.2 Taper
6.3 End Splits
6.4 Surface Cracks
6.5 Cup Shakes
6.6 Knots
6.7 Hollow Centre
FIR
DEO
CYP
SPR
KAL
KPI
CHR
4. Dimensions
Minimum length
Minimum mean mid-girth
2.5 m
1 m
For detailed Information, refer to IS 5246 : 2000 Specification for coniferous logs first revision
6.21
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.1 Classification
Class 1
B
(7)
cm
63
67
70
74
76
82
87
C
(8)
cm
70
74
78
82
84
92
96
43 46 51
Class 3
Group
A
(9)
cm
55
60
63
66
68
73
78
B
(10)
cm
58
63
66
70
72
76
81
41 43
Class 4
Group
C
(11)
cm
65
70
73
76
78
85
90
48
A
B C
(12) (13) (14)
cm cm cm
50 53 60
55 57 64
57 60 67
60 63 70
62 65 72
67 70 78
71 75 83
36
38 42
Class 5
Group
Class 6
Group
A B C A
(15) (16) (17) (18)
cm cm cm cm
48 50 55 46
51 53 60 48
54 56 63 51
56 59 66 53
58 61 68 55
63 66 72 58
67 70 78 61
30
32
35
29
B
(19)
cm
48
50
53
56
58
61
64
31
Class7
Group
C A B C
(20) (21) (22) (23)
cm cm cm cm
50 44 46 48
52 46 48 50
55 48 50 52
59 50 53 56
61 52 55 58
63 53 56 59
67 56 59 62
34
26
28 30
Note The circumferences for different species at the joints of the components are covered under 8.1.1 and 8.1.2, of the standard
and the length of the components are covered under individual types of joints. For poles of intermediate length in Table 1, the
circumferences given for the next larger pole shall be used
6.22
SP 21 : 2005
4. Preparation of Components of Jointed
PolesThe bark of the components shall be
completely removed and all the branches shall be dressed
down flush with the stem. The tops of the upper
components shall be bevelled in the shape of an inverted
V for a length equal to top diameter or 10 cm whichever
is less.
5. Preliminary Treatment A prophylactic
treatmen shall be given.
6. Preservative Treatment Shall be treated
with a preservative so as to impregnate completely the
sapwood and as much of heartwood of non-durable
species as possible.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
8. Defects
For detailed information, refer to IS 6056 : 1970 Specification for jointed wood poles for
overhead power telecommunication lines.
6.23
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Bend
6.2
Taper
6.3
6.4
Surface Cracks
6.5
6.6
Knots
6.7
Wounds
6.8
Flutes
6.9
Buttress
Where
6.10 Twist
4. Dimensions The minimum dimensions of logs
shall be the following :
Length
2.5 m
Mean mid-girth 1 m
For detailed information, refer to IS 7308 : 1999 Specification for non-coniferous logs
(first revision).
6.24
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Preservative Treatment
Sleepers
containing sap wood and those without an asterisk mark
in Appendix A shall be given preservative treatment.
Gauge
275
180
150
Gauge
BG
MG
NG
+10,
-2.5
do
do
25 13
20 11.5
18 11.5
28 15
25 18
20 13
do
do
do
25 13
20 15
18 13
20 13
25 13
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
185, 215, 245 and
onwards varying by 30 cm
do
do
do
do
do
+10,
5
do
do
Tolerance in
Length, %
+5
1.25
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
do
For detailed information, refer to IS 10394 : 1982 Specification for wooden sleeper for railway
track
6.25
SECTION 7
2.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
IS
73 : 1992
IS
Page
7.3
212 : 1983
7.5
IS
215 : 1995
7.6
IS
216 : 1961
7.8
IS
218 : 1983
7.9
IS
454 : 1994
7.10
IS
702 : 1988
7.11
IS 3117 : 2004
Bitumen emulsion for roads and allied application (anionic type) (first revision)
7.12
IS 8887 : 2004
7.14
IS 9912 : 1981
Coal tar based coating materials and suitable primers for protecting
iron or steel pipe lines.
7.15
7.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For a given lot under each type the softening point for
samples taken from different parts of the lot shall not
vary by more than 8C from maximum to minimum and
shall not fall outside the range of the test range of the
test limits specified in Tables 1 and 2.
Sl
(1)
i)
S35
(3)
S45
(4)
S55
(5)
S65
(6)
S90
(7)
S200
(8)
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.99
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
175
175
175
175
175
175
50 to 65
45 to 60
30 to 40
35
35
50
75
75
75
75
--
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
10
55
55
52
52
47
42
99
99
99
99
99
99
1 500300
180
1 000200
150
500100
110
25050
20
40 to 50
2 500500 2 000400
220
210
* Penetration ratio=
7.3
45 to 60
40 to 55
35 to 50
30 to 45
50 to 60
60 to 70
80 to 100
175 to 225
35
35
35
35
SP 21 : 2005
Sl
No.
(1)
(2)
* Penetration ratio =
A35
(3)
A55
(4)
A65
(5)
A90
(6)
0.99
0.2
175
55 to 70
30 to 40
25
10
10
0.99
0.2
175
45 to 60
50 to 60
25
15
10
0.99
0.2
175
45 to 60
60 to 70
25
15
10
0.98
0.2
175
35 to 50
80 to 100
25
15
10
10
1
57
1
57
1
47
1
42
99
99
99
99
1 000 300
250
400 300
100
300 100
70
200 50
50
Penetration 4 0 C,200g,60s
100
Penetration at 25 0 C, 100g, 5s
For detailed information, refer to IS 73:1992. Specification for paving bitumen (second revision).
7.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Min
(3)
Max
(4)
i)
1.09
1.24
ii)
iii)
30
100
iv)
v)
vi)
Up to 200 C
200 to 230C
230 to 270C
270 to 300C
300 to 350C
Mineral matter (Ash)
Matter insoluble in benzene percent by weight
2
6
4
12
0
5
4
10
12
7
17
1
25
For detailed information, refer to IS 212:1983 Specification for crude coal tar for general use
(second revision).
7.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.1 Types
Type A for surface dressing and dense
tarsurfacings.
Type B for open graded premix carpet with or
without seal coat.
2.2 Grades There shall be five grades of road tar as
follows :
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
(2)
Specific gravity at 27/27C
Viscosity by standard tar
viscometer (10 mm cup)
a) Temperature of test, C
b) Viscosity in seconds
Equiviscous temperature (EVT)C
Softening point (R&B), C
Distillation fractions, percent
by weight (g per 100g)
Distilling
a) Light oil below 200C
b) Middle oil 200C-270C
c) Heavy oil 270C-300 C
d) Anthracene oil 300C-350C
e) Pitch residue converted
to 76C (R &B)
Softening point (R&B) of the pitch
percent by weight, Max
a) at 300C, Max
b) at 360C, Max
Water content, percent by
weight, Max
Phenols, percent by weight, Max
Naphthalene, percent by weight,
Max
Raw anthracene, percent
by weight, Max
Matter insoluble in toluene,
percent by weight, Max
RT-1
(3)
RT-2
(4)
RT-3
(5)
RT-4
(6)
RT-5
(7)
1.16-1.26
1.16-1.26
1.18-1.28
1.18-1.28
1.18-1.28
35
3055
3236
1519
40
3055
3741
2024
45
3560
4346
2629
55
4060
5357
2640
65
4060
6368
4550
0.5
512
410
1525
4560
0.5
29
48
1626
5065
0.5
16
36
1727
5570
0.5
0.54
27
1829
6075
0.5
04
15
1829
6580
48
90
50
90
52
90
54
90
56
90
0.5
2.0
4.0
0.5
2.0
3.5
0.5
2.0
3.0
0.5
2.0
2.5
0.5
2.0
2.0
3.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
22
22
24
24
24
residue
7.6
SP 21 : 2005
Sl.No.
(1)
(2)
i)
RT-1
(3)
RT-2
(4)
RT-3
(5)
RT-4
(6)
RT-5
(7)
1.10-1.28
1.10-1.28
1.12-1.28
1.12-1.28
1.14-1.28
35
40
45
55
65
b) Viscosity in seconds
30-55
30-55
35-60
35-70
35-70
32-36
37-41
43-46
53-57
63-67
45-50
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
5-12
2-9
1-6
0-4
0-4
4-10
50-70
4-8
3-6
2-7
1-5
18-28
18-28
19-30
19-30
61-71
64-74
67-77
70-80
pitch residue, C
a) at 300C, Max
40
40
40
40
40
b) at 360C, Max
80
80
80
80
80
0.5
2.0
0.5
2.0
0.5
2.0
0.5
2.0
0.5
2.0
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
3.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
22
22
24
24
24
For detailed information, refer to IS 215 : 1995 Specification for road tar (third revision).
7.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Requirements
3.1 Composition The material shall be:
a) either the residue of the direct distillation of
crude tar produced by the high temperature
carbonization of coal in coke ovens or retorts,
or
Soft pitch,
Soft medium pitch,
Hard medium pitch,
Hard pitch.
TABLE 1 EQUIREMENTS FOR COAL TAR PITCH
Sl. Characteristics
No.
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
(2)
(3)
1.20 to 1.30
45 to 55C
4
8
25
0.5
Soft Medium
Pitch
(4)
1.22 to 1.32
58 to 68C
1.22 to 1.32
70 to 80C
1.28 to 1.38
82 to 92C
4
8
3
4
No Test
No Test
28
0.5
30
0.75
35
0.8
of tests, refer to IS 1202:1978 methods of testing tar bituminous material: Determination of specific gravity
Determination of softening point (first revision).
Distillation test (first revision).
Determination of matter insoluble in toulene (first revision).
Determination of mineral matter (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to 216 : 1961 Specifications for Coal tar pitch (Revised).
7.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Precautions
4.1 Safety All persons handling the creosote should
be fully aware of the hazards involved in handling. Skin
should be protected from coming in direct contact with
the liquid. Eyes should be protected by using safety
goggles, while handling the material.
2. Types
a) Type I Obtained from tar produced by the
high temperature carbonization of
coal, and
b) Type II Obtained from tar produced by the
medium or low temperature
carbonization of coal.
3. Requirements
Characteristics
Type I
Type II
Min
Max
Min
(3)
(4)
(5)
Max
(6)
a) 210C
b) 235C
c) 315C
d) 355C
2.0
0.5
5
30
75
0.95
15
5
40
75
2.0
0.5
5
20
60
(2)
0.935
15
For detailed information, refer to IS 218 : 1983 Specifications for creosote oil for use as wood
preservatives (second revision).
7.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b)
c)
Heavy grade
construction.
2. Grades
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
(2)
Kinematic viscosity, 60 0C cst
Flash point, Pensky Martens closed type,0C
Distillate volume, percent of total distillate
up to 3600C
a) Up to 190 C
b) Up to 225 C
c) Up to 260 C
d) Up to 315 C
Residue from distillation up to 360C, percent
by volume (by difference)
Tests on residue from distillation upto 360C
a) Viscosity at 60 C, poises
b) Ductility at 27 C
c) Matter soluble in
Trichloroethylene
percent by mass
d)
Penetration 25 C
/100g/5Sec
Water content percent by mass
Medium
Max
Heavy
Min
Max
Min
Min
Max
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
70
38
140
800
55
1600
3000
55
6000
10
50
70
85
30
30
30
75
50
55
75
80
600
12
2400
100
10
100
10
2400
99
99
99
35
70
0.2
50
25
50
0.2
2400
100
0.2
For detailed information, refer to IS 454 : 1991 Specifications for cutback bitumen from waxy
crude (second revision).
7.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
IS 702 : 1988
INDUSTRIAL BITUMEN
(Second Revision)
d) 115/15
e) 135/10
f) 155/6
Note The two values given in the grade denotes
approximately softnening point and penetration
respectively
2. Grades
a) 85/25
b) 85/40
c) 90/15
Characteristics
(1)
(2)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
85/40
(4)
1.00 to 1.05
90/15
(5)
115/15
(6)
135/10
(7)
155/6
(8)
225
80 to 90
35 to 45
225
85 to 100
10 to 20
225
110 to 120
8 to 20
225
225
130 to 140 150 to 160
7 to 12
2 to 10
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.30
60
3
60
2
60
2
60
1
60
0
99
99
99
99
99
For detailed information, refer to IS 702 : 1988 Specifications for industrial bitumen
(second revision).
7.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Types
3.1 a) Rapid Setting Type RS
Materials
c)
3.2 Applications
a) Type RS A quick setting, emulsified bitumen
used for penetration and surface treatments;
4. Requirements
4.1 Bitumen emulsion shall be homogeneous. Within
90 days after manufacture it shall show no undispersed
bitumen after thorough mixing.
4.2 Physical and chemical requirements shall be as
given in Table 1.
7.12
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF BITUMEN EMULSION
Sl. No.
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
Characteristic
(2)
Viscosity by Sabybolt Furol
viscometer, in second at 25C
Bitumen content, percent by mass, Min
Settlement, 5 days, percent, Max
Demulsibility, 35 ml of 0.02 N
calcium chloride, percent Min
Miscibility1 in water, coagulation in 2 h
Modified miscibility with water
difference of bitumen content, Max
Cement mixing test, percent, Max
Coating ability and water resistance
a) Coating dry aggregate
b) Coating after spraying
c) Coating wet aggregate
d) Coating after spraying
Sieve test, percent, Max
Particle charge
Rapid
Setting
(3)
20-100
Medium
Setting
(4)
20-100
Stow
Setting
(5)
20-100
Method of Test,
Ref to Annex
(6)
A
65
3
60
65
3
_
57
3
_
B
C
D
_
_
Nil
_
_
4.5
E
F
2.0
_
_
_
_
0.10
Negative
Good
Fair
Fair
Fair
0.10
Negativ
_
_
_
_
0.5
Negative
H
J
K
If the sample of emulsified bitumen being tested fails to conform to the requirement, the sample shall be tested for 5-day settlement
and for miscibility and if the numerical difference between the average percentage of residue in the 5-day settlement test is less than
3, and if the miscibility test shows no appreciable coagulation in 2h, then the emulsified bitumen shall be considered conforming to
this standard.
1
Note The emulsified bitumen shall not show an a preciable separation of bituminous base from the water of the emulsion
and shall coat the aggragate thoroughly.
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 1211:1978 Methods for testing tar and bitumen: Determination of water content
(Dean and Stark method) (first revision) and Appendices A to J of the stand.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3117 : 2004 Specifications for Bitumen emulsion for
roads and allied application. (Anionic type)
7.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Grade
a) Rapid setting - 1
b) Rapid setting -2
Rs - 1
Rs -2
c) Medium setting
MS
d) Show setting - 1
SS - 1
e) Show setting - 2
SS - 2
Requirement
3.1 Shall be homogeneous. Within one year after
manufacture date it shall show no undispersed bitumen
after thorough mixing.
Characteristic
Grade of Emulsion
Method of Test
Ref. to
RS-1
RS-2
MS
SS-1
SS-2
IS No.
Annex
of this
Standard
8
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
1
9
i)
ii)
3117
20100
100300
50300
20100
31150
iii)
Coagulation of emulsion at
low temperature 1
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
iv)
Positive
Positive
Positive
Weak Positive
Positive
Good
Fair
Fair
Fair
No
Coagulation
No
Coagulation
No
Coagulation
No
Coagulation
v)
Particle charge
vi)
vii)
Coating,
Coating,
Coating,
Coating,
dry aggregate
after spraying
wet aggregate
after spraying
ix)
Test on residue:
1) Residue by evaporation
percent, Min
1) Penetration 25 0C/100 g/ 5sec
3) Ductility 270 C/cm, Min
4) Solubility :
In Irichloreothylene,
Percent by mass, Min
x)
xi)
1)
60
67
65
50
60
80-150
50
98
80-150
50
98
60-150
50
98
60-350
50
98
60-120
50
98
1203
1208
1216
20-55
30-75
40-90
60-100
20
This requirement shall be applicable only under situations where the ambient temeprature is below 15 0C
For detailed information, refer to IS 8887 : 2004. Specifications for Bitumen emulsion for
roads (Cationic type) (first revision).
7.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Primers
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF HOT APPLIED COATING MATERIAL
Sl
No.
Characteristics
Requirements
Type I
(1)
(2)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
Type II
Min
Max
Min
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
105
115
105
115
5
10
1.4
25
10
25
1.6
35
1.5 mm
Not applicable
12
20
1.4
25
Max
20
50
1.6
35
1.5 mm
None
70 cm 2
20 cm2
50 cm2
10 cm2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Note Coal dispersion pitches have a tendency to form a hard thin skin while hot, and penetration values tend to show a wide
variation, on the prior preparation of the sample, which is not easy to control, and dependent on the point chosen on the
surface for the test. The behaviour and performance of these coal dispersion pitches are functions of the property of the body
of the material and not of any surface skin. To overcome this, fill the cup up to the brim and after cooling down, pour a little
excess of material slowly and carefully to form a convex surface. The excess material is to be cut with a hot knife after cooling
for 15 min at room temperature.
7.15
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS OFTYPE A PRIMER
Sl Characterics
No.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Viscosity at 25oC
Flash point
Volatile matter at
145C-150C
Drying time
Requirements
20 to 40 Second
35C (Min)
40 to 60 percent
by weight
Conditions of
Appendix C
shall apply
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Viscosity at 25C
Flash point
Volatile matter at
100-110C
Drying time
Requirements
20 to 40 Second
35C (Min)
60 to 80 percent
by weight
Conditions of
Appendix C
shall apply
Note For methods of tests, refer to Appendices of the standard and the following:
IS
82:1973 Methods of sampling and test for thinners and solvent for paints (first revision).
IS 1202:1978 Methods of testing tar and bituminous materials, Determination of specific gravity (first revision).
IS 1203:1978 Determination of penetration (first revision).
IS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point (first revision).
IS 1206 (Part 1):1978 Determination of Viscosity : Part 1 Industrial viscosity (first revision).
IS 1207:1978 Determination of equiviscous temperature (first revision).
For detailed informatiom refer to IS 9912 : 1981 Specifications for coal tar based coating
materials and suitable primers for protecting iron or steel pipe lines.
7.16
SECTION 8
2.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
GENERAL
IS
1237:1980
8.4
IS
1542:1992
8.6
IS
2116:1980
8.7
IS
4457:1982
8.8
IS 4832
(Part 1) :1969
Silican type.
8.9
(Part 2) :1969
Resin type.
8.10
(Part 3) :1968
Sulphur type
8.11
IS 4860:1968
8.12
IS 13753:1993
Dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption E>10 percent Group (B III)
8.13
IS 13754:1993
Dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 6<E 10 percent Group (B IIb)8.15
IS 13755:1993
Dust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 3<E <6 percent Group (BII a) 8.18
IS 13756:1993
IS 14862 :2000
IS 14871-2000
8.27
8.30
IS 5317:2002
8.32
IS
8.33
IS 9510:1980
8.34
IS 12583:1988
8.36
IS 13026:1991
Bitumen mastic for flooring for industries handling LPG and other light
BITUNINOUS
IS
1195:2002
8374:1977
hydrocarbon products
8.38
8.39
LINOLEUM
IS
653:1992
8.2
8.41
SP 21 : 2005
Title
IS 3462:1986
Page
8.42
IS 9197:1979
Epoxy resin, hardeners and epoxy resin composition for floor topping.
8.44
IS 12866:1989
8.46
RUBBER
IS
638:1979
8.48
IS
809:1992
8.50
8.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Tolerances
5.1 On length or breadth, it shall be 1 mm and on
thickness +5 mm.
2. Terminology
Class of Tile
i)
ii)
3. Classification
a) General Purpose Used for flooring of normally
lightly loaded, such as in office building, schools
colleges, hospitals and residential buildings.
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
4. Dimensions
Breadth
mm
Thickness
mm
200
200
20
250
250
22
300
300
25
Minimum
Thickness
of Wearing
Layer mm
5
5
5
6
6
Sl. No.
8.4
SP 21 : 2005
8.1 Flatness of tile Surface The amount of concavity
and convexity shall not exceed 1 mm.
1) Average wear 2
mm
Note For requirements in regard to materials, manufacture and for methods of tests refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1237 : 1980 Specification for cement concrete flooring
tiles (first revision).
8.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Quality of sand
2.1 General The sand shall be hard, durable, clean
and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and
shall not contain clay, silt and dust more than specified.
2.2 Deleterious Materials
IS Sieve
Designation
Percentage
Passing
10 mm
100
4.75 mm
95-100
2.36 mm
95-100
1.18 mm
90-100
600 micron
80-100
300 micron
20-65
150 micron
0-15
3. Grading of Sand
3.1 The particle size grading of sand for plaster work
shall be as specified in Table 1. Where the grading falls
outside the limits of the grading zones of sieves other
than 150, 300 and 600 micron IS Sieve by a total amount
not exceeding 5 percent, it shall be regarded as falling
within the grading.
b)
For detailed information refer to IS 1542:1992 Specificaion for sand for plaster (second revision).
8.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Grading of Sand
3.1 The particle size grading of sand for use in mortars
shall be within the limits as specified in Table 1.
2. Quality of Sand
4.75 mm
2.36 mm
1.18 mm
600 micron
300 micron
150 micron
b)
100
90 to 100
70 to 100
40 to 100
5 to 70
0 to 15
Organic impurities
Note: For methods of test, refer to IS 2386 Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete
Part 1 : 1963 Particle size and shape
* Part 2 : 1963 Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2116 : 1980 Specificaion for sand for masonry mortars
(first revision).
8.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Requirements
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENT OF CERAMIC UNGLAZED VITREOUS ACID RESISTING TILES
2.1 Sizes
(i)
Sl. No.
Characteristic
(1)
(2)
(3)
i)
Squareness
ii)
Warpage
iii)
for size(i)
for size(ii)
for size(iii)
Water absorption
1.5 mm
2.0 mm
2.5 mm
2 percent, Max
iv)
Compressive strength
v)
Flexural strength
vi)
Resistance to acid
vii)
Abrasion resistance
Requirement
The gap between the inner
edge of the square and the adjacent side of the tile shall not
exceed 1 mm per100 mm run
For detailed information, refer to IS 4457 : 1982 Specificaion for ceramic unglazed vitreous
acid resisting tiles (first revision).
8.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Sl No.
(1)
2. Materials
(i)
Property
Requirement
Sodium
Silicate
Type
(3)
(2)
Working time at 27 2 o C,
Potassium
Silicate
Type
(4)
15
20
35
40
100
150
Min,minutes
(ii)
Flexural strength at
7 days,Min, kgf/cm2
(iii)
Compressive strength at
7 days Min, kgf/cm
(iv)
(v)
5
18
18
percent by weight
Note 1 For method of tests, refer to IS 4456 (Part 1) : 1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortar: Part I Silicate type
and resin type
Note 2 For general guide for chemical resistance of sillicate type mortars to various substances, refer to Table 1 of IS
4441:1980 Code of practice for use of silicate type chemical resistant mortars (first revision).
For detailed informations, refer to IS 4832 (Part 1) : 1969 Specificaion for chemical resistant
mortars: Part 2 Silicate type.
8.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Materials
2.1 Resins Penolic, furane, epoxy, polyester.
2.2 Fillers Siliceous or other inert fillers. Shall be
graded so as to permit 1.5 mm joints.
(2)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
2
2
Furane Epoxy
Polyester
Type
Type
Type
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
20
20
20
20
75
75
150
150
350
350
500
500
10
10
12
12
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Note In the test for bond strength the joint shall not fail at or below the value specified.
Note 1
For methods of tests, refer to IS 4456(Part I) : 1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars: Part I
Silicate type and resin type.
Note 2For general guide for chemical resistance of resin type mortars to various substances, refer to Table 1of IS 4443:1980.
Code of practic for use of resin type chemical resistant mortar (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 4832 (Part 2) : 1969 Specification for chemical resistant
mortars: Part 2 Resin type.
.
8.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
i)
2. Composition
a)
b)
c)
ii)
Sulphur55 to 70 percent
Inert filler30 to 45 percent
Sieve analysis of silica filler
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
Percentage Retained
by Mass
425 micron
5 max
150 micron
10 min
75 micron
35 min
280
30
70
10
20.0
1.0
0.6
Note 1 For methods of tests, refer to IS 4456(Part 2) : 1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars: Part 2 Sulphur
type.
Note 2 For general guide for chemical resistance of sulphur type mortars to various substances, refer to Table 1 of IS 4442:1980
Code of practic for use of resin type chemical resistant mortar (First Revision.)
For detailed information, refer to IS 4832 (Part 3) : 1968 Specification for chemical resistant
mortars: Part 3 Sulphur type.
8.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
IS 4860 : 1968
2. Classification
2.1 Class I Recommended for severe type of
corrosive environments as obtained in storage tanks,
pickling tanks etc.
230
3.5
114
2.0
64
1.0
Characteristic
RESISTANT BRICKS
Requirements
Class I Bricks
(1)
Tolerances
(mm)
(2)
(3)
Class II Bricks
(4)
i)
ii)
100
70
iii)
iv)
Resistance to acid
v)
700
Loss in weight shall not
exceed 1.5 percent
Average wear shall not
500
Loss in weight shallnot
exceed 4.0 percent
exceed 2 mm
Note For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to D of the standard and Appendix A of IS 1237:1980 Specification for cement
concrete flooring tiles (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 4860 : 1968 Specification for acid resistant bricks.
8.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
8.13
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS
Characteristics
Requirements
Test
According to
IS 13630
Part 1
1 12 cm: 0.75)1)
1> 12 cm: 0.5
+0.6/-0.3
1 12cm: 0.5 1)
1>12cm: 0.3
0.25
Part 1
0.5
0.6
+ 0.7
0.8
Part 1
0.3
Part 1
+ 0.5
+ 0.3
Part 1
+ 0.5/--0.3(+0.8/-0.1mm)
+0.5/-0.3 (+0.8/-.1mm)
0.5( 0.5mm)
B) Physical Properties
i)
Water absorption % by weight
Part 4
Part 5
Part 9
Min Class 2
Min Class B
Part 8
Part 8
Part 8
Note For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 13630 Methods of tests for Ceramic tiles
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5.
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS
Characteristics
A)
Dimensions and Surface Quality
i) Length and width
The deviation in % of the average size of each tile (2
to 4 sides) from the work size.
The deviation in % of the average size of each
tile(2or 4 sides) from the average size of 10 test
specimens (20 or 40 sides)
ii) Thickness
The deviation in % of the average thickness of
each tile from the work size thickness
iii) Straightness of sides 1) (facial sides)
The maximum deviation from straightness in % related to the corresponding work size.
iv) Rectangularity1)
The maximum deviation from rectangularity in %
related to the corresponding work size
8.15
S > 410
1.2
1.0
0.75
0.6
0.75
0.5
0.5
05
10
10
0.75
0.5
0.5
0.5
SP 21 : 2005
Characteristics
90 < S 190
1.2
Test According to
IS 13630
s > 410
1.0
0.75
0.6
0.75
0.5
0.5
0.5
10
10
0.75
0.5
0.5
0.5
Part 1
Part 1
Part 1
Part 1
Part 1
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
Min 95% of tiles shall be free from visible defects that would Part 1
impair the appearance of a major area of tiles
B Physical Properties
i) Water absorption % by weight
Average 6 <E 10 Individual Max 11.0
ii) Modulus of rupture in N/mm2
Average 18, Individual Min 16
iii) Scratch hardness of surface
(Mohs scale)
a) Glazed tiles
Min 5
b) Unglazed tiles
Min 6
iv) Abrasion resistance:
a) Resistance to deep abrasion
Max 540
of unglazed tiles, removed
volume in mm3
b) Resistance of abrasion of
Average to the abrasion class indicated by
glazed tiles Class I-IV
The manufacturer
v) co-efficient of linear thermal
Max 9 106
expansion from ambient
temperature to 1000C (K1)
vi) Thermal shock resistance
Required
vii) Crazing resistance3) glazed tiles
Required
viii) Frost resistance
Required, if agreed
ix) Moisture expansion unglazed
Max 0.6
tiles mm/m
8.16
Part 2
Part 6
Part 12
Part 11
Part 4
Part 5
Part 9
Part 10
Part 3
SP 21 : 2005
C) Chemical Properties
i) Resistance to staining of glazed
Min Class2
tiles Class 1 - 3
ii) REsistance to household
chemicals and swimming pool water
cleansers, except to cleansing agents
containing hydrofluoric acid and its
compounds
a) Glazed tiles Class AA-D
Min Class B
b) Unglazed tiles
Required
iii) Resistance to acids and alkalis
(with the exception of hydrofluoric
acid its comounds)
a) Glazed tiles Class AA-D
Required if agreed according to the chemical ersistance
class indicated by the manufacturer
b) Unglazed tiles
Required 4)
Part 8
Part 8
Part 7
Part 8
part 7
For detailed information refer to IS 13754:1993 Specification for Dust-pressed ceramic tiles
with water absorption of 6%<E 10% (Group-BII b).
8.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
A)
Characteristics
Dimensions and Surface Quality
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS
Surface S of the Product (cm2)
S< 90
i)
8.18
1.2
1.0
0.75
0.6
0.75
0.5
0.5
05
10
10
0.75
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
SP 21 : 2005
Characteristics
90 < S 190
1.2
Test According to
IS 13630
s > 410
1.0
0.75
0.6
0.75
0.5
0.5
0.5
10
10
0.75
0.5
0.5
0.5
Part 1
Part 1
Part 1
Part 1
Part 1
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
Min 95% of tiles shall be free from visible defects that would Part 1
impair the appearance of a major area of tiles
B Physical Properties
i) Water absorption % by weight
Average 3 <E 6 Individual Max 11.0
ii) Modulus of rupture in N/mm2
Average 22, Individual Min 20
iii) Scratch hardness of surface
(Mohs scale)
a) Glazed tiles
Min 5
b) Unglazed tiles
Min 6
iv) Abrasion resistance:
a) Resistance to deep abrasion
Max 345
of unglazed tiles, removed
volume in mm3
b) Resistance of abrasion of
According to the abrasion class indicated by
glazed tiles Class I-IV
The manufacturer
v) co-efficient of linear thermal
Max 9 106
expansion from ambient
temperature to 1000C (K1)
vi) Thermal shock resistance
Required
vii) Crazing resistance3) glazed tiles
Required
viii) Frost resistance
Required, if agreed
ix) Moisture expansion unglazed
Max 0.6
tiles mm/m
8.19
Part 2
Part 6
Part 12
Part 11
Part 4
Part 5
Part 9
Part 10
Part 3
SP 21 : 2005
C) Chemical Properties
i) Resistance to staining of glazed
Min Class2
tiles Class 1 - 3
ii) REsistance to household
chemicals and swimming pool water
cleansers, except to cleansing agents
containing hydrofluoric acid and its
compounds
a) Glazed tiles Class AA-D
Min Class B
b) Unglazed tiles
Required
iii) Resistance to acids and alkalis
(with the exception of hydrofluoric
acid its comounds)
a) Glazed tiles Class AA-D
Required if agreed according to the chemical ersistance
class indicated by the manufacturer
b) Unglazed tiles
Required 4)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Part 8
Part 8
Part 7
Part 8
part 7
For detailed information refer to IS 13755:1993 Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 3%<E 6% (GroupBII a)
8.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
A).
Characteristics
Dimensions and Surface Quality
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS
Surface S of the Product (cm2)
S 90 90<S 190 190 < S 410 S>410
8.21
1.2
1.0
0.75
0.6
0.75
0.5
0.5
05
10
10
0.75
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
SP 21 : 2005
Characteristics
90 < S 190
1.2
Test According to
IS 13630
s > 410
1.0
0.75
0.6
0.75
0.5
0.5
0.5
10
10
0.75
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.6
0.6
0.6
Part 1
Part 1
Part 1
Part 1
Part 1
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
Min 95% of tiles shall be free from visible defects that would Part 1
impair the appearance of a major area of tiles
Average 3 Individual Max 3.3
Min 27
Part 2
Part 6
Min 5
Min 6
Max 205
Part 12
Part 11
Part 4
Part 5
Part 9
Part 10
Part 3
8.22
SP 21 : 2005
C) Chemical Properties
i) Resistance to staining of glazed
Min Class2
tiles Class 1 - 3
ii) REsistance to household
chemicals and swimming pool water
cleansers, except to cleansing agents
containing hydrofluoric acid and its
compounds
a) Glazed tiles Class AA-D
Min Class B
b) Unglazed tiles
Required
iii) Resistance to acids and alkalis
(with the exception of hydrofluoric
acid its comounds)
a) Glazed tiles Class AA-D
Required if agreed according to the chemical ersistance
class indicated by the manufacturer
b) Unglazed tiles
Required 4)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Part 8
Part 8
Part 7
Part 8
part 7
For detailed information refer to IS 13756:1993 Specification for Dust-pressed ceramic tiles
with water absorption E<3% (Group BI)
8.23
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope
1000 mm: 5 mm
1600 mm: 8 mm
8.24
SP 21 : 2005
3.1.4 Tolerance on shape
3.2
Mechanical and Physical Characteristics
Where the product is supplied coated, the following
mechanical and physical specifications shall apply to
the coated (that is finished) product. When sampling is
to be done from continuous production, testing of the
base sheet prior to coating is acceptable when it can be
shown that there is a correlation between the results of
y tests on sheets with and without coating.
3.2.1 Bending Strength shall be as specified in Table
1.The modulus of rapture shall be the average of the
values obtained from testing the samples in both
directions.
TABLE 1 MINIMUM MODULUS OF
RAPTURE
Category
Modulus of Rapture,Min (MPa)
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
Type A Sheet
(2)
7
13
18
Type B Sheet
(3)
4
7
10
16
22
a) Dimensional
(compulsory)
Geometrical
b)
c)
characteristics
and
a)
Bending strength
b)
Water impermeability
c)
Freeze-thaw
d)
Warm- water
e)
Soak-dry
f)
Heat-rain test
8.25
SP 21 : 2005
6.
Safety Rules
Production IdentificationSheet shall be
marked with indelible characters to show that
they do not contain as bestos.
b) Information to UsersThe company should,
through its distribution system, supply
adequate information to the users concerning
safety precautions to be taken during handling
or machining of products and that excessive
exposureto dust by cutting, drilling, sanding
and turning or similar operations should be
a)
Note 1 For method of measurement of different dimensions of sheets refer to Annex. B of the standard.
Note 2 For method of tests, refer to Annex. C, D, E, F, G, H and J of the standard.
For detailed information refer to IS 14862 : 2000 Specification for fibre cement flat sheets.
8.26
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers the requirement for straight
fibre cement profiled sheets of more than 0.9 m length
and their fittings used as roofing and cladding materials.
It also specifies tests for checking these characteristics
as well as marking and conditions for acceptance.
1.2 Some of these requirements may apply, after
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser,
to curved corrugated sheets.
2.2.2
According to thickness
Characteristics
A (15 mm h 55 mm)
Minimum
Thickness,
e, mm
h 55 mm)
C (40 mm h 80 mm)
D (60 mm h 150 mm)
B (25 mm
Class
1
600
3
4
4.5
2
800
3
1000
4
1400
10
1000
1400
2000
2500
3300
1400
2000
2500
3300
5.5
3300
4250
5600
7400
Note The sheet being commonly manufractured in India at the time of formulation of this standard fall under category
B and C and Class 7.
8.27
SP 21 : 2005
shall apply to nominal dimensions given by
manufacturer:
a) Tolerance on pitch a
a 75 mm
+4.0
mm
2.0
75 mm< a 180mm
180 mm < a 260mm
260 mm < a
+c6.
mm
2.0
+8.0
mm
3.0
+ 9.0
mm
3.0
b)
2 mm
+ 3 mm
5
10 mm
c)
Tolerance on length
d)
e)
+10
- 5 mm
a) Dimensions and
g)
f = 0.7 103
I2
h
a)
b)
Impermeability,
c)
Frost resistance,
d)
e)
Heat-rain.
8.28
SP 21 : 2005
Fittings shall have straight and clean edges. They may
have lapping joints. They may be left in their natural
colour or colouring matter may be added in the
composition. They may also receive adherent coloured
or uncoloured coatings on their surface.
4.2 Characteristics
4.2.1 DimensionsShall have dimensions and
tolerances appropriate for use with their corresponding
sheets.
a)
Note 1. For method of testing profile and other dimensions, refer to Annex B of the standard.
Note 2.For method of tests, refer to Annex C & D of the standard.
For details refer to IS 14871 : 2000 Specification for products in fibre reinforced cement Long
corrugated or asymmetrical section sheets and fittings for roofing and cladding
8.29
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.2.1 Fine Aggregate The fine aggregate shall consist of naturally occuring limestone rock ground to a
grading as given in Table 2, and shall have a calcium
carbonate content of not less than 80 percent by weight
3.2.2. Coarse Aggregate : The coarse aggregates
shall consist of clean igneous or calcareous rock or
siliceous material obtained from natural deposits
either directly or by screening, crushing or other
mechanical process, as free from dust as is practicable. Where limestone chippings are used for flooring, the quality of the limestone shall be such that
the aggregate curshing value shall not be greater
than 28. The percentage and size of coarse aggregate incorporated in the bitumen mastic will be dependent primarily upon the thicknessof the finished
work. The size shall be within the limits specified in
Table 3. The percentage shall be such that the total
percentage of material retained on a 600-micron IS
Sieve, on analysis of the bitumen mastic as laid,
including the material derived from the fine aggregate, shall fall within the appropriate limits
specifiedin Table 3.
SL
No.
Characteristics
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
(2)
Penetration at 25oC
Softening point (ring
& ball), Max
Solubility in CS2, percent Min
Ash content (mineral matter),
Max, percent by mass
Loss on heating for 5h
at 163oC, percent by mass, Max
Coloured Mastic
Asphalt for
Flooring
Mastic Asphalt
for Flooring
Coloured Mastic
Asphalt
for Flooring
(3)
(4)
(5)
5 to 15
5 to 15
(6)
105oC
60
105oC
60
100oC
99.5
100oC
60
30
30
0.5
30
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
8.30
SP 21 : 2005
S.l
No.
(1)
i)
ii)
Grading
(2)
iii)
iv)
v)
45
55
10
30
10
30
20
Nil
III
IV
15-25
15-20
25-35
20-30
30-50
30-50
4.
Max
(1)
(2)
(3)
Soluble bitumen
12.0
18.0
40.0
56.0
8.0
25.0
8.0
32.0
Note Percentage by mass of bitumen mastic excluding the material retained on a 600-micron IS Sieve .
5. Hardness Number The hardness number of the bitumen mastic shall be as follows
a) At the time of manufacture
Grade I
12 at 35C.
NoteFor methods of tests for bitumen, refer to
IS 1203:1978
Determination of penetration.
IS 1205:1978
Determination of softening point.
IS 1208:1978
Determination of ductility.
IS 1212:1978
Determination of loss on heating.
IS 1217:1978
Determination of mineral matter (ASH).
For detailed information refer to IS 1195 : 2002 Specification for bitumen mastic for
flooring (third revision).
8.31
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Characteristic
(2)
Requirements
(3)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
2.3 Aggregates
2.3.1 Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall consist
of naturally occuring sand or crushed lime stone or
crushed hard-rock. The grading of the fine aggregates
inclusive of the filler is given in Table 2 for guidance.
TABLE 2 GRADING OF FINE
AGGREGATES
S.l No. Passing
Retained on
Percentage by
IS Sieve
IS Sieve
mass
Min
Max
(2)
75 - micron
212 - micron
600 - micron
2.36 mm
(3)
75 micron
212 micron
600 micron
(4)
0
10
5
0
4. Composition
See Table 3
50 to 90oC
10 to 40
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Requirement
Mastic
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Percentage by Weight of
Without Coarse Aggregate
Min
Max
(2)
(3)
Bitumen
14
Passing 75-micron IS Sieve 25
Passing 212 micron IS Sieve 8
and retained on75-micron
IS Sieve
Passing 600-micron IS Sieve 4
and retained on 212-micron
IS Sieve
Passing 2.36mm IS Sieve and 0
retained on 600-micron
IS Sieve
17
45
18
30
22
(5)
5
20
35
25
For detailed information refer to IS 5317 : 2002 Bitumen mastic for bridge decking and roads
(second revision).
8.32
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.
Passing
IS Sieve
75- micron
Terminology
212- micron
600- micron
2.36- mm
3. Materials
3.1 Bitumen Requirements shall conform to as
specified in Table 1.
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
OF BITUMEN
Sl.No. Characteristic
Requirement
(1)
(2)
(3)
i)
Softening point
(ring and ball method)
o
ii)
Penetration at 25 C in 1/100cm
o
iii) Ductility at 27 C, Min, in cm
iv) Loss on heating, percent, Max
v) Solubility in CS , percent, Min
2
Percentage
by Mass
Retained on
IS Sieve
75- micron
212- micron
600- micron
2.36 mm
45 to 55
(filler)
10 to 30
10 to 30
5 to 20
Nil
4. Composition
4.1 Bitumen mastic composition for electrical
conducting and anti-static grade are made by
incorporating bitumen in conjunction with other suitable
materials like carbon black of the conductive grade like
graphite.
4.1.1 The bitumen content shall be between 13 to 18
percent by mass of the total mastic.
Note For method of preparation of bitumen mastic,refer
to clause 4.2 of the standard.
65 to 100 C
5 to 20
2
0.3
99
5.
Properties
For detailed information, refer to IS 8374 : 1977 Specification for bitumen mastic, anti-static
and electrically conducting grade.
8.33
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope Requirement for bitumen mastic of acidresisting grade used as an underlay to acid-proof bricks,
tiles or stones.
2. Materials
2.1 Bitumen The physical properties of bitumen
used shall conform to those specified in Table 1
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF
BITUMEN
Sl. No.
Characteristics
Requirement
(1)
(2)
(3)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Softening point, o C
Penetration at 25 o C in 0.01 cm
Loss on heating, percent bymass, Max
Solubility in carbon disulphide
percent by mass, Min
iii)
iv)
v)
65 to 140
5 to 20
0.3
99
2.2 Aggregates
2.2.1 Filler The filler shall be the portion passing
through 75-micron IS Sieve.
Percent by Mass
(3)
45 to 55 (filler)
10 to 30
10 to 30
5 to 20
Nil
Grading
(2)
20mm
25mm
Percentage
by mass
(3)
100
85Min
100
95Min
100
95Min
8.34
15 mm
20 to 25 mm
25 to 30 mm
15 to 30
20 to 35
30 to 45
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 5
Sl
No.
(1)
i)
ii)
Requirement
(2)
Soluble bitumen
Grading of aggregate
Passing 75-micron IS Sieve
Passing 212 micron IS Sieve
and retained on 75-micron
IS Sieve
Passing 600-micron IS Sieve
and retained on 212 micron
IS Sieve
Percentage by
Mass of Bitumen
Mastic Excluding
the Coarse Aggre
gate
(3)
13 to 18
45 to 55
8 to 32
8 to 30
4.
Properties
Note 1 For guidance on performance and recommendation for use of bitumen mastic, refer to Table 6 of the standard.
Note 2 For methods of tests for bitumen, refer to:
IS 1203:1978 Determination of penetration.
IS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point.
IS 1212:1978 Determination of loss on heating.
IS 1216:1978 Determination of solubility in Carbon disulphide trichloroethylene.
For detailed information, refer to IS 9510 :1980 Specification for bitumen mastic, acid -resisting.
8.35
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Material
mm
Thickness, mm
Weight,kg/m2 for 3 mm thick
for 4 mm thick
for 5 mm thick
Ash content, percent
Tensile strength, kg/cm2
Breaking loadfor 300 mm span,
750 mm width
iii)
iv)
v)
3.
3 to 5
1.50
2.00
2.50
7
25
60kg
3 to 5
(mm)
35
1 800
900
3 to 5
35
Width
Thickness
1 800900
3
4
5
3
4
5
(mm)
90
i)
ii)
Bitumen Content
Uniformity of
impregnation
iii)
Ash content
iv)
Breaking load
v)
Water absorption
vi)
Impermeability
vii)
viii)
90
ii)
mm
kg
3 0.2
4 0.2
5 0.2
5.4 0.2
7.2 0.2
9.0 0.2
1 200750
Mass
(4)
1 200
I)
Thickness
(3)
ix)
Tolerances in mm
5
Impact resistance
Wet load bearing
capacity
Accelerated
weathering
(type test)
20
1
x)
8.36
Temperature
Requirement
(3)
Not to exceed 50 5 percent
Bitumen content in outer and
central layers of the sheet shall
not vary by more than 5 percent
Shall not be more than 10 percent
100 kg (1000 N), minimum
for all thickness
Shall not be more than 8 percent
No water or moisture on the
lower surface of the test specimen shall be visible or felt
Shall not tear, break or crack
The specimen shall not crack
and sag and shall recover from
the deflection, if any
Shall be free from cracks, colour
change or any other surface
defects. there shall be no change
in flexibility and overall appearance when compared to unexposed sheets
a) Shall be no softening or any
apparent susceptibility
change of colour, fininsh etc.
b) Shall not crack or deform
SP 21 : 2005
6. FinishThe sheets shall have true shape, good
appearance and shall be free from visible defects. The
corrugations shall be true and regular. The edges of the
sheets shall be straight and clean. External surface of
For detailed information, refer to IS 12583 :1988 Specification for corrugated bitumen roofing
sheets.
8.37
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Sieve Designation
Passing IS Sieve
90 microns
Materials
iv)
v)
Ductility at 27 C, Min
o
Retained on IS Sieve
45 to 55
212 microns
90 microns
10 to 30
600 microns
212 microns
10 to 30
2.36 mm
600 microns
5 to 20
Percentage
by Mass
2.36
Nil
99
2
For detailed information, refer to IS 13026 : 1991 Specification for bitumen mastic for flooring
for industries handling LPG and other light hydrocarbon products.
8.38
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Materials
2.1 The wearing surface of the linoleum shall be made
from the following material:
a) Oxidized or polymerized linseed oil (conforming to
IS 75 : 1973) * or other suitable drying oil, with necessary
driers;
b) Rosin or resin or their combination:
c) Cork flour or wood flour or both:
d) Mineral fillers; and
e) Colouring material or pigments
Note The material shall be mixed and pressed to a
specially smooth surface on the backing (see 2.2). The
backing material shall be securely bonded to the wearing
surface.
3. Types
3.1 Plain Linoleum The composition of plain
linoleum shall be of uniform colour extending evenly
throughout the full thickness from the wearing surface
to the hessian backing.
6.
8.39
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENT OF
NOLEUM SHEETS, LINOLEUM
TILES AND CORK TILES
Sl.No
Characteristic
Requirement
(1)
i)
( 2)
vi)
Residual
indentation
(3)
Width of sheet
ii)
iii)
Thickness
iv)
Squareness
(for tiles only)
v) Seasoning(for plain
linoleum only)
Sl.No Characteristic
(1)
( 2)
vii) Flexibility
viii) Water Absorption
Requirement
(3)
Shall not crack or break
For
Absorption
Thickness
Max
mm
Percent,
4.5
5.5
3.2
6.5
2.0
9.0
1.65
10.5
ix) Colour fastness Shall not be inferior to that of
No.5 of the standard patterns
of the blue dyed wool cloth as
specified in IS 686 :1985*
* Methods for determination of colour fastness of textile
materials to day -lighting (first revision) day to light
Note The tolerances on sizes are applicable at the time of actual cutting of the tiles.
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 9704:1980 Methods pf tests for linoleum sheets and tiles.
For detailed information, refer to IS 653:1992 Specification for linoleum sheets and tiles
(third revision).
8.40
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b) At 462oC
ii)Dimensional stability
iii) Colour fastness
ix) Deflection
x) Impact
xi) Abrasion resistance
Note 1 : For methods of tests, refer to IS 3464:1980 Methods of test for plastic floor covering and wall tiles (first revision).
Note 2 : For categories of tests refer to 6 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3461 : 1980 Specification for PVC asbestos floor tiles
(first revision).
8.41
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF
FLEXIBLE PVC FLOORING
Sl.No. Characteristic
Requirement
(1)
(2)
(3)
i)
Thickness
3.2 Thickness The standard thickness of floor covering shall be 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 2.5 mm and 3 mm.
3.3 Tolerances : The tolerance on the specified widths
of sheets/rolls, tile sizes and thickness shall be as given
in Table 1.
4. Colour and Surface Characteristics
4.1 The flooring shall have a uniform wearing surface.
The colour and also the pattern, marbling or mottling, if
present, shall extend through the full thickness of the
flooring, when the flooring in not laminate. In case of
laminated flooring it shall extend to the full thickness
of the top layer. The colour and the pattern shall match
the sample that is agreed upon by the purchaser and
the supplier.
5. Requirement See Table 1.
8.42
SP 21 : 2005
xi) Ply adhesion
xii)
Moisture movement
not produce
cracking.
xiv) Elastic product
surface
Note For methods of tests, refer to Appendix A to D of the standard and IS 3464:1986 Methods of test for plastic flooring
and wall tiles (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 3462 : 1986. Specification for unbacked flexible PVC
flooring (second revision).
8.43
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Materials
(1)
1
(2)
Weight
per Epoxy
Equivalent
(3)
5.0 to5.88
(4)
3 to 20
Gravity
at 27oC
able
Chlorine
content %
Max
(5)
(6)
At27oC
Pa.s
1.05 Min
1.20 Max
0.6
Equivalent/
1000g,
min
(1)
(2)
200 to170
at 27oC
Pa.s
Gravity
at 27oC
able
Chlorine
content %,
Max
(5)
(3)
(4)
1.05 Min
1.20 Max
do
do
0.5 to 0.9
II
III
5
5
0.9 to 4
4 to 10
0.6
0.6
0.6
8.44
SP 21 : 2005
SL
Type
No.
(1)
(2)
iii)
1300 to 1700
16 to 25
450 to 500
--
50 to 55
830 to 910
--
50 to 55
260 to 290
1.11 to 1.12
110 to 130
ii)
14000 to 22000
250 to 280
1.125 to 1.13
110 to 130
(c) Polyamionamide
i) A
12500to 17500
350 to 410
0.96 to 0.98
110 to 190
190 to 210
280 to 300
1.05 to 1.07
0.96 to 0.98
100 to 110
160 to 180
300 to 360
--
100 to 110
20 to 40
0.97to0.99
3000 to 6000
ii) B
14000to 15000
iii) C
9000 to 13000
(d)
Aminoresin compound
i) A
17000to 23000
14 to 16
1.15 to 1.21
60 to 70
67oC
7.85
5.46
19.06
3
2
REMARKS
(7)
High rate of reaction with strong
exotherm. Curing sensitive to
humidity.
Slow rate of curing with long
pot-life and low exotherm
High rate of reaction and high
exotherm
Permits curing at high
atomospheric humidity and low
temperature, medium rate of
curing.
Permits curing at high atmospheric humidity and low
temperature, Fast rate of curing
Slow rate of curing with low
exotherm
do
do
Possibility of adjusting pot-life
and exotherm
SL.
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Characteristic
(2)
Requirememt
(3)
80
2
20
15
35x10-3
45x10-6
1
Min
Min
Min
Min
Min
Max
Max
0.10
Max
0.50
Max
2
Max/mm
2.5
Max
3.2
Min
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 9162:1979 Methods of tests for epoxy resins, hardenrs and epoxy resin compositions for floor topping.
For detailed information refer to IS 9197 : 1979 Specification for epoxy resin hardners and
epoxy resin compositions for floor topping.
8.45
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
400 to 500
1.11
:
:
25 to 30
65
Profile
No.
(1)
(2)
i) Corrugated
asbestos
cement, profile
in accordance
with IS 459:1992
ii) Corrugated
steel
profile in
accordance with
IS 277 : 1992
iii) Corrugated
aluminum sheets
profile in
accordance with
Depth of
Corrugation
D
Tolerance
(3) (4)
(5)
1 48
+3
-5
2 45
+3
-5
3
4
17.5
12.5
19
38
2.5
2.5
75
+5
75
+5
125
Effective
Width
B Tolerance Tolerance
(8)
(9)
(10)
1050
+10
+10
-5
-5
1100
+10
+10
-5
-5
660
810
910
680
830
650
800
25
25
795
+25
8.46
Minimum
Thickness
Length of
Sheet
T
Tolerance A Tolerance
(11)
(12) (13)
(14)
1.1
+0.15
1 750
0.5%
2 000 of length
2 500
3 000
+0.15
1.1
+0.15
1 800 0.5%
2 200 of length
2 500
2 800
3 000
1 800
2 400 0.5%
of length
3 000
SP 21 : 2005
4.2 Special Finishes A clear tissue of fibreglass
surface mat or polyester mat may be applied to the sheet
surface( on the side exposed to weathering ) during
manufacture to improve resistance to weathering.
Alternatively, PVF and polyester cladding films can be
bonded to the sheet surface (on the side exposed to
weathering).
5. Performance Requirements:
Clear
Above 0.80
II
Moderately diffusing
0.32 to 0.80
III
Heavily diffusing
0.10 to 0.32
IV
Below 0.10
Diffusion
Classification
(1)
I
Minimum Total
Transmission
(2)
80
II
75
III
70
IV
60
Profile No. in
Accordance
With Table
(1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Total Load
N
(2)
1 100
1 100
190
190
190
850
750
For detailed information, refer to IS 12866 : 1989 specification for plastic translucent sheets
made from thermosetting polyster resin (glass fibre reinforced).
8.47
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types:
a) Type A 50 to 65 Hardness in IRHD, and
b) Type B 66 to 80 Hardness in IRHD.
Requirements
4.1 Material
4.1.1 Jointing Material Shall be made of one of the
following materials:
a) Sheet rubber, or
b) Sheet rubber reinforced with fabric rubber insertion
jointing.
1
1
2
2
3
4
mm
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.6
0.7
8.48
SP 21 : 2005
4.6 Compression Set
4.6.1 Jointing to be used for joints subjected to water
and air pressure: The compression set at 27 1C for
24 2 hours shall not exceed 35 percent.
4.6.2 Jointing to be used for joints subjected to steam
pressure: The compression set at 1001C for 24 2 hours
shall not exceed 35 percent.
Type
Joints subjected to
steam pressure
Elongation at Break
(approx kgf/cm2 )
Min
Percent
Min
(Approx kgf/cm 2)
Min
Elongation
at Break
Percent
Min
(1)
(2)
Grade 1
(3)
Grade 2
(4)
Grade 1
(5)
Grade 2
(6)
Grade 1
(7)
Grade 2
(8)
Grade 1
(9)
Grade 2
(10)
i)
ii)
A
B
8.5(85)
8.5(85)
6(60)
6(60)
400
300
350
250
12(120)
12(120)
7(70)
7(70)
450
350
400
300
Note For methods of tests, refer to the standard, and IS 3400: Methods of tests for vulcanized rubbers
Part 1 : 1987 Tensile stress-strain properties (second reivsion)
Part 2 : 1995 Hardness (second revision)
Part 4 : 1987 Accelerated ageing (second revision)
Part 5 : 1986 Adhesion of rubber to textile fabrics (second revision)
Part10 : 1977 Compression set at constant strain (first revision)
Note This standard is also applicable to Section 10 on Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings.
For detailed information, refer to IS 638 : 1979 Sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion
jointing (second revision).
8.49
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5 mm,
4.4 The length of side shall not vary from the nominal
value by more than 0.15 percent.
4.5 Sheet Width 0.9 m, 1.2 m, 1.5 m, 1.8 m, 2.0 m,
2.1m. The width of the sheet at any point shall not be
less than the nominal value, and shall not exceed the
nominal value by more than 6 mm. The sponge-backed
rubber flooring shall have a wearing surface of solid
rubber at least 3 mm thick on a sponge rubber base of 3
mm thickness.
5. Performance
5.1 Hardness Shall be neither less than 65 IRHD nor
greater than 96 IRHD.
TABLE 1 TOLERANCE IN HARDNESS
Nominal Hardness
Tolerances on Hardness
IRHD
IRHD
65 to 76
Over 76 to 86
Over 86 to 96
6 mm
8.50
+0
2
SP 21 : 2005
Note:
For methods of tests refer to Appendices B to F of the standard and IS 3400. Methods of test for vulcanized rubbers
Part 2 : 1995 Hardness (first revision)
Part 3 : 1987 Abrasion resistance using rotating cylindrical drum device (first revision)
Part 10 : 1977 Compression set at constant strain (first revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 809 : 1992 Specification for rubber flooring materials
for general purposes (second revision).
8.51
SECTION 9
2.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
IS
1322 : 1993
9.3
IS
1580 :1991
9.6
IS
2645 : 2003
9.7
IS
3037 : 1986
9.8
IS
3384 : 1986
Bitumen primer for use in water-proofing and damp proofing (first revision)
9.10
IS
5871 : 1987
9.11
IS
7193 : 1994
9.12
IS 12027 : 1987
9.13
IS 14695 : 1999
9.14
9.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Other Requirement
Type of Felt
(1)
(2)
a) Fibre Base
i) Type 1 Underlay
ii) Type 2 Self finished
felt
b) Hessian Base
i) Type 3 Self finsihed
felt Grade 1
iii) Type 3 self finished
felt Grade 2
For 10m2
Untreated Base
(see Note)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
4.0
4.5
--
3.6
7.6
5.0
5.7
12.9
12.0
22.6
2.3
1.8
17.7
12.1
23.0
2.3
1.8
31.8
20.2
37.1
Notes1. The weight of the untreated base shall be taken as in dry condition for fibre base felts. In the case of hessian base the weight
of untreated base shall conform to IS 2818 (Part2) : 1971.*
2. Include allowance for 1.2kg minimum mica dusting powder in dry condition except for Type 1.
3. When other type of mineral powders are used, the weights shown in the last column shall be changed on the basis of
4.4.2 of the standard.
* Indian hessian: Part 2 : 305 and 229 g/m
at 16 percent
9.3
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2
Type Breaking Strength,
of
Min, Kg
Felt
Warpway Weftway
(1)
(2)
(3)
Type 1
72
24
Pliability Test
Storage
Sticking
Test
(4)
(5)
Heat
Resistance
Test
(6)
Pressure
Head
Test
Water
Absorption
Test, Max
(7)
(8)
95
Type 3 135
(all grades)
60
90
i) The roll shall not show crack The test pieces The test pieces The test pieces
on unrolling
shall be
shall show
shall show
examined
no sign of
no sign of
after cooling melting of
leakage
the bitumen
compound
ii) Consider any surface rupture
After release
exceeding 5 mm in lengt
of the load
as failure
the layers
felt shall
be capable of
being separated
withoutdamaging
the coatant, in
any way
i) The roll shallnot show cracks The test
on unrolling
pieces shall
be examined
after cooling
ii) Consider any surface rupture
exceeding 5mm in length
as failure
The test
pieces shall
show no
sign of melting
of the bitumen
compound
--
The test
piecesshall
show no
sign of
leakage
After release
of the load the
layers of felt
shall be capable
of being separated
without damaging
the coatant
in any way
9.4
5.0%
2.0%
--
SP 21 : 2005
Note For test procidures refer to IS 13826 Methods of test for bitumen based felt:
IS (Part 1) : 1993 Breaking strength test.
IS (Part 2) : 1993 Pliability test.
IS (Part 3) : 1993 Storage sticking test.
IS (Part 4) : 1993 Pressure head test.
IS (Part 5) : 1993 Heat resistance test.
IS (Part 6) : 1993 Water absorption test.
For detialed information, refer to IS 1322 :1993 Specification for bitumen felts for waterproofing and damp-proofing (fourth revision).
9.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Grades
a) Grade 1 Shall be semistiff, smooth and
homogenous paste suitable for application by spreading
with hand, trowel, spatula or gun.
(1)
Characteristic
Requirements
(2)
Grade 1
Grade 2
(3)
(4)
i)
ii)
iii)
0.5
40
Shall satisfy the
requirement
0.5
30
Shall satisfy the
requirement
iv)
v)
35
Shall satisfy the
requirement
35
Shall satisfy the
requirement
100
225
80
200
vi)
Consistency
a) Before setting (test after 1h) Min
b) After setting (test after 24 h) Min
For detailed information, refer to IS 1580 : 1991 Specification for bituminous compound for
water proofing and caulking purposes (second revision).
9.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b)
Physical tests of setting time and compressive
strengths of cement mixed with the water-proofing compounds.
2. Requirements
For detailed information, refer to IS 2645 : 2003 Specification of integral cement water proofing
compounds (second revision).
9.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Materials
Characteristics
(1)
i)
Requirements
(2)
(3)
55 to 90 oC
ii)
Penetration
10 to 30
iii)
Ductility
3 to 30
iv)
2.0
v)
99%
Percentage by Weight of
40 to 45
15 to 20
15 to 20
20 to 30
Nil
9.8
SP 21 : 2005
5. Hardness Number The hardness number of the
bitumen mastic at the time of laying shall be between 2
to 8 at 25oC, and 10 to 65 at 45oC.
Requirement
(1)
i)
(2)
(3)
Bitumen
15 to 20
Aggregate passing
ii)
18 to 20
iii)
12 to 18
iv)
12 to 18
v)
35 to 40
For detailed information, refer to IS 3037 : 1986 Specification for bitumen mastic for use in
water-proofing of roofs (first revision).
9.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Characteristic
(1)
(2)
Requirement
(3)
i)
ii)
4 to 24
35
65
iii)
40
iv)
v)
0.2
3
20 to 50
99.0
Note For test rocedures, refer to Methods of testing tar and bituminous materials;
IS 1203 : 1978 Determination of penetration
IS 1206 (Part 1): 1978 Determination of viscosity: Part 1 Industrial viscosity.
IS 1208 : 1978 Determination of ductility.
IS 1209 : 1978 Determination of flash point and fire point.
IS 1211 : 1978 Determination of water content (Dean and Stark Method).
IS 1213 : 1978 Distillation test
IS 1216 : 1978 Determination of solubility in carbon disulphide tricholoroethyelne
For detailed information, refer to IS 3384 : 1986 Specification for bitumen primer for use in
water-proofing and damp-proofing.
9.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Materials
3.1 Bitumen Physical Properties
i) Softening point (ring and ball method)
ii) Penetration at 25oC in 1/100cm
iii) Ductility at 27oC (Min) in cm
iv) Loss on heating, percent Max
v) Solubility in CS2, percent Min
or
Carbon tetrachloride or trichloroethylene
50 to 90oC
20 to 40
3
1
99
Percentage of Weight
0 to 10
10 to 18
40 to 54
24 to 40
Nil
//
Sl.No.
Requirements
Percentage by Total
Mastic
i) Soluble bitumen
15 to 17
ii) Aggregate passing 75-micron IS Sieve 42 to 52
iii) Aggregate passing 212-micron IS Sieve 3 to 10
and retained on 75-micron IS Sieve
iv) Aggregate passing 600 micron IS Sieve 15 to 25
and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve
v) Aggregate passing 2.36 mm IS Sieve
7 to 20
and retained on 600-micron IS Sieve
vi) Aggregate retained on 2.36 mm IS Sieve Nil
5. Hardness Number The hardness number of
the bitumen mastic shall be between 20 and 50 at 250c.
For detailed information, refer to IS 5871 : 1987 Specification for bitumen mastic for tanking
and damp proofing (first revision).
9.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Classification
a) Grade 1 Talcum, mica or sand surface glass
fibre base bitumen felts for water-proofing
Sl.
No.
(1)
ii)
iii)
Type of Felt
(2)
Grade I
Grade II
Untreated
Base
Coatant
(3)
(4)
kg
0.4
0.4
kg
15.3
22.0
Total Weight in
Dry Condition
Including Surfacing
(5)
kg
18.0
25.0
Sl. No.
i)
ii)
Pliability test
iii)
Storage
iv)
v)
Pressure head
Heat resistance
vi)
Water absorption
Note For
(Part 1)
(Part 2)
(Part 3)
(Part 4)
(Part 5)
(Part 6)
a) Warp 50
b) Weft 30
a) Roll shall not cracks on unrolling
b) Consider any surface rupture exceeding 5 mm in length as failure
The test pieces shall be examined after cooling.After release of
load, the layers of felt be capabe of being separated without damaging
The test pieces shall show no sign of leakeage
The test prices shall show no sign of melting of bitumen
compound
2 percent
test procedures, refer to IS 13826 : 1993 Methods of test for bitumen based felts:
Breaking strength test.
Pliability test.
Storage sticking test.
Pressure head test.
Heat resistance test.
Water absorption test.
For detailed information, refer to IS 7193 : 1974 Specification for glass fibre base bitumen
felts.
9.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class B
Class C
For detailed information, refer to IS 12027 : 1987 Specification for silicone-based water repellents.
9.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Properties
(1)
(2)
i)
ii)
Treated
Base
kg
(1)
(2)
0.4
4.5
Requirement
(3)
Breaking strength
in Kg, min
a)
b)
Wrap 30
Weft 15
Pliability after
conditioning the
sample for
o
3 h at 5 C.
a)
Note For test procedure, refer to IS 13826 : 1993 Methods of test for bitumen based felts:
(Part 1) Breaking strength test.
(Part 2) Pliability test.
For detailed information, refer to IS 14695 : 1999 Specification for glass fibre base coal tar
pitch outer wrap.
9.14
SECTION 10
2.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
GENERAL
IS
775 :1970
Cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins and sink (second revision)
10.8
IS
782 :1978
10.9
IS
804 :1967
10.10
IS
1700 :1973
10.11
IS
2963 :1979
Copper alloy wastage-fittings for wash basins and sinks (first revision)
10.12
IS
3489 :1985
10.13
IS
10.16
IS
6411:1985
Gel-Coated glass fibre reinorced polyester resin bath tubs (first revision)
10.18
IS
8718 :1978
10.20
IS
8727:1978
10.21
IS
12701:1996
10.22
IS
13983:1994
10.25
IS
10.27
407 : 1981
10.29
IS
2501 : 1995
Solid drawn copper tubes for general engineering purposes (third revision)
10.31
10.32
IS
1536 : 2001
Centrufugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
(fourth revision)
10.33
IS
1537 : 1976
Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision)
10.35
IS
1538 : 1993
Cast iron fitting for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision)
10.36
IS
1729 : 2002
Sand cast iron spigot and socket soil waste and ventilating pipes, fittings
and accessories (second revision)
Malleable cast iron pipe fittings (second revision)
10.40
10.42
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating
pipes, fittings and accessories (second revision)
Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers (first revision)
10.46
10.48
Cast iron specials for asbestos-cement pressure pipes for water, gas and
sewage (first revision)
10.50
Cast - Iron
IS
1879 : 1987
IS
3989 : 1984
IS
5382 : 1985
IS
5531 :1988
10.2
SP 21 : 2005
Title
Page
IS
6163 : 1978
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
(first revision)
10.52
IS
6418 : 1971
Cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering purpose.
10.54
IS
7181:1986
Horizontally cast iron double flanged pipes for water, gas and sewage
(first revision)
10.56
IS
8329 : 2000
Centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron pressure pipes for water, gas and
10.57
IS
8794 : 1988
10.59
IS
9523 : 2000
Ductile iron fitting for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage
IS
IS
IS
10292 : 1988
10299 : 1982
12820 : 2004
(first revision)
10.60
10.61
Cast iron saddle pieces for service connection from asbestos cement
pressure pipes.
10.62
IS
12987 : 1991
IS
12988 : 1991
IS 13382 : 2004
10.63
10.65
10.66
10.67
10.69
Lead pipes (Part I) for other than chemical purposes (third revision)
10.71
FIBRE PIPES
IS
11925 : 1986
LEAD PIPES
IS 404 (Part 1) : 1993
PLASTIC PIPES
IS
3076 : 1985
Low density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies (second revision).
10.72
IS
4984 : 1995
High density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies (fourth revision)
10.74
IS
4985 : 2000
10.76
IS
7834 : 1987
Injection moulded PVC fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies
(first revision)
Part I
General requirements
10.78
10.3
10.80
SP 21 : 2005
Title
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
8008 : 2003
8360 : 1977
10124 : 1988
12709 : 1994
12818 : 1992
Page
Part 3
10.81
Part 4
10.82
Part 5
10.83
Part 6
10.84
Part 7
10.85
Part 8
10.86
Injection moulded HDPE fitting for potable water supplies (first revision)
Part I
10.87
Part 2
10.88
Part 3
10.89
Part 4
10.90
Part 5
10.91
Part 6
10.92
Part 7
10.93
Fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fitting for potable water supplies
Part I
General requirements
10.94
Part 2
10.95
Part 3
10.96
General requirements
10.97
Part 2
10.98
Part 3
10.99
Part 4
10.101
Part 5
10.102
Part 6
10.104
Part 7
10.106
Part 8
10.108
Part 9
10.109
Part10
10.110
10.111
Part12
10.112
10.113
Glass fibre reinforced plaster (GRP) pipes joints and fittings for use for potable
water supply (first revision).
10.114
Unplasticised PVC screens and casting pipes for bore / tubewell supplyuse
10.118
(first revision).
10.4
SP 21 : 2005
Title
IS
13592:1992
Page
UPVC pipes for soil and waste discharge systems for inside and outside
buildings including ventilation and rain water system
10.122
10.125
IS
14333:1996
IS
14402:1996
GRP pipes joint and fitting for sewerage, industrial waste and water
(other than potable)
IS
14735: 1999
10.127
10.130
IS
Part I:2004
10.133
Part 2:1992
10.136
3589:2001
Seamless or electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage
(168.3 to 2032 mm outside diameter) (third revision)
10.138
IS 4270: 2001
10.140
IS
10.142
10.143
10.145
10.147
5504:1997
IS 6286:1971
STO N E WA R E
IS
651: 1992
IS 3006 :1979
Note Asbestos, cement and concrete pipes have been covered in Section 1 On cement and concrete
SANITARY APPLIANCES
IS
IS
771:
Part 1: 1979
10.149
Part 2 :1985
10.150
Part 3 : 1979
10.151
Part 3 : 1985
10.152
Part 5 : 1979
Part 7 : 1981
10.153
10.154
772 : 1973
10.155
10.5
SP 21 : 2005
Title
Page
IS
773 : 1988
Enamelled cast iron water- closets, railway coaching stock type (fourth revision).
IS
774 : 2004
Flushing cistern for water closets and urinals (other than plastic cistern)
10.156
( fifth revision)
10.157
IS
1726 :1991
10.159
IS
2326 : 1987
Automatic flushing cisterns for urinals other than plastic interms (first revision)
10.161
IS
2548 : 1996
Part 1:
10.162
Part 2 :
10.164
2556 :
Part 1 : 1994
10.166
Part 2 : 1994
10.169
Part 3 : 1994
10.171
Part 4 : 1994
10.173
Part 5 : 1994
10.174
Part 6 : 1995
10.175
Part 7 : 1995
10.180
Part 8 :1995
IS
10.184
Part 9 : 1995
10.188
Part 14 : 1995
10.190
Part 15 : 1995
10.191
IS 5455 : 1969
10.193
IS 5961 : 1970
10.195
IS 7231 : 1994
Plastic flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals (second revision)
10.196
IS 11246 : 1992
Glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (GRP) squatting pans (first revision)
10.198
778 : 1984
Copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for water works purposes
(fourth revision)
IS
781:1984
10.200
Cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop valves for water services
(third revision)
10.202
10.203
IS
1701: 1960
IS
1703 : 2000
Water fittings copper alloy float valves (horizontal plunger type) for water
supply fittings (fourth revision)
10.204
10.6
SP 21 : 2005
Title
Page
IS
1711:1984
10.205
IS
1795 :1982
10.206
IS
2692 : 1989
10.207
IS
3004 :1979
10.208
IS
3311:1979
Waste plug and its accessories for sink and wash basins (first revision)
10.209
IS
4346 :1982
Washers for use with fittings for water serices (first revision)
10.210
IS
5312:
Part 1:2004
10.211
Part 2:1986
10.213
8931:1993
Copper alloy fancy single taps, combination tap assembly and stop valve for
IS
9338 :1984
10.214
Cast-iron screw-down stop valves and stop check valves for water works
purposes (first revision)
10.216
IS
9739 :1981
10.218
IS
9758 :1981
10.219
IS
9762 : 1994
10.220
IS
9763 : 2000
Plastic bib taps, pillar taps, angle valves for hot and cold water services
(second revision)
10.221
IS
12234 : 1988
10.223
IS
13049 : 1991
Diaphragm type (Plastic body) float operated valves for cold water services
10.224
IS
13114 : 1991
Forged brass gate, globe and check valves for water works purposes
10.225
IS
13349 : 1992
10.227
IS
14845 : 2000
Resilient seated cast iron air relief valves for water works purposes
10.229
IS
14846 : 2000
10.231
WATER METERS
IS
779 : 1994
10.232
IS
2104 : 1981
10.234
IS
2373 : 1981
10.235
Note IS 638 : 1979 Sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing (second revision)is covered in
Section 8 Floor Covering and Finishing.
10.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Weight
m)
For detailed information, refer to IS 775 : 1970 Specification for cast iron brackets and supports
for wash-basins and sinks (second revision).
10.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 782 : 1978 Specification for caulking lead (third revision).
10.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
5. Dimensions
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
3. General
3.1 Pressed steel tanks are not recommended for depths
greater than 5 m.
3.2 Type 1 tanks are normally used where plain internal
surface is necessary or where there are no restrictions
as to external acess or where the exterior of the tank is to
be lagged.
3.3 Type 2 tanks are normally used at a location
where access to the exterior for erection is precluded
due to insufficient space inside a building.
3.4 Type 2 and type 3 tanks are suitable for use where
they are to be erected on a solid level floor.
4. Material
standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 804 : 1967 Specification for rectangular pressed steel
tanks (first revised).
10.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Materials
Sl. No Component Part
i)
Basin or receptacle
ii)
iii)
iv)
Fittings
Nozzle
Material
a)
b)
c)
d)
Glazed earthenware
Vitreousware
Enamelled cast iron
Cement concrete
with smooth finish
e) Stoneware
f) Stainless steel
a)
b)
c)
a)
b)
a)
b)
Brass
Copper, Solid drawn
Stainless steel
Brass,cast or hot pressed
Stainless steel
Bronze
Any other non-oxidizing
copperalloy
3. Construction
3.1 Basin or Receptacle Shall be fixed at such a height
that the drinking level is most convenient to persons
utilizing the fountain.
3.2 Jet Mechanism With nozzle mouth not greater
than 10 mm diameter or one square centimentre in area,
the nozzles shall be placed so that the lower edge of the
nozzle mouth is at an elevation not less than 20 mm above
the floor level rim of the receptable.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1700 : 1973 Specification for Drinking fountains (first
revision).
10.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
2.1 Materials
Fordetailed information, refer to IS 2963 : 1979 Specification for copper alloy waste fittings
for wash-basins and sinks (first revision).
10.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
10.13
SP 21 : 2005
10.14
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF BATH TUBS
Particulars
Dimension of Tubs
Pattern 1
Length overall, A
Width overall, B
Depth inside (at waste hole), C
Roll (at sides), D (see Note)
Roll (at tap end), E
Roll (at tap end), F
Distance of tap holes, centre to centre,G
Height Overall, H
with 35 mm Min seal trap
with 70 mm Min seal trap
Wast hole - horizontal distance
from outside edge of roll at tap
end to centre of waste hole, J
Overflow centre- vertical
distance below top edge, K
Pattern 2
Size1
Size 2
Size 3
1525
700
440
60-80
60-80
75-100
180 Min
1700
700
440
60-80
60-80
75-100
180 Min
1850
700
440
60-80
60-80
75-100
180 Min
1700
730
430
60-80
60-80
75-100
180 Min
580
620
250 Min
580
620
250 Min
580
620
250 Min
570
610
250 Min
90-105
90-105
90-105
90-105
Note In case of bath tubs pressed from one sheet the dimension may be increased to 100 mm maximum, whilst the slope of the
sides and ends will be steeper than that shown in Fig. and 2.
5. Tolerances
5.1 Overall width and length 1 percent.
5.2 For other values specified in Table 1, 4 percent
6. Surface Coating
6.1 Finish Gloss, colour and opacity shall be uniform
and visually satisfactory.
6.2 Chemical resistance
a)
b)
a) Crazin~g
b) Dimples, rundown, sagging
c) Blisters
d) Pinholes
e) Specks
6.4 Thickness of Enamel shall be between 0.2 mm to
0.5 mm.
6.5 Warpage Shall not exceed 5 mm/m for edges
set against wall or floor and shall not exceed 1.5 mm/m
for other edges.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3489 : 1985 Specification for enamelled steel bath tubs
(first revision).
10.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
56.5
60.0
Lead
1.0
2.5
Zinc
Remainder
10.16
SP 21 : 2005
5. Dimensions
For detailed information, refer to IS 5219 (Part 1) : 1969 Specification for cast copper alloys
traps Part 1: P and S traps.
10.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Materials
i)
Sl.No
Part
(1)
ii)
Non-permissible.
(2)
(3)
/parts
Rim
Wall
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Visiable Parts
i)
Traces of mending
2 Not conspicuous
(6)
(7)
ii)
Impurities
""
iii)
Pin Holes
""
iv)
Colour bolts
v)
Unevenness
vi)
Deformity
4. Dimensions
10.18
1680 to 1700
730 to 760
Height overall
500 to 570
440
60 Min to 85Max
75 Min to100Max
180
250
100
SP 21 : 2005
5. Requirements
5.1 Each bath tub shall be one piece unit with an
opening for waste out let. An overflow shall normally
be provided. Apron (side panel) may be provided
integrally or seperately.
5.2 Thickness of laminbase including gel coal shall not
be less than 2 mm for apron, 3 mm for inner wall and
bottom and 4 mm tor bottom bend.
6. Performance Requirements
6.1 Impact Resistance : Shall not show cracks in the
gel-coat when subjected to impact test.
6.2 Hardness Shall show a minimum reading of 40
points on a bareolimpressor or any other equally suitable
apparatus.
6.3 Cracking or CrazingShall not show on visual
inspection any signs of cracking or crazing after the
oven test.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6411 : 1985 Specification for Gel-coated glass fibre
reinforced polyester resin bath tub (first revision).
10.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Pattem
i)
Flat-rim
ii)
Flat-rim-ledge
iii)
Flat-rim- ledge,
with doule compartment
Overall
length
mm
2.
3.
Overall
Width
mm
750
600
500
450
400
750
600
1050
800
450
450
400
400
400
500
500
500
500
Max
mm
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
150
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
Note For test procedures refer to IS 772 : 1973 General requirements for enamelled casti iron sanitary appliances (second
revision) and IS 3972 Methods of test for vitreous enamel ware.
For detailed information, refer of IS 8718 : 1978 Specification for vitreous enamelled steel
kitchen sinks.
10.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Norminal Size
(Overall Length Overall Width)
Flat-back (Type 1)
Flat-back (Type 2)
ii) Flat-rim
iii) Overall
iv) Round
mm
480
500
500
600
480
500
510
530
450
450 Dia
mm
430
450
450
500
430
400
450
430
400
4. Requirement
4.1 Basin shall have in integral soap holder recess or
recesses which shall drain into the bowl.
4.2 A slot type of overflow having an area of not less
than 500 mm2 shall be provided in the front or back
faciloitte cleaning of the overflow. The cross-sectional
area of passageway of overflow shall be 400 mm2,
minmum.
5. Surface Coating Interioirs of wash basins shall
be adequately and evenly coated with vitreous enamel
of qualityin 5.1 to 5.5 Atleast one ground or primer
coating preferably white, or coloured enamel coating
Note For test procedures refer to IS 772 : 1973 General requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances(second
revision), and IS 3972. Methods of test for vitreous enamel ware.
For detailed information, refer to IS 8727 : 1978 Specification for vitreous enamelled steel
wash-basins.
10.21
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
asdfa
10.22
SP 21 : 2005
1.3 This standard does not cover mobile and
horizontal cylindrical water tanks
2. Material
2.1 Shall be such that it does not impart any taste, colour
or odour to water, nor have any toxic effect, and it shall
not contaminate water thereby making it unpotable.
2.2 Polyethylene resin to be used should be of
rotational moulded grade and duly stabilized with antioxidants. The anti oxidants used, not exceeding 0.3%
by mass of finished resin, should be physiologically
harmless and should be selected from the list given in
IS 10141: 1982. Positive list of constituents of
polyethylene in contact with food stuffs,
pharmaceuticals and drinking water.
2.3 The density of resin (base material ) at 23 oC shall
be within 932 to 943 kg/m3.
Overall
Height
Range
(mm)
(4)
490-690
700-900
700-950
625-1025
800-1100
1050-1350
1150-1590
1260-1650
1400-1700
1400-1810
1640-2150
1750-2400
1800-2100
2065-2800
2100-2930
2400-3740
2100-4000
3190-5000
Minimum Internal
Dia of Man-Hole/
Hand-Hole
(mm)
(5)
265
265
265
370
370
370
370
370
450
450
450
450
450
450
450
450
450
450
Minimum Wall
and Bottom
Thickness
(kg)
(6)
3.0
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.4
4.5
4.5
4.5
5.4
7.7
8.1
10.4
10.7
10.72
10.72
11.53
11.5
13.2
Note The gross capacity of the tanks shall be at least 5 percent in excess of the minimum net capacity.
10.23
Minimum
Weight of Tank
(Without Lid)
(7)
7.8
9.0
15.0
18.0
23.0
33.0
47.0
54.0
64.0
81.0
96.0
147.0
180.0
05.0
39.0
19.0
408.0
566.0
SP 21 : 2005
Minimum Net
Capacity
Overall
Length
Overall
Width
Over all
Height
Minimum
Internal dia
of Handhole
Minimum wall
Thickness
(Measured on)
Rectangular
Vertical Port
and Bottom
Thickness
Minimum
Weight of
Tank
(Without Lid)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
i)
150
620-820
620-820
285-485
300
2.75
6.6
ii)
200
930-1130
620-820
285-485
300
2.75
7.7
iii)
300
995-1200
620-820
285-485
300
2.75
11.0
iv)
400
1150-1350
855-1150
335-535
300
2.75
13.0
v)
500
1150-1500
900-1250
335-535
300
2.75
17.5
5.
Performance Requirement
For detailed information, refer to IS 12701 : 1996 Specification for rotational moulded
polyethylene water storage tanks (first revision).
10.24
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.5
a) The distance between the edge of the sink bowl
and the end of the sink shall be 15 mm, minimum
for sit-on type sinks and 30 mm, mini mum for
inset type sinks. Depth of the collar provided
for inset sinks shall be 10+2 mm.
b) For sinks designed for use with a 600 mm wide
worktop, the distance between theedge of the
sink bowl and the front of the sink shall be 50
mm minimum and in the case of sinks designed
for use with 500 mm wide worktop, the distance
shall be 45 mm minimum.
c) Both single and double bowl sink shall be set a
minimum of 10 mm from gridline.
4.6 The demensions of the sink shall comply with Table1
read with Fig. 1 of the standerd.
5 . Construction and workmanship
5.1 Sinks shall be constructed of the lowest practical
numbers of sections compatible with the manufacturing
practice to ensure a smooth surface.
5.2 Drainers shall be fluted or grooved and shall be
inclined towards thesink bow.
10.25
SP 21 : 2005
c) with single tap hole of 35 + 2 mm diameter for
high outlet mixer tap.The centres of tap holes
shall be more than 60 mm from the nearest back
edge of the bowl and not less than 50 mm to the
front face of the upstand.
5.5 Overflows Sinks shall be provided in either of
the following conditions :
For detailed information, refer to IS 13983 : 1994 Specification for stainless steel sinks for
domestic purposes.
10.26
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Specific gravity
=
Acid value
=
Volatile content
=
Gel time at 25C
=
shall also be met with:
Barcol hardness
=
Heat deflection
temperature
=
Elongation at break
=
Water absorption
1,13+0.01 at 27C
16+4 mg. KOH/g,
30 percent +3 percent,
20 to 30 minutes.
40
BHU min;
80C to 90C
1.9 percent,-0+ 25C
1 percent,after 7 day
sat 25C max.
3. Panal Dimensions
3.1 The nominal external size of the unit panels shall
be 1 mryrt square or 1 m x 0.5 or 0.5 x 0.5 m
3.2 Tolerance in the external dimensions of each panel
shall be within or +0.2 percent of the external dimensions.
Tolerance on the angles shall be within 0.3C
4. Type/Thickness of panel
Type of panel
Min Thicknes,
mm
A
B
C
3
4
5
10.27
i) Tensile strength
70 MPa (Min)
ii) Bending strength
100 MPa (Min)
(cross-breaking)
iii) Elastic modulus in bend 6000 MPa (Min)
iv) Glass content
25 percent (Min)
v) Barcoal hardness
50 BHU (Min)
vi) Water absorption
0.5 percent (Max)
SP 21 : 2005
6.2 Hydrostatic TestShall withstand following
hydrostatic pressure without bursting, cracking or
leakage:
Type of Panel
A
B
C
Hydrostatic Pressure
MPa
0.04
0.08
0.12
For detailed information, refer to IS 14399 (Parts 1 and 2): 1996. Specification for hop press
moulded thermosetting glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (GRP) sectional waterstorage tanks.
10.28
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope
Outside Dia in
Preferred No. Series
Wall Thickness
(mm)
0.5
0.5,0.6
0.5 to 1.0
0.5 to 1.2
0.6 to 1.5
0.6 to 1.5
0.6 to 1.5
1
0.6 to 1.5
1
0.8 to 2
1 to 1.5
1 to 2.5
1 to 1.5
1.2 to 3
1.2 to 1.5
1.5 to 4
1.5 to 4
1.5 to 6
1.5 to 8
1.5 to 8
Wall Thickness
(mm)
125
2 to 12
160
2.5 to 12
200
8 to 12
250
8 to 12
315
8 to 20
Note Wall thickness shall be 0.5, 0.6, 0.8, 1, 1.2, 1.5,1,
2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16 and 20 mm.
Temper
Tensile
Strength
MPa
Hardness
Vickers
HV
285 Min
75 Max
300 Min
400 Min
285 Min
80-110
135 Min
80 Max
320 Min
400 Min
80-110
130 Min
10.29
SP 21 : 2005
6.3 Flattening (for tubes not exceeding 100 mm
Outside Diameter) Test piece shall not crack.
6.4 Double Bend Test (for Round Tubes over 100 mm
Outside Diameter Test piece shall not crack on the
outside of either bend.
For detailed information, refer to IS 407: 1981. Specification for brass tubes for general purposes
(third revision).
10.30
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
7. Physical Properties
2.
Grades
Cu-DHP,
Cu-FRTP,
Cu-DPA, Cu-ATP.
3. Supply Condition:
a) As Drawn (HD)Tubes in half hard condition
produced by cold drawing.
b) Half Hard (HB) Tubes in half hard condition
produced by cold drawing.
c) Annealed (O)
4. Freedom from Defects
4.1 Shall be reasonable clean,smooth and free from
cracks, seams, silver, scales and other defects
detrimental to the intended applcations.
Min
(2)
5.65 So
Min
(3)
(4)
As drawn(HD)
i) As such
ii) Strip cut
from tube
Half Hard (HB)
i) As such
ii) Strip cut
from tube
Annealed(O)
i) As such
ii) Strip cut
280
113
250
235
25
99
225
205
25
40
85
from tube
195
45
(1)
For detailed information, refer to IS 2501: 1995 Specification for solid drawn copper tubes for
general engineering purposes. (third revision).
10.31
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope
1.1 Requirements for cast iron rainwater pipes, halfround gutters, their fittings and accessories.
Pipes
Sockets
Mass
Nominal Size, mm
External dia, mm
Thickness,
Projection of spigot bead, mm
Width of spigot bead, mm
Length of Width of spigot bead, mm
Internal dia, mm
Thickness, Min, mm
Internal depth, mm
Thickness of beads, mm
Nominal mass of 1800 mm pipe
without ears, kg.
50
53
3
1
20
1 800
63
4
60
7
7.5
75
79
3
1
20
1 800
89
4
65
7
11
2.1.1. Tolerances
5
125
130
3
1
20
1 800
139
4
75
9
20
1800
1800
1800
5.9
7.5
9.1
150
156
4
1
20
1 800
167
4
75
9
26
: 3 mm for 50 and 75
mm pipes
3.5 mm for 100 and
125 mm pipes
4 mm for 150 mm pipes
Internal dia of socket
: 3mm
Depth of socket
: 10m
Thickness
: 1mm
Thickness of guttersfittings : 1.0 mm
Length of pipe
: 13.0 mm
Length of fittings
: 3 mm
Mass
: -10 percent
2.2.
100
104
3
1
20
1 800
114
4
65
7
14
1800
100
125
100
125
50
65
3
3
: +13.0 mm
: + 3.0 mm
: 10 percent
150
150
75
3
Note 1 For dimens of bends, shoes, branches, offsets, union sockets, holderbats, rainwater heads, refer to the standard.
Note 2 For test details, refer to the standard and IS 1500:1983 Methods for brinell hardness test for mettallic materials (second
revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1230 : 1979 Specification for cast iron rainwater pipes
and fittings (second revision).
10.32
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class
(1)
(2)
LA
3.5
A
3.5
B
3.5
Note *DN : Nominal diameter.
Class
B
2.5
Note *DN : Nominal Diameter.
a)
200
180
180
(3)
1.5
2.0
2.5
2. Classification
3. Mechanical tests:
230
(1)
(2)
6. Tolerances
6.1 Tolerances on barrel diameter and socket
dimensions (lead joint) (refer to Table below) and Fig.
of the standard.
10.33
SP 21 : 2005
Dimensions
a)
External
diameter of barrel
b)
Nominal Diameter
DN
Tolerances
mm
(DE)
All diameters
(DI)
All diameters
1
f= (4.5+0.0015 DN)
2
1
f = (3+0.001 DN)
3
Up to and including
5
DN 600
Over DN 600 upto
10
and including 1050
Note f is the caulking sace of the joint in mm and us equal to (9+0.003 DN).
Allowable Difference
Between Mionor Axis
and DE, Min mm
1.0
1.75
2.00
2.4
3.5
Typing of Casting
Dimensions
Wall thickness
Flange thickness
Tolerance in mm
-- (1+0.05 e)
(2+0.05
Tolerance in mm
Note For methods of test refer to the standard and IS 1500 : 1983 Method for Brinell hardness test for smetallic materials
(second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1536 : 1989 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun)
iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision).
10.34
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Sizes
a) Working lenght of socket and spigot pipes 3.66,
4, 4.88, 5 and 5.5 m.
b) Working length of flanged pipes 2 to 3 m for 80
mm nominal diameter pipe and 2 to 4 m for others.
c) Norminal diameter of socket and spigot pipes
and flanged pipes 80, 100,125, 150, 200, 250, 300,
350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900,1 000, 1
100, 1 200, 1 500.
d) Tolerances
1) Length (socket and spigot, and plain ended pipes)
Socket and
Spigot Pipes
Flanged Pipe
1) Up to 300 mm 20
2) Over 300 and
up to 600 mm 20
3) Over 600 and
up to 1000 mm 15
4) Over 1000 and
up to 1500 mm 10
25
20
25
25
15
20
20
10
15
15
10
10
10 mm.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1537 : 1976 Specification for vertically cast iron pressure
pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision).
10.35
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
HYDROSTATIC TEST
PRESSURE FOR FITTINGS
Nominal Diameter
Test Pressure
Fittings without
Fittings with
Branches or with
Branches
Branches not
Greater than
Greater than
Half the
Half the Principal
Principal
Diameter
Diameter
MPa (N/mm 2 )
MPa (N/mm 2 )
2.5 (25)
2.5 (25)
2.0 (20)
2.0 (20)
1.5 (15)
1.0 (10)
3. Tolerances
3.1 Diameter
Dimension
External diameter of
spigot (DE)
Internal diameter of
socket (DI)
Nature of Joint
Nominal Diameter
(DN)
Tolerance
mm
Lead joints
All diameters
Lead joints
All diameters
or
1/2 f
(4.5+0.0015 DN)
or
1/3 f
(3+0.001 DN)
5
10
3.2 Thickness
Dimension
Wall thickness
Flange thickness
15
3.3 Length
Type of Fitting
Tolerance, mm
- (2+0.05 e)
+ (3+0.05 b)
where
e = the standard thickness of the wall in
millimetres, and
b = the standard thickness of the flange in
millimetres.
10.36
Flanged fittings
Nominal Dia
Upto and
including
450
Over 450
All diameters
Tolerance
mm
+ 20
+ 20
- 30
10
SP 21 : 2005
4. Mass
Nominal
Diameter
(DN)
(mm)
(1)
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
900
1000
1050
1100
1200
1500
Barrel
Diameter
(DE)
(mm)
98
118
114
170
222
274
326
378
429
480
532
635
738
790
842
945
1048
1124
1152
1256
1567
Internal
Dia of
Socket
(DI)
(mm)
116
137
163
189
241
294
346
398
449
501
553
657
760
813
865
968
1072
1143
1177
1281
1594
Flange
Diameter
(D)
(mm)
(2)
200
220
250
285
340
395
445
505
565
615
670
780
895
960
1015
1115
1230
1258
1340
1455
1800
6.3
Flanged Sockets, Flanged Spigots, Collars,
Double Sockets 1/4,1/8, 1/16 and 1/32 bends.
Nominal Diamter 80, 100, 125, 150, 200,250, 300, 350,
400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1 000, 1
050, 1 100, 1 200, and 1 500 mm.
6.4 All flanged tees All sockets, all flanges.
Nominal
Diameter
(DN)
mm
80
100
125
150
200
10.37
250
Nominal
Diameter
of Branch
(dn)
mm
80
80
100
80
100
125
80
100
125
150
80
100
125
150
200
80
100
125
150
200
250
Nominal
Diameter
Nominal
Diameter
of Branch
(DN)
mm
300
350
(dn)
mm
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
200
250
300
350
350
200
250
300
350
400
400
SP 21 : 2005
Nominal
Diameter
(DN)
mm
450
500
600
700
800
Nominal
Diameter
of Branch
(dn)
mm
250
300
350
400
450
250
300
350
400
450
500
300
350
400
450
500
600
350
400
450
500
600
700
750
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
Nominal Nominal
Diameter Diameter
of Branch
(DN)
(dn)
mm
mm
900
1000
1100
1200
1500
Nominal
Diameter
450
500
600
700
800
900
500
600
700
750
800
900
1050
600
700
750
800
900
1000
1100
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
750
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1500
(DN)
mm
(DN)
mm
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
300
350
350
400
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
900
Nominal
Diameter
of Branch
(dn)
mm
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
100
80
100
80
100
100
150
150
150
150
200
200
Nominal
Diameter
(DN)
mm
Nominal
Diameter
of Branch
(dn)
mm
1000
1050
1100
1200
1500
200
200
250
250
250
Nominal
Diameter
(DN)
mm
100
80
750
125
80
100
800
150
80
100
125
100
125
150
125
150
200
900
200
250
1000
1050
Nominal
Diameter
of Branch
(dn)
mm
600
700
600
700
750
700
750
800
800
900
800
1000 *
900
1000
300
350
400
Nominal
Diameter
of Branch
(dn)
mm
450
500
600
700
6.8
150
200
250
200
250
300
250
300
350
350*
400
300t
1100
350
400
350
400
450
400
450
500
500
1100
1200
1500
900
1000
900
1000
*
1100
1000
1100 t
1000
1100 *
1200
1200
10.38
SP 21 : 2005
6.9 Bell Mouth Pieces
Nominal
Diameter (DN)
mm
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1050
1100
1200
1500
For detailed information, refer to IS 1538 : 1993 Specification for cast Iron Fittings for pressure
pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision).
10.39
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
32 mm
38 mm
2.2 Shall emit clear ringing sound when struck with light
hand hammer.
Socket
Nominal mass
of pipe(kg)
excluding ears
75
External diameter
Thickness
100
60
5
150
85
5
110
5
160
5
Internal diameter
Thickness
76
6
101
6
129
6
181
6
1500 mm length
1800 mm length
2000 mm length
9.56
11.41
12.65
100
50, 75,100,150,
(Bend)
92,95, 100,
112 ,120, 135,
Size
50,75,100,150
Projection
18.14
21.67
24.15
26.70
31.92
35.66
(Bend)
13.86
16.52
18.37
Nominal
50,75,100,150
100
(Bend)
92,95, 100, 12
120, 135 ,104
3.7
50,75,100,150
50, 50,75, 100
10.40
(Bend)
50
Pipe
Branch Pipe
100
50
SP 21 : 2005
3.8
50 100 100
3.9
Trap
Nominal Size
50
75
100 150
50
75
100 150
50
75
100 100
4. Tolerances
50
Wall thickness
75
100 150
mm dia
50
75
100 150
dia
4 mm for 150 mm
3.15
50
75
dia
100 150
Internal dia of socket
50
75
Depth of socket
100 150
Length
3.16
Sanitary connection
3.16.1
100
100
150
100
3.16.3 Bends
Nominal Size
100
1.0 mm
3 mm for 50 and 75
7.15
Length
For detailed information refer to IS 1729:2002. Specification for sand cast iron spigot and
socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (first revision).
10.41
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Topic
1.1 Requirements for following types of malleablecast
iron pipe fittings threaded in accordance with IS 554:1985
for general purposes for the transmission of fluid and
gas upto the limit of pressure and temperature specified
in 1.3 :
a) Elbows including twin elbows, union elbows
and side outlet elbows,
b) Tees including pitcher tees and side outlet tees,
c) Crosses,
d) Bends including long sweep bends and return
bends,
e) Sockets,
f) Bushing and hexagon nipples,
g) Backnuts,
h) Caps and plugs, and
j) Unions
1.2 Dimensions which are not included in the standard
are left to the discretion of the manufacturer depending
on the end use of the fittings.
1.3 These fittings shall be suitable for working pressure
of up to 1.4 MPa in the case of water and up to 0.7 MPa
in the case of steam, air, gas and oil at a temperature not
exceeding 100C.
NoteRelationship between nominal size (in inch) of the
thread at the outlet of the fitting and the corresponding
nominal diameter DN in mm is given in Appendix A of the
standard.
2. Designation
2.1 Malleable cast iron fittings shall be designated
giving the following particulars in the sequence shown:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Type of fitting
Size designation
Right and left-hand thread where applicable,
Code number
3. Material
3.1 Shall conform to IS 14329:1995+
4. Galvanising
4.1 Shall be galvanised to meet the standard.
5. Threads
5.1 Outlets of fittings shall be threaded to dimensions
and tolerances as per the prescribed standard.
6. Dimensions
6.1 Wall Thickness ad Reinforcement Shall be as
Follows:
Size
Wall-Thickness
Reinforcement
Designation Basic size Tolerance * Projection width
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
1/8
2.0
-0.5
1.0
3.0
1/4
2.5
-0.5
1.3
3.6
3/8
2.5
-0.5
1.3
4.0
1/2
2.5
-0.5
1.5
4.6
3/4
3.0
-0.7
1.5
4.6
1
3.0
-0.7
1.8
5.1
1
3.5
-0.7
1.8
5.1
1
3.5
-0.7
2.0
5.6
2
4.0
-0.7
2.3
6.1
2
4.5
-1.0
2.5
6.1
3
5.0
-1.0
2.8
6.1
4
6.0
-1.0
3.3
7.1
5
6.5
-1.0
4.0
8.1
6
7.5
-1.0
4.6
8.9
* No limit for plus tolerance.
10.42
SP 21 : 2005
Designations
Above
Upto and
Including
Tolerances
(1)
mm
(2)
mm
(3)
mm
30
+1.5
30
50
+ 2.0
UA1
UA2
UA11
UA12
50
75
2.5
75
100
+ 3.0
100
150
+ 3.5
150
200
+ 4.0
200
+ 5.0
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
Size Designation
13/81
11/21
13/41
111
111
13/81
11
13/41
111
111
121
11
13/41
111
111
13/83/4
1
11/23/4
13/43/8
13/41/2
13/43/4
113/8
111/2
113/4
113/4
11
111
11
11
11
111
11
11
111
111
11
11
11
111
111
11
11
111
111
11
21
211
211
211
211
10.43
21x1
22
221
221
221
121
22
22
212
212
212
212
212
212
222
33/43
313
313
313
323
323
424
434
SP 21 : 2005
6.11 Size Designation of Pitcher Teees E1
1
11
1
1
11
11
11
11
1 1
11
111
111
111
11
111
111
111
111
111
11
11
1111
11
1111
1111
2121
2121
2121
212
211
212
211
211
212
10.44
SP 21 : 2005
6. 21 Size Designation of Bushings N4
1/8, 3/8 1/8, 3/ 8 1/4, 1/2 1/8, 1/2 1/4,
1/2 3/8, 3/4 1/4, 3/4 3/8, 3/4 1/2, 1 1/4,
1 3/8, 1 1/2, 1 3/4, 1 3/8, 1 , 1 ,
1 1, 1 3/8,1 , 1 , 1 1,
1 1, 2 , 2 , 2 1, 2 1, 2 1,
2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 2, 3 1, 3 1,
3 1, 3 2, 3 2, 3 3, 4 2, 4 3and 4 3.
6.22
Size Designation of Hexagon Nipples N8;
Hexagon Nipples, Right - and Left- Hand Thread N8,
R-L ; and Hexagon Nipples, Reducing N8:
1/4
3/8
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
1
3/8
3x2
3 x 2
T8
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1
1
2
2
3
T9
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
T1
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1
1
2
2
3
U12
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1
1
2
2
3
2 1
2 2
1
1
U11
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1
1
2
2
3
Flat seat
2
2
21
2 1
2
1
1
U2
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1
1
2
U1
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1
1
2
2
3
T11
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
Nominal Size of
Pipe Threads
(Size Designation)
Corresponding
Bore
mm
1/8
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
6
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
7. Pressure Test
7.1 Shall be subjected to either of the two following
pressure tests
a) Internal hydraulic pressure of not less than 2.1 MPa,
or
b) Internal air pressure of 1.05 MPa whilst the fitting is
completely immersed in water or light oil.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1879 : 1987 Specification for malleable cast iron pipe
fittings (second revision).
10.45
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. General Requirements
50
75
100
150
4.4
4.5
100 150
109 161
126 179
8.5
9
1,800
3,000
Nominal Dia
75
100
100
150
50
50
75
100
Nominal Dia
Angle
Offsets
Taper
Spigot
DN
75
100
100
150
Socket
dn
50
50
75
100
4.6
4.7
Collars
Dia
Branch
Nominal Diameter
Nominal
Body
50
75
100
150
Nominal Diameter
50
Barrel Ext. Dia
57
Internal Dia. of Socket73
Joint thickness
8
Length of pipes
1,000
2,000
b) Unequal Branches
3. Tests
Angle
Angle of Bend
92, 112 and 135.
10.46
Nominal
Diameter
50
75
100
150
140
150
160
170
SP 21 : 2005
4.8 Connectors (C.I. to Stoneware)
Nominal Dia
Angle of Bend
75
100
150
92, 112, 36
Dimensions
Branch
dn
100
100
100
50
100
50
i)
50
100
50
Angle
50
75
100
150
50, 75
3.0
100
3.5
150
4.0
3.0
10
+ 3.0
0
+ 3.5
0
+ 4.0
0
+ 3.0
0
10
4.1 3 Traps
Nominal
Diameter
DN
External diameter
of barrel, DE
Diameter
Angle
95
135
180
Vent
dn
50
50
50
Note For detailed dimensions and body sketches refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3989 : 1984 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun)
iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (second revision).
10.47
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Type 1
(3)
REQUIREMENTS
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
(4)
(5)
(6)
Type 5
(7)
Type 6
(8)
i)
Hardness in IRHD
40 5
50 5
60 5
70 5
80 4
88 3
ii)
25
25
25
25
25
25
for 72 +0 h at 70 1C
2
12
12
12
12
15
15
5 to+ 8
5 to + 8
5 to + 8
5 to + 8
5 to + 8
5to + 8
20
20
20
20
20
20
(1)
for 24
2
iii)
iv)
30 to +10
30 to +10 30 to +10
0 to+ 8
0 to + 8
0 to + 8
0 to + 8
0 to + 8
0 to + 8
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
+5
100
100
100
100
100
100
vi)
10.48
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 TENSILE STRENGTH AND ELONGATION FOR DIFFERENT
TYPES
SL. NO. POLYMER USED
(1)
i)
REQUIREMENTS
Type 1
(3)
(2)
Type 2
(4)
Type 3
(5)
Type 4
(6)
Type 5
(7)
Type 6
(8)
ii)
iii)
18
18
17
15
11
450
450
375
250
175
100
12
13
14
13
11
b)
450
425
400
300
250
150
11
11
11
11
b)
450
400
325
200
125
100
For detailed information, refer to IS 5382 :1985 Specification for rubber sealing rings for gas
mains, water mains and sewers (first revision).
10.49
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5.3
5.5
5.6
Nominal Dia
Length
Nominal Dia
(Small end)
100
125
150
200
225
250
300
350
400
500
600
80
80,100
80, 100, 125
100, 125, 150
125,150, 200
80, 100, 125,150, 200, 250
80, 100, 125,150, 200, 250, 300
200, 250, 300, 350
200, 250, 300, 350, 400
250, 300, 350, 400,450, 500
300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
80,100,125,150,250, 300,
350, 400, 450, 500, 600
Cast Iron Plain and Flanged Spigots
Nominal Dia
5. Dimensions (mm)
Length
Nominal Dia
(Large end)
Nominal Dia
4. Hydrostatic Test
Nominal Dia
6.
Nominal Dia
(Branch)
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
80
80,100
80,100,125
80, 100,125,150
80,100,125,150,200
80,100,125,150,200,250
80,100,125,150,200,250, 300
200,250,300,350
200,250,300,350,400
250,300,350,400,450
250,300,350,400,450,500
300,350,400,450,500,600
Tolerances
Wall thickness, e (2.00 mm + 0.05 e)
(see note)
Flange thickness, b (3.00 mm + 0.05 b)
10.50
SP 21 : 2005
where
e = standard thickness of the wall in mm, and
b = standard thickness of the flange in mm.
Note No limit for the plus tolerances is specified.
6.1
Other Dimensions
Dimension
Tolerance
mm
Machined outside diameters +1.5
(D2 and d2)
1.0
Length (l) and height (h)
+15
10
Note For method of test, refer to IS 1500 : 1983 Method for brinell hardness test for metallkic materials (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 5531 : 1988 Specification for cast iron specials for asbestos
cement pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (second revision).
10.51
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Internal
Depth
98
118
144
170
222
274
326
378
429
480
532
635
738
790
Dia.
116
137
163
189
241
294
346
398
449
501
553
657
760
813
84
88
91
94
100
103
105
107
110
112
115
120
122
123
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
750
2. Mechanical Tests
2.1 Ring Test (for Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds)
Up to and including Modulus of Rupture
300 mm nominal dia. 40 kgf/mm2, Min
2.2 Tensile Test
2.2.1 Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds
External
Dia
of Barrel
Socket
Nominal Dia
Tensile Strength Min
Over 300 mm and
20 kgf/mm2
up to 600 mm
Over 600 mm
18 kgf/mm2
2.2.2 Pipes Cast in Sand Moulds
Tensile strength
18 kgf/mm2, Min
(all diameters)
3. Brinell Hardness Test Hardness of external
unmachined surface shall not exceed 230 HB.
4. Hydrostatic Test Shall withstand test
pressure of 17.5 kf/cm2 without showing leakage,
sweating or other defects, when kept under pressure
for 15 seconds. All pipes shall withstand a test pressure
of 6 kgf/cm2 after installation.
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
750
Barrel
Mass Approx
kg/m
External
Dia.
Thickness
98
118
144
170
222
274
329
378
429
480
532
635
738
790
4.9
5.1
5.4
5.7
6.5
7.0
7.6
8.8
9.4
10.0
11.4
12.6
14.0
14.6
10.25
12.94
16.82
21.04
31.48
42.00
54.27
72.20
87.70
105.70
132.20
175.80
226.60
253.40
10.52
SP 21 : 2005
6. Tolerances
Where
10 mm
d) Length 25 mm
e) Wall thickness (1 + 0.05 e) mm
f) Maximum deviation from straight line (in mm)
shall not be greater than 1.25 times the length of pipe in
metres.
Note For method of test refer to IS 1500 : 1983 Method for Brimell hardness test for metallic materials(second revision)
For detailed information, Refer to IS 6163 : 1978 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun)
iron low pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.
10.53
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
TABLE 1 PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATINGS FOR GRLY AND MALLEABLE CAST IRON FLANGES
Nominal
Pressure
N/mm2
Typeof Material
Cast Iron
Malleable
Cast Iron
(1)
(2)
(3)
0.25
15
20
0.60
15
20
1.0
15
20
20
25
IS : 2107
IS : 2108
IS : 2107
IS : 2108
IS : 2107
IS : 2108
1.6
2.5
150
180
200
220
250
260
300
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(29)
(30)
(31)
0.25
0.25
0.23
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.60
0.60
0.60
0.60
1.0
1.0
1.60
1.60
1.60
2.50
2.50
2.50
0.56
0.58
0.58
0.92
1.48
1.48
1.56
2.30
2.30
2.42
0.52
0.56
0.56
0.85
1.39
1.52
1.52
2.12
2.35
2.35
0.50
0.55
0.55
0.80
1.30
1.50
1.50
2.00
2.30
2.30
0.50
0.55
0.55
0.80
1.30
1.40
1.40
1.80
2.20
2.20
0.45
0.50
0.50
0.70
1.10
1.40
1.40
1.80
2.10
2.10
Note For grey cast iron flanges, the pressure and temperature
rating shall be reduced by 25 percent, where moderate shock (as
may occur in efficient boiler fee main) is likely to be present.
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
10.54
0.43
0.50
0.50
0.68
1.08
1.38
1.38
1.75
2.08
2.08
0.36
0.50
0.50
0.60
1.00
1.30
1.30
1.60
2.00
2.00
SP 21 : 2005
Table 7
Table 8
Table 9
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12
4.
Flange Facing
a)
b)
5. General
5.1 Flange surfaces shall be free from casting surface
defects and segregations.
5.2 It is recommended to use stud bolts with nuts on
both sides for nominal pressures above 15 kgf/cm2.
6. Hydraulic Test Test pressure applied to the joint
shall not exceed 1.5 times the nominal pressure for
flanges.
Note 1 Nominal sizes are 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40,50,
65, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 700,
800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 2200,
2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3600, 3800 and 4000.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6418 : 1971 Specification for cast iron and malleable cast
iron flanges for general engineering purposes.
10.55
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Mechanical Tests
5.1
2.1 Tensile Test Minimum 150 MPa.
On External Diameter
Dimension
External diameter
of barrel (DE)
5.2
Test
Pressure
(1)
(2)
MPa
Upto and including 300 mm 2.5
Over 300 mm and upto and 2.0
including 600 mm
Over 600 mm
1.5
On Thickness
Dimension
Tolerance
Wall thickness
Flange thickness
(1+0.05e)
(2+0.05b)
Where
Suggested
Maximum
Hydraulic
Working
Pressure
including
Surge
(3)
MPa
1.2
1.0
5.3
On length 10 mm
0.6
4. Sizes
2.1 Nominal diameter DN : 80, 100, 125, 150, 200,
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700 and 750 mm.
For detailed information, Refer to IS 7181 : 1986 Specification for horizontally cast iron
double flanged pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision).
10.56
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
e
=
where
e
=
dn =
K
=
Water
Main
Sewers
K9 - K12
K8 - K10
K7 - K10
K7 - K12
K7 - K10
K7 - K10
Gas Mains
K9 - K12
K9 - K10
K9 - K10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 40
PN 10
PN 16
PN 25
PN 40
80 450
500 600
K 9
K10
K 9
K10
K 9
K10
K 9
K10
K9
K9
K9
K9
K9
K9
K9
K10
7001200
1400 2000
K10
K10
K10
K10
K10
K9
K9
K9
K9
K9
* Pressure pipe lines for cast iron special for mechanical and push on
flexible joints for water, gas and sewage.
10.57
SP 21 : 2005
3. Joints
a)
b)
c)
d)
5. Tests
5.1. Tensile and Elongation
Push on joint
Flanged joint
Fexible joints and Inter connection
Restrained joints
Nominal
Diameter
(dn) mm
MPa
80 1000
1000 2000
Minimum
Tensile
Strength
Percent
420
420
Minimum
Elongation
at Break,
10
7
Nominal
Diameter (dn)
mm
Class K7
Class K8
Class K9,
Class K10,
Class K12
PN10
Flange
PN16
Flange
PN25
Flange
PN40
Flange
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
80 to 300
350 to 600
700 to 1000
1100 to 2000
3.2
2.5
1.8
1.2
4.0
3.2
2.5
1.8
5.0
4.0
3.2
2.5
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.2
3.2
3.2
2.5
4.0
4.0
Where P is the hydrostatic test pressure at works in MPa, maintained for atleast 10 s, and the pipe shall not show any sign of
leakage, sweating or other defects.
6. Dimensions
For detailed information, refer to IS 8329:2000 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron, pressure pipes
for water, gas and sewage (third revision).
10.58
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal
Dia
dn
(1)
250
300
350
100
125
150
200
Class
(2)
External
Dia of
AC Pipe
D2
(3)
5,10,15
20
25
5,10
15
20
25
5,10
15
20
25
5,10
15
20
25
5
10
15
20
25
99.5
101.5
106.5
120.0
121.0
126.5
132.5
145.0
147.0
152.5
159.5
171.0
176.5
183.0
191.0
221.0
225.0
233.5
242.5
253.5
400
450
500
600
Class
(2)
5
10
15
20
25
5
10
15
20
25
5,10
15
20
25
5,10
15
20
25
5,10
15
20
25
5,10
15
20
25
5,10
15
20
25
External
Dia of
AC Pipe
D2
(3)
271.0
276.5
284.5
294.5
305.5
322.5
328.5
340.5
352.5
366.5
379.5
392.0
405.0
419.0
432.0
448.0
463.0
478.0
482.0
498.0
515.0
532.0
536.5
554.5
572.5
591.5
643.5
665.5
686.5
710.5
5. Coating
5.1 Coating shall not be applied to any part unless its
surface is clean, dry and free from rust.
5.2 In all instances where the coating material has a tar
or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious, and
hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature
of 65C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0C as to
chip off when scribed lightly with a pensknife.
For detailed information, refer to IS 8794 : 1988. Specification for cast iron detachable joints
for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (first revision).
10.59
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal
Diameter
Type of Tensile
Elongatton at
casting Strength break, percent
(Mpa) (Min) (Min)
All size Fittings
420
5
3.2 Hardness test Shall not exceed 250 HBS.
4. Hydrostatic test Shall withstand the pressure
test without showing any leakage at prescribed test
pressure.
5. Sizes Nominal sizes of 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250,
300, 350, 400, 450, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1000, 1100,
1200, 1400, 1600, 1800 and 2000 mm.
Note For dimensional and other requirements for socket/
spigot of push on joints, mechanical joints and flanges. See
table 3 to 7 and for fittings table 15 to 31. Tolerances for
various dimension of flanges shall be as given in tables 8 to
11. Tolerances in ovaliyty is as given in table 12 and 13.
6. Coating
= 14, 12
dn = Nominal Diameter
3. Mechanical test
b)
c)
d)
e)
For detailed information, refer to IS 9523 : 1980 Specification for ductile iron fittings, for
pressure pipes for water gas and sewage.
10.60
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal Dia of
Pipe and Joint
(1)
(2)
Inner Dia
Y
mm
(3)
(4)
Number
Per Set
mm
( 5)
80
5,10,15,20
90
14
25
90
14
5,10,15,20
109
14
25
115
14
125
5,10,15,20
131
14
25
138
14
150
5,10,15,20
155
14
25
165
14
200
5,10,15,20
201
14
25
219
14
250
5,10,15,20
246
14
25
264
14
300
5,10,15,20
293
14
25
316
14
350
5,10,15,20
345
16
25
362
16
5,10,15,20
392
16
25
412
16
450
5,10,15,20
438
18
25
459
18
500
5,10,15,20
487
20
25
510
20
600
5,10,15,20
585
20
25
613
20
100
400
Class
Cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure
pipes (first revision)
*
Cross Sectional
Dia X
4. Tolerances A tolerance of
2
0.5
mm
0
shall be
For detailed information, refer to IS 10292 : 1988. Specification for dimensional requirements
for rubber sealing rings for C I D joints in asbestos cement piping (first revision).
10.61
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Tests
3.1. Tensile test Minimum 150 MPa.
3.2 Brinell Hardness Not more than 215 HB.
Thickness of
Saddle or
Strap
Width of
Saddle or
Strap
Boss
Diameter
Boss
Thickness
Tapping
Size
(DN)
(t)
(b)
(d)
(t1)
Max
Kg
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
80
100
125
150
200
11
11
11
12
12
38
42
45
45
45
60
65
75
75
85
13
13
13
14
14
25
25
25
37
37
1.7
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.9
5. Tolerances
Dimensions
Cored holes and other
2
dimensions
Drilled holes
Mass
7. Coating
Tolerances mm
1.5
For detailed information, refer to IS 10299 : 1982 Specification for cast iron saddle pieces for
service connection from asbestos cement pressure pipes.
10.62
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Joint
Type of Rubber*
Mechanical Joint
Bulb 2
Push-on-joint
Heel5
Hardness IRHD
60 5
50 5
80 4
Dimensions
DN
(1)
80
100
125
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
750
800
900
1000
1050
1100
1200
N
(2)
130
150
176
202
254
308
360
416
467
518
570
675
788
840
892
995
1098
1184
1220
1324
Q
(3)
98
118
144
170
222
274
326
378
429
480
532
635
738
790
842
945
1048
1124
1152
1256
R
(4)
32
32
32
35
35
35
35
40
40
40
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
50
55
55
T
(5)
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
15
15
20
20
U
(6)
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
19
19
19
20
20
25
25
25
25
25
30
34
34
V
(7)
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
10
10
10
1500
1635
1567
60
20
34
10
C
(2)
16
16
16
16
18
18
20
20
22
22
24
26
29
30
30
30
30
30.5
J
(3)
122
142
169
196
252.5
306
362.5
416
472
525
580
689
799
854
906
1009
1118
1181
A
(4)
10
10
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
15
17.5
18.5
18.5
18.5
18.5
19
10.63
D
(5)
5
5
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
10
10
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
10.3
N
(6)
124
144
171
198
254.5
308
364.5
418
474
527
582
691
801.5
856.5
908.5
1012
1120
1183
B
(7)
26
26
26
26
30
32
34
34
38
38
42
46
51
52.5
52.5
52.5
52.5
52.5
SP 21 : 2005
5. Tolerances
Sl.No. Dimension
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Nominal
Tolerances
Diameter (mm)
(mm)
Thickness, U
Internal diameter, Q
Width, R
Dimension, V
Dimension, T
80 to 600
1.0
700 to 1500
1.5
80 to 300
1.5
2.0
450 to 600
3.0
700 to 1500
4.0
80 to 600
5.0
700 to 1500
8.0
80 to 600
2.0
700 to 1500
3.0
80 to 750
2.0
800 to 1500
4.0
i)
Bulb
C
ii)
0.5
0.8
700 to 1050
1.0
80 to 125
1.0
50 to 300
1.5
2.0
450 to 600
3.0
700 to 800
4.0
900 to1050
6.0
80 to 250
0.5
300 to 450
0.6
Heel
A
iii)
80 to 600
250 to 1050
500 to 1050
0.8
80 to 250
0.3
300 to 700
0.4
750 to 1050
0.5
80 to 125
1.0
150 to 300
1.5
2.0
450 to 600
3.0
700 to 800
4.0
900 to 1050
6.0
80 to150
0.5
Height
B
200 to 600
0.8
700 to1050
1.0
FIG. 1 & 2
For detailed information, refer to IS 12820 : 2004. Specification for dimensional requirements
of rubber gaskets for mechanical joints and push-on-joints for use with cast iron pipes and
fittings for carrying water, gas and sewage (first revision)
10.64
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Coatings
5.1 Coating shall not be applied to any part unless its
surface is clean, dry and free from rust
3. Tests Requirements.
3.1 Tensile Strength Minimum of 150 MPa.
3.2 Brinell Hardness Not more than 215 HBs.
3.3 Hydrostatic testMay be carried out for collars
only. The collars shall withstand the test pressure
specified in Table 1 of IS 9627 : 1980 for 15 Seconds
without showing any leakage, sweating or other defects.
4. Dimensions
4.1 Nominal Dia 50, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200 mm with
classes 5 and 10 for each Dia. for flanges and collars.
*
For detailed information, refer to IS 12987 : 1991 Specification for cast Iron detachable joints for use with
asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty).
10.65
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal
Class
Dia of Pipe
& Joint
mm
50
80
100
125
150
200
2. General
2.1 The rubber sealing rings shall conform to the general
requirement and type 3 of IS 5382:1985++
3. Dimensions
5
5
5
5
5
5
and
and
and
and
and
and
Inner Dia
Y
10
10
10
10
10
10
mm
60
90
109
131
155
201
Cross Number
Sectional Per
Dia, X Set
mm
10
14
14
14
14
14
2
2
2
2
2
2
4. Tolerances
4.1 A tolerance of
+0.5 mm
0.0 mm
Cast Iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure
pipes (Light Duty).
For detailed information, refer to IS 12988 : 1991 Specification for rubber sealing rings for
CID joints for light duty AC pipesDimensional requirements.
10.66
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Test Presure
Castings without Branches
or with Branches not Greater
than Half the Principal Dia
MPa
(2)
2.5
2.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
mm
(1)
10.67
SP 21 : 2005
6. Sizes Nominal Diameter of the casting 80, 100,
125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700,750,
800, 900,1 000, 1 050, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500.
Note 1 For dimensional and other requirements for socket/
spigot of push on joints mechanicaljoints and flanges see
section 2 = ( Tables 5 to10) of the standard.
Note 2 For dimensional and other requirements for castings
see section 3 (Tables 11 to 34) of the standard.
7. Tolerances
Type of Fitting
Length
Flanged scket
Flanged spigot
collar & taper
Bend 90o
Bend 45o
Bend 221/2o
and 111/4o
Tolerances
mm
-(2+0.05 e)
(3+0.05b)
Wall thickness
Flange thickness
Where
e = standard thickness of the wall in millimetres,
and
b = standard thickness of the flanges in
millimetres.
Note No limit for the plus tolerances is specified.
Tee
L
L
L
Deviation / Tolerance
mm
DN 80 to 1 200 : 25
DN 1 400 to 1 600 : 35
(15 + 0.03 DN )
(10 + 0.025 DN)
DN 80 to DN 1 000 :
(10 + 0.02 DN)
DN 1 200 to 1 600 :
(10 0.025 DN)
L and h DN 80 to 1 200 : +50
25
DN 1 400 to 1 600: + 75
35
8. Coating
8.1 The coating material shall set rapidly with good
adherence and shall not scale off.
8.2 Where the coating material has a tar or similar base,
it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not
to flow when exposed to a temperature of 65C but not
so brittle at a temperature of 0C as to chip off when
scribed with a penknife.
For detailed information, refer to IS 13382 : 2004. Specification for cast Iron specials for
mechanical and push-on flexible joints for pressure pipe lines for water, gas and sewage (first
revision)
10.68
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
3. General
3.1 Pipes
3.1.1 Length Between 1.5 to 3.5 m with a tolerance
of 25 mm. Variation from straight length maximum
1 in 100.
Nominal Diameter of Pipes
Nominal Bore, mm
Limites of internal 50 75 100 125 150 200 225
diameter, mm
Minimum
50 75 100 125 150 200 225
Maximum
54 80 106 133 160 213 239
3.1.2 Pipes shall be made with ends suitable for the
joint specified; square cut plain ends for snap joints
and C coupling joints and with machined ends for
taper coupling joints, soil O ring joints and for spigot
and socket joints.
Nominal Bore, mm
Minimum thickness 50 75 100 125 150 200 225
below ground work 3.5 3.5 4.0 5.2 5.2 7.0 7.0
Minimum thickness 2.7 2.7 2.7 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8
above ground work
10.69
SP 21 : 2005
6. Test
6.1 Pipes, Couplings and Fittings (except plastic
materials).
6.1.1 Chemical resistance Shall not show any
evidence of softening or disintegration
6.1.2 Water Absorption Gain in mass, expressed as
a percentage of the original mass, shall not exceed 2
percent.
6.1.3 Resistance to Boiling Water Shall show no
sign of disintegration or seperation into laminations.
Nominal Bore, mm
Pipes
kg per m
kg per test length
Couplings
50
1640
500
122
75
1640
500
143
100
1640
500
169
125
1940
590
195
150
1940
590
195
200
2380
725
304
225
2530
760
317
NoteIS
5382 : 1985 Rubber sealing rings for gas gains, water mains and sewers (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 11925 : 1986 Specification for pitch impregnated fibre
pipes and fittings for drainage purposes.
10.70
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Grade 1
Percent
(2)
Grade 2
Percent
(3)
99.80
0.06
0.005
0.075
99.25
0.10
0.07
0.50
0.005
0.20
0.75
Nominal
ID mm
Over
Upto
and
Including
Angle of
Mandrel
Degree
(1)
(2)
(3)
10
15
25
15
25
23
35
35
Minimum
Expansion
in OD
Percent
(4)
100
100
75
For detailed information, refer to IS 404 (Part) : 1993 Specification for lead pipesfor other
than chemical purposes (third revision).
10.71
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
WorkingPressure
0.25 MPa
0.4 MPa
0.6 MPa
1.0 MPa
3. Material
4. Dimensions
Tolerance
on Outside
Diameter
Class 2
(0.4 MPa)
Min
Max
Min
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
10
12
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
+0.3
+0.3
+0.3
+0.3
+0.3
+0.3
+0.4
+0.5
+0.6
+0.7
+0.8
+1.0
+1.2
+1.3
1.9
2.4
3.0
3.6
4.3
5.2
5.9
6.6
2.3
2.9
3.5
4.2
5.0
6.0
6.7
7.5
2.4
3.0
3.7
4.7
5.5
6.6
8.1
9.2
10.3
10.72
Clas 3
(0.6 MPa)
Class 4
(1.0 MPa)
Max
Min
Max
Min
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
2.9
3.5
4.3
5.4
6.3
7.5
9.2
10.4
11.6
2.2
2.7
3.4
4.3
5.3
6.7
8.0
9.6
11.7
2.7
3.2
4.0
5.0
6.1
7.6
9.0
10.8
13.1
Max
(10)
2.0
2.4
2.7 3.2
3.3
3.9
4.2
4.9
5.3
6.1
6.6
7.5
8.3
9.4
10.4 11.7
SP 21 : 2005
5. Visual Appearance The internal and external
surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth, clean, and free
from groovings and other defects. The ends shall be
cleanly cut and shall be square with the axis of the pipe.
6. Performance Requirements
6.1 Hydraulic Characteristics When subjected to
internal pressure creep rupture test the pipe shall show
no signs of localized swelling, leakage or weeping and
shall not rupture during the prescribed test duration.
The temperatures, durations of test and stresses for
quality and acceptance tests shall be as given in
Table 2.
Thickness of
Pipe Wall
Tensile Strength
Min
Elongation
at Break
Min
5 mm
> 5 mm
8.85 MPa
8.85 MPa
350 percent
200 percent
For detailed information, refer to IS 3076 : 1985 Specification for low density, polyethylene
pipes for potable water supplies. (second revision).
10.73
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Designation
4. Material
2.2
Sl.
No.
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
MRS
(Minimum Required
Strength) of
Material in MPa
at 20C, 50 years
(2)
PE 63
PE 80
PE 100
(3)
6.3
8.0
10.0
Maximum
Allowable
Hydrostatic
Design Stress
() MPa
At 20C
(4)
5.0
6.3
8.0
At 30C
(5)
4.0
5.0
6.3
2.5
4
6
10
12.5
16
Maximum Permissile
Working Pressure
0.25
0.40
0.60
1.00
1.25
1.60
MPa
MPa
MPa
MPa
MPa
MPa
16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 75, 90, 110, 125, 140,160,
180, 200, 225, 250, 280,315, 355,00, 450, 560, 630,
710, 800, 900 and 1000 mm.
10.74
SP 21 : 2005
5. Dimensions
5.3 Length 5 m to 20 m.
5.4 Coiling The pipes supplied in coils shall be
coiled on drums of minimum diameter of 25 times the
nominal diameter of the pipe ensuring that kinking of
pipe is prevented.
Outside
Diameter
mm
(2)
16.0
20.0
25.0
32.0
40.0
50.0
63.0
75.0
90.0
110.0
125.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
200.0
225.0
250.0
280.0
315.0
355.0
400.0
450.0
500.0
560.0
630.0
710.0
800.0
900.0
1000.0
Tolerance
mm
(only positive
tolerances)
Ovality
mm
(3)
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.8
2.1
2.3
2.6
2.9
3.2
3.6
4.1
4.5
5.0
5.7
6.4
7.2
8.1
9.0
(4)
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.8
2.2
2.5
2.8
3.2
3.6
4.0
4.5
5.0
9.8
11.1
12.5
14.0
15.6
17.5
19.6
22.1
24.9
28.0
31.5
35.0
6. Visual Appearance
6.1 The internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall
be smooth, clean and free from grooving and other
defects. The ends shall be cleanly cut and shall be square
with axis of the pipes. Slight shallow longitudinal
grooves or irregularities in the wall thickness shall be
permissible provided that the wall thickness remains
within the permissible limits.
7. Performance Requirements
7.1 Hydraulic Characteristics When subjected to
internal pressure creep rupture test the pipes under test
shall show no signs of localized swelling, leakage or
weeping, and shall not burst during the prescribed.
7.2 Reversion Test Longitudinal Reversion shall not
be greater than 3 percent.
7.3 Overall Migration test Shall be within the limits
stipulated in*.
7.4 Carbon Black Content and Dispersion the
carbon black content shall be within 2.5 0.5 percent,
and the dispersion of carbon black shall be satisfactory.
Polyethylen e for is safe use in contact with food stuff,
pharmaceuticals land drinking water.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4984 : 1995 Specification for high density polyethylene
pipes for water supply (fourth revision).
10.75
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
280
315
335
400
450
500
560
630
Mean outside
Diameter mm
Min
20.0
25.0
32.0
40.0
50.0
63.0
75.0
90.0
110.0
125.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
200.0
225.0
280.0
315.0
355.0
400.0
450.0
500.0
560.0
630.0
Max
20.3
25.3
32.3
40.3
50.3
63.3
75.3
90.3
110.4
125.4
140.5
160.5
180.6
200.6
225.8
280.9
316.0
356.1
401.2
451.2
501.5
561.7
631.9
3. CompositionMaterial
shall
consist
substantially of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride to
which maybe added additives that are needed to
facilitate the manufacture of pipe and production of
sound and durable pipe of good surface finish
mechanical strength and opacity.
Min
Max
20
20.0
20.3
25
25.0
25.3
32
32.0
32.3
40
40.0
40.3
50
50.0
50.3
Note For detailed dimensions including wall thickness of all
classes of pipes and tolerances refer to 7 of the standard.
4. Dimension
10.76
SP 21 : 2005
5.3 Effect on Water Pipes shall not have any
detrimental effect on composition of water flowing
through them. When tested toxic substances extracted
from internal walls of the pipes shall not exceed the
concentrations in the test solution as given in 10.3 of
the standard.
Note For methods of measurements and tests, refer to IS 6307 : 1987 Rigid PVC sheets (first revision) relevant parts of IS
12235 : 1986. Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies, IS1 3360 (Part 3/ sec 1): 1995 Plastics
Methods of testing, Part 3 Physical and dimensional properties, Section 1 Determination of density and relative density of noncellular plastics
For detailed information, refer to IS 4985 : 2000 Specification for unplasticised PVC pipes for
potable water supplies (third revision).
10.77
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal
Size
Minimum
Socket
Length
(1)
16
(2)
14
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
16
19
22
26
31
38
44
51
61
69
76
86
96
106
118.5
131.0
146.0
163.5
20.3
25.3
32.3
40.3
50.3
63.3
75.3
90.3
110.4
125.4
140.5
160.5
180.5
200.6
225.7
250.8
280.9
316.0
10.78
SP 21 : 2005
6.3 Effect on Water Shall not have any detrimental
effect on composition of water flowing through them.
Toxic substances extracted by water from internal walls
of fitting shall not exceed the following :
Lead (first extraction)
Lead (third extraction)
Dialkyl tin C4 and higher
1.0 mg/I
0.3 mg/I
0.02 mg/I
homologues measured
as tin (third extraction)
Other toxic substances
(third extraction)
0.01 mg/I
+ 0.2
0
For detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded
PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water suplies : Part 1 general specific
requirements (first revision).
10.79
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
63
2. Requirements
90
110
75
125
140
45 Elbow Laying
Length,
mm
4.5 1
51
6 + 1.2
1
7.5 + 1.6
1
9.5 + 2
1
11.5 + 2.5
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
1
14 + 3.2
1
16.5 + 4
1
19.5 + 5
1
23.5 + 6
1
27 + 6
1
30 + 7
1
34 + 8
1
38 + 8
1
43 + 9
1
48 + 10
1
53 + 11
1
60 + 12
1
67 + 13
1
For detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 2) :1987 Specification for injection moulded
PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water suplies : Part 2 Specific requirements
for 45 elbows (first revision).
10.80
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
For detailed information, refer to IS :7834 (Part 3) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded
PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies ; Part 3 for 90 elbows (first
revision).
10.81
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part 4) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded
PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies : Part 4 Specific requirements
for 90 tees. (first revision).
10.82
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
* General requirements
z1
mm
20
16
27 3
25
33 + 3
32
42 + 4
3
51 + 5
3
63 + 6
3
79 +7
3
94 + 9
3
112+ 11
3
137 +13
4
157 +15
4
175 + 17
5
200 + 20
6
6 2
1
7+2
1
8 +2
1
10+ 2
1
12+ 2
1
14 + 2
1
17 + 2
1
20 + 3
1
24 + 3
1
27 + 3
1
30 + 4
1
35 + 4
1
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
Note For
typical illustration of 45o Tees and symbols Z and Z1 see Fig.1 of the standard
For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part 5) : 1987 Specification for Injection moulded
PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies : Part 5 Specific requirements
for 45o tees. (first revision).
10.83
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
75
90
110
Requirements
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
4+2
1
5+2
1
6+3
1
6+3
1
8+3
1
8+4
1
8+4
1
8+5
1
10 + 5
1
10 + 6
1
12 + 6
1
12 + 7
1
* General requirements
Note For typical illustration of socket and Z see fig. 1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 6) : 1987 Specification for Injection moulded
PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies : Part 6 Specific requirements
for sockets (first revision).
10.84
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
* General requirements
For detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 7) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded
PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies ; Part 7 Specific requirements
for unions (first revision).
10.85
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.
Requirements The diameter of the socket of
cap shall be as follows: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63,75,
90 110, 12 5, 140, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250, 280 or 315 mm.
For detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 8) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded
PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part 8 Specific requirements
for caps (first revision).
10.86
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5.
Size, mm
Weld Length, mm
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
14
15
Performance Requirements
For detailed information, refer to IS: 8008(Part I ):2003. Specification for injection moulded
high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part I General
requirements.
10.87
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
2. Requirements
2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be
as follows :
Nominal Diameter
mm
20
25
32
40
Laying Length
mm
35
40
50
60
1
2
2
2
70 2
80 2
90 2
110 2
140 3
140 3
150 3
170 3
Note For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part 1) : 2003 injection
moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies: Part I general requirements, for fittings.
For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 2):2003. Specification for injection moulded
high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 2 Specific requirements
for 90 bends (first revision)
10.88
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
Requirements
Laying Length
mm
36.5 1
39 1
46 1
63
75
80
88
98.5
122.5
135
145
157
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
the
Note For general requirements, regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc.refer toIS 8008 (Part1):2003. Injection
moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : PART 1General requirements for fittings.
For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 3 ) :2003 Specification for injection moulded
high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part3 specific requirements
for 90 tees.
10.89
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Size
mm
32 63
63 75
63 90
75 90
90 110
110 160
160 225
2. Requirements
2.1 Two different diameters at either end shall be
concentric.
2.2 Overall laying length and the tolerance thereon
shall be as follows:
Note For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part-1):2003. Injection
moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements for fifths.
For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 4 ) :2003 Specification for injection moulded
high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 4 specific requirements
for reducers (first revision).
10.90
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Requirements
Size
mm
32 63
90 63
110 63
150 63
225 63
48
74.3
89.4
98.5
102.8
Note For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc,refer to IS: 8008 (Part1): 2003 Injection
moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 1 general requirements, for fittings
For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 5 ) :2003. Specification for injection moulded
high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 5 Specific
requirements for ferrule reducers.
10.91
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.
Sl.
No.
Nominal
Diameter
PN 10
Collar
Height
H
Welding
Length
L
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
xix)
xx)
xxi)
xxii)
xxiii)
xxiv)
xxv)
xxvi)
xxii)
xxviii)
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
710
800
900
1 000
28
34
40
49
60
72
84
99
119
134
150
170
190
210
235
261
291
327
373
427
514
530
615
642
737
840
944
1 047
47
57
67
78
88
103
123
138
158
188
188
214
214
269
269
320
320
370
430
482
585
585
685
685
800
905
1 005
1 110
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
80
80
80
80
80
80
100
100
100
100
100
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
120
140
9
10
11
12
14
16
17
18
18
18
18
20
24
24
25
25
25
30
33
46
46
50
50
50
52
55
60
28
27
24
23
16
14
43
37
42
34
34
30
36
46
35
45
35
50
42
14
24
10
30
20
18
15
10
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
80
80
80
80
80
80
100
100
100
100
100
120
120
130
120
130
120
120
120
120
140
7
9
10
11
12
14
16
17
18
25
25
25
30
32
32
35
35
35
40
46
60
60
60
60
28
27
27
24
23
16
14
43
17
35
27
27
20
28
38
35
35
35
40
29
10
10
10
20
Note 1 For typical illustration of pipe end see Fig.1 of the standard.
Note 2 Outside diameter and wall thickness of the end to be welded to pipe shall complywith the requirements given in IS 8008
(Part 1) : 2003.
Note For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part 1) : 2003.
Injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements for fittings
For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 6 ) : 2003 Specification for injection moulded
high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 6 Specific requirements
for pipe ends.
10.92
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal
Flange
size
Pipe
Inside
O u t s i d e Diameter
Diameter
D
Pitch Circle
Diameter
Outside
Diameter
Thickness
of Flange
Thickness Diameter
of Mild
of Hole
D3
D4
Number
of Hole
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
xix)
xx)
xxi)
xxii)
xxiii)
xxiv)
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
100
125
150
200
200
200
250
250
300
350
400
500
500
600
600
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
32
38
44
53
64
76
88
103
123
138
154
174
194
214
239
265
295
331
376
430
517
533
618
645
65
75
85
100
110
125
145
160
180
210
210
240
240
295
295
350
350
400
460
515
620
620
725
725
95
105
115
140
150
165
185
200
220
250
250
285
285
340
340
395
395
445
505
565
670
670
780
780
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
25
25
30
30
30
30
35
35
35
35
35
6 0.3
6 0.3
6 0.3
60.3
60.3
60.3
60.3
90.5
90.5
90.5
90.5
90.5
90.5
120.5
120.5
160.5
160.5
190.5
190.5
220.5
220.5
220.5
22 0.5
220.5
14
14
14
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
26
26
26
30
30
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
12
12
12
16
16
26
20
20
24
For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 7 ) : 2003 Specification for injection moulded
high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 7 Specific
requirements for sandwich flanges.
10.93
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 8360 (Part I ) :1977 Specification for fabricated high
density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements.
10.94
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
20
50 2
25
62.5 2
32
80 2
40
80 2
50
90 2
63
94.5 4
75
112.5 4
90
135 4
110
165 4
125
181.5 4
140
210 6
160
240 6
180
270 + 6
200
300 + 6
225
337.5 + 8
250
375.5 + 8
280
420 + 8
315
472.5 + 8
355
532.5 + 10
400
600 + 10
450
675 + 10
500
750 +10
NoteFor general requirements regarding material, sizes, method of test and sampling refer to IS 8360 (Part 1) : 1977
Fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS 8360 (Part 2):1977 Specification for fabricated high
density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 2 specific requirements
for 90 tees.
10.95
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Scope
Requirements
Overall Laying
Length
mm
100 3
100 3
100 3
100 3
100 3
108 5
128 5
154 5
188 5
213 5
239 8
273 8
307 8
341 8
384 10
427 10
478 10
538 10
606 10
683 10
769 10
500
855 10
Note For typical illustration of 90 fabricated bend
see Fig.1 of the standard.
NoteFor general requirements regarding material, sizes, methods of test and sampling refer to IS : 8360 (Part 1) :1977.
Fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General Requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS 8360 (Part 3) :1977. Specification for fabricated high
density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 3 Specific requirements
for 90 bends.
10.96
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
(1)
(3)
(4)
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
14.0
16.0
19.0
22.0
26.0
31.0
37.5
43.5
51.0
61.0
68.5
76.0
86.0
96.0
106.0
118.5
131.0
146.0
163.5
183.5
206.0
231.0
256.0
286.0
16.1
20.1
25.1
32.1
40.1
50.1
63.1
75.1
90.1
110.1
125.1
140.2
160.2
180.2
200.3
225.3
250.4
280.4
315.4
355.4
400.4
450.4
500.4
560.4
16.3
20.3
25.3
32.3
40.3
50.3
63.3
75.3
90.3
110.4
125.4
140.5
160.5
180.5
200.6
225.7
250.8
280.9
316.0
356.0
401.0
451.0
501.0
561.0
630
321.0
630.4
631.0
For detailed information, refer to, IS 10124 (Part 1) 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies: Part 1 General requirements (first revision).
10.97
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Colour
Class 1
Class 2
Class 3
(0.25 MPa)
(0.4 MPa)
(0.6 MPa)
Red
Blue
Green
Class 4
(1.0
Yellow
MPa)
B
Min
0.4
MPa
Class2
0.6
Mpa
Class3
1.0
MPa
Class 4
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
20
20
35
35
35
45
45
45
45
55
55
55
55
65
65
65
65
75
1.2
1.5
1.7
1.8
2.1
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.3
3.7
4.2
4.6
5.3
5.9
6.5
7.3
1.4
1.7
1.9
2.3
2.7
2.9
3.4
3.8
4.2
4.7
5.2
5.8
6.5
7.3
8.2
9.3
10.3
11.6
2.0
2.4
2.8
3.4
3.9
4.4
4.9
5.5
6.2
6.9
7.7
8.6
9.7
10.8
12.2
13.7
15.3
17.2
3.2
3.8
4.5
5.5
6.3
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.2
12.5
13.9
15.6
17.7
19.8
22.4
24.8
27.8
630
75
8.2
13.0
19.2
31.3
For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 2):1998 Specification for fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies Part 2 Specific requirements for sockets (first revision)
10.98
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Colour
Blue
Green
Yellow
10.99
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF STRAIGHT REDUCERS
All dimensions in millimetres
Size
d
Min
Max
Min
Min
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
20-15
16.0
16.3
10
18
1.1
1.0
25-20
20.0
20.3
10
20
1.1
1.0
32-25
25.0
25.3
10
23
1.4
1.3
40-32
32.0
32.3
10
26
1.8
1.6
50-40
40.0
40.3
15
30
1.4
1.3
2.2
2.0
63-50
50.0
50.3
15
35
1.7
1.5
2.8
2.5
75-63
63.0
63.3
20
42
1.5
1.4
2.2
2.0
3.5
3.2
90-75
75.0
75.3
35
48
1.8
1.7
2.6
2.4
4.2
3.8
110-90
90.0
90.3
35
55
2.1
1.9
3.1
2.8
5.0
4.5
125-110 110.0
110.4
35
65
2.5
2.3
3.7
3.4
6.1
5.5
140-125 125.0
125.4
45
73
2.9
2.7
4.3
3.9
6.9
6.3
160-140 140.0
140.5
45
80
3.2
2.9
4.8
4.4
7.7
7.0
180-160 160.0
160.5
45
90
3.7
3.4
5.4
4.9
8.8
8.0
200-180 180.0
180.6
45
100
4.2
3.8
6.1
5.5
9.9
9.0
225-200 200.0
200.6
55
110
4.6
4.2
6.8
6.2
11.0
10.0
250-225 225.0
225.7
55
123
5.2
4.7
7.6
6.9
12.4
11.2
280-250 250.0
250.8
55
135
5.7
5.2
8.5
7.7
13.8
12.5
315-280
280.0
280.9
55
150
6.4
5.8
9.5
8.6
15.4
13.9
355-315 315.0
316.0
65
168
7.2
6.5
10.7
9.7
17.3
15.6
400-355 355.0
356.1
65
188
8.1
7.3
12.0
10.8
19.6
17.7
450-400 400.0
401.2
65
210
9.1
8.2
13.5
12.2
22.0
19.8
500-450 450.0
451.4
65
235
10.3
9.3
15.2
13.7
24.8
22.4
560-500 500.0
501.5
75
260
11.4
10.3
16.9
15.5
27.5
24.8
630-560 560.0
561.7
75
290
12.8
11.6
18.9
17.2
30.8
27.8
For detailed information,refer to IS 10124(Part 3): 1988 Specification for Fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies: Part 3 Specific requirements for straight reducers (first revision).
10.100
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Colour
Green
Yellow
(1)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
1.0 MPa
(Class 4)
(3)
3.2
3.8
4.5
5.5
6.3
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.2
12.5
13.9
15.6
17.7
19.8
22.4
24.8
27.8
31.3
Note For pipes of 0.25 MPa and 0.4 MPa pressure class,
there are no caps and for these, the caps designed for 0.6
MPa working pressure may be used.
For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 4) :1988 Specification for fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies: Part 4 Specific requirements for caps (first revision).
10.101
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class of Fitting
Class 2 (0.4 MPa)
Colour
Blue
Green
Yellow
B
Min
(1)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
(2)
98
115
137
166
188
209
238
267
296
333
369
412
463
521
586
659
731
818
920
0.6 MPa
(Class 3)
(4)
2.0
2.4
2.8
3.4
3.9
4.4
4.9
5.5
6.2
6.9
7.7
8.6
9.7
10.8
12.2
13.7
15.3
17.2
19.2
1.0 MPa
(Class 4)
(5)
3.2
3.8
4.5
5.5
6.3
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.2
12.5
13.9
15.6
17.7
19.8
22.4
24.8
27.8
31.3
Note For pipes of 0.25 MPa pressure class, there are no equal tees for these, equal tees designed for 0.4 MPa may be used.
10.102
SP 21 : 2005
* PVC welded by solvent or welding rod and with fibre glass reinforcement of 40 m width and 3 mm minimum thickness.
D = mean socket internal diameter at mid-point of socket length as specified in IS : 10124 (Part 1) - 1988*.
L = minimum socket length in accordance with IS : 10124 (Part 1) 1988*.
B = 1.45 x nominal outside diameter of the pipe + 6 mm.
t = minimum wall thickness of equal tees calculated on the basis of 90 percent of the minimum wall thickness of the corresponding
size and pressure class of pipe rounded off to the next higher 0.1 mm.
Note The figure is only intended to define the terms used in Table 1 and is not intended to illustrate specific design features.
For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 5) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies : Part 5 Specific requirements for equal tees (first revision).
10.103
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class of Fitting
Colour
Class
Class
Class
Class
Red
Blue
Green
Yellow
1
2
3
4
(0.25
(0.4
(0.6
(1.0
MPa)
MPa)
MPa)
MPa)
Note This figures is intended to define the terms used in Table 1 and is not intended to illustrate specific design features
10.104
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1. DIMENSIONS OF PVC FLANGED TAIL PIECE WITH METALLIC FLANGES
Dia, D Dia, d
Size
Dia, G
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
63
125
165
7.0
19
75
145
185
7.0
90
160
200
110
180
220
125
210
250
140
210
250
160
240
285
180
240
285
200
295
340
64 +1.0
-0
76
+1.0
-0
91
+1.0
-0
112 +1.0
-0
127 +1.0
-0
142 +1.0
-0
162 +1.0
-0
183 +1.0
-0
203 +1.0
225
295
340
250
350
395
280
350
395
315
400
445
355
460
505
400
515
565
450
565
615
500
620
670
560
685
740
630
755
810
-0
228 +1.0
-0
253 +1.0
-0
284 +1.0
-0
319 +1.0
-0
359 +1.0
-0
405 +2.0
-0
455 +2.0
-0
506 +2.0
-0
566 +2.0
-0
637 +2.0
-0
L
Min
Dia E
Max
Bolt
Size
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
2.5
68
101
M 16
19
2.5
80
121
M 16
9.5
19
3.0
95
136
M 16
9.5
19
3.0
115
156
M 16
11.0
19
3.0
130
186
M 16
12.5
19
4.0
145
186
M 16
12.5
23
4.0
165
212
M 20
12.5
23
4.0
185
212
M 20
16.0
23
4.0
205
267
M 20
20.0
23
4.0
230
267
M 20
20.0
23
12
5.0
255
322
M 20
20.0
23
12
5.0
285
322
M 20
24.5
23
12
5.0
320
372
M 20
24.5
23
16
5.0
360
432
M 20
24.5
28
16
6.0
405
483
M 24
28.0
28
16
6.0
455
533
M 24
28.0
28
20
6.0
505
588
M 24
32.0
33
20
6.0
565
649
M 24
32.0
33
20
7.0
635
719
M 27
Note Fabricated tail pieces for sizes 225 mm and above are not generally recommended. For 0.25 MPa pressure class,
fabricated tail pieces shaould not be made from 0.25 MPa (Class 1) pressure class pipes. For this, tail pieces made from 0.4 MPa
(Class 2) pressure class pipe should be used.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 10124 (Part 6) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies: Part 6 Specific requirements for flanged tail pieces with
metallic flanges (first revision).
10.105
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class of Fitting
Colour
Green
Yellow
10.106
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF THREADED ADAPTORS
All dimensions in millimetres.
Nominal Outside Diameter Length of
Thickness at
Thread
Dimensions Length of
Size
AtPlain Portion Plain portion Plain Portion Designing
Pitch
Useful
of threaded
of Threaded of Threaded of Threaded
Thread
Adaptor. Dia
Adaptor
For Basic
Gauge
Length
A
Outside
Diameter
Max
Min
Min
Min
Min
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
63
63.0
63.3
68.0
5.5
75
75.0
75.3
74.0
4.1
90
90.0
90.3
86.0
110
110.0
110.4
106.0
(1)
Dimensions
of Pipe
Required for
Making
Threaded Adaptor
Class 3 Class4
6MPa 10MPa
Wall
Thickness
Min
Min
MaxClass 3Class4 0.
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
6.8
2.309
23.4
63.0
63.3
5.6
6.9
5.7
2. 1/2
2.309
26.7
75.0
75.3
4.2
5.8
5.7
7.6
2.309
29.8
90.0
90.3
5.8
7.7
3.8
6.2
2.309
35.8
114.1
114.5
6.0
8.4
Note For pipes of 0.25 MPa and 0.4 MPa, threaded adaptors for 0.6 MPa shall be used.
For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 7) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC
fittings of potable water supplies: Part 7 Specific requirements for threaded adaptors (first
revision).
10.107
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class of Fitting
Colour
Blue
Green
Yellow
Y
Min
L
Min
(1)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
(2)
297
354
424
519
589
660
754
848
942
1060
1178
1319
1484
1673
1884
2120
2355
2638
2968
(3)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
R
Minimum Wall Thickness(t)
Min
for Working Pressure
(Only
for
Plain
Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa
(Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
189
1.4
2.0
3.2
225
1.7
2.4
3.8
270
1.9
2.8
4.5
330
2.3
3.4
5.5
375
2.7
3.9
6.3
420
2.9
4.4
7.0
480
3.4
4.9
8.0
540
3.8
5.5
9.0
600
4.2
6.2
10.0
675
4.7
6.9
11.2
750
5.2
7.7
12.5
840
5.8
8.6
13.9
945
6.5
9.7
15.6
1065
7.3
10.8
17.7
1200
8.2
12.2
19.8
1350
9.3
13.7
22.4
1500
10.3
15.3
24.8
1680
11.6
17.2
27.8
1890
13.0
19.2
31.3
Note 1
For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes. For this,
bends made from 0.4
MPa pressure class pipe should be used.
Note 2Y is calculated from
90
360
2 r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D)
For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 8) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies: Part 8 Specific requirements for 90 o bends. (first revision).
10.108
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class of Fitting
Colour
Blue
Green
Yellow
Y
Min
L
Min
(1)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
(2)
198
236
283
346
393
440
503
566
629
707
786
880
990
1115
1256
1413
1570
1759
1979
(3)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
R
Minimum Wall Thickness(t)
Min
for Working Pressure
(Only
for
Plain
Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa
(Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
189
1.4
2.0
3.2
225
1.7
2.4
3.8
270
1.9
2.8
4.5
330
2.3
3.4
5.5
375
2.7
3.9
6.3
420
2.9
4.4
7.0
480
3.4
4.9
8.0
540
3.8
5.5
9.0
600
4.2
6.2
10.0
675
4.7
6.9
11.2
750
5.2
7.7
12.5
840
5.8
8.6
13.9
945
6.5
9.7
15.6
1065
7.3
10.8
17.7
1200
8.2
12.2
19.8
1350
9.3
13.7
22.4
1500
10.3
15.3
24.8
1680
11.6
17.2
27.8
1890
13.0
19.2
31.3
Note 1 For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes. For this, bends
made from 0.4 MPa pressure class pipe should be used.
Note 2 Y is calculated from
90
360
2 R, where R, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D)
For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 9) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies: Part 9 Specific requirements for 60 o bends. (first revision).
10.109
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.
Marking The bend shall be marked in colour
as indicated below for different class of fittings:
Class of Fitting
Colour
Blue
Green
Yellow
Size
(1)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
Y
Min
(2)
149
177
212
259
295
330
377
424
471
530
589
660
742
837
842
1060
1178
1319
1484
L
Min
(Only
for
Plain
Bends)
R
Min
(3)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
(4)
189
225
270
330
375
420
480
540
600
675
750
840
945
1065
1200
1350
1500
1680
1890
Note 1
For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes. For this,
bends made from 0.4 MPa pressure class pipe should be used.
o
90
Note 2 Y is calculated from
r 2 R, where R, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D)
360
For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 10) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies Part 10 Specific requirements for 45 o bends. (first revision).
10.110
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class of Fitting
Colour
Blue
Green
Yellow
3. DimensionsSee Table 1.
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR 30O BENDS
All dimensions in millimetres.
Size
(1)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
Y
Min
(2)
99
118
142
173
197
220
252
283
314
354
393
440
495
558
628
707
785
880
990
L
Min
(Only
for
Plain
Bends)
R
Min
(3)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
(4)
189
225
270
330
375
420
480
540
600
675
750
840
945
1065
1200
1350
1500
1680
1890
Note 1
For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes.For this,
bends made from 0.4
MPa pressure class pipe should be used.
Note 2 Y is calculated from
90
360
2 r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D)
For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 11) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies Part 11 Specific requirements for 30 o bends. (first revision).
10.111
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class of Fitting
Class 2 (0.4 MPa)
Class 3 (0.6 MPa)
Class 4 (1.0 MPA)
Colour
Blue
Green
Yellow
3. DimensionsSee Table 1.
TABLE 1. DIMENSIONS FOR 22O BENDS
All Dimensions in millimetres
Size
(1)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
Y
Min
(2)
75
89
106
130
148
165
189
213
236
266
295
330
371
419
471
530
589
660
742
L
Min
(Only
for
Plain
Bends)
R
Min
(3)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
(4)
189
225
270
330
375
420
480
540
600
675
750
840
945
1065
1200
1350
1500
1680
1890
Note 1 For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes.For this, bends
made from 0.4 MPa pressure class pipe should be used.
o
1
22
2
Note 2 Y is calculated from
2 r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D)
o
360
For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 12) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies Part 12 Specific requirements for 22 o bends. (first revision).
10.112
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Class of Fitting
Colour
Blue
Green
Yellow
3. DimensionsSee Table 1.
TABLE 1DIMENSIONS FOR 11O BENDS
All dimensions in millimetres.
Size
(1)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
Y
Min
(2)
38
45
53
65
74
83
95
106
118
133
148
165
186
209
236
265
295
330
371
L
Min
(Only
for
Plain
Bends)
R
Min
(3)
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
180
200
225
250
280
315
355
400
450
500
560
630
(4)
189
225
270
330
375
420
480
540
600
675
750
840
945
1065
1200
1350
1500
1680
1890
Note 1 For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes. For this, bends
made from 0.4 MPa pressure class pipe should be used.
Note 2 Y is calculated from 11o 2 r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D).
3600
For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 13) : 1988 Specification for Fabricated PVC
fittings for potable water supplies. Part 13 specific requirements for 11o bends. (first revision).
10.113
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Dimensions
5.1
2. Classification
2.1 Pressure Classes (PN) : Five pressure classes of
pipes namely, PN 3, PN 6, PN 9, PN 12 and PN 15
correspond to the working pressure rating of 300, 600,
900, 1 200 and 1500 KPa respectively.
Note The working pressure ratings mentiond above may
have to be changed for use at fluid temperature greater than
43.5 0 C, in occordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Nominal
Diameter,
DN
Min
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
2400
2600
2800
3000
+
196
246
296
346
396
446
496
596
695
795
895
995
1 095
1 195
1 395
1 595
1 795
1 995
2 195
2 395
2 595
2 795
2 995
Max
204
255
306
356
408
459
510
612
714
816
918
1 020
1 120
1 220
1 420
1 620
1 820
2 020
2 220
2 420
2 620
2 820
3 020
1.5
1.5
1.8
2.0
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.6
4.2
5.0
6.0
10.114
epoxy,
SP 21 : 2005
5.2 Lengths 6 m, 9 m, and 12 m effective lengths with
a tolerance of 25mm.
5.3 Out of squareness of pipeAll points around each
end of a pipe unit shall fall within 6.5 mm or 0.5
percent of the nominal diameter of the pipe which ever
is greater, to a plane prependicular to the longitudinal
axis of the pipe.
Diameter,
DN
OD
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
2400
2600
2800
208
259
310
361
412
463
514
614
718
820
922
1024
1126
1228
1432
1636
1840
2044
2248
2452
2656
2830
+2.0
+2.1
+2.3
+2.4
+2.5
+2.7
+2.8
+3.0
+3.3
+3.5
+3.8
+4.0
+4.3
+4.5
+5.0
+5.5
+6.0
+6.5
+7.0
+7.5
+8.0
+8.5
3000
3064
+9.0
0.2
Definition
Chip
Crack
None
Crack, surface
Crazing
Delamination, edge
Delamination
internal
None
Dry-spot
Mamimum diamaeter, 14 mm
Foreign inclusion
(metallic)
Foreign inclusion
(non-metallic)
10.115
SP 21 : 2005
Fracture
Air bubble
(void)
Blister
Burned
Fish-eye
Maximum diameter, 13 mm
Lack of fillout
Orange-peel
Mamimum diameter, 29 mm
Pimple
Pit (pinhole)
Porosity Pinhole
pre-gel
Resin-pocket
Resin-rich edge
Wash
Maximum dimension, 29 mm
Wormhole
Wrinkles
Scratch
Short
None
Shrink-mark
(sink)
10.116
Maximum diameter, 29 mm
None
SP 21 : 2005
8. Pipe stiffness Each length of pipe shall have
sufficient strength to exhibit the minimum pipe stiffness
(F/rY) specified in Table 4.
TABLE 4 PIPE STIFFNESS AT 5 PERCENT
DEFLECTION
Stiffness
Class(SN)
A
B
C
D
248
496
250 mm
248
496
300 mm
62
124
248
496
where
F = load per unit length in kN per mete length, and
ry = vertical pipe deflection, in metres.
For detailed information, refer to IS 12709 : 1994 Specification for glass fibre reinforced plastic
(GRP) pipes, joints and fittings for use for potable water supply (first revision)
10.117
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Dimensions
5.1. Screen Pipes See Table 1 and 2 and also Fig.
1 of the Standard.
5.2
+ 25, 0 mm
Mean Outer
Diameter of pipe
d
Min
(2)
52.0
64.0
92.0
117.0
144.0
169.0
204.0
229.0
284.0
334.0
404.0
454.0
OuterDiameter
of Pipe at any
Point
Min
(3)
51.9
63.9
91.8
116.8
143.7
168.6
203.6
228.5
283.4
333.3
403.2
453.1
Outer
Diameter Over
Connection, ds
Max
(4)
56.0
69.0
98.0
124.0
154.0
182.0
219.0
247.0
302.0
356.0
432.0
483.0
10.118
Max
(5)
3.5
4.0
4.0
5.0
6.5
7.5
8.8
10.0
12.5
14.5
17.5
19.5
(6)
4.0
4.6
4.6
5.7
7.3
8.5
9.8
11.2
14.0
16.2
19.5
21.7
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF PLAINS SCREEN PIPES
All dimensions in millimetres.
Nominal
Diameter
Mean Outer
Any Point
Wall Thickness, s
Diameter Over
Connection,
DN
Min
Max
Min
Max
Max
Min
Max
(1)
250
300
350
400
(2)
280.0
330.0
400.0
450.0
(3)
280.5
330.6
400.7
450.8
(4)
279.6
329.6
399.6
449.5
(5)
280.8
331.0
401.2
451.3
(6)
298.0
352.0
428.0
479.0
(7)
12.5
14.5
17.5
19.5
(8)
14.0
16.2
19.5
21.7
Polyvinyl chloride PVC and its copolymer for its safe use in contact with food stuffs, pharmaceuticals and drinking water.
Mean OuterDiameter of
Pipe, d
Mean Outer
Diameter Over
Connection ds
Wall Thickness, s
DN
Min
Max
Min
Max
Max
Min
Max
(1)
40
50
80
100
125
150
175
200
250
300
350
400
(2)
48.0
60.0
88.0
113.0
140.0
165.0
200.0
225.0
280.0
330.0
400.0
450.0
(3)
48.2
60.2
88.3
113.3
140.4
165.4
200.5
225.5
280.5
330.6
400.7
450.8
(4)
47.9
59.9
87.9
112.9
139.9
164.8
199.8
224.8
279.6
329.6
399.6
449.5
(5)
48.3
60.3
88.4
113.4
140.5
165.6
200.6
225.8
280.8
331.0
401.2
451.3
(6)
52.0
65.0
94.0
120.0
150.0
178.0
215.0
243.0
298.0
352.0
428.0
479.0
(7)
3.5
4.0
4.0
5.0
6.5
7.5
8.8
10.0
12.5
14.5
17.5
19.5
(8)
4.0
4.6
4.6
5.7
7.3
8.5
9.8
11.2
14.0
16.2
19.5
21.7
Mean OuterDiameter of
Pipe, d
Mean Outer
Diameter Over
Connection ds
Wall Thickness, s
DN
Min
Max
Min
Max
Max
Min
Max
(1)
150
175
200
250
350
400
450
(2)
165.0
200.0
225.0
280.0
330.0
400.0
450.0
(3)
165.4
200.5
225.5
280.5
300.6
400.7
450.8
(4)
164.8
199.8
224.8
279.6
329.6
399.6
449.5
(5)
165.6
200.6
225.8
280.8
331.0
401.2
451.3
(6)
174.0
211.0
238.0
292.0
346.0
420.0
470.0
(7)
5.7
7.0
7.6
9.6
11.2
14.0
16.0
(8)
6.5
7.8
8.8
11.0
13.3
15.5
17.5
10.119
SP 21 : 2005
Segmental
Lengths
mm
l3
(3)
25
l4
(4)
880
l5
(5)
60
2000
3000
25
25
1880
2880
60
60
1000
30
870
70
2000
30
1870
70
3000
30
2870
70
1000
40
860
80
2000
40
1860
80
3000
40
2860
80
1000
45
850
90
2000
45
1850
90
3000
45
2850
90
125
2000
3000
60
60
1800
2800
160
160
150
2000
60
1770
170
3000
60
2770
170
175
2000
60
1770
170
3000
60
2770
170
200
2000
70
1760
180
50
80
100
250
3000
7 0
2760
180
2000
85
1720
220
3000
300
400
85
2720
220
(2)
40
2000
25
3000
25
4000
25
2000
30
3000
30
4000
30
2000
40
3000
40
4000
40
50
80
100
125
150
175
2000
45
3000
45
4000
45
2000
60
3000
60
4000
60
2000
60
3000
60
4000
60
2000
60
60
60
2000
85
1720
220
3000
3000
85
2720
220
4000
2000
3000
95
95
1700
2700
240
240
200
250
300
350
400
10.120
(3)
2000
70
3000
70
4000
70
2000
85
3000
85
4000
85
2000
85
3000
85
4000
85
2000
85
3000
85
4000
85
2000
95
3000
95
4000
95
SP 21 : 2005
mm
40
50
80
100
125
150
175
200
250
300
350
400
3
3
3
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
85
108
168
216
240
285
335
390
450
530
640
720
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
4.5
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
5.5
5.5
5.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.0
7.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
9.5
9.5
9.5
9.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.0
8.0
8.0
8.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
11.0
11.0
11.0
11.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
13.5
13.5
13.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
4.0
4.0
5.5
5.5
6.5
9.5
9.5
11.0
Notes
1. a is the summation of slot lengths over the internal circumference of the cross section.
2. n is the minimum number of slots on the circumference of the cross section.
3. In each metre of secreen 10 wider pieces between slits up to 2 mm in width are permitted.
4. Percentages of opening given in the table are based on internal surface area versus internal open area of pipe.
Tolerance on width of slot ( w ), given in Table 7 shall be as under:
Slot width ( w )in mm
Tolerance,
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
+ 0.06
0.0
+ 0.06
0.0
+ 0.10
0.0
+ 0.20
0.0
+ 0.20
0.0
+ 0.20
0.0
+ 0.20
0.0
+ 0.30
0.0
7. Tests
*
Dimensions of pipe threads where pressure tight joints are
erquired on the threads (third revision)
NoteFor methods of test, refer to Appendix A of the standard, IS 8543 (Part 1/Sec 2) : 1979 Methods of testing plastics, Part
1: Characterization of polymer structure and size, section 2 : Determination of density of solid plastics; IS 8543
(Part 4/sec 1) : 1984 Methods of testing plastics, Part 4 : Short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile
properties; and IS 12235 : 1986 Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies.
For detailed information, refer to IS 12818 : 1992 Specific ation for unplasticized PVC screen
and casing pipes for bore tube well (first revision)
10.121
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
Type A : for use in ventilation pipe work and rain
water applications.
Type B : for use in soil and water discharge systems.
6. Dimensions
3. Size Normal outside diameter DN of pipes as
covered are 40, 50, 63, 75, 90, 110, 125, 140 and 160 mm.
Mean
Outside
Diameter
Type B
DN
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min,
Max
Min,
Max
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
40
40.0
40.3
39.5
40.5
1.8
2.2
3.2
3.8
50
50.0
50.3
49.4
50.6
1.8
2.2
3.2
3.8
63
63.0
63.3
62.2
63.8
1.8
2.2
3.2
3.8
75
75.0
75.3
74.1
75.9
1.8
2.2
3.2
3.8
90
90.0
90.3
88.9
91.2
1.9
2.3
3.2
3.8
110
110.0
110.4
108.6
111.4
2.2
2.7
3.2
3.8
125
125.0
125.4
123.5
126.5
2.5
3.0
3.2
3.8
140
140.0
140.5
138.3
141.7
2.9
3.4
3.6
4.2
160
160.0
160.5
158.0
162.0
3.2
3.8
4.0
4.6
10.122
SP 21 : 2005
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
40
1.6
2.9
1.0
2.4
50
1.6
2.9
1.0
2.4
63
1.6
2.9
1.0
2.4
75
1.6
2.9
1.0
2.4
90
1.7
2.9
1.1
2.4
110
2.0
2.9
1.2
2.4
125
2.3
2.9
1.4
2.4
140
2.6
3.2
1.6
2.7
160
2.9
3.6
1.8
3.0
Nomina
Outside
Diameter
Socket
Depth, C
Min
(1)
(2)
(3)
Min
(4)
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
26.0
30.0
36.0
40.0
46.0
48.0
51.0
54.0
58.0
40.1
50.1
63.1
75.1
90.1
110.1
125.1
140.2
160.2
40.3
50.3
63.3
75.3
90.3
110.4
125.4
140.5
160.5
Max
(1)
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
Inside Diameter
of Socket
D1
Min
(2)
40.3
50.3
63.3
75.3
90.3
110.4
125.4
140.5
160.5
Max
(3)
41.1
51.1
64.1
76.1
91.2
111.2
126.3
141.4
161.5
Inside Diameter
of Beading
D2
Min
(4)
49.6
59.6
72.9
84.5
99.5
120.3
137.1
152.1
173.8
7. Tests
7.1. Visual Appearance The internal and external
surface of the pipes shall be smooth and clean, and free
from groovings and other defects. the end shall be clearly
cut and shall be square with the axis of the pipe.
7.2. Reversion Test A length of pipe of approximately
300 mm shall not in length by more than 5 percent.
7.3 Stress Relief TestThis test shall be carried out for
socket end pipes only. When tested the test specimens
shall not show blisters, excessive delamination or
cracking or signs of weld line splitting.
Max
(5)
50.6
60.6
73.9
85.5
100.5
121.3
138.2
153.2
175.0
Length of
Beading
and Neck
A
Neck
of
Socket
B
Length
Beyond
Beading
C
Min
(6)
18
18
18
20
23
26
28
30
32
Max
(7)
5
5
5
5
5
6
7
8
9
Min
(8)
18
20
23
25
28
32
35
38
42
10.123
SP 21 : 2005
9. Mechanical
9.1. Impact Strength at 0oC When tested by the
method in IS : 12235 (Part 9) : 1986, the pipe sample shall
not fracture or crack through its complete wall thickness.
9.2. Tensile Strength and ElongationNot less than
45 MPa and 80 percent.
Note For methods of tests refer to Appendix A of the standard, IS 6307 : 1985 Rigid PVC sheets (first revision), IS 8543
(Part 4/sec 1) 1984 Methods of testing plastics, Part 4 Short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile
properties and relevant parts of IS 12235 : 1986 Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies.
For detailed information, refer to IS 13592 : 1992 Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl
chloride (UPVC) pipes for soil and waste discharge system for inside and outside buildings
including ventilation and rain water system.
10.124
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.2
2. Designation
Material
Grade
MRS
(Minimum Required Strength)
of Material in MPa, at 200C
at 50 years
At20o
PE63
PE63
PE63
6.3
8.0
6.3
5.0
6.3
8.0
Maximum Permissible
Working Pressure , MPa
PN 2.5
PN 4
PN 6
PN 8
PN10
Pn12.5
PN16.0
0.25
0.40
0.60
0.8
1.00
1,25
1.60
4.0
5.0
6.3
3.0
4.0
5.0
63, 75, 90, 110, 125, 140, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250, 280,
315, 335, 400, 450, 500, 560 and 630 mm.
3. Colour Shall be black .
4. Materials
4.1 High Density PolyethyleneHigh density
Polythylene ( HDPE ) used for the manufacture of pipes
shall conform to designation PEEWA -45- T-006 or
PEEW A-45 - T-003 or PEEWA - 50 - T- 003 or PEEWA 50-T-006 or PEEWA - 57-T-003 or PEEWA-57-T-006 or
High density polyethylene material for moulding
and extrusion
10.125
SP 21 : 2005
mm
(2)
63.0
75.0
90.0
110.0
125.0
140.0
160.0
180.0
200.0
225.0
250.0
280.0
315.0
355.0
400.0
450.0
500.0
560.0
630.0
mm
(3)
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.8
2.1
2.3
2.6
2.9
3.2
3.6
4.1
4.5
5.0
5.7
Ovality
mm
(4)
1.5
1.6
1.8
2.2
2.5
2.8
3.2
3.6
4.0
4.5
5.0
9.8
11.1
12.5
14.0
15.6
17.5
19.6
22.1
Note 1 For chemical resistance classification table for HDPE pipes and fittings see Appendix D of the standard.
Note 2 For methods of tests, refer to Appendices B and C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 14333 : 1996 Specification for high density polyethylene
pipes for sewerage.
10.126
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Dimensions
5.1 Inside Diameters and Tolerances See Table1
TABLE 1 SPECIFIED INSIDE DIAMETERS AND
TOLERANCES
Nominal
Diameter
DN
Inside
Diameter Range
ID
Min
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
2400
2600
2800
3000
2.2
Stiffness Classes (SN) Four stiffness classes
of pipes namely A, B, C, and D corresponding to minimum
pipe stiffness values of 62, 124, 248 and 496 kPa
respectively at 5 percent deflection.
Notes
1. The working pressure ratings mentioned above may have to
be changed for use at fluid temperature greater than 43.5oC in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
2. The above pressure classes correspond to the long term
hydrostatic design pressure categories.
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
Tolerances on
Declared
ID
Max
196
246
296
346
396
446
496
596
695
795
895
995
095
195
395
595
795
995
195
395
595
795
995
204
255
306
356
408
459
510
612
714
816
918
1 020
1 120
1 220
1 420
1 620
1 820
2 020
2 220
2 420
2 620
2 820
3 020
1.5
1.5
1.8
2.0
2.4
2.7
3.0
3.6
4.2
5.0
6.0
10.127
SP 21 : 2005
5.2. Alternatively, the outside diameter of pipes for each
of the size designation shall be as given in Table 2 subject
to the tolerances, as specified.
TABLE 2 SPECIFIED OUTSIDE DIAMETERS AND
TOLERANCES
Nominal
Diameter,
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
800
900
1 000
1 100
1 200
1 400
1 600
1 800
2 000
2 200
2 400
2 600
2 800
3 000
Chip
Mechanical couplings
6.2. Restrained
* rubber sealing rings for gasd Mains, water mains and sewers
(first revision)
10.128
SP 21 : 2005
8. Pipe Stiffness Each length of pipe shall have
sufficient strength to exhibit the minimum pipe stiffness
(f/y) specified in Table 4.
Pipe stiffness = f
y
where F = Load per unit length in kN per metre length; and
y = vertical pipe deflection, in metres.
A
B
C
D
248
496
250 mm
124
248
496
62
124
248
496
9. Fittings
9.1 General All GRP fittings, such as bends, tees,
junctions and reducers, shall be equal or superior in
performance to pipe of the same classification and shall
be smoothly finished internally.
GRP fittings are not subject to tests for strength and it
is essential that external restraint be considered for
installation.
9.2 Fittings may be made :
a)
b)
by moulding
Pw + Ps
1.4 PN
For detailed information, refer to IS 14402 : 1996 Specification for glass fibre reinforces plastics
(GRP) pipes, joints and fittings for use for sewerage, industrial waste and water (other than
potable).
10.129
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal
Diameter
WallThickness
At Plain End
e
e2
At Socket
e3
mm
Min
mm
Max
mm
Min
mm
Max
mm
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
i)
40
3.2
3.8
2.9
2.4
ii)
50
3.2
3.8
2.9
2.4
iii)
63
3.2
3.8
2.9
2.4
iv)
75
3.2
3.8
2.9
2.4
v)
90
3.2
3.8
2.9
2.4
vi)
110
3.2
3.8
2.9
2.4
vii)
125
3.2
3.8
2.9
2.4
viii)
140
3.6
4.2
3.2
2.7
ix)
160
4.0
4.6
3.6
3.0
Note For both solvent cement fittings and ring seal fittings
a redution of 5 percent of the wall thickness resulting from
core shifting is permitted. In such a case, the average of two
opposite wall thickness shall be equal to or exceed the values
given in this table.
6.2
UPVC pipes for soil and waste discharge systems inside buildings
including ventilation and rain water system.
*
10.130
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 SOCKET AND SPIGOT DIMENSIONS FOR SOLVENT CEMENT FITTINGS
SI
No.
Nominal
Diameter
Socket
Depth
DN
Min
mm
Mean Inside
Diameter of
Socket at Mid Point
D1
Max
mm
Min
mm
Max
mm
Mean Outside
Diameter of
Spigot Portion
D2
Min
mm
Max
mm
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
i)
40
26.0
40.1
40.3
40.0
40.3
50.3
ii)
50
30.0
50.1
50.3
50.0
iii)
63
36.0
63.1
63.3
63.0
63.3
iv)
75
40.0
75.1
75.3
75.0
75.3
v)
90
46.0
90.1
90.3
90.0
90.3
vi)
110
48.0
10.1
110.4
110.0
110.4
vii)
125
51.0
125.1
125.4
125.0
125.4
viii)
140
54.0
140.1
140.5
140.0
140.5
ix)
160
58.0
160.2
160.5
160.0
160. 5
Nominal
Diameter
DN
mm
Length of
Beading Neck
A
Neck of
Socket
B
Lengthbeyond
Beading
C
Max
mm
Max
mm
Min
mm
Min
mm
Max
mm
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
i)
40
40.1
41.1
18
18
40.0
40.3
ii)
50
50.1
51.1
18
20
50.0
50.3
iii)
63
63.1
64.1
18
23
63.0
63.3
iv)
75
75.1
76.2
20
25
75.0
75.3
v)
90
90.1
91.2
23
28
90.0
90.3
vi)
110
110.1
111.3
26
32
110.0
110.4
vii)
125
125.1
126.4
28
35
125.0
125.4
viii)
140
140.2
141.4
30
38
140.0
140.5
160
160.2
161.5
32
42
160.0
160.5
ix)
Note The minimum dimensions D1 in this table for grooved sockets shall be maintained same as that of sliding sockets
(D1) in table 2.
6.3
=
=
=
=
135.0
80.0
10.0
70.0
= 75.0
+2
0
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
with
Specification for rubber lings for gas mains, water mains and
sowers.
10.131
SP 21 : 2005
8. Workmanship Both the inner and outer surface
of the fitting shall be cleanly finished, smooth and free
from grooving, blistering or other deleterious defects,
when viewed without magnification. Each end of the
fitting shall be square to the axis of the approximate line.
9. Requirements
9.1 Sockets of fittings shall be either of solvent cement
type or rubber ring type.
9.2 Socket and Spigot Configurations A fitting shall
have any of the following configrations of socket and
spigot.
mm
40
50
63
75
90
110
125
140
160
50.0
55.0
61.0
67.0
75.0
85.0
92.0
100.0
110.0
40.0
50.0
63.0
75.0
90.0
110.0
125.0
140.0
160.0
40.4
50.4
63.4
75.5
90.6
110.7
125.7
140.8
168.0
Socket Depth
Min
mm
Wall Thickness
of Socket, Min
mm
(1)
40 to 63
75 to 90
110 to 160
(2)
20.0
22.0
24.0
(3)
1.8
2.0
2.0
Note For methods of tests refer to Appendices A to D of the standard and IS 6307 : 1985 Rigid PVC sheets and
IS 12235 : 1986 Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies Part 6 Stress relef test: Part 7 resistance
to Sulphuric acid.
For detailed information, refer to IS 14735 :1999 Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl
chloride (UPVC) injection moulded fittings for soil and waste discharge system for inside and
outside buildings including ventilation and rain water system.
10.132
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
4. Dimensions
3. Manufacture
Outside Diameter
Thickness
Mass of Tube
Plain End
(kg/m)
Screwed and
Socketed
mm
Maximum
mm
Minimum
mm
mm
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
10.1
9.7
1.8
0.360
0.363
13.6
13.2
1.8
0.515
0.519
10
17.1
16.7
1.8
0.670
0.676
15
21.4
21.0
2.0
0.947
0.956
20
26.9
26.4
2.3
0.138
0.139
25
33.8
33.2
2.6
1. 98
2.00
32
42.5
41.9
2.6
2.54
2.57
40
48.4
47.8
2.9
3.23
3.27
50
60.2
59.6
2.9
4.08
4.15
65
76.0
75.2
3.2
5.71
5.83
80
88.7
87.9
3.2
6.72
6.89
100
113.9
113.0
3.6,
9.75
10.00
10.133
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF STEEL TABLES MEDIUM
Nonimal
Bore
Outside Diameter
Thickness
Mass of Tube
plain end
(kg/m.)
Screwed and
Socketed
mm
Maximum
mm
Minimum
mm
mm
mm
mm
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
10.6
9.8
2.0
0.404
0.407
14.0
13.2
2.3
0.641
0.645
10
17.5
16.7
2.3
0.839
0.845
15
21.8
21.0
2.6
1.21
1.22
20
27.3
26.5
2.6
1.56
1.57
25
34.2
33.3
3.2
2.41
2.43
32
42.9
42.0
3.2
3.10
3.13
40
48.8
47.9
3.2
3.56
3.60
50
60.8
59.7
3.6
5.03
5.10
65
76.6
75.3
3.6
6.42
6.54
80
89.5
88.0
4.0
8.36
8.53
100
115.0
113.1
4.5
2.2
12.5
125
140.8
138.5
4.8
15.9
16.4
150
166.5
163.9
4.8
18.9
19.5
Outside Diameter
Thickness
Mass of Tube
Plain end
(kg/m.)
Screwed and
Socketed
mm
Maximum
mm
Minimum
mm
mm
mm
mm
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
0.490
10.6
9.8
2.6
0.487
14.0
13.2
2.9
0.765
0.769
10
17.5
16.7
2.9
1.02
1. 03
15
21.8
21.0
3.2
1.44
1.45
20
27.3
26.5
3.2
1.87
1.88
25
34.2
33.3
4.0
2.93
2.95
32
42.2
42.0
4.0
3.79
3.82
40
48.8
47.9
4.0
4.37
4.41
50
60.8
59.7
4.5
6.19
6.26
65
76.6
75.3
4.5
7.93
8.05
80
89.5
88.0
4.8
9.90
10.40
100
115.0
113.1
5.4
14.5
14.8
125
140.8
138.5
5.4
17.9
18.4
150
166.5
163.9
5.4
21.3
21.9
10.134
SP 21 : 2005
9. Leak Tightness Test Eddy current test may be
done in place of hydrostatic test subject to mutual
agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.
5. Tolerances
a) Thickness
1) Welded tubes:
Light tubes
Medium and heavy
tubes
2) Seamless tubes
+ not limited
8 percent
+ not limited
10 percent
+ not limited
12.5 percent
a) Mass:
1) Single tube (light
series)
2) Single tube (medium)
and heavy series
3) For quantities per
load of 10 tonnes,
Min (light series)
4) For quantities per
load of 10 tonnes,
Min (medium and
and heavy series)
+ 10 percent
8 percent
10 percent
+ 7.5 percent
5 percent
7.5 percent
*
Pipe threads where pressure - tight joints are made on the threads
dimensions tolerance and designation (fouth revision)
Nominal Bore
Elongation
Percent Min
20 percent
12 percent
20 percent
Note For methods of tests refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second revision) and
IS 2329 : 1985 Methods of bend test on metallic tubes (in full section) (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS:1239 (Part 1) : 2004 Specification for steel tubes, tubulars
and other wrought steel fittings Part 1 Steel tubes (sixth revision).
10.135
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
10.136
SP 21 : 2005
6.10 Elbows, equal, 135o Nominal size of outlet 6
,8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100.
7. Tolerance
Dimensions
mm
Internal Threads
6
8
8,10
15
15,20
15, 20, 25
20, 25, 32
25, 32, 40
32, 40, 50
40, 50 ,65
50, 65,80
80, 100
81, 100
Above
Upto and
Tolerance
mm
including
(1)
(2)
(3)
30
1.5
30
50
2.0
50
75
2.5
75
100
3.0
100
175
3.5
7.1 Tolerance for the Alignment of Threads The axes
of the threads shall be coincident with the theoretical
axes of the fittings within a tolerance of 0.5o on the run
and on the branches.
8. Joints Unless otherwise specified, sockets for
tubulars shall have parallel threads. All threads shall be
in accordance with IS 554 : 1985*.
9. Tests on Fittings and Socket
9.1 Pressure Test Either of the following:
a) The application of an internal hydraulic pressure
of not less than 5 MPa, or
b) The application of an internal air pressure of 0.7
MPa whilst the fittings is completely immersed
in water or light oil. The ends of fittings and
sock ets when subjected to the required pressure,
after having been made up wrench tight with the
prior application of lubricant, or sealant, or by
any other appropriate method shall not show
any leakage.
9.2. Expansion Test on Sockets At the option of
Manufacturer- either drift expanding test or Taper screw
plug test shall be carried out.
10. Galvanizing Where tubulars sockets and
fittings are required to be galvanised, the zinc coating
shall be in accordange with IS 4736 : 1986+
11. Workmanship Tubulars, sockets fitting shall
be clearly finished and reasonably free from scale,
surface flaws, laminations and other defects. The screw
threads of tubulars, sockets and fittings shall be clean
and well cut. The ends shall be cut clearly and square
unless otherwise specified.
Pipes threads where pressure tight joints are made on threads
dimensions tolerances and designation (fourth revision)
*
For detailed information, refer to IS :1239 (Part 2) 1992 Specification for steel tubes, tubulars and other
wrought steel fittings Part 2 Mild Steel sockets, tubulars and other wrougth steel pipe fittings (fourth revision)
10.137
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
ERW
EFW
6. Tensile Strength
Steel
Grade
variation shall be
20
18
12
10
0
5. Chemical Copmosition
5.1 Ladle Analysis
Fe 330
Fe 410
Fe 450
330
410
450
Elongation Percentage
5.65 So
Min
iii) Automatic metal arc welded with bare electrode any Co2
C
Max
0.17
0.25
0.30
Tensile Strength
MPa, Min
Fe 330
Fe 410
Fe 450
Steel Grade
Analysis, Percent
+ 0.02
+ 0.005
+ 0.005
Carbon
Sulphur
Phosphorous
Permissible Deviation on
S
Max
0.055
0.055
0.050
10.138
(mm)
168.3
193.7
219.1
244.5
273.1
323.9
355.6
406.4
457.0
508.0
559.0
610.0
660.0
711.0
762.0
813.0
(mm)
864.0
914.0
965.0
1016.0
1067.0
1118.0
1168.0
1219.0
1321.0
1422.0
1524.0
1626.0
1727.0
1829.0
2032.0
SP 21 : 2005
9. Tolerances
Seamless Pipe
0.75 percent
1 percent
1 Percent
1.5 percent
b)
ERW Pipe
EFW Pipe and
Seamless Pipe
10 percent
20 percent
12.5 percent
4 mm
5 mm
6 mm
7 mm
8 mm
10 mm
Tolerance
mm
168.3
457.0
1321.0
168.3
upto
upto
upto
upto
406.4
1219.0
2032.0
1219.0
6
6
6
4
1321.0
upto
2032.0
13. Tests
Pipes
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
50
60
75
Clearance Y
between
Plain Ends.
Max
Minimum Specified
Outside Dia
Thickness of
168.3 to 406.6
Above 406.6 to 599.0
Above 599.0 to 914.0
Above 914.0 to 1219.0
Above 1219.0 to 1620.0
12.1
.Dimension
mm
where
P =
Tolerance
Welded Pipe
Upto 508
Over 508
a)
S=
t =
For detailed information, refer to IS 3589 : 2001 Specification for seamless or electrically welded steel Sipes
for water, gas and sewage (168.3 to 2032 mm outside diameter) (third revision)
10.139
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b)
c)
Grade of Steel
Fe 410
Fe 450
Nominal Bore
mm
(1)
Outside Diameter
mm
(2)
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
625
114.3
141.3
168.3
193.7
219.0
244.5
273.0
323.9
355.6
406.4
457.2
508.0
558.8
635.0
4. Dimensions
4.1 Length Random lengths of 4 to 7 m.
Dimensions of Screwed and Socketed Casing Pipes
All dimensions in millimetres.
Outside
Thickness
Socket
Diameter
of Pipe
Outside
of Pipe
Diameter
114.3
141.3
150
168.3
175
193.7
200
219.1
225
244.5
250
273.1
300
323.9
5.4
5.4
7.1
5.4
7.1
6.4
8.0
6.4
8.0
7.1
9.0
8.0
10.0
8.0
10.0
Overall
Length of
Socket,
130.0
157.0
114.3
120.6
184.0
27.0
211.6
152.4
237.0
152.4
262.5
165.1
291.0
177.8
346.0
177.8
1 14.3
1 41.3
1 68.3
1 93.7
2 19.1
2 44.5
2 73.0
3 23.9
3 55.6
4 06.4
4 06.4
4 57.2
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.4
5.4
6.0
7.1
7.1
8.0,10.0 and 12.0
8.0,10.0,12, 14.0
10.0,12.0 and14.0
10.0
3. Manufacture Steel used shall be made by openhearth, electric or basic oxygen process, having not
more than 0.06 percent each of sulphur and
phosphorous.
Nominal
Bore of
Pipe
Min
100
125
Thickness
mm
(3)
6.0
6.0
8.0
8.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
12.0 and 14.0
12.0 and 14.0
12.0 and 14.0
14.0
14.0
Thickness
(mm)
(1)
300
350
400
450
475
500
550
625
(mm)
(3)
10.0 and 12.0
10.0,12.0 and 14.0
10.0,12.0 and 14.0
10.0,12.0 and 14.0
14.0
10.0 and 14.0
14.0
14.0
(mm)
(2)
323.9
355.6
406.4
457.2
482.6
508.0
558.8
635.0
10.140
SP 21 : 2005
5. Tolerances
Seamless tube
+ 20 percent
- 12.5 percent
Welded tube
Up to and including
406.4 mm outside
diameter
Over 406.4 mm
outside diameter
+ 15 percent
- 12.5 percent
Fe 410
Fe 450
where
+ 15 percent
- 10 percent
6.1 Screwed and socketed butt joints shall have righthanded V-form threads in accordance with the particulars
given in Fig. 4 and Table 6 of the Standard
6.2 Screwed flush butt joints shall have right handed
square form threads in accordance with the particulars
given Fig. 5 and Table 7 of the Standard.
6.3 The plain-end pipes shall be supplied with both ends
bevelled or both ends square cut or one end bevelled
and one square cut.
7. Condition of Pipes All pipes shall be, free
from harmful defects, of good commercial finish and free
from loose scale and rust. When required, the ends shall
be cut square with the axis of the pipe.
8. Tests
8.1 Tensile TestTensile strength and elongation.
Grade
Tensile
strength
MPa
Fe
Fe
MPa
(N/mm 2 )
450
410
Yield
Test Pressure
N/mm2
280 t/D
350 t/D
Elongation
Min
strength
5.65
Percent
(N/mm 2 )
275
235
S0
13
15
For detailed information, refer to IS 4270 : 2001 Specification for Steel tubes used for water wells (third revision)
10.141
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
P = 2 st/D
where
P = test pressure MPa,
3. Chemical Composition
3.1 Ladle analysis
C percent
Max
0.25
S percent
Max
0.05
P percent
Max
0.05
C
P
S
4. Physical Tests
4.1. Tensile Test
U.T.S Min Y.S. Min
E Percent Min
on
5.65
410 MPa
240 MPa
20
So
For detailed information, refer to IS 5504 : 1997 Specification Spiral welded pipes (first revision)
10.142
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulphur
+
+
0.02
0.03
0.005
0.005
175
193.7
200
291.1
225
244.5
250
273.0
398
323.9
350
355.6
400
406.4
450
457.2
lengths between 1 to 13
4. Dimensions
a)
b)
Nominal
Bore
mm
6
8
10
Outside
Diameter
mm
10.2
13.5
17.2
Thickness
15
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
90
100
125
150
21.3
2.0,2.65 and 3.25
26.9
2.35, 2.65 and 3.25
33.7
2.65,3.25, 4.05 and 4.85
42.4
2.65,3.25,4.05 and 5.4
48.3
2.9, 3.25 4.05, 4.85 and 5.9
60.3
2.9, 3.65, 4.5, 4.85, 5.6, and 6.35
76.1
3.25, 3.65, 4.5, 5.4 and 6.5
88.9
3.25, 4.05, 4.85, 5.4, and 6.35
101.6
3.65, 4.05, 4.85, and 6.35
114.3
3.65, 4.5, 5.4, 5.9, 6.35, and 8.0
139.7
3.65, 4.5, 4.85, 5.4, 6.35, 8.0and 9.5
165.1& 168.3
3.65, 4.5, 4.85, 5.4, 6.35, 7.1,
Outside diameter
Wall thickness
percent
1
15.0 percent
12.5
mm
1.8,2.0 and 2.65
1.8,2.35 and 2.9
1.8,2.35 and 2.9
+5 0
0 0
of
GRADE 2
GRADE 3
10.143
GRADE 4
0.19
0.12
0.90 Max
0.50 to 10.5
0.05
0.04
0.05
0.04
0.13 to 0.32
0.08 to 0.37
2.03 to 2.57
0.47 to 0.98
0.44 to 1.01
0.40 to 0.75
0.04 to 0.30
manganese above 1.05 shall be permitte
SP 21 : 2005
6.
Physical Tests
Grade
Tensile Requirements
Tensile Strength
kgf/mm2, Min
Yield point,
kgf/mm2, Min
Grade 1
Grade 2
38.5
42.0
1
2
3
4
Grade 3 Grade 4
45.5
42.0
Impact Properties
21.0
24.5
24.5
Size of Specimen
24.5
Grade
Longitudinal
Transverse
E= 2.2051 + 17.50
E=1.575t + 12.50
Longitudinal
Transverse
E= 1.890t + 15.00
E=1.260t + 11.00
Longitudinal
Transverse
E= 1.890t + 15.00
E=1.339t + 11.00
Longitudinal
Transverse
E= 1.890t + 15.00
E=1.260t + 6.50
Where
46C
46C
73C
101C
Minimum Average
Notched Bar
Bar Impact Value
of Each Set of
Three Specimen
mm x mm
10 x 10
10 x 7.5
10 x 5
kgf.m
2.07
1.73
1.38
10 x 2.5
0.69
Minimum
Notched
Bar Impact
Valueof one
Specimen
Only of a set
kgf.m
1.38
1.17
0.97
0.48
Minimum Impact
Test Temperature
For detailed information, refer to IS 6286 : 1971 Specification for seamless and welded steel pipe for sub-zero
temperature service.
10.144
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Tests
5.1 Hydraulic Test Straight pipes shall withstand
the internal hydraulic test pressure of 0.15 MPa on the
barrels and fitting covered in Section A of the standard
and 0.075 MPa for fitting covered in Section B of the
standard, without showing signs of injury or leakage.
5.2 Absorption Test Maximum increase in mass shall
be as follows :
Thickness of Pipe or
Fitting, mm
Upto and including 20
Over 20 and upto 25
Increase in
Mass Percent
6
7
10
10.145
SP 21 : 2005
6.3 Length and Straightness of barrels for straight and
taper pipes.
a) Length 600, 750, or 900 mm
b) Tolerance
For detailed information, refer to IS 651 : 1992 Specification forsalt glazed stoneware pipes andfittings (fifth
revision).
10.146
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1.5 percent.
3.4 Alkali Resistance Shall not show evidence of
pitting, softening, spalling or cracking.
4. Dimensions
4.1 Pipes, Barrels and Sockets
Internal
Diameter
of Pipe
Mean Thickness
of the Barrel
and of Socket,
Min
Internal
Depth
of Socket
Min
100
150
12
15
50
57
200
16
63
250
20
70
300
25
70
350
30
75
2. Requirements
400
35
75
450
37
76
500
40
80
600
43
90
2.2 Shall give sharp clear note when struck with light
hammer.
2.3 Interior and exterior surfaces of the pipes and fittings
which remain exposed after jointing, shall be glazed.
3. Tests
3.1 Pipes shall withstand hydraulic pressure of 0.3 MPa
on the barrels and 0.15 MPa on fittings. The pressure
shall be maintained for not less than 5 seconds without
showing signs of leakage or injury.
3.2 Water absorption shall not exceed the following :
Thickness of Pipe or
Fitting
Increase in Mass,
Percent
Up to 20 mm
20 to 25 mm
25 to 32 mm
32 to 38 mm
Over 38 mm
3
4
5
6
8
10.147
SP 21 : 2005
4.4.1 Internal diameters of taper pipes, half-section
straight channel half-section taper channels, bends (one
quarter, one eight and one sixteenth).
6. Gully Traps
6.1 Round Mouth Gully Traps
Type
Size
mm
125 100
Size
mm
100
180
125
125
For detailed information, refer to IS 3006 : 1979 Specification for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes
and fittings (first revision).
10.148
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
LOCATION
(1)
(2)
i) General
B LEMISH OR
D EFECT
(3)
Warpage
MAXIMUM PERMITTED
(4)
Not to exceed 2% on
all planes or 10 mm
which ever is less
A total of not over 6
Spots and
Bilsters
ii) Service
Bubbles,
A total of not over 8
space, top of pinholes
rim
and
or slab,
specks
inside of
bowl
Polishing
A total of not over 4
marks and
exposed
bodies
Spots and
A total of not over 6
blisters
iii) Visible
Bubbles,
Not over 3 in
surfaces
Pinholes
one pottery
other than
and square, a
above
specks
A total of not over 10
Polishing
A total of not
marks and
over 4
exposed
bodies.
For detailed information, refer to IS 771 (Part1) : 1979 Specification for fire-clay sanitary appliances, Part 1
general requirements (second revision)
10.149
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Tolerances
Sizes
mm
750 450 250
600 450 200
600 450 200
b) Laboratory sinks
For detailed information, refer to IS 771 (Part 2) : 1985 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances
Part 2 of kitchen and laboratory sinks (third revision).
10.150
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS : 771 (Part3/ Sec 1) : 1979 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary
appliances, Part 3 Specific requirements of urinals, Section 1 Slab urinals (second revision).
10.151
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Type 1
Type 2
mm
mm
1140 460 400
1500 520 400
2.2 Construction Stall urinals shall be manufactured
either as a single urinal or as a range of two or more
urinals The inside surface of the urinals shall be regular
and smooth throughout to ensure efficient flushing.
The bottom of urinals shall have sufficient slope from
the front towards the outlet such that there is efficient
draining of the urine.
Note For details of dimensions and tolerances see Table 2 of the standard
For detailed information, refer to IS 771 (Part 3/ Sec. 2) : 1985 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary
appliances Part 3 Specific requirements of Section 2 Stall urinals (third revision).
10.152
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Tolerance
a) On dimensions of 50 mm and over 4%
b) On dimensions less than 50 mm 2 mm
For detailed information, refer to IS 771 (Part 5) : 1979 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances:
Part 5 Specific requirements of shower trays (second revision).
10.153
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
a)
b)
For detailed information, refer to IS 771 (Part 7) : 1981 Glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part 7 Specific
requirements of slop sinks (second revision).
10.154
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
a) Crazing;
b) Dimples, rundown, sagging;
c) Blisters not more than on interior surface:
d) Pinholes not more than two for coloured
wares and not more than four for white wares;
Note-
For detailed information, refer to IS 772:1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iron
sanitary appliances (second revision).
10.155
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
IS
Note 1 These shall conform to the requirement of IS 772 : 1973 General requirement of enamelled cast iron sanitary
appliances.
For detailed information, refer to IS 773 : 1988 Specification for enamelled cast iron water - closets, railway
coaching stock type (third revision).
10.156
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
10.157
SP 21 : 2005
high-level cisterns and 38 1 mm for low-level cisterns.
The steel flush pipe shall be not less than 1 mm thick
whereas the lead flush pipe shall have a minimum
thickness of 3.5 mm. For high density polyethlyene
and unplasticized PVC pipes, the outside diameter of
the pipes shall be 40 mm. When PVC plumbing pipes
are used, the outside diameter of the pipe shall be 40 mm
for high-level cisterns and 50 mm for low-level cisterns.
5.4 Inlet and overflow holes The aistern shall be
provided with inlet and overflow holes; situated one at
each end which shall be capable of accomodating and
overflow pipe of the less than 20 mm nominal bore and
a 15 mm size flout value.
5.5 Float Valve The float valve shall be of 15 mm
nominal size
5.6 Lever The lever shall not project beyond the side
of the cistern for a distance greater than 350 mm
measured from the centre of the cistern to the end of the
lever arm. In case of low-level cisterns, where the
mechanism is handle operated, the handle, whether
situated on the front or at the end of the cistern, shall be
within the projection limit for lever.
5.7 Chain The chain shall be of such a strength as to
sustain a dead load of 50 kg without any apparent or
permanent deformation of the shape of the links.
5.8 Overflow Pipe The overflow pipe shall be of not
less than 20 mm nominal bore and shall incorporate a
non-corrodiable mosquito device secured in a manner
which will permit it to be readily cleaned or renewed
when necessary. No provision shall be made whereby
the overflow from the cistern shall discharge directly
into the water-closet or soil pipe without being detected.
5. Finish Cast iron cisterns shall be painted inside
with suitable anti-corrosive paint and with a protective
For detailed information, refer to IS 774 : 2004. Specification for flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals
(other than plastic cisterns) (fifth revision).
10.158
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Grade
of Covers
Light-duty
LD-2.5
Medium-Duty MD-10
Heavy- Duty
HD-20
Extra-Heavy EHD-35
Duty
Type/Shape
Rectangular,
Square
Circular
Circular
Rectangular
Circular
Lamphole
Square
Rectangular
(Scrapper Manhole)
Circular
Square
Rectangular
(Scrapper manhole)
10.159
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1
GRADE
DESIGNATION
(1)
LD-2.5
OF
(2)
Rectangular
Square
Circular
MD-10
Circular
HD-20
Rectangular
Circular
EHD-35
Lamphole cover
Square
Rectangular
(Scrapper manhole)
Circular
Square
Rectangular
(Scrapper manhole)
CLEAR OPENING
OF FRAME
FRAME
mm
Depth
mm
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
450 600
450 450
400 400
370 (dia)
370 (dia)
450 (dia)
480 (dia)
500 (dia)
450 600
500 (dia)
560 (dia)
600 (dia)
350 (dia)
560 560
450 900
35
2.5
50
30
45
45
60
70
80
80
100
110
110
130
110
100
50
30
50
40
40
40
40
50
50
50
60
75
25
75
60
560 (dia)
600 (dia)
560 560
130
140
130
60
75
60
35
600 900
120
70
5. Manufacture
5.1 Covers and Frames Covers and frames shall be
cleanly cast and they shall be free from air and sand
holes, cold shuts and warping which are likely to impair
the utility of the castings. Covers shall have on its
operative top a raised chequered design to provide for
an adequate no-slip grip. The rise of the chequer shall
be not less than 4 mm.
5.2 Key Holes and Keys Key holes, keys and lifting
devices shall be provided in the manhole covers to
facilitate their placement in the frames, and their
operative maintenance during use in the field.
10
20
For detailed information, refer to IS 1726 : 1991 specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames (third
revision) IS 210 : 1993 Grey iron castings (fourth revision).
10.160
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Construction
a) Cistern The thickness of the body and the cover
shall not be less than 5 and 6 mm for cast iron and
vitreous china cisterns respectively. The body of the
pressed steel cistern shall be of seamless or welded
construction. The thickness of body and cover shall
not be less than 1.60 mm and 1.25 mm respectively before
coating and shall be porcelain enamelled or otherwise
protected against corrosion by equally efficient coating.
b) Depth of Cistern Body The depth of the body of
cistern shall provided for a clearance of not less than 25
mm between the highest level that can be reached by
water before siphonage commences and the spillover
level of the top of cistern.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2326 : 1987 Specification for automatic flushing cisterns for urinals (other
than plastic cisterns)(second revision).
10.161
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
DESCRIPTION
DIMENSION
Min
(1)
(2)
i) Distance from centre line of hinge
bolts to extreme edge of rim at front, A
ii) Length of opening at longest point, B
iii) Width of opening at widest point, C
iv) Overall width at widest point, D
v) Distance between inner and outer rims, E
vi) Centre-to-centre distance of seat bolt holes, F
vii)Distance from centre line of hinge bolts to
inner rim of seat at the back, G
viii) Thickness of seat at thinnest point
ix) Thickness of cover at thinnest point
10.162
Max
(3)
445
(4)
475
250
215
380
55
145
85
290
240
--175
--
3
3
SP 21 : 2005
5.
Tests
For detailed information, refer to IS 2548 (Part 1) 1996 Specification for Plastic seats and covers for waterclosets Part 1 Thermoset seats and covers (fifth revision).
10.163
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Manufacture
4.1 Seat The underside of the seats may be either
flat or recessed. Where the underside is flat, the seat
shall be a solid moulding, and where the underside is
recessed, the section shall be not less than 3 mm at any
point. The seats may be of the closed or open front
pattern (see Fig. 1).
4.2 The cover shall completely cover the aperture of
the seat and shall be so designed that it is capable of
being raised easily from the seat. The cover shall be not
less than 3 mm in thickness at any point.
4.3 Dimensions See Table 1
DESCRIPTION
DIMENSION
Min
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
(2)
Distance from centre line of hinge
bolts to extreme edge of rim at front, A
Length of opening at longest point, B
Width of opening at widest point, C
Overall width at widest point, D
Distance between inner and outer rims, E
Centre-to-centre distance of seat bolt holes, F
Distance from centre line of hinge bolts to
inner rim of seat at the back, G
Thickness of seat at thinnest point
Thickness of cover at thinnest point
10.164
Max
(3)
(4)
445
475
250
215
380
55
145
85
290
240
--175
--
--
--
SP 21 : 2005
FIG. 1
10.164 A
SP 21 : 2005
4.4 Finish The surfaces of the seats, covers and
components shall be smooth, free from blisters and
delamination and reasonably free from flowlines,
contamination, streaking and unintended colour
variation colour variation.
4.6 Hinging Device The bolts shall have a minimum
shank length of 65 mm and a coarse thread of M8 size
within 25 mm of the flange of fixing to the pan.
4.7 Buffers and Distance Pieces Each seat (if not
provided with distance pipes) shall be provided with
not less than three rubber or plastic buffers of size 25
mm 40 mm 10 mm for closed front seats and not less
than 4 for open front seats, which shall be securely
fixed to underside of the seat.
5. Test
5.1 Strength The seats shall withstand, without
permanent distortion of the seat or the hinge fit tings or
damage to any finish, a load of 1 150 N applied for a
period of 30 minutes.
5.2 Water Absorption The increase in mass shall be
0.75 percent, Max and on visual in spection after
immersion, it shall shown no impairment.
5.3 Impact Resistance
5.3.1 Seats When tested for impact, the seat, hinges
and buffers/distance pieces shall show no visible
damage.
5.3.2 Covers When tested for impact, the cover, cover
hinges and cover buffers shall show no visible damage.
5.4 Rigidity
5.4.1 Seats The maximum deflection shall be as given
below and on visual inspection after the load is removed,
the seats shall not show any fracture (See Annex F of
the standard)
Grade
Deflection, mm
1
12.5
2
20.0
5.4.2 Covers The maximum deflection shall be as
given below and on visual inspection after the load is
removed, the cover shall not show any fracture and no
part of the edge of the cover shall be pushed through
the seat opening
Grade
Deflection, mm
1
25
2
40
5.5 Staining by Seats and Covers There shall not
be any visible colour transfer to the white cloth.
5.6 Staining and/or Other Surface Deterioration of
Seats and Covers There shall not be any change of
colour or other adverse change in surface
characteristics.
5.7 Surface Hardness - Minimum value of Rockwell
Hardness Number (HR) shall be `L45'.
5.8 Endurance Test for Seats, Covers and Buffers
Neither seat, cover or buffer should be damaged or
dislocated. This is a type test.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2548 (Part 1) : 1996 Specification for plastic seats and covers for water
closets: Part 1 Thermoplastic seats and covers (fifth revision).
10.165
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
General
Blemish of Defect
Maximum Permitted
Wavy finish
Warpage
WC an and bidets
Squatting pans
Other appliances
Accessories
Discoloration
Polishing marks
A total of not over five; no grouping. For coloured appliances no blisters are permitted and pinholes are
in to a total of two.
Polishing marks
10.166
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 BLEMISHES OR DEFECTS PERMITTED IN WASH BASINS,
L A B O R ATO RY
SINKS AND DRINKING FOUNTAINS
Location
General
Blemish of Defect
Maximum Permitted
Wavy finish
Warpage :
Wash basins and drinking
fountains
Laboratory sinks
Discoloration
A total of not over two; no grouping for coloured appliances no blisters are permitted and pinhole limited to one
only.
Polishing marks
Spots, blisters and pinholes
Face of internal,
back and side
TABLE 3
Location
Blemish of Defect
Maximum Permitted
General
Warpage
Discoloration
Wavy finish
Spots, blisters and Pinholes
Visible Surface
10.167
SP 21 : 2005
6. Performance Requirements
For detailed information refer to IS 2556 (Part 1) : 1994 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous
china): Part 1 General requirements (third revision).
10.168
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Patterns
a) Pattern 1
4.
Flushing Tests
10.169
SP 21 : 2005
For detailed information, refer to IS 2556 (Part 2) : 1994 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part 2 Specific requirements of wash-down water closets (fourth revision).
10.170
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
10.171
SP 21 : 2005
2.2 Each pan except the rural pattern shall have an
integral flushing rim of the suitable.
2.3 Pan of 630 mm shall be of box rim type. Pan of sizes
smaller than 630 mm may be either box rim or open rim
type. The flushing rim and inlet shall be of self draining
type.
2.4 Trap with P or S outlet (withor without inspection
vent ) for long and orissa pattern. The trap shall conform
to IS 2556 ( Part 13) : 1973+.
3. Flushing Tests
3.1 Toilet Paper Test When repeated four times, the
pan shall discharge full charge of paper at least thrice.
3.2 Smudge Test Immediately after flushing there
shall be no smudge left on the pan.
3.3 Water Holding Capacity Test Shall be capable
of holding not less than 10 litres of water between the
normal water level and highest possible water level of
the pan installed.
All dimensions in millimetres.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2556 (Part 3) : 1994 Vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part 3
Specific requirements of squatting pan (fourth revision).
10.172
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
Flat Back
Angle Back
Size
660 460
(Surgeon's basin)
630 450
550 400
450 300
600 480
400 400
Note 2 For general requirements refer to Part 1 General requirements of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2556 (Part 4) : 1994 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part 4 Specific requirements of wash basins (third revision).
10.173
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
2.1 Sizes
Note 1 For general requirements refer to Part 1 General requirements of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2556 (Part 5) : 1994 Specification for Vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china): Part 5 Specific requirements of laboratory sinks (third revision).
10.174
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Note Where a closed channel with overflow is not provided a domed grating with perforatoins starting form the base and the
crown of which shall be 25 mm, minimum above surface shall be provided which
All dimension in milimetress
10.175
SP 21 : 2005
10.176
SP 21 : 2005
1.
PATTERN
REF TO FIG.
3.
4.
2.
10.177
DIMENSION
Height
H
Projection
P
Width
W
Distance
K, Min
440
440
265
265
355
315
140
140
410
590
265
375
305
395
100
100
345
420
270
190
410
590
265
375
305
395
100
100
SP 21 : 2005
REF IN FIG. 6
SIZE 1 / SIZE 2
d1)
40
d1)
50
REF IN
FIG. 7
SIZE 1
Size
675 32585
450100
Height
H
675
Projection of slab form
P
325
wall, Min
Width near the centre
W1
85
of the slab, Min
Width at the top end, Min W2
50
Width at the bottomend, Min W3
50
10.178
SIZE 2
825
825
450
100
75
55
SP 21 : 2005
2.2 Bowl urinals shall be provided with adequate means
of support preferably of the concealed type. Alternatively
minimum two fixing holes on each side of minimum
diameter 6.5 mm shall be provided.
2.3 Squatting plate type urinal shall be of one piece
construction having an itegral longitudinal flushing pipe.
2.4 When installed there should be no liquid left over
in the bottom of a pan of the urinal after flushing.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part 6) : 1995 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china) Part 6 specific requirements of urinals and partition plates (fourth revision).
10.179
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
10.180
SP 21 : 2005
Note Ovality is permissible within the variation allowed for the dimension
All dimensions in millimetres.
3A Traps for Long Pattern and Orissa Pattern Pans
10.181
SP 21 : 2005
Note Ovality is permissible within the variation allowed for the dimension.
All dimensions in millimetres.
3B Traps for Rural Pattern Orissa Pattern Pans
Note Ovality is permissible within the variation allowed for the dimension for inlet and outlet diameters.
All dimensions in millimetrrs.
10.182
SP 21 : 2005
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part 7) : 1995 vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part 7specific requirements of accessories for sanitary appliances. (third revision)
10.183
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
ii) Pattern 2
Single trap syphonic pattern
with 'S' trap or 'P' trap (See Fig. 1).
iii) Pattern 3 Washdown pattern with 'P' trap or
'S' trap (Fig. 2 or concealed 'S' trap see (Fig. 3).
iv) Pattern 4 Washdown pattern with horizontal
outlet see (Fig. 4).
Note1 For dimensions and tolerances, refer to 6, of the
standard.
2.1 Patterns
i) Pattern 1 Double trap syphonic pattern with 'S'
trap or 'P' trap (See Fig. 1).
10.184
SP 21 : 2005
FOR
FIG. 3 WASHDOWN WATER CLOSET FOR CLOSE COUPLED SUITE CONCEALED S TRAP
10.185
SP 21 : 2005
(1)
DESCRIPTION
(2)
i)
ii)
iii)
Pattern No.
Height H
Width W
iv)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
REF TO
FIGURES
SYPHONIC P OR S
OUTLET
(FIG. 1A)
WASHODOWN
OUTLET
(FIG. 2A AND 3A)
WASHDOWN
HORIZONTAL OUTLET
(FIG. 4A)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
39010
39010
1 and 2
39010
39010
3
39010
39010
D1
W1
W2
50 Min
50 Min
150 Min
110 Min
50 Min
150 Min
110 Min
D2
P
Q
415 to 445
290 Min
240 Min
415 to 445
290 Min
240 Min
415 to 445
290 Min
240 Min
D3
70 Max
70 Max
D4
T
80 Max
80 Max
75 Min
80 Max
75 Min
10.186
SP 21 : 2005
2.2 Shall be of one piece construction with not less
than two floor fixing holes having a minimum diameter
of 6.5 mm
2.3 Flushing rim and inlet shall be of self draining
type.
2.4 Low level coupled type flushing cistern with
discharge capacity not less than10 litres.
3. Finish Inside surface of water closet and trap
shall be glazed uniform and smooth in order to ensure
an efficient flush.
4.
Flushing Test
For detailed information, refer to IS 2556 (Part 8) : 1995 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous
china): Part 8 Specific requirements of pedestal close coupled washdown and syphonic water closets (fourth
revision).
10.187
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Patterns
10.188
SP 21 : 2005
For detailed information, Refer to IS : 2556 (Part 9) : 1995 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances
(vitreous china)Part 9 Specific requirements of pedestal type bidets (Fourth Revision).
10.189
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Flushing Test
4.1 Toilet Paper Test When repeated four times, the
pan shall discharge the full charge of the paper atleast
thrice.
4.2 Smudge Test Immediately after the flush there
shall be no smudge left in the pan.
4.3 Holding capacity Test Shall be capable of
holding not less than 10 litres of water between the
normal water level and the highest possible water level
of the pan.
4.4 Ball Test The ball shall be discharged in the
normal manner.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part 14) : 1995 Specification for Vitreous Sanitary Appliances
(Vitreous China): Part 14 Specific Requirements of Integrated Squatting Pans (First Revision)
10.190
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
2. 1 Sizes
Size 1 560 460 mm, 'P' or 'S' trap
Size 2 640 460 mm, 'P' or 'S' trap
10.191
SP 21 : 2005
2.4 Antisiphonage vent horn shall be provided where
required by local authority.
2.5 Depth of water seal shall in no case be less than 50
mm.
3. Finish The inside of water closets and traps
shall be glazed uniform and smooth in order to ensure
an efficient flush. The grooved part of the outlet of the
closets and that of the bends where provided shall not
be glazed.
4. Flushing Test
Note 1 For method of test, refer to 8 of the standard.
Note 2 For general requirements refer to Part 1 General requirements of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2556 (Part15) : 1995 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous
china), Part 15: specific equirements of universal water closets (first revision).
10.192
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
10.193
SP 21 : 2005
For detailed information, refer to IS 5455: 1969. Specification for cast iron steps for manholes.
10.194
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Weight 75 kg minimum.
For detailed information, refer to IS 5961 : 1970 Specification for cast iron gratings or drainage purposes.
10.195
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Construction
10.196
SP 21 : 2005
4.3 Freedom from Self Siphonage The siphonic
system shall be capable of being rapidly brought into
action when the water is at the working water level, but
shall not self-siphon or leak into the flush pipe when
the water is up to 1 cm above the invert of the overflow
pipe.
4.4 Reduced Water Level The discharge shall operate
satisfactorily when the cistern is filled to a level up to 1
cm below the working water level.
4.5 Discharge Capacity Cistern of 5 litres and 10
litres capacities, when required to give a full flush, shall
respectively discharge 5 litres and 10 litres with variation
of 0.5 litres. Dual-flush cistern of 10 litres capacity
shall discharge alternatively a short flush of 5 0.5
litres. Dual flush western 6/3 liture capacity shall
discharge 6 0.5 liters and atternatively a half flush of
3 0.5 litre
4.6 Discharge Rate The discharge rate shall be 10
0.5 litres within 6 seconds and 5 0.5 litres and 60.5
litre within 6 s and 3 0.5 litres within 35 for liters of
For detailed information, refer to IS 7231 : 1994 Specification for plastic flushing cisterns for water closets and
urinals (second revision).
10.197
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Material
2.1 Glass Fibre As per IS 11320: 1997* and IS
11551 : 1996+
Low alkali glass with glass content of the laminate
minimum 30 percent by weight.
FUNCTIONAL DIMENSIONS
DESCRIPTION
REF IN FIG. 1
(1)
(2)
DIMENSIONS (mm)
(3)
A
B
C
D
125
200
70
6-8
E
F
G
H
J
K
425
25-28
320
40 Min
77, ID
20-25
10.198
SP 21 : 2005
2.2. Polyster Resin Unsaturated polyster resin shall
be isopthalic type
2.3. Sheet Moulding Compound (SMC) Shall be of
low profile grade and shall consist of glass fibre
reinforcements pre-impregnated with filled unsaturated
polyester resin system in sheet form.
2.4 Surface Coat
4. Performance requirements
4.1 Warpage Feeler guage of 4mm shall not slide
under it without application of force.
4.2 Thickness See 3.1
4.3 Impact Resistance Shall not show any cracks in
the surface coat.
4.4 Crazing Shall not show cracks or crazing after
oven test.
a) Gel coat.
b) Polyurethane resin coat
3. Thickness and Mass
3.1 Thickness
For detailed information, refer to IS 11246 : 1992 Specification for glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (FRP)
squatting pans (first revision).
10.199
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR COMPONENT PARTS OF GATE, GLOBE AND CHECK VALVES
SL. NO.
COMPONENT
MATERIAL
(1)
(2)
(3)
I)
Body
ii)
Bonnet or cover
iii)
iv)
a)Brass
b) Leaded tin bronze
a) leaded tin bronze
b) Forged brass
c) Brass
a) leaded tin broze
b) Extruded brass rod
c) Forged brass
d) Brass
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
Spring
Seating ring
* Steel, aluminium alloy, zink and non metallic material may be permitted if required.
10.200
SP 21 : 2005
4.2 Globe Valve
7. Dimension
MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS OF BODYAND
BONNET
All dimensions in millimetres
Class of
Valve
1.7 1.7
2.0 2.0
10
15 20 25
32 40
5 0 6 5 8 0 100
8. Tests
8.1 Material Test shall conform to the prescribed
standards.
For details information, refer to IS 778 : 1984. Specification for Copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for
water works purposes (Fourth revision).
10.201
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
2. Nominal sizes
a) Bib taps shall be 8, 10, 15, 20 and 25 mm.
b) Stop valves shall be 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50
mm. Nominal size of the bib tap and stop valves
shall be designated by the nominal bore of the
socket or pipe outlet to which the tap or valve is
normally fitted.
3. Materials
Sl No.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Component
Material
Body and bonnet a) Cast brass
b) Leaded tin
bronze
Spindle nuts
Brass (extruded
rolled or forged)
Gland Crutch
Brass (extruded,
rolled, cast, die
(handle) cast
washer,
plate etc.
Washer
Leaded tin bronze
mm
Externally
Threaded
45
50
60
70
85
100
110
135
65
75
85
100
125
135
145
175
Mixed
Ends
55
62
70
85
105
115
125
155
Tolerance 3mm
Note For detailed dimensions, refer to the standard.
For details information, refer to IS 781 : 1984 Specification for Cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop
valves for water services (third revision).
10.202
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
RATE OF
FLOW L/MIN
PERMISSIBLE
HEAD LOSS
FITTING
IN
m
15
5
10
15
1.0
1.5
2.5
20
20
25
30
1.5
2.0
3.0
25
40
45
2.5
3.0
For detailed information, refer to IS 1701: 1960 Specification for mixing valves for ablutionary and domestic
purposes.
10.203
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Construction
5.1 The inlet shank shall be horizontal in case of 15 mm
size it may be either horizontal or vertical.
5.2 The lever may be made in one piece or the short aim
and rod may be seperately constructed.
Classification
S L . NO
(1)
COMPONENT
(2)
MATERIAL
(3)
i)
a) Cast Brass
4. Materials
Lever rod
Brass rod
iii)
a) Brass rod
b) Leaded tin bronze
iv)
Washer
Synthetic rubber
v)
Inlet pipe
Brass
For detailed information, refer to IS 1703: 1999 Specification for water fittings copper alloy float Valves
(horizontal plunger type) (fourth revision)
10.204
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
COMPONENT
(2)
i)
ii)
Spindle
iii)
Spindle spring
iv)
v)
vi)
a) Mild steel
b) Leaded tin bronze
a) Phosphor bronze
wire
b) Spring steel wire
c) Any corrosion
resisting alloy having a
tensile strength of
phosphor
bronze
wire.
Lead tin bronze
Brass
As specified
MATERIAL
(3)
vii)
a) Vulcanized fibre
b) Any other equally
suitable material
For details information, refer to IS 1711 : 1984 Specification for self-closing taps for water supplypurposes
(second revision)
10.205
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
IS
4. Construction
SL. NO.
i)
COMPONENT
Body, body components,
capstan head and washer
plate
MATERIAL
a) Cast brass
b) Leaded tin bronze
ii)
a) Brass rod
(extruded or rolled)
b) Brass
For detailed information, refer to IS 1975 : 1982 Specification forPillar taps for water supply purposes (second
revision)
10.206
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Nominal Size
8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm.
ii)
COMPONENT
(2)
Body, plug and
cap
Washer plate
and nut
iii)
Resilient washer
iv)
Copper washer
MATERIAL
(3)
Leaded tin
bronze
Brass
(extrudedrolled, cast,
diecast) Leaded brass
Leather Vulcanized
fibre, rubber
Copper
For detailed informaton, refer to IS 2692 : 1989 Specification for ferrules for water services (second revision)
10.207
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
2.5 The larger end of the plug taper shall project 6 1.5
mm from the body.
10.208
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 3311 : 1979 Specification for waste plug and its accessories for sinks and
wash-basins (first revision).
10.209
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Dimensions
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF WASHERS
Nominal
Size of
Tap/Valve
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
2.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.0
6.5
6.5
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
10
14.3
15.9
19.0
25.4
33.0
40.1
47.7
63.5
14.5
16.1
19.3
25.6
33.6
40.6
48.3
64.2
* A tolerance of
3. Materials
a) Synthetic or natural vulcanized rubber
b) Vegetable tanned hydraulic leather The
moisture content shall be between 15 percent
and 20 percent.
c) Polyethylene high density
d) Vulcanized fibre The material shall comply with
the following requirements :
a) Tensile strength, Min 55 MPa;
b) Density, Min
1.10g/cm3;
c) Shear strength, Min
55 MPa
+ 0.5
0.0
mm shall be permitted.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4346: 1982 Specification for washers for use with fittings for water services
(first revision)
10.210
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500
and 600 mm.
The nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of the
water way. The actual bore at any point shall not be less
than the nominal size.
4. Materials
TABLE 1MATERIALS FOR DIFFERENT COMPONENT
PARTS OF REFLUX VALVES
Component
Material
(2)
(3)
i)
Grey cast
iron
ii)
Stainless steel
(1)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
3. Nominal Sizes
Sl. No.
5. Manufacture
Leaded in bronze
leaded tin bronze
Leaded tin bronze
Leaded tin bronze
Bolts
Nuts
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
xi)
x)
Gaskets
Hinges
Rubber
Grey cast iron
standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 5312 (Part1) : 1984. Specification for Swing check type reflux (nonreturn) valves for water works purposes- Part 1- single door pattern (first revision).
10.211
SP 21 : 2005
Note For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to
the standard.
7. Testing
7.1 Hydrostatic Body Test Shall not show any
leakage or permanent distortion under the specified
pressure .
7.2 Hydrostatic Seat Test shall show no leakage
when subjected to the prescribed pressure.
For detailed information, refer to IS 5312 (Part1) : 2004. Specification for swing check type reflux (nonreturn) valves for water works purposes Part 1- Single door pattern (second revision).
10.212
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Nominal Sizes400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1000, 1100 and
1 200 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the nominal
bore of the water way.
Component
(1)
(2)
i)
v)
vi)
vii)
Flange jointing
ii)
iii)
iv)
4. Materials
Sl. No.
Material
(3)
Grey cast iron
High tensile brass
Carbon steel
Carbon
steel
Leaded tin bronze
Leaded tin rings
bronze
Rubber material
7. Testing:
7.2 Body Test Shall not show leakage or permanent
distortion of any coponent when subjected to the
prescribed test.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5312 (Part 2) : 1986 Specification for swing check type reflux (non-return)
valves for waterworks purposes Part 2- Multi-door door pattern.
10.213
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Nominal Sizes
Pillar tap
Bib tap
Combination tap assembly
Stop valve
Angle stop valve
2. Materials:
4. Construction
Sl.No. Component
Material
1.
a) Castbrass
b) Die cast and back
nuts brass
c) Forged brass
d) Leaded tin bronze
e) Brass rods
f) Brass tubes
g) Copper tubes
2.
3.
Flanges
15 mm
15 mm
15 mm
15 mm and
20 mm
15 mm and
20 mm
a) Castrass
b) Die cast brass
c) Forged brass
d) Leaded tin bronze
e) Brass rods
f) Brass sheet
Spindle, glands,
washer plate, nuts,
screws and pin
a) Brass rods
(Extruded or rolled)
b) Forged brass
4.
a) Phosphor bronze
sheet
b) Phosphor bronze
wire
c) Stainless steel
5.
O ring
a) Synthetic rubber
6.
a) Acrylo Nitrillebuta
diene rubber
b) Neoprene rubber
c) Synthetic butadiene
rubber (S.B.R.)
7.
a) Cast brass
b) Die cast brass
c) Forged brass
d) Leaded tin bronze
e) Brassrods
f) Zinc
g) Plastics
10.214
SP 21 : 2005
6. Finish The significant surfaces of taps,
combination tap assembly and stop valves shall be
nickle-chromium plated. However, the body of concealed
stop valve and side stop valve of pillar mounting
combination tap assembly may be polished bright or
may have an unpolished surface, as 'Cast' finish.
7. Performance Tests
For detailed information, refer to IS 8931 : 1993. Specification for copper alloy fancy single taps, combination
tap assembly and stop valves for water services (first revision)
10.215
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal Sizes
mm
200 to 300
Up to and including150
3. Nominal Sizes :
15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250
and 300 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the
nominal bore of thewater way.
Note For dimensions, refer to Figs 1 to 5 and Table 2 to 5
of the Standard.
4. Material
Sl.No. Component
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
(2)
Body, bonnet,
handwheel,gland
(one piece) and back
seat intergal
a) Fasteners/bolting
b) Nut
Stem
Body seat
ring/disc
facing ring
Solid disc
with integralface
Disc with separate
facing rings
Material
(3)
Cast iron
Carbon steel
-doa) High tensile brass
b) Stainless Steel
a) Leaded tin
bronze
b) Stainless Steel
a) Leaded tin
bronze
b) Stainless Steel
Cast iron
Glad packing
viii)
Bonnet
gasket
Disc stem nut,
back seat bushing
(where separate),
gland (two piece design)
Yoke bush
ix)
vii)
x)
5. Manufacture
5.1 Area of the body end parts shall not be less than
the area of the circle of diameter equivalent to the
nominal size of the valve except that this area may be
reduced by not more than 15 percent though the seats
to permit use of disc guides from below.
5.2 The stems shall have trapezoidal threads.
5.3 The overall heights of the valves shall not exceed
the specified valves.
6. Coating Shall be smooth glossy and sufficiently
tenacious so as not to flow when exposed to
temperature of 77C and not become so brittle to a
temperature of 15C so as to chip off when scratched
lightly with the point of a pen knife.
7. Testing Each valve shall be subjected to
hydrostatic test as per following Table 1 and the value
shall show no sign of leakage.
10.216
SP 21 : 2005
Test
(2)
1.6
Body test
Seat test
Back seat test
(Where specified)
2.4
1.6
2.4
5
2
5
1.0
Body test
Seat test
Back seat test
(Where specified)
1.5
1.0
1.5
5
2
5
For detailed information, refer to IS 9338 : 1984 Specification for Cast Iron screw-down stop valves and stops
and check valves for water works purposes (first revision)
10.217
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Materials
Sl.No. Component
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
Material
4. Construction
4.1 Body and components shall be so designed as to
provide ample. resiotance to distortion under maximum
working pressure.
20
25
1.58
32
2.65
40
3.46
50
4.89
For detailed information, refer to IS 9739 : 1981 specification for pressure reducing valves for domestic water
supply system.
10.218
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Sl.No. Component
Material
(1)
i)
(2)
Body of flush valve
(3)
a) Cast brass
b) Die casting brass
ii)
Flush pipe
iii)
iv)
Washers
Springs
v)
vi)
Stop valve
Spindle to stop valve
lever or flush valve
5.
0.5 litre
Rubber
a) Phosphor bronze
b) Stainless steel
Cast brass
Extruded brass
For detailed information, refer to IS 9758:1981 Specification for flush valves and fittings for water closets and
urinals.
10.219
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
(1)
i)
Particulars
(2)
15
20
25
32
40
50
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
305
Dia of float HP
127
152
203
229
254
LP114
127
178
203
203
254
ii)
Wallthickness, (Min)
1.5
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
iii)
Tapping of boss
iv)
M 8 1.25
M 8 1.25 M 1 2 1.75
M 14 2
1.50
1.50
1.75
2.0
2.5
M 14 2 M16 2
2.0
2.0
(below threads)
v)
2.00
2.00
2.25
2.50
2.50
2.50
vi)
8.0
8.0
13.0
16.0
16.0
19.0
For detailed information, refer to IS 9762 : 1994 Specification for polyethylene floats (spherical) for float valves
(first revision)
10.220
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Component
Recommended Material
Body of Tap/valve
Pressure
Temperature
90 0 C
Maximum : 65 C
Lower limit: as for installations.
10.221
SP 21 : 2005
7. Test
7.1 Resistance to Residual Chlorine in Water
Plastic taps and valves shall remian unaffected after
being immersed in a 10 percent solution of hydrochloric
acid for 24 hours.
7.2 Drip Proofness Test This test shall be carried
out by applying a hydraulic pressure of 0.1MPa
maintained for 15 minutes. There shall be no leakage of
water during the test. Alternatively, the test can be
performed using 0.04 MPa of pneumatic pressure.
7.3 Thermal Shock Test This test shall be carried
out by dipping the tap, valve in water maintained at a
temperature not more than 65 2 C for one hour and
then suddenly quenching in water with temperature
not more than 15 C and repeating the operation for 10
times. There shall be no defect in the tap or valve at the
end of the test.
For detailed information, refer to IS 9763 : 2000 Specification for plastic bib taps, pillar taps angle valves and
stop valves for hot and cold water services (second revision).
10.222
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Construction
2. Classification
a)
b)
3. Size 15 mm nominal
4.
Material
1.
Polyacetal
2.
3.
4.
Diaphragm
Diaphragm pin
Polyacetal
or
polypropylene or
polypropathene
Synthetic rubber
Synthetic rubber
Stainless steel or any
other non-corrosive
material or
polyacetal.
For detailed information, refer to IS 12234 : 1988 Specification for plastic equilibrium float valve for cold water
services.
10.223
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Materials
Sl. No Components/Parts
(1)
1.
2.
3.
(2)
Valve body,
inlet shank
vale seat
and back nut
Discharge horn
(if provided)
Diaphragm
+5
0
+0.025
0
Material
(3)
Polyacetal
Polyacetal
or Polypropylene
or polyethylene
or Acrylonitrile
Butadiene
Styrene (ABS)
or Ethylene Vinyl
Acetate (EVA)
or any other suitable
material
Synthetic rubber
3. Nominal Size 15 mm
4. Construction
4.1 Inlet shank shall be not less than 48 mm in length.
4.2 Valves shall be supplied with a high pressure (HP)
or a low pressure (LP) seal.
4.3 Diaphragms made of synthetic rubber shall have
the form and dimension as required for the operation of
the valve.
4.4 Float aim and assembly shall have not more than
25mm, Inlet diflection after the test additional deflection
after boading for 28 days shall not be more than 12mm.
5. Performance Tests
Note For method of test refer to Appendices Aot C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 13049 : 1991 Specification for diaphragm type (plastric body) float
operated valves for cold water services.
10.224
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Material
Body, bonnet,
cover stuffing
box,disc, wedge
and hinge
Gland, gland nut,
ball, stem, stem
nut, hinge pin
Forged brass
Handwheel
Gland packing
TABLE 1 MATERIALS
Component
Forged brass
or free cutting
brass
Cast iron
(see Note)
a) Hemp and jute
b) Asbestos
c) Any other equally
efficient packing
material suitable for
cold water
Phosphor
bronze wire
a)
b)
4. Types
a) Shell Test
15 ses.
15 ses.
Gate valves
Globe valves
10.225
SP 21 : 2005
Minimum
Wall
Stem
Thickness
(1)
mm
8
10
15
20
25
32
40
50
(2)
mm
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.1
2.4
2.5
2.8
Minimum
Mini mum
Mini mum Length of
Across Flat or OD
Threads at Ends
Diameter
of Sealing Face at Ends
(3)
mm
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.5
8.5
9.5
10.5
12.0
(4)
mm
18
22
26
32
39
49
55
68
(5)
mm
7.0
7.5
9.5
10.5
12.0
13.5
13.5
17.0
GATE VALVES
GLOBE VALVES
(2)
(3)
mm
43
43
52
56
65
73
76
90
mm
47
50
60
70
80
95
110
125
HORIZONTAL LIFT
CHECK VALVES
(4)
mm
47
50
60
70
80
95
110
125
VERTICALLIFT
CHECK VALVES
(5)
SWING CHECK
CHECK VALVES
(6)
mm
47
50
52
60
63
76
86
97
mm
--58
72
83
----
Whenever dimensions are not given, those sizes are not generally manufactured in those designs.
For detailed information, refer to IS 13114: 1991 Forged brass gate, globe and check valves for water works
purposes.
10.226
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
750
900
1 000
1 100
1 200
1 400
1 500
1 600
1 800
2 000
2 250
2 500
Sl. No.
(1)
1.
10.227
2.
Item
(2)
Thimble, frame, guide,
extension guide, slide
(shutter), gear box,
pedestal, stem guide,
bracket, wedging devices,
flush bottom seal
support bar
Yoke (Bridge)
3. a) Wedges
b) Wedge facings
Material
(3)
Cast iron
SP 21 : 2005
6. Surface Preparation and Painting After cleaning,
the surfaces shall be primed by application of either one
shop coat of zinc chromate or coaltar coating suitable
for use in potable water and applied. After painted
surfaces are dry, the machined or bearing surfaces and
the holes, both plain and threaded, shall be coated with
grease to offer temporary protection to the surfaces
until the time of installation.
Surfaces of thimble and stem guides which would
be in contact with the concrete shall not be coated.
7. Manual Lifting Devices : Shall be ungeared or
geared operatable by handwheel or a cracle handle.
Geared mechanism may be either single ordual speed as
necessary.
8. Shop Testing
a) Seat Clearance Check
b) Smooth Movement Test
c) Shop Leakage Test
8.1. Hydrostatic Test : Water pressure of 1.5 times the
unbalanced specified maximum operating hed shall be
applied to the sluice gates in closed position for a period
of 5 minutes. Under this test there shall be no leakage
through the metal nor shall anypart be permanently
deformed.
For detailed information, refer to IS 13349 : 1992 Specification for single faced cast iron
thimble mounted sluice gates.
10.228
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMMARY OF
Types
a) Single Air valve :
:
b) Double Air valve :
Material
i)
Body, Cover,
Grey cast iron
Valve, Stuffing
box,Valve guide, Cowl,
gland, cap, Joint supprting
ii)
Stem
iii)
Low Pressure
Natural
rubber
6. Service Application
v)
vi)
Stem nut
Leaded tin
bronze
vii)
viii)
Bolts
Carbon steel
10.229
SP 21 : 2005
ix)
x)
Nuts
Gasket
Carbon steel
Rubber
xi)
Gland packing
Jute/hemp
xii)
Float (Low
pressure
orifice)
Timber core
with vulcanite coating
xiii)
Float (High
pressure
orifice)
Float Guide
Timber core
with vulcanite coating
Leaded tin
bronze
xiv)
15
25
40
50
80
100
150
200
PN PN PN PN
PN
1.0 1.6 1.0 1.6
1.0
6
8 6
8 6
8
8
10 8 10 8
- 9 10 9
- - 12
- - 10
- - 13
- - 14.5
15
25
40
50
80
100
150
200
75
100
100
100
-----
40
75
75
75
-----
--100
100
100
125
125
140
--75
75
100
125
200
250
--90
100
115
125
150
150
--55
75
100
125
200
250
PN
PN
PN
1.6
1.0
1.6
- 10
8
10
10
9
10
10
12
12
10
12
16
13
16
18 14.5
18
For detailed information, refer to IS 14845:2000 Resilient sealed cast Iron air relief valves for water works
purposes
10.230
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal Sized
mm
PN 1.0
50 to 1200
PN 1.6
50 to 600
3. Nominal Sizes 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150,200,250,
300, 350, 400,450, 500, 600, 700, 750,800, 900, 1000,1100
and 1 200 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the nominal
bore of the waterway. The actual bore at any point shall
not be less than the nominal size.
4. Materials
Sl.No. Component
Material
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
Body, Bonnet,
Dome, Stool
cover, Wedge,
Stuffing box,
gland, thrust
Plate and Cap
Hand wheel
Stem
Wedge nut,
Shoe, Channel
Body seat ring,
Wedge facing
ring and Bushes
Bolts
Nuts
Gasket
Gland Packing
Gear
Gear Housing
Pinion & Pinion
Shaft
5. Manufacture
5.1 The portion of bonnet (gland and stuffin box) which
come in contact with spindle shall be provided
cohenever required with bushings of minimum 3 mm
thickness and specified material.
5.2 Valves shall be filled withdouble faced cast iron wedge
made in one piece and having twomachired facing rings.
5.3 Stems shall have machine cut single start the wedge
can be raised to a position so as to ensure full flow
passage through the valve.
Note : For detailed dimeension and typical sketches refer to
the standard.
TEST
PN Rating
PN 1.0
PN 1.6
TEST
Valve Size
(mm)
Body
Seat
Body
Seat
Test Pressure
MPa (Gauge)
1.5
1.0
2.4
1.6
Test Duration
(Minutes)
50 to1200
Body
5
Seat
2
7.2. Liquid Penetrant Test After forming of a collar
no stem shall show any sign of flaw when subjected to
liquid penetrant flaw detection test in accordance with
IS : 3658.
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b)
Measuring chamber
(Semi positive meters only)
Gears, gearshaft and pinions
a) For use under water
b) For use above water
c) Dia
Materials
a) Bronze
b) Brass
a) Bronze
b) Brass
c) Plastic
a) Plastics
b) Brass
c) Stainless steel
a) Ebonite
(for piston only)
b) Vulcanite
(for piston only)
c) Plastics
a) Brass
b)Bronze
c) Plastics
i) StainlessSteel
ii) Nickel alloy
iii) Plastics
i) Brass rod
ii) Brass sheet
(for gears only)
iii) Stainless
iv) Plastics
Copper duly
Enamelled or
powder coated
7. Technical Characteristics
7.1 Pressure Tightness Meter shall be able to
withstand constantly without defects, leakage,
seepage,the continous water pressure of
10.232
i)
ii)
SP 21 : 2005
7.2 Loss of Pressure Shall not exceed 0.025 Mpa at
the maximum flow rate, Qmax.
8. Metrological Characterists
Table 2
METER SIZE
THREADS
NOMINAL
FLOW RATE,
QN IN KL/H
MINIMUM LENGTH OF
OVERALL DIMENSIONS
(SEE FIG. 1 OF THE STANDARD)
THREADS ON EITHER
END OF BODY
(1)
15
20
25
40
50
(2)
G B
G1 B
G 1B
G2 B
G 2B
(3)
1.5
2.5
3.5
10
15
Length
With
nipples
Without
nipples
(a)
(b)
Preferred
(4)
10
12
12
13
15
(5)
12
14
16
20
25
(6)
250
290
380
430
470
(7)
165
190
260
300
330
Width W
(Max)
H1
Height
H2
Alternate
(8)
110
165
-
(9)
100
130
170
210
270
(10)
50
60
65
75
115
(11)
180
240
260
300
300
Tolerance : On the overall length shall be 5 mm for meter with nipples and +0,-2 mm for meters without nipple.
Note : Meters shall be supplied with nuts and nipples unless specified otherwise by thepurchaser.
(1)
15
20
25
40
50
Class A
(2)
60
100
140
400
600
Class B
(3)
30
50
70
200
300
Class A
(4)
150
250
350
1 000
1 500
Class B
(5)
120
200
280
800
1 200
MAXIMUM
FLOW RATE
QMAX KL/H
(6)
3
5
7
20
30
Note: For methods of tests, refer to IS 6784 :1996 Method of performance testing of water meters(domestic type) (second
revision)
10.233
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.1 Construction
a) Cast iron boxes Minimum thickness of box
shall be 8 mm for Size 1 and 10 mm for Size2.
3. Dimensions
Minimum inside clear dimensions :
Size
1
2
Length
mm
Width
mm
600
900
600
600
4. Manufacture
*
Height
mm
500
600
For detailed information, refer to IS 2104 : 1981 Specification for water meter boxes (domestic type)
( first revision)
10.234
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal
Size
50
80
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
Maximum
Registration
Not to be Less than
100 000 000
100 000 000
100 000 000
100 000 000
1000000000
1000 000 000
1000 000 000
1000 000 000
10 000 000 000
10 000 000 000
4. Performance Requirementst
4.1. Temperature : Up to 45oC.
4.2. Hydrostatic Test : Shall satisfactorily withstand a
pressure of 1.6 MPa (16 kgf/cm2).
4.3. Capacity Ratings :
Nomininal Capacity Ratings
Nominal
Size
mm
50
80
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
500
Vane-Wheel Type
30 000
50 000
70 000
150 000
250 000
400 000
500 000
-
mm
50
80
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
500
Helical Type
20 000
62 000
100 000
250 000
400 000
550 000
750 000
1 000 000
1 500 000
2 500 000
mm
Vane-Wheel Type
50
80
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
500
250
500
700
000
400
200
400
-
1
2
3
6
Helical Type
500
1 000
1 500
3 500
5 500
9 000
14 000
20 000
25 000
35 000
Helical Type
50 000
125 000
200 000
500 000
800 000
1 100 000
1 500 000
2 000 000
3 000 000
5 000 000
For detailed information, refer to IS 2373 : 1981. Specification for water meters (bulk type)
10.235
SECTION 11
BUILDERS HARDWARE
11.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
IS
11.4
IS
11.5
IS
205 : 1992
11.6
IS
206 : 1992
11.7
IS
208 : 1996
11.8
IS
281 : 1991
Mild steel sliding door bolts for use with padlocks (third revision)
11.9
IS
362 : 1991
11.10
IS
363 : 1993
11.11
IS
364 : 1993
11.12
IS
452 : 1973
11.13
IS
453 : 1993
11.14
IS
1019 : 1974
11.15
IS
1341 : 1992
11.16
IS
1823 : 1980
11.17
IS
1837 : 1966
11.18
IS
2209 : 1976
11.19
IS:
2681 : 1993
Non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops) for use with pad locks
(third revision)
11.20
IS
3564 : 1995
11.21
IS
3818 : 1992
11.22
IS
3828 : 1966
Ventilator chains
11.23
IS
3843 : 1995
11.24
IS
3847 : 1992
11.25
IS
4621 : 1975
Indicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories (first revision)
11.26
IS
4948 : 2002
11.27
IS
4992 : 1975
11.28
IS
5187 : 1972
11.29
IS
5899 : 1970
Bathroom latches
11.30
IS
5930 : 1970
11.31
IS
6315 : 1992
11.32
IS
6318 : 1971
11.33
11.2
SP 21 : 2005
IS
6343 : 1982
Title
Page
11.34
IS
6607 : 1972
11.35
IS
7196 : 1974
Hold fast
11.36
IS
7197 : 1974
Double action floor springs (without oil check) for heavy doors
11.37
IS
7534 : 1985
11.38
IS
7540 : 1974
11.39
IS
8760 : 1978
11.40
IS
9106 : 1979
11.41
IS
9131 : 1979
Rim locks
11.42
IS
10019 : 1981
11.43
IS
10090 : 1982
Numericals
11.44
IS 10342 : 1982
11.45
IS
12817 : 1997
11.46
IS
12867 : 1989
11.47
IS
14912 : 2001
11.48
11.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Description
ii)
4. Dimensions
4.1 Barrel Tower Bolts 75, 100 ,125 ,150,175, 200,
225, 250 and 300 mm sizes
4.2 Semi-Barrel Tower Bolts 75, 100, 125, 150, 175,
200, 225,250, 300, 375 and 450 mm sizes.
4.3 Riveted or Spot Welded Tower Bolts 100, 125,
150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 375, 450, 600, 750 and 900
mm sizes.
4.4 Skeleton Tower Bolts 375, 450, 600, 750 and 900
mm sizes.
Note For detailed dimensions and tolerances on them, refer
to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 204 (Part 1) : 1991 Specification for tower bolts:Part 1 Ferrous metal (fifth
revision).
11.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Brass sheets
Cast brass
Extruded brass
Zinc base alloy die casting.
Type Description
a) Barrel Tower Bolts
1
Brass barrel tower bolts with cast brass
barrel and rolled or cast brass bolts.
2
Brass barrel tower bolts with barrel of
extruded sections of brass and rolled or
drawn brass.
3
Brass barrel tower bolts with brass sheet
barrel and rolled or drawn brass bolt.
5. Finish
4. Dimensions
4.1 Barrel Tower Bolts 75, 100 ,125, 150,175, 200,
225, 250 and 300 mm sizes
4.2 Skeleton Tower Bolts 375, 450, 600,750, and 900
mm sizes.
Note For detailed dimensions and tolerances on them, refer
to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.
11.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Requirements
a)
b)
c)
d)
Pin
3. Materials
Flap
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
For detailed information, refer to IS 205 :1992 Specification for non-ferrous metal but thinges (fifth revision).
11.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Dimensions
2. Types
Light weight
Medium weight
Heavy weight
Medium weight
Heavy weight
3. Materials
i)
ii)
4.1 Light Weight Tee Hinges 75, 100, 125, 150, 200,
250, 300, 350, and 400 mm sizes.
4.3 Heavy Weight Tee Hinges 150, 200, 250, 300, 350,
400, 450, 500 and 600 mm sizes.
4.4 Light Weight Strap Hinges 75, 100, 125, 150, 200,
250, 300, 350 and 400 mm sizes.
4.5 Medium Weight Strap Hinges 75, 100, 125, 150,
200, 250, 300, 350, 450 and 500 mm
4.6 Heavy Weight Strap Hinges 150, 200, 250, 300,
350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm sizes.
Note For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to Tables 2
to 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 206 : 1992 Specification for tee and strap hinges (fourth revision).
11.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Cast
Type 2
Pressed oval
Type 3
Type 4
Fabricated
Dimensions
mm
Up to 100
101 to 200
201 and above
5. Finish
Type 1
3. Materials
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Type 4
Tolerance
mm
1
1.5
2
Note The material used shall comply with the requirements given in Table 1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 208 : 1996 Specification for door handles (fifth revision).
11.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Sizes
a) Plate type sliding bolts 150, 200, 250, 300,
375 and 450 mm.
b) Clip or bolt type sliding bolts 200, 250, 300,
375 and 450 mm
2. Types
i)
ii)
3. Sizes
(a) Plate type sliding bolts 150, 200, 250, 300,
375 and 450 mm; and
6. Finish
i)
ii)
4. Materials
Mild Steel
Mild Steel Wire
Mild Steel Rod
Note For details of material see 5 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 281 : 1991 Specification for mild steel sliding door bolt for use with
padlocks (third revision).
11.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Dimensions
3.1 Alluminium Alloy Parliament Hinges 50, 65, 75,
100, 125, 150, 175, and 200 mm.
11.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
Type
4. Finish
Description
For detailed information,refer to IS 363 : 1993 Specification for hasps and staples (fourth revision).
11.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.2 Tolerances
Dimension
mm
2. Types
a)
b)
c)
b)
Up to and including 5
0.2
0.5
including 25
Above 25
3. Materials
a)
Tolerance
mm
For detailed information,refer to IS 364 : 1993 Specification for fan light catch (third revision).
11.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Performance Tests
a) The tail rod when pushed through to the
maximum possible limit and released 100 times
in quick succession the spring shall show no
sign of damage or any permanent set.
b)
4. Requirements
a)
b)
c)
d)
Note 1 For details regarding material of door spring rat-tail type see 3 of the standard.
Note 2 For detailed dimension of door springs see Fig.1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 452 : 1973 Specification for door spring rat- tail type ( second revision).
11.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
a)
b)
3. Sizes
Size of Spring
Hinge
mm
Size of Blank
Hinge
mm
100
70
125
75
150
75
6. Finish
a) Mild Steel Hinges Stove-enamelled black
or copper-oxidized.
b) Brass Hinges Satin, bright, nickel plated,
or copper-oxidized.
For detailed information, refer to IS 453 : 1993 Specification for double-acting spring hinges (third revision).
11.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Size
75
75
60
14
100
100
70
20
125
125
70
20
150
150
70
20
3. Types
Type 1 Opens when handle is turned in one
direction only.
Type 2 Opens when hande is turned in any
direction.
3.1 Type 1 rim latches shall either be left-hand or righthand.
4. Sizes 75, 100, 125 and 150 mm denoted by overall
length of the body measured from the outside face of
the fore end to the rear end.
5. Material Shall be of the mild steel, brass,
aluminium alloy or zinc base alloy.
Length Breadth
Depth
Tolerance + 1 mm
6. Finish
Brass latches
Aluminium latches
Steel latches
Note For requirements for material of rim latches see Table 1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1019 : 1974 Specification for rim latches (second revision)
11.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b)
c)
d)
e)
3. Materials
i)
ii)
Pin
Mild steelwire
For detailed information, refer to IS 1341 : 1992 Specification for steel butt hinges (sixth revision).
11.16
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.1 Tolerances
a) On overall length of cover plate 0.5 mm
b) On thickness of cover plate + 0.3 mm
and 0mm.
2. Materials
a) For Body or Housing and Cover Plate
Aluminium alloy (pressure die) castings or
aluminium alloy sheets or brass sheet or cast
brass or brass gravity die casting.
b) For Spring Phosphor bronze or hard drawn
steel wire.
c) For TongueAluminium alloy pressure die
casting or cast brass or nylon or plastic.
3. Requirements
a) Four countersunk holes for fixing door stopper
to floor.
b) Body or housing shall be cast in one piece and
fixed to cover plate by brass or mild steel
screws.
5. Manufacture
5.1 The stoppers shall be well made and free from
defects likely to prevent its correct fixing or affect
adversely its reliability in use.
5.2 Body or housing shall be cast in one piece and
fixed to cover plate by brass or mild steel screws.
5.3 There shall be four countersunk holes for fixing
stoppers to the floor.
5.4 On the extreme end, a rubber piece shall be attached
to absorb shocks due to pulling action of door. The
rubber used shall comply with the following
requirements:
a) Relative density, Max
b) Hardness
c) Ageing for 24 h at
100 10C
30
35
40 45
140 140
150150
40
40
40 40
4.5 for castings
3 for sheet metal
1.3
60 5
i) Change in
initial hardness
+5, 0
ii) Shall not develop
brittleness or
tackiness
For detailed information, refer to IS 1823 : 1980 Specification for floor door stoppers (third revision).
11.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMARRY OF
3.1 Tolerances
2. Types
Type 1 Mild steel pivots
Type 2 Aluminium pivots
1
2
3
4
5
25
30
30
35
35
Pivot
Length
Pin Projection
0.2 mm
Pin dia
0.2 mm
4. Finish
Thickness
of Ventilator
Shutte
0.5 mm
No.
Pivot
Breadth
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
Pin
Projection
Pin Dia
Type 1
20
25
25
25
25
50
50
65
65
75
10
12.5
12.5
15
15
10
12.5
12
16
16
Type 2 and 3
9.5
12.5
12.5
15
15
For detailed information, refer to IS 1837 : 1966 Specification for fan light pivots (first revision).
11.18
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Manufacture
a)
b)
c)
d)
6. Finish
a)
b)
c)
d)
11.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
Type 1 Brass sliding door bolts with sand cast
brass hasp, staple and fixing bolts or
clips and rolled or drawn brass bolts.
Type 2 Brass sliding door bolts with die-cast
brass hasp, staple and fixing bolts or
clips and rolled or drawn brass bolts.
Type 3 Aluminium alloy sliding door bolts
with hasp, staple and fixing clips of
sheets, or extruded sections and fixing
bolts and sliding bolts of extruded
sections of aluminium alloy.
Type
Size, mm
1 and 2
For detailed information, refer to IS 2681 : 1993 Specification for non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts
(aldrops) for use with padlocks (third revision).
11.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY
OF
2. Types
a) Bottle type (Type A)
b) Tubular type (Type B)
Note See Fig. 1 to 4 of the standard.
5. Essential Requirements
5.1 The closer shall be manufactured in three sizes
conforming to the requirements given in Table 1, in
accordance with the direction of the opening of the
door either clockwise or anti-clockwise.
5.2 The closing time shall be easily adjustable between
5 and 20 seconds by means of regualting screw.
5.3 Hydraulic oil filling shall work satisfactorily at all
temperatures between 50 C and 10 C without requiring
any change except adjustment of the regulating screw.
6. Test
6.1 Performance Requirements When opened
through 90 , the door shall swing back to an angle of
20 5 with normal speed, but thereafter the speed
should get automatically retarded and should smoothly
negotiate with the latch (where provided)
6.2 Endurance Test After 50,000 operations against
maximum load specified, the closer shall show no
defects, failure or leakage of oil etc.
Note For test details see Annex B of the standard.
Sl.
No.
(1)
i)
Designation of
Closer
(2)
1.
ii)
iii)
For detailed information, refer to IS 3564 : 1995 Specification for hydraulically regulated door closers (fourth
revision).
11.21
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Requirements
a) Knuckles shall be straight and at right angle
to the flap.
2. Material
Name of
Component
Flap
Material
a)
b)
c)
For detailed information, refer to IS 3818 : 1992 Specification for continuous (piano) hinges ( third revision).
11.22
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Mild steel
Aluminium alloy
b) Eye
Mild steel
Aluminium alloy
c) Wire Mild
Mild Steel
Aluminium alloy
a) Eye
For detailed information, refer to IS 3828 : 1966 Specification for ventilator chains (third revision).
11.23
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Sizes
4.1 Light Weight Hinges 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60,
65 and 75 mm
4.2 Heavy Weight Hinges 25, 40, 50, 65 and 75 mm
3. Materials
a) Flap
Steelcover plate
b) Pin
For detailed information, refer to IS 3843 : 1995 Specification for steel back flap hinges ( second revision).
11.24
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 3847 : 1992 Specification for mortice night latches (first revision).
11.25
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
c) Gears
3. Material
a) Body, knob
and indicating
spindle
b) Indicating disc
Size 1
Size 2 Tolerance
(mm)
(mm)
(mm)
Length of bolt
75
85
Breadth of bolt
45
50
Dia of disc
70
70
For detailed information, refer to IS 4621 : 1975 Specification for indicating bolts for use in public baths and
lavatories (first revision).
11.26
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 4948 : 2002 Specification for welded steel wire fabric for general use
(second revision).
11.27
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
= 90 2 mm.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4992 : 1975 Specification for door handles for mortice locks (vertical type)
(first revision).
11.28
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Type
2. Material
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
100
20
150
200
100
150
200
250
300
25
30
15
15
15
15
15
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
For detailed information, refer to IS 5187 : 1972 Specification for flush bolt (first revision).
11.29
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
a) Body
b) Bolts
c) Knob
Thickness 10 mm
Note For typical illustration see Fig. 1 of the standard.
3. Material
For detailed information, refer to IS 5899 : 1970 Specification for bathroom latches.
11.30
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5930-1970 Specification for mortice latch (vertical type).
11.31
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Material
For foundation
box, main body
and half cover
5. Finish
4. Performance Requirements
4.1 Floor spring shall not show any change or
deterioration in working after it has been subjected to
50 000 operations at a rate of not more than 6 to 8
operations per minute.
a) Undercoat, and
For detailed information, refer to IS 6315 : 1992 Specification for floor springs (hydraulically regulated ) for
heavy doors (second revision).
11.32
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Tests
4.1 Test for Stays Window stay shall be capable of
restraining the shutter in three positions, at angles of
300, 600 and 900 with the frame. Tolerance in position of
restraint: 50 .
4.2 Test for Fasteners Fastener shall be able to hold
a force of 40 kgf (applied in increments of 5 kgf at one
minute intervals)
11.33
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
iron/
5. Performance Requirements
5.1 After being fitted in its position, when the door is
opened through 900 and released, it shall swing back to
an angle of 2050 with normal speed, but thereafter the
speed shall get automatically retarded till a smooth, final
close is reached.
5.2 Endurance Test The closer fitted to the door of
maximum permissible weight shall be subjected to 50,000
operations at the rate of a maximum of 6 to 8 operations
per minute. The number of operations to be carried out
continuously at any time during the test shall not be
less than 3 000. At the end of the test the closer shall
show no defects, failure, or deterioration in its working.
6. Finish The exposed surface shall be polished or
pointed as agreed to mutually. In case of aluminium
body, it may be anodized. All components of mild steel
shall be pickled, scrubbed and rinsed to remove grease,
rust, scale or any other foreign element. The finish of
mild steel surface shall be smooth, uniform and free
from all visible defects with hard and tough film of enamel
strongly adhering to the surface. All components shall
be finished in colour as agreed to mutually.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6343 : 1982 Specification for door closers (pneumatically regulated) for
light doors weighting up to 40 kg (first revision).
11.34
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
c)
d)
e)
f)
Note For requirements for materials for component parts of mortice locks see Table 1 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6607 : 1972 Specification for rebated mortice locks (vertical type).
11.35
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
.
All dimensions in millimetres.
11.36
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 7197:1974 Specification for double action floor springs (without oil check)
for heavy doors.
11.37
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Dia. of
Bolt
150
210 1
150 2
200
260 1
200 2
10 0.5
250
310 1
250 2
or
300
360 1
300 2
12 0.5
110
65 1
110 2
10 0.
2. Types
3. Sizes
II
Material
Mild steel sheet
Aluminium alloy sheet
Mild steel rods
Aluminium alloy
extruded rod
For detailed information, refer to IS 7534:1985 Specification for sliding locking bolts for use with pad locks
(first revision).
11.38
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Manufacture
a) Body
b) Locking Bolt
c) Levers
d) Lever spring
3. Material
3.1. Body, Body Cover Mild steel, cast brass, brass
sheet, aluminium alloy castings and sheets and zinc
base alloy casting.
Note For requirements of materials for other component
parts, see Table 1 of the standard.
e) Keys
For detailed information, refer to IS 7540 : 1974 Specification for mortice dead locks
11.39
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Aluminium alloy
body
Finished smooth
Suitable protective coating
such as painting.
Anodized
Finished smooth and
polished bright or satin.
May be chromium plated,
anodized or oxidized where
so desired by purchaser.
For detailed information, refer to IS : 8760 1978. Specification for mortice sliding door locks with lever
mechanism (first revision).
11.40
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Sizes
Steel rising butt hinges
Cast iron rising butt hinges
Brass rising butt hinges
Material
Cold rolled mild steel
Cast iron
Extruded brass
75 and 100 mm
75 and 100 mm
75,100, and
125 mm.
3. Materials
Flap
For detailed information, refer to : IS 9106 :1979 Specification for rising butt hinges.
11.41
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
6. Construction
a) Body Overall depth of the body shall be
not more than 15 mm.
b) Locking bolt Section not less than 822
mm
2. Types
Type 1 Left hand or right-hand, and
Type 2 Reversible
11.42
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Materials
i) Mild steel sheets
ii) Mild steel bars
For detailed information, refer to IS 10019 : 1981 Specification for mild steel stays and fasteners.
11.43
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Manufacture
a) Shall be manufactured in one piece and shall be
free from all defects.
b) Projecting lugs or pins at the back or countersunk
screw holes shall be provided for fixing.
2. Materials
i)
Cast brass
ii)
Cast bronze
iii)
Cast aluminium
3. Sizes 25, 50, 75, 100, 150 and 300 mm. The
thickness of the numericals shall not be less than 2 mm,
and the width shall be as agreed upon between the
purchaser and the manufacrurer.
11.44
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Type 2
Type 3
For detailed information, refer to IS 10342 : 1982 Specification for curtain rail system.
11.45
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
a)
b)
c)
d)
10
12
10
12
16 mm
19 mm
16 mm
19 mm
3. Sizes
For detailed information, refer to IS 12817:1997 Specification for stainless steel butt hinges (first revision)
11.46
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Characteristics
Requirements
i)
ii)
iii)
Elongation
iv)
Hardness
v)
Resistance to combustion
Note 1 For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard and IS 8543 (Part 4/ Sec 1): 1984 Method of testing
plastics: Part 4 short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile properties.
Note 2 Method of installation is given in Annex D of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 12867 : 1989 Specification for PVC handrail covers.
11.47
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Requirements
a) Closing time shall be easily adjustable between
5 to 20 seconds by means of regu lating screws.
b) Hydraulic oil, filling shall work satisfactorily at
all termperature between 50C and -10C without
requiring any change except adjustment of the
regulating screw.
2. Nominal Sizes
Designation
No. 1
Mass of Door
Up to 60 kg
Width of Door
Up to 850 mm
No. 2
60 to 80kg
851 to 1 000 mm
3. Materials
Non porous body
Piston
Aluminium alloy
5.
Test
a) Performance requirement When opened through
90, the door shall swing back to 200 50 with normal
speed but thereafter speed should automatically get
retarded and should smoothly negotiate, with the
latch (where provided)
For detailed information, refer to IS 14912 : 2001. Specification for door closersconcealed type (hydraulically
regulated)
11.48
SP 21 : 2005
SECTION 12
WOOD PRODUCTS
12.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
GENERAL
IS
12049 : 1987
12.4
ADHESIVES
IS
849 : 1994
12.6
IS
851 : 1978
12.7
(first revision)
IS
852 : 1994
12.9
PLYWOOD
IS
303 : 1989
12.10
IS
1328 : 1996
12.12
IS
4990 : 1993
12.13
IS
5509 : 2000
12.15
IS
5539 - 1969
12.16
IS
7316 : 1974
12.18
IS
10701 : 1983
Structural plywood
12.19
IS
13957 : 1994
12.21
1658 : 1977
12.22
IS
1659 : 2004
12.23
IS
3087 : 1985
Wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes (first revision) 12.25
IS
3097 : 1980
12.28
IS
3129 : 1985
12.30
IS
3308 : 1981
12.32
IS
3348 : 1965
12.33
IS
3478 : 1966
12.34
IS
12406 : 2003
12.35
IS
12823 : 1990
12.37
IS
14276 : 1995
12.39
IS
14587 : 1998
12.40
12.2
SP 21 : 2005
Title
Page
3513 : 1989
12.42
12.45
12.48
12.51
13958 : 1994
12.53
IS
14588 : 1999
12.54
IS
14842 : 2000
12.55
IS
15476 : 2004
12.56
IS
15491 : 2004
12.57
12.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.3 Blockboard
2.3.1
Sizes Blockboards shall be of the sizes
specified below :
Length
2. Dimensions
mm
2.1 Plywood
2.1.1 Size Plywood panels shall be of the sizes specified
below
Length
mm
2400
2100
2100
1800
1800
Width
Width
mm
1200
1200
900
1200
900
mm
2400
1200
2100
1200
2100
900
1800
1200
1800
900
2.2 Hardboard
Width
mm
1200
3600
1200
3000
1200
2400
1200
2100
1200
2100
900
1800
1200
1800
900
1200
1200
mm
3600
1200
3000
1200
2400
1200
2100
1200
2100
900
1800
1200
1800
900
12.4
SP 21 : 2005
2.5.1 Size Shall be as sizes specified below:
Length
Width
mm
mm
4800
1800
3600
1200
3000
1800
3000
1200
Length
2400
1800
mm
2400
1200
2400
1200
2100
1200
2100
1200
2100
900
1800
1800
2100
900
1800
1800
1200
900
1800
1200
1800
900
3. Tolerances
3.1 The following tolerances for the dimensions shall
be permitted.
1200
2100
1200
2100
900
1800
1200
1800
900
2.6.2 Thickness The thickness shall be as given in
the specification.
2.7 Particle Board for Insulation
2.7.1 Size Particle boards for insulation shall be of
the sizes specified below :
Length
Width
mm
3.1.1 Length
+ 6 mm
0 mm
3.1.2 Width
+ 3 mm
0 mm
mm
2400
1200
2100
1200
2100
900
1800
1200
1800
900
For detailed information, refer to IS 12049 :1987 Specification for dimensions and tolerances relating to wood
based panel materials.
12.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 849 : 1994 Specification for cold setting casein glue for wood (first revision)
12.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Type
Symbol
Gap -Filling
Adhesive
Close Contact
Adhesive
BWP/GF
BWP/CC
BWR/GF
BWR/CC
BWR
WWR/GF
WWR/CC
WWR
CWR/GF BWP/CC
CWR
BWP
Test
Requirements
Mean Failing
Load, kg, Min
Dry Test
Resistance to
Gap
Joint
Close
Contact
Joint
205
275
Gap
Joint
Close
Gap
Contact Joint
Joint
Close
Contact
Joint
Gap
Joint
100 for
BWP
90 for
BWR
150
180
Micro-Organism
Close
Gap
Contact Joint
Joint
200
Close
Contact
Joint
180
200
4. Resistance to water
4.1 Gap joints See Table 2.
Type
(1)
(3)
kg
100
(or at the boiling point of water)
do
70 2
27 2
100
3
3
16 to 24
90
100
180
BWP
BWR
WWR
CWR
Mean Failing
Load
12.7
(4)
SP 21 : 2005
4.2 Close-Contact Joints See Table 3.
TABLE 3 RESISTANCE TO WATER (CLOSE-CONTACT JOINTS)
Type
(1)
Time of
Mean Failing
Immersion
Load
(2)
(3)
(4)
kg
100
150
115
BWP
100
(or at the boiling point of water)
WWR
70 2
150
CWR
27 2
16 to 24
200
Note For methods of tests, refer to Appendices B to G of the standard and IS1734 (Part 7) : 1983 Methods of test
Part 7 Mycological test.
for plywood
For detailed Information, refer to IS 851: 1978 Specification for synthetic resin adhesives for
construction work (nonstructural) in wood (first revision).
12.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Requirements
N=
86
100 M
Where
N = nominal mass of the consignmentrdered,
and
M = average percentage moisture content.
For detailed information, refer to IS 852 : 1994 Specification for animal glue for general wood-working purposes
(second revision).
12.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY
b)
Discolo
ration
Nil
5 percent
iv)
Dote
5cm/m 2
15cm/m 2
v)
Insect
hole
Scattered up to
12 holes/ m2
Scattered up to
24 holes/ m2
vi)
Joints
No Restriction
vii)
Knots
(dead)
2up to12 mm
dia/m2
4up to 20 mm dia/m2
vii)
No restriction
x)
Knots
(tight)
6 upto25 mm
dia/m2
No Restriction
xi)
Patches
4 patches/m 2
provided they are
all tight patchess
and donot mar the
appearance
Any number
provided they are
all tight patches and
donot mar the
appearance
xii)
Splits
2 splits,each not
more than 1mm
wide and length
not more100 mm
provided they are
filled with suitable
filler
xiii)
Swirl
Defect
Sl.
No.
Categories
(1)
i)
(2)
Blister
ii)
Checks
Types of Surfaces
A
(3)
Nil
Individual check
not more than
50 mm in length
B
(4)
Nil
Individual check not
more than 100 mm
in lengthand the total
6/m2
(dead)
ix)
iii)
12.10
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE CATEGORIES OF DEFECTS
Type of Surface
Maximum Number
of Categories of
Permissible Defects
per sq metre
Tolerance
a) Length
:
:
b) Width
c) Thickness
1200 mm
1200 mm
1200 mm
900 mm
1200 mm
(1)
THICKNESS
mm
(2)
3 ply
3,4,5,6,
5 ply
5, 6, 8, 9
7ply
9,12,15,16,
9 ply
11 ply
19, 22, 25
Above 11 ply
As ordered
10%
5%
d) Squareness
0.2%
e) Edge straightness
0.2%
7. Tests
BOARD
0 mm
+ 3 mm
0 mm
+ 6 mm
Sl.No.
Grade
i)
BWR
Minimum average
Individual
ii) MR
Minimum average
Individual
1350 1000
1100 800
1000
800
1000
800
800
650
800
650
For detailed Information, refer to IS 303 :1989 Specification for plywood for general purposes (third revision)
12.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
a)
b)
NoteFor method of tests, refer to the standard and IS 1734 (Part 1) : 1983 Method of tests for plywood, Part1 determination
of density and moisture(second revision).
For detailed Information, refer to IS 1328 : 1996 Specification for veneered decorative plywood (third revision).
12.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Description
Designation
CS
CSC
CSFF
mm
1220
920
1220
920
1220
920
mm
1540
1540
1220
1220
1220
920
mm
1220
920
1220
920
610
920
+
Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (Phenolic and amino
plastic (first revision)
3. Materials
3.1 Timber Any species of timber may be used ,
However a list of species given in Annex B of the
standard may be used for selection of species.
3.2 Adhesives for Bonding of VeneersShall be of the
hot press synthetic resin (phenol formaldehyde) type
and shall conforn to BWP type specified in IS 848 :
1974.+
4. Dimensions and Tolerances
4.1. Size
Unless otherwise specified, plywood boards for
concrete shuttering work shall be of length and width
as specfied below
mm
mm
2400
2440
2140
2140
1840
1840
mm
mm
mm
2400
1200
1500
1200
2400
900
1500
900
2100
1200
1200
1200
2100
900
1200
900
1800
1200
1200
600
1800
900
900
900
Thickness
4 mm
5 mm
6 mm
5-ply
6 mm
8 mm
9 mm
7-ply
12 mm
16 mm
9-ply
16 mm
19 mm
More than 9- ply
22 mm
25 mm
30 mm
35 mm
40 mm
4.3 Tolerances The tolerances on the nomial sizes of
finished boards shall be as specified in IS 12049 :1987*.
5. Workmanship and Finish Shall be smooth and
the faces and back shall be free from harmful
discolouration, pleats, overlaps and loose knots. The
edges shall be of smooth uniform finish.
* Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel
materials.
12.13
SP 21 : 2005
Gaps and open joints shall be permitted as follows
a) In Face The gap or opening shall not
exceed a width of 0.4 mm, If it exceeds 0.4mm
this may be rectified by well-fitted veneer
inserts of suitable width provided the grain
of the veneer insert does not deviate by more
than 10 percent from the grain direction of
the surrounding veneer.
b) In Core (Cross-Band) The width of the
opening shall of exceed 1 mm in the case of 3ply and 5-ply, and 2 mm in the case of plywod
of more than 5 ply, pnomided that such
openings are not less than 300 mm apart in
any reneer and staggered not less than 150
mm between any neveer and the next one with
the same direction.
6. Tests
For detailed informations, refer to IS 4990 : 1993 Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work
(second revision).
12.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
1
2
3
4
Type 5
Ammonium phosphate
Boron compounds
Ammonium sulphate
Combination of ammonium
phosphate and boron compounds
Combination of ammonium
sulphate and ammonium phosphate
a)
b)
Soaking treatment
*
Code of practice for preservation of plywood and other panel
products.
Note For method of test refer IS 1734. (Part 1) : 1983 Method of test for plywood Part 1 1983. Determination of density
and moisture content ( second revision) Methods of test for plywood. Part 3 1983. Determination of fire resistance (second
revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS : 5509-1980. Specification for fire retardant plywood.(first revision)
12.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Modes of Treatment
a)
b)
c)
ii)
Service Conditions
for Treated Plywood
(2)
All
All
12.16
Type of
Preservative
Recommemded
Mode of
Treatment
Recommended
(4)
Minimum
Retention
kg/m 3
(5)
(6)
Type 4 (Copper
chrome-arsenic
composition or
acid- copper-chorme
composition)
Pressure
process
Veneer
treatment
12.0
a) Type 4(Copper
chrome-arsenic
composition or
acid-copper chrome
composition)
Pressure
process
12.0
b) Type 1 [Creosote
or creosote fuel
oil mixture (50 : 50)]
Pressure
process
100.0
12.0
SP 21 : 2005
Sl
No
(1)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
Service Conditions
for Treated Plywood
(2)
Marine structures exposed
to marine borer danger
(IS : 710 -1976) +
Concrete shuttering plywood
IS : 4990 -1993)
Type of
Preservative
Recommemded
Mode of
Treatment
Recommended
(4)
Type 1[Creosote or
creosote fuel oil
mixture (50:50]
Type 4 ( Copperchrome arsenic
composition or
acid-copper-chromecomposition)
Type 4 (Copper-chrome
arsenic composition or
acid-copper-chrome
composition)
All
All
(5)
Minimum
Retention
(6)
Pressure
process
200.0
Pressure
process
12.0
Veneer
treatment
Veneer
treatment
12.0
12.0
All
Type 1 [Creosote or
creosote fuel oil mixture
(50:50)]
Pressure
process
100.0
All
Type 4 ( Copperchrome-arsenic
composition or acidcopper -chrome
composition) or Type 1
[Creosote or creosote
fuel oil mixture (50:50)]
Pressure
process
7.5.0
Pressure
or soaking
do
Pressure
process
4.0
do
Type 2 or Type 3 or
Type 4
Pressure
process
or soaking
4.0
75.0
5.5
4.5
For detailed information, refer to IS 5539 : 1969 Specification for preservative treated plywood.
12.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Tolerances
Length up to 120 cm
+3 mm
0 mm
Length over 120 cm
+6 mm
0 mm
Width up to 90 cm
+3 mm
0 mm
Width above 90 cm
+6 mm
0 mm
Thickness = + 0.2 mm +5 percent of nominal
thickness
= 0.1 mm+2.5 percent of nominal
thickness
Rectangular panels shall have their
diagonal length not varying beyond
9 mm
6. Finish Trimmed square and sanded to a smooth
finish.
4. Standard Dimensions
7. Tests
2. Material
2.1 Timber Shall be according to IS 303 : 1989*. Non
durable timbers and sapwood of all other timber shall be
given a preservative treatment.
2.2 Adhesive Synthetic resin adhesive BWR or WMR.
2.3 Plywood When used, shall be BWR or WWR
synthetic resin bonded type.
Length
Width
120 and 90 mm
Thickness
Note For method of test refer to the standard and IS1734 (Part 1) 1983 Method tests for plywood Part 1 Determination of
density and moisture content (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 7316 : 1974 Specification of decorative plywood using plurality of veneers
for decorative faces.
12.18
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Materials
Thickness
mm
4
6
9
3
5
{
{
{
{
12
16
16
19
19
25
11
++
Defects
Face
Core
i)
ii)
iii)
Blister
Checks
Discolouration
iv)
v)
vi)
Dote
Insect holes
Knots (dead)
Pin knots (dead)
Pin knots (live)
Nil
Nil
3 percent of the area if it will
not impair the board properties.
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Permitted provided they do not mar
the appearance
3 up to 25 mm dia/m2
Nil
No restriction
6 percent of the area if it
will not impair the board properties.
5 cm/m2
No restriction
2 up to 12mm dia/m2
2/m 2
No restriction
Knots (tight)
vii)
viii)
6 up to 25 mm dia/ m2
Swirl
No restriction.
Up to 4/m2 provided
they do not mar the appearance.
12.19
SP 21 : 2005
6.3. Tolerance The tolerances on the nominal sizes of
finished panels shall be as given below:
Length
8. Tests
8.1 Moisture Content Shall not be less than 5 percent
and not more than 15 percent.
6 mm
0 mm
Width
3 mm
Thickness up to
and excluding
6mm
0 mm
10 percent
6 to 9 mm
7 percent
Above 9 mm
5 percent
Average
Wood
Failure
Percent
1324 and above No restriciion
1226-1323
60
1079-1225
80
<1079
Panel to be
considered
as failed
irrespective
of percentage
Average
Failing
Load, N
Average
Wood
Failure
Percent
981and above No restriction
883- 980
60
785- 882
80
<785
Panel to be
considered
as failed
irrespective
of percentage
Average
Failing
Load, N
Average
Wood
Failure
Percent
981 and above No restriction
883- 980
60
785- 882
80
<785
Panel to be
considered
as failed
irrespective
of percentage
Property
i)
Compressive strength
Along the grain
Across the grain
Modulus of rupture
Along the grain
Across the grain
Modulus of elasticity
Along the grain
Across the grain
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
125
vi)
Modulus of rigidity
588
vii)
Note For methods of tests refer to various parts of IS 1734. Methods of tests for plywood and all parts of IS 2753 :1991. Methods
for estimation of preservatives in treated timber and in treating solutions (first revision).
12.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
IS 13957 : 1994
Thickness
mm
(2)
3 ply
3, 4, 5 ,6
5 Ply
5, 6, 8, 9
7 Ply
9,12,15, 16
9 Ply
12.15.16.19
11 Ply
Above 11 Ply
19,22,25
As ordered
d) Facing stress
For detailed Information, refer to IS 13957 : 1994.Specification for metal faced plywood.
12.21
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Requirements
Thickness
mm
a) Medium
Bending
Strength
(Modulus of
Rupture
Average)
Mpa
all thicknesses
40
30
40
5
6
9
30
30
all thickness
50
20
b) Standard
hardboard 3
4
b) Width
Max
hardboard
Water Absorption
after 24th immersion
Percent
c) Tempered
hardboard
For detailed information, refer to IS 1658 : 1977 Specification for fibre hardboards (second revision).
12.22
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.
Symbol
BWP-DEC
BWP - COM
MR - DEC
MR - COM
3.1 Timber
3.1.1 Any suitable species of timber may be used for
blockboard manufacture. A list of species for
12.23
SP 21 : 2005
5.4 Mycological Test
MR Grade block board specimens, when tested
according to Annex H of the standard shall show no
visible signs of separation at the edges.
5.5 Modulus of Rupture and Modulus of Elasticity
The modulus of rupture and modulus of elasticity when
tested according to the method given in Annex J of the
standard, BWP Grade and MR Grade boards shall have
average and minimum individual values as given below:
BWP
MR
Grade
Grade
Modulus of rupture, N/mm2:
Average
50
40
Minimum, individual
42
34
Modulus of elasticity,N/mm2:
Average
5 000
4 000
Minimum individual
4 200
3 400
Note For test prosedures see Appendices D to K of the standard and IS 1734 (Part 11): 1983 Methods of test for plywood,
Part 11 Determination of static bending strength (second revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 1659 : 2004 Specification for Blockboard (fourth revision).
12.24
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Length
Grade Designation
FPS
FPT-1
Width
4850
3000 ,
2100 ,
1000
1850,
1000,
450
(4800) ,
2750
1800 ,
and
1800,
900 ,
3650
(2700),
1500 ,
900
1500 ,
600 ,
3600) ,
2400 ,
1200 ,
1200 ,
and
graded
Extrusion
II
FPT-2
pressed solid
Extrusion
XPS
pressed,tubular
XPT
3. Materials
Dimensions
a) Length
8 mm
b) Width
8 mm
Tolerance
c) thickness :
Above 25 mm
2.5 per.
up to and
5 per.
including 25 mm
12.25
SP 21 : 2005
5. Physical, Mechanical Properties See Table 1
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF VARIOUS TYPES OF PARTICLES
BOARDS
S.l.
Properties
Flat Presses Flat Presses
Extrusion
Extrusion
No.
Single Layer Three Layers
Pressed
Pressed
multi Layers
Solid
Tubular
& Graded
(XPS)
(XPT)
Grade1
(1)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Density variation
10
10
10
10
10
1.2
Water absorption
percent,
2 h soaking
24 h soaking
25
50
10
20
40
80
40
80
40
80
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
2
0.5
2
0.5
10
12
Modulus of rupture,
N/mm 2
up to 20 mm thickness
above 20 mm thickness
11
11
15.0
12.5
11
11
2
2
1
1
Tensile strength
perpendicular to
surface,N/mm 2
up to 20 mm thickness
above 20 mm thickness
0.8
0.8
0.45
0.40
0.3
0.3
1.2
1.2
0.4
0.4
---
0.2
0.15
---
---
---
1250
850
1250
850
1250
700
---
---
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
a) Linear expansion
(Swelling in water)
percent 2 h soaking
i) Length
ii) Width
b) Thickness swelling
percent 2 h soaking
Swelling due to
surfce absorption
percent,
Tensile Strength
perpendicular to
surface N/mm2
*a) After cycle test
b) Accelerated water
resistance test
Screw withdrawal
strength, N
Face
Edge
(3)
Grade 2
1.1
1.3
(2)
* Cyclic test: specimens are immeresed in water at 27 2Cfor a period of 72 h, followed by drying in air at 27 2C for 24h and then
heating dry air at 70C for 72h. Three such cycles are to be followed, and then the specimens are tested for tensile strength
perpendicular to surface.
Accelerated water resistance test- Specimens are immersed in water at 27 2C and water is brought to boiling and kept at boiling
temperature for 2 h. Specimens are then cooled in water to 27 2C and then tested for tensile strength perpendicular to surface.
12.26
SP 21 : 2005
7. Preservative Treatment A suitable preservative
may be added to the particle mix at the time of rinsing of
the adhesive. The following percentages of
preservatives are regarded as suitable :
6. Physical Characteristics
6.1 Density Between 500 and 900 kg
6.2 Moisture Content Between 5 and 15 percent.
6.3 See Table 1 for other tests.
6.4 Workability The particle boards shall not crack
or split when drilled, sawed and nailed
perpendicular to the surface.
Note For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 2380 : 1977 Methods of tests for wood particle boards and boards from other
lignocellulosic materials.(first revision)
For detailed Information, refer to IS 3087 : 1985 Specification for wood particle boards (medium density) for
general purposes (first revision).
12.27
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Sl .Grade
No.
Type
Designation
1. Grade I
SO GP - I
2. Grade l
SO D - I
3. Grade I
TU GP - I
4. Grade I
TU D - I
5. Grade II
SO GP- II
6. Grade II
SO D - II
7. Grade II
TU GP - II
8. Grade II
TU D - II
3. Material
a)
6. Tests
6.1 Density Density of each specimen shall not vary
from mean density by more than 10 percent.
6.2 Moisture Content Average value shall be
between 7 to 16 percent.
6.3 Water Absorption Value shall not exceed 25
percent for 2 h soaking and 50 percent for 20 h soaking.
6.4 Water Resistance Test Boards shall not show
signs of disintegration and /or shall not delaminate.
6.5 Swelling in Water Swelling in thickness in
percentage of original thickness shall not be more than
7 percent due to general absorption and this shall be
not be more than 5 percent in case of swelling due to
12.28
SP 21 : 2005
surface absorption.
6.6 Adhesion of Plies Adhesion of face veneers to
the board core shall offer appreciable resistance and
the exposed surface of veneer shall show sizes of some
adherent fibres distributed more or less uniformly.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3097 : 1980 Specification for veneered particle boards (first revision).
12.29
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3650,3000,2700,2400,
2100,1800, 1500, 1200, 1000,
900, 600, 450, and 300
Width in mm :
Tolerances:
Dimension
Length
Width
Thickness
Nominal Size
for all lengths
for all width
above 25 mm
up to and
including 25 mm
Tolerance
8 mm
8 mm
1 mm
0.8 mm
12.30
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF LOW DENSITY PARTICLES BOARDS
Maximum
Maximum
Maximum
Maximum
Maximum
Minimum Sound
Variation
kg/m3
Moisture
In Density
Modulus
Content
Swelling
Of Rupture
Thermal
Due to
Absorption
Conductivity
Surface
Absorption*
(1)
400
(2)
Percent
10
(3)
Percent
16
(4)
N/mm2
1.5
Frequency
(5)
(6)
(7)
Percent kcal. cm/cm2 h0C Hz
1250.05
250
5
Fire
{
{
Maximum
Minimum
Density
Resistance
5.6
(9)
(10)
0.1
Not easily
Ingnitable
p
Not
lower
than
class 2
500
0.2
1000
2000
0.3
0.5
Note For test procedure, refer to the standard and various parts of IS 2380:1977. Method of test for wood particle boards and
boards from other lignocellulosic materials (first revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 3129 : 1985. Specification for low density particle boards (first revision)
12.31
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.1 Tolerances
In length
: 6 mm
In width
: 4 mm and
In thickness. : 2 mm
2. Types
a) Type 1 Light weight slabs, intended for nonload bearing partitions, ceilings, wall linings,
permanent shuttering and roof insulation.
b) Type 2 Heavy duty slabs, intended for load
bearing situations and for use in roof
construction.
3. Form and Texture Slabs shall be uniform
thickness with rectangular parallel faces and shall
have clean reasonable square edges and shall be of
uniform texture.
Width
mm
mm
2000
500
2000
500
1220
610
1220
610
Type
2
1
5
8
11
12.5
16
22
27.5
25.0
30.0
40.0
3.5
6
8
9.5
12
16
20
18.5
22
30
Size
Thickness
Test
Load
Test
Span
Deflection
(Max)
mm mm
2000500
1220610
2000500
1220610
mm
25
25
40
50
kg
100
165
90
90
mm
45
27.5
75
75
mm
6
6
6
6
75
100
120
150
75
75
5
5
2000500
40
120
75
1220610
50
160
75
75
240
75
125
250
500
1000
2000
4000
Note For test procedures, refer to Appendix B of the standard, IS 3346 : 1980 Method for the determination of thermal
conductivity of thermal insulation materials (Two slab, guarded hot-plate method) (first revision) and IS 8225 : 1987 Method of
measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation room (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 3308 : 1981 Specification for wood wool building slabs (first revision).
12.32
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Fibre insulation
board, ordinary or
flame retardant type
Bitumen bonded fibre
Insulation board,
Tolerance on length
and width
Nominal
Thickness
mm
12
18
25
12
18
25
3. Requirements
3.1 Density Shall not exceed 0.4g/cm3
3.2 Transverse Strength
Type of Board
Thickness
mm
Fibre insulation
board ordinary or flame
retardant type
0.75
0.75
1.00
1.25
0.50
0.50
0.75
0.75
9
12
18
25
9
12
18
25
365,300
270,240
210,180
150,120
100, 90
60, 45
and 30
9
12
18
25
9
12
18
25
7.2
12.8
23
44
13
23
45
86
Mean
Absorption
at 27 20C
Max
30
30
25
25
25
25
20
20
180,150
120,100
90,60
45and
30
For detailed information, refer to IS 3348 : 1965 Specification for fibre insulation boards.
12.33
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.3
b)
c)
Thickness 50, 45, 40, 35, 30, 25, 22, 20, 16,
12, 9 m 6 and 4 mm.
d)
3. Materials
Type
Grade
Density Moisture
Content
kg/cm2
Water
Absorption
After 24 h
Immersion
percent,max
1.2
3 to 7
450
350
10
0.9 Min
5 to 6
400
300
25
1.2
0.9 Min
5 to10
5 to16
300
250
225
200
15
25
g/cm3
Type 1 Grade A
Grade B
Grade A
Type 2 Grade B
Maximum Permissible
Variation in Individual
Specimen
from the Mean
percent
Mimimum
Modulus
of
Rupture
kg/cm2
Minimum
Tensile
Strength
Resistance
to Boiling
Water After
3h Immersion
shall not show
any sign of
delamination
Not specified
Note For test procedures, refer to various parts of IS 2380 : 1997 Methods of test for wood particle boards and boards from
other lignocellulosic materials ( first revision ) and 9.3 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3478 :1966 Specification for high density wood particle board
12.34
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Designation
SBF-I
SBG-II
3. Materials
3.1 Wood Any spicies of wood or any other
lignocellulosic material may be used
3.2 AdhesiveAny suitable type of synthetic resin
adhesive be used. For the purpose of bonding to comply
with physical and mechanical requirements given in
Table 1.
3.3 Sizing MaterialParaffin wax dissolved in mineral
spirit, or alternatively emulsified with water, or melted
shall be used as sizing material.
Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic
aminoplastic) (first revision).
+
a) Width 1.22 m
b) Length 5.49, 4.89, 3.66, 3.05,
2.44, 1.83, 1.22m
Any other dimesions as agreed to between the
purchaser and the manufacturer may be used. Tolerance
on length and width shall be 3 mm /m.
and
12.35
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 PHYSICALAND MECHANICAL REQUIEMENTS OF MEDIUM DENSITY FIBRE BOARDS
Sl.
No.
(1)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
Properties
(2)
Density (Kg/m 3)
Variation from mean density, percent
Moisture content, percent
Variation from mean moisture content percent (absolute)
Water absorption percent, Max
a) After 2 h soaking
b) After 24 h soaking:
Up to and including 6 mm thick
7 to 12 mm thick
13 to 19 mm thick
20 mm thick and above
Linear expansion (swelling in water) percent, Max
a) Due to general absorption after 24 h soaking:
Thickness
Length
Width
b) Due to surface absorption (in thickness) after 2 h soaking
Modulus of rupture, N/mm2
a) Up to 20 mm thickness:
Average
Minimum individual
b) Above 20 mm thickness:
Average
Minimum individual
Modulus of elasticity, N/mm2
a) Up to 20 mm thickness:
Average
Minimum individual
b) Above 20 mm thickness:
Average
Minimum individual
Internal bond, N/mm2
a) Up to 20 mm thickness:
Average
Minimum individual
b) Above 20 mm thickness:
Average
Minimum individual
Internal bond, N/mm2
a) After cyclie test
Average
Minimum individual
b) After accelerated water resistance test
Average
Minimum individual
Screw withdrawal strength (Min).N
a) FAce
b) Edge (for thickness 12 mm)
Grade II
(SBG II)
(3)
600900
10
510
3
Grade I
(SBG I)
(4)
600900
10
510
3
45
30
20
18
30
20
13
12
7
0.4
0.4
5
4
0.3
0.
4
28
25
28
25
25
22
25
22
2 800
2 300
2 800
2 300
2 500
2 300
2 500
2 300
0.8
0.7
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.8
0.7
0.45
0.4
0.30
0.25
1 500
1 250
1 500
1 250
Cyclic test Specimens are immersed in water at 27 2C for a period of 72 h, followed b drying in air at 27 2C for 24 h and
then heating in dry air at 70C for 72 h. There such cycles are to be followed and then the specimens are tested for internal bond
strength.
Accelerated water resistance test Specimens are immersed in water 27 2C and water is brought to boiling and kept at boiling
temperature for 2 hours. Specimens are then cooled in water 27 2C and then tested for internal bond strength.
12.36
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Tests
Designation
PLB-11
PLB-12
PLB-13
PLB-14
PLB-21
PLB-22
PLB-23
PLB-24
3. Materials
12.37
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 PHYSICALAND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Properties
Grade II
10
7.0
15.0
15.0
30.0
5.0
8.0
15.0
12.5
11.0
11.0
0.3
0.3
0.2
__
0.15
__
1250
850
1250
750
1000
450
250
75
1000
450
250
75
Note For method of test, refer to the standard and various parts of IS 2380 : 1977 Methods of test for wood particle boards and
boards from other lignocellulosic materials ( first revision).
For detailed Information, refer to IS 12823 : 1990 Specification for wood products- prelaminated particle boards
12.38
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Length
Width
++
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
Width
5 mm
ii)
5.
SL. NO
5 mm
i)
Length
Thickness
3. Finish
Unsanded boards
6 mm to 12 mm
1 mm
12 mm to 20 mm
1.5 mm
20 mm and more
Sanded boards
2 mm
0.3 mm
2 mm per1000 mm
Squareness
2 mm per1000 mm
1250
6 to12
13
25
2.0
0.5
0.5
9
5.5
3 000
0.4
0.25
1250
850
11to13
For detailed information, refer to IS 14276 : 1995 Specification for cement bonded particle board.
12.39
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Grade II
Designation
Type I
PLMDF-11
Type II
PLMDF-12
Type III
Type IV
PLMDF-13
PLMDF-14
Type I
PLMDF-21
Type II
PLMDF-22
Type III
PLMDF-23
Type IV
PLMDF-24
IS 12406 : 1988 +
3.2 Impregnated Base Paper Printed or plain colour
absorbant basepaper having a weight of 60-140 g/m2
impregnated in a suitable synthetic resin and dried to a
volatile content of 4-8 percent shall be used:
3. Impregnated Overlay An absorbant tissue paper
having a weigth of 18-40 g/m3 impregnated in a suitable
synthetic resin and dried to a volatile content of 4-8
percent, shall be used.
4. Finish The finish of the paper overlaid board
depends on the surface of caul plates used. .
5. Dimensions and Tolerances Dimensions and
tolerances shall conform to IS 12049 : 1987 ++
6. Physical
see Table 1.
and
Mechanical
Properties
3. Materials
3.1 Medium Density Fibre Board Synthetic resin
bonded medium density fibre board shall conform to
PROPERTY
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
++
12.40
Grade I
10
Grade II
10
6
12
4
9
18
7
28
25
28
25
0.8
0.7
0.7
0.6
0.4
0.25
__
__
1500
1250
1500
1250
1000
450
250
75
1000
450
250
75
SP 21 : 2005
Note: For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 2380 : 1977 Methods of tests for wood particle boards and boards from
other lignocellulsic materials (first revision).
For detailed Information, refer to IS 14587:1998 Specification for prelaminated medium density fibre board.
12.41
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
+
++
12.42
SP 21 : 2005
4. Dimensions and Tolerances
mm
2100
2100
1800
1800
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1200
1200
mm
1200
900
1200
900
1200
900
600
300
150
1200
600
mm
1200
1200
900
900
900
900
600
600
600
mm
300
150
900
600
300
150
600
300
150
4 percent , Max
900C, Max
b) Width
c) Thickness
less than 6 mm
6 mm and above
:
:
5.3.
Tolerances
+ 6 mm
0 mm
+ 3 mm
0 mm
10 percent
5 percent
Requirement
1.25 Min
Dimension
a) Length
Property
i) Specific gravity
Diameter
8 to 50
3 to 50
50 to 80
6 to 40
SNo.
Test
Requirement
. i) Insulation resistance
after immersion in water
at 272C
10 Megohms, Min
ii) Volume and surface
resistivity ohm-cm
2-5 109
iii) Flatwise electric
strength in oil at 90 2 C 4KV/mm for 6mm
iv) Edgewise electric
strength in oil at 900c
25k V for 25 mm
wide specimen
v) Power factor (tan)
0.019 at 50 cycle
at20 C (Typical,
not mandatory)
vi) Comparative tracking
index for varnished
CTI 100
components
12.43
SP 21 : 2005
Test
Requirement
Type V
Type VI
(2)
175
(3)
90
2.
195
95
3.
(1)
1.
(Specimen 20 mm
20 mm
20 mm)
a) Parallel to laminae
b) Perpendicular to laminae
4.
170
120
95
185
14
20
60
45
70
70
0.50
0.30
0.35
0.25
5.
6.
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
1586 :1988 Method of Rockwell herdness test for metallic materials (second revision).
1708 :1986 Methods of testing of small clear specimens of timber (second revision).
1734 (Part 9) : 1983 Method of test for plywood, Part 9 Determination of tensile strength (second revision).
1998 :1962 Method of test for thermosetting syntheticresin bonded laminated sheets.
2259 : 1963 Method of test for determination of insulation resistance of solid insulating material.
2824 :1975
Method of determining comparative tracking index of solid insulating materials under moist conditions
(first revision).
IS 3396 :1979
Method of test for volume and surface resistivities of solid electrical insulating materials (first revision).
IS 3513 (Part 4) :1966 High andmedium density wood based laminates, Part 4 sampling and tests.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3513 (Part 1) : 1989 Specification for resin treated compressed wood
laminates (compregs) : Part I For electrical purposes (first revision).
12.44
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY
OF
2. Types
1200
1200
600
2100
900
1200
300
1800
1200
1200
150
900
900
900
1800
1200
900
600
1500
1500
900
900
300
600
900
150
1500
300
600
600
1500
1500
150
600
300
1200
1200
600
150
4.2 Thickness The preferred thickness of compreg
boards shall be 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 60
and 70 mm.
b) Type VI
mm
mm
Tolerances
+ 6 mm
0 mm
b) Width
+ 3 mm
0 mm
c) Thickness less than 6 mm
10 percent
6 mm and above
5 percent
3. Material
3.1 Timber Any non resinous species of timber may
be used for the manufacture of veneers required for
making compreg.
3.2 Synthetic Resins Shall be of phenol or cresol
formaldehyde type and shall conform to IS 848 : 1974 *.
3.3 Varnishes Shall conform to IS 524 : 1983+ and IS
525 : 1968++.
3.4 The thickness of veneers for the manufacture of
compreg shall be between 0.7 and 2 mm. The thickness
of individual veneers shall not vary beyond 5 percent
of the averge thickness.
*
Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (Phenolic and amino
plastic ) (first revision).
+
Varnish, finishing, exterior, synthetic, air drying (second
revision).
++
mm
2100
mm
0 mm
0.20 mm
0 mm
0.25 mm
12.45
SP 21 : 2005
5. Physical and Mechanical Properties :
TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
S. No.
Test
Requirement
i)
Specific gravity
1.25, Min
ii)
iii)
Water absorption
at 27 20C
iv)
Sporadic working
temperature
Sl. No.
Test
(1)
(2)
4 Percent, Max
1.2 Per cent, Max
900C, Max
Type VI
(4)
1.
200
100
2.
200
90
3.
100
70
120
150
14
35
20
30
70
80
---------
0.20
0.50
4.
5.
6.
12 x 12 x 64
(uncoated)
Bending
Length
Width
Thickness
Compression
20
20 20
12.46
80
80
75
70
40
45
80
70
70
SP 21 : 2005
Note For method of tests refer to
i)
IS 1586 : 1988 Method for Rockwell hardness test for metallic material (second revision)
ii)
IS 1708 : 1986 Methods of testing of small clear specimen of Timber (second revision)
iii)
IS 1734 (Part 9) : 1983 Methods of test of plywood : Part 9 Determination of tensile strength. (second revision)
iv) IS 1998 : 1962 Method of test for thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated sheets.
v)
IS 3513 (Part 4) : 1966 High and medium density wood based laminates (compreg) : Part 4 Sampling and tests.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3513 (Part 2) : 1989. Specification for resin treated compressed wood
laminates (compregs) : Part 2 For chemical purposes (first revision).
12.47
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.1 Boards
4.1.1 Sizes Shall generally be the following :
mm
12.48
mm
mm
mm
SP 21 : 2005
mm
mm
2100
1200
1200
600
Length
mm
Diameter
mm
2100
900
1200
300
1500
8 to 50
1800
1200
1200
150
1200
3 to 50
900
50 to 80
600
6 to 40
mm
mm
1800
900
900
900
1500
1200
900
600
1500
900
900
300
1500
600
900
150
1500
300
600
600
1500
150
600
300
1200
1200
600
150
: + 6 mm
b) Width
: + 3 mm
Tolerances
a) Length
Grade GH
(1)
(2)
(3)
i) Specific gravity
0 mm
ii) Moisture content and
volatile matter
0 mm
c) Thickness less than 6 mm : 10 Percent
6 mm and above
+ 0 mm
0.20 mm
+ 0. mm
0.25 mm
5.2
5 Percent
Grade GM
(4)
1.25 Min
1.35 Max
0.95 Min
1.25 Max
6-12 percent
6-12 percent
4.2 Rods
4.2.1 The sizes for round rods of compreg shall
generally be the following
TABLE 2 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
SL.NO.
(1)
TEST
(2)
Requirement
Type V
GH
(3)
Type VI
GH
(4)
Type V
GM
(5)
Type VI
GM
(6)
i.
155
90
108
59
ii.
145
100
88
59
iii.
Compressive strength,
(Specimen 20 mm 20 mm 20 mm)
a) Parallel to laminate, MPa Min
b) Perpendicular to laminate, MPa, Min
Shear strength (MPa) Min
a) Parallel to grain and laminate (edgewise)
b) Perpendicular to grain and
perpendicular to lamine (flatwise)
130
70
90
160
55
70
75
130
14
14
--
--
iv.
60
45
--
--
v.
80
--
80
vi.
0.3
0.5
--
0.2
0.5
12.49
SP 21 : 2005
6.
6.1 The face and the back of a board shall be free from
checks, splits, blisters, discoloration, overlaps, gaps
and open joints and the boards shall be free from warp.
NoteFor method of tests refer to:
i)
IS 1586 : 1988 Method for rockwell hardness test for metallic material (second revision)
ii)
IS 1708 : 1986 Methods of testing of small clear specimen of timber (second revision)
iii)
IS 1734 (Part 9) Methods of testing of plywood, Part 9 Determination of tensile strength. (sssecond revision)
iv)
IS 1998 : 1962 Method of test for thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated sheets.
v)
IS 3513 (Part 4) : Specification for high and medium density wood based laminates (compreg) : Part 4 Sampling tests.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3513 (Part 3) : 1989 Specification of resin treated compressed wood
laminates (compregs) : Part 3 For general purposes (first revision).
12.50
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.1 Veneers
Permissible Limits
Jointing
Gaps
Slope of
Grain
Tight knot
Three numbers up to 25 mm
diameter in one square metre
provided they are spaced 300 mm
or more apart.
Warp
3.2 Adhesive
3.2.1 Only BWP grade adhesive conforming to
IS 848 : 1974 + shall be used for making LVL.
3.3
Preservatives
3.3.1 Veneers used for LVL shall be given suitable
preservative treatment before lamination, with a
preservative that is compatible with the adhesive to be
used.
+ Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood ( phenolic and
aminoplastic) (first revision).
6. Requirements :
6.1 Moisture Content Between 5 to 15 percent.
12.51
SP 21 : 2005
6.2 Adhesion of PliesAdhesion of plies shall be
tested by knife test as described in IS 1734 (Part 5) on
three specimens each under the following condition
a) In the dry state.
b) After boiling in water for 72 h followed by
cooling in water at room temperature, and
Properties
Requirement
i)
ii)
Min
550
7500
35
35
50
v)
Horizontal shear:
a)
55
2300
2700
Note For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 1734 : 1983 Methods of test for plywood (second revision), various parts
of IS : 1708 Methods of testing small clear specimens of timber (second revision) and IS 2380 : 1977 Methods of tests for wood
particle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic materials ( first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 14616 : 1999 Specification for laminated veneer lumber.
12.52
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
c) Thickness
Less than 6 mm 10 percent
6mm and above 5 percent
d) Squareness
2. Materials
0.2 percent
e) Edge Straightness
0.2 percent
Length
b)
Width
Tolerance
+6mm
0mm
+3mm
0mm
For detailed information, refer to IS 13958 : 1994 Specification for Bamboo mat board for general purposes.
12.53
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY
OF
3. Material
3.1 Bamboo Any suitable species of bamboo may be
used .
3.2 Adhesive Adhesive for bonding bamboo mat and
veneer shall be of phenolic type conforming to BWR
type specified in IS 848 : 1974+
3.3 Veneer Any species of timber may be used for
manufacture of veneers. However, a list of species is
given in Annex B of the standard for guidance.
Tolerance
6 mm
0 mm
+3 mm
-0 mm
6. Tests
6.1.1 In dry state Shall give an average and
individual glue sheer strength value of not less than
1350N and 1100 N respectively
6.1.2 Water resistance Shall give an average and
individual glue sheer strength value of not less than
1000 N and 800 N respectively
6.1.3 Mycological Shall give an average and
individual glue sheer strength value of not less than
1000 N and 800 N respectively.
6.2 Internal Bond Strength
6.2.1 In dry state Shall give an average and
individual value of not less than 1.5 N/ mm2 and 1.2 N/
mm2 respectively.
6.2.2. In wet stateShall be subjected to attack by
micro- organisms as per the method described in Annex
C and then tested as per IS : 2380 (Part5) shall given an
average and individual value of not less than 1.2 N/mm2
and 0.9 N/mm2 respectively.
6.2.3 Mycological Shall be subjected to attack by
micro- organisms as per the method described in Annex
C of the standard and then tested as per IS : 2380 (Part5)
shall given an average and individual valuee of not less
than 1.2 N/mm2 and 0.9 N/mm2 respectively .
10 percent
5 percent
1000 mm
1000 mm
++
For detailed information, refer to IS 14588 : 1999 Specification for bamboo mat veneer composite for general
purposes.
12.54
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY
OF
Dimension
3. Material
3.1 Coconut Fibre Coconut fibre layer used in the
manufacture of coir veneer board shall be uniform with
a minmum of 600 g/m2.
3.2 Jute Jute fibre used in the manufacture of coir
veneer board shall be uniform with a minimum of 60 g/
m2.
3.3 Adhesive Adhesive for manufacture of coir veneer
board shall conform to BWR/MR of IS 848* for BWR/
MR grade of boards.
3.4 Veneer Any species of timber may be used for
the manufacture of veneers
Tolerance
a) Less than 6 mm
10%
b) 6 mm and above
5%
a)
b)
Mycological test..
c)
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 1734 (Part 1) IS 1734 (Part6 ) IS1734 (Part 7) and Annexure C of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 14842 : 2000 Specification for bamboo mat veneer composite for general
purposes.
12.55
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY
OF
1. Scope
2. Materials
2.1 Bamboo
Any species of bamboo suitable for mat making may be
used for MBCS
2.2 Adhesive
Resin for BMCS shall be phenolic tye conforming to
BWP grade specified in IS 848. For the outermost layers
of mats of BMCS, resin admixed with suitable filer shall
be used.
2.3 Preservative
Preserative treatment shall be given by incororating the
suitable preservatives like sodium pentachloro phenate
into the resin before soaking the mats to protect against
biodegradation.
For detailed information, refer to IS 15476: 2004 Specification for bamboo mat corrugated sheets.
12.56
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY
OF
1. Scope
4. Finish
Designation
Grade 1
Grade 2
Grade 3
3.1 Coir
Coir fibre layer used in the manufacture of medium
density coirboards shall be uniform having a minimum
mass of 600 g/m2. Coir needled felt is manufactured by
mechanical inter - loop of coir fleee by use of barb needles
to form a non woven felt of different densities.
3.2 Jute
Jute fiber layer or any other finer fiber used i the
manufacture of medium density coirbaords shall be
uniform having a minimum mass of 60 g/m2.
3.3 Paper
Paper used in the manufacture of medium density
coirboards shall be uniform having a minimum mass of
40 g/m2.
3.4 Adhesive
BWR type of synthetic resin adhesive conforming to IS
848 shall be used for the purpose of bonding for Grade
1, Grade 2 and Grade 3 boards to comply with hysical
and mechanical requirements given in Table 1.
12.57
SP 21 : 2005
vi)
vii)
Properties
(2)
Density, kg/m 3
Variation from mean density percent
Moisture content, percent
Variation from mean moisture content, percent absolute
Water absorption, percent, Max
1) After 2 h soaking
2) After 24 h soaking
a) Up to and including 6 mm
b) 8 - 12 mm
c) 13 - 19 mm
d) 20 mm and above
Grade 1
(3)
Grade 2
(4)
Grade 3
(5)
650 900
10
515
500 900
10
515
500 900
10
515
30
20
13
12
30
20
13
12
45
30
20
18
4
0.3
0.3
4
4
0.3
0.3
4
7
0.4
0.4
5
31
27
29
25
29
25
27
23
25
22
25
22
17
15
NA
NA
NA
NA
15
13
NA
NA
NA
NA
2 800
2 500
2 800
2 500
2 800
2 500
2 500
2 300
2 500
2 300
2 500
2 300
0.9
0.8
0.9
0.8
0.8
0.7
0.8
0.7
0.8
0.7
0.7
0.6
0.45
0.40
0.45
0.40
viii)
ix)
x)
12.58
SP 21 : 2005
Sl.No.
(1)
xi)
xii)
Properties
(2)
Screw withdrawal strength, N:
a) ace:
1) Average
2) Minimum individual
b) Edge (for thickness > 12 mm):
1) Average
2) Minimum individual
Nail holding strength, N
a) Face:
1) Average
2) Minimum individual
b) Edge (for thickness > 12 mm):
1) Average
2) Minimum individual
Resistance to spread of flame
Grade 1
(3)
Grade 2
(4)
Grade 3
(5)
2 300
2 00
1 725
1 500
1 725
1 500
1 700
1 500
1 400
1 250
1 400
1 250
1 400
1 250
1 400
1 250
1 400
1 250
1 400
1 400
1 400
1 250
1 250
1 250
xiii)
To pass the test
(Annex C)
1
Accelerated Water Resistance Test Specimens are immersed in water at 27 2C and water is brought to boiling and kept at boiling
temperature for 4 h for Grade 1 and 2 h for Grade 2. Specimens are then cooled in water to 27 2C and dried in ambient condition
before determining the tensile strength perpendicular to the surface (Intenal bond).
12.59
SECTION 13
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
13.3
13.5
IS 1826 : 1961
13.7
13.9
13.11
IS 2202
(Part 1) : 1999
(Part 2) : 1983
13.12
13.14
IS 4021 : 1995
13.15
IS 4962 : 1968
13.17
IS 6198 : 1992
13.18
IS 15380:2003
13.19
IS 1003 : 1994
13.21
IS 1361 : 1978
13.23
IS 1948 : 1961
13.25
IS 1949 : 1961
13.27
IS 4351 : 2003
13.29
IS 6248 : 1979
13.30
IS 7452 : 1990
Hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators (second revision)
13.31
IS10451 : 1983
13.32
IS10521 : 1983
Collapsible gates
13.33
Glass fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) door shutters for internal use
13.2
13.34
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
thickness 12 mm or more.
3.4 Veneered Particle Board Panelling Shall be
made of one piece of veneered particle board. Thickness
shall not be less than 12 mm.
3.5 Asbestos Cement Board Panelling Shall consist
of two or more panels with thickness of each panel not
less than 6 mm.
3.6 Medium Density Fibre Board Panelling
Thickness of boards shall not be less than 12 mm.
3.7 Prelaminated Particles Board Panelling
Thickness of boards shall not be less than 12 mm.
3.8 Wire Gauze Panelleing Shall be so designated
that no single panel exceeds 0.5 m2 in are
3.9 Medium Density Wood Particle Board Panelling
shall be made of one piece of medium density wood
particle board. Thicknes of boards used shall not be
less than 12 mm.
4. Dimensions, Sizes and Tolerances
4.1 Dimensions of Components and Tolerances
Sl. No.Description
Width
mm
Thickness
mm
i)
1003
351 or 401
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
1503
2003
1003
401
351
351
351
351
Vertical stile
top and freeze
rail
Lock rail
Bottom rail
Munting
Glazing bar
or
or
or
or
401
401
401
401
3. Requirements
3.1 Timber Panelling No single panel shall exceed
0.5m2 in area.
3.2 Plywood Panelling Shall be of one piece of
thickness not less than 9 mm for 2 or more panel
construction and 12 mm for single panel construction.
3.3 Blockboard Panelling Shall be of one piece of
* Permissible moisture content for timber used for different
purpose (Third revision)
+ Classification of Indian timbers for door and window shutters
and frames.
Designation
of Doors
Width
mm
Height
mm
8 DS
8 DS
9 DS
9 DS
10 DS
10 DS
12 DS
12 DS
700
700
800
800
900
900
1100*
1100*
1905
2005
1905
2005
1905
2005
1905
2005
20
21
20
21
20
21
20
21
13.3
(1945)
(2045)
(1945)
(2045)
(1945)
(2045)
(1945)
(2045)
SP 21 : 2005
Note 1 The designation refers to modular sizes of door openings.
First number stands for width and the last for height module
(M=100mm); D= Doors, SSingle shutter and TDouble leaf
shutters.
Note2 The standard widths and heights for panel doors are
arrived at as shown in Fig. 6 of the standard. In case the modular
height is taken from finished floor level, the height of the door
shall be given in bracket. In case of double leaf shutters, the
rebate in the shutters shall be as given in 6.15 of the standard.
Finish
For detailed information,refer to IS 1003 (Part 1) : 2003 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutter:
Part1 door shutters (fourth revision).
13.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
mm
Stiles and Rails
Mounting
60 3
Glazing bars
40 1
4.2
3. Requirements
3.1 Timber Panelling No single panel shall exceed
0.5 m2 in area.
3.2 Plywood Panelling Thickness not less than 9
mm for two or more panel construction and 12 mm for
single panel construction.
3.3 Blockboard Panelling Shall be of one piece of
thickne 12 mm or more.
13.5
mm
mm
80 3 25 1
25
30
25
30
1
1
1
1
80 3
30 1
60 3
mm
20 1
22.5 1
25 1
7.5 1
30 1
- do -
40 1
- do -
Sizes
a) Window Shutters
Designation
Width
(1)
(2)
6
10
12
6
10
12
WS 12
WT 12
WT 12
WS 13
WT 13
WT 13
500
460
560
500
460
560
b) Ventilator Shutters
Designation
Width
(1)
(2)
6V6
10 V 6
12 V 6
500
900
1100
Height
(3)
1000
1100
1100
1200
1200
1200
Height
(3)
500
500
500
SP 21 : 2005
4.3 Tolerances on overall dimensions shall be 3 mm.
5. Finish
5.1 Defective knots, when permitted on surfaces
exposed to view shall be completely bored or cut out
and tightly plugged with the same timber species and
properly glued in. The grains of the plug shall run in the
direction of the grains of the piece.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1003 (Part 2) : 1994 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutter:
Part 2 Window and ventilator shutter (third revision)
13.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Requirments
4.1 Grade 1
Grade 2
13.7
SP 21 : 2005
6.1.5 Rigidity test Slats shall have sufficient flexibility
so as to permit a 180 bend around a 7.5 cm dia cyliner
without harm or permanenet deformation or injury to
finish when released to their original shape.
6.2.1
Colour fastness and shrinkage Face and
cross tapes shall have good colour fastness to light
and water, and shall not shrink more than 7 percent.
For detailed information, refer to IS
13.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
Core
Type
Abbreviation
Cellular
Decorative
Non-decorative
CD
CN
Hollow
Decorative
Non-decorative
HD
HN
3. Sizes
Designation
Width
mm
8 DS
8 DS
9 DS
9 DS
10 DS
10 DS
12 DS
12 DS
700
700
800
800
900
900
1100
1100
20
21
20
21
20
21
20
21
Height
mm
1905
2005
1905
2005
1905
2005
1905
2005
(1945)
(2045)
(1945)
(2045)
(1945)
(2045)
(1945)
(2045)
5. Requirements
5.1 Plywood for Face Panels
4. Materials
13.9
SP 21 : 2005
6.1 Both faces of door shutter shall be sanded to a
smooth even texture. If required by the purchaser, all
surfaces of shutters which are required to be painted
shall be covered evenly by brush painting with a priming
coat or primer. In the case of shutters to be polished or
varnished, a priming coat of suitable polish or varnish
shall be given before delivery. However, only unpainted
doors shall be subjected to the tests.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2191 (Part 1) : 1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular
and hollow core type) : Part 1 Plywood face panels (fourth revision).
13.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.2
Cellular
Decorative with skins of
CDPV
decorative veneered particle board.
Non-decorative with
CNP
skins of particle boards unveneered
Non-decorative with skins
CNPV
of particle boards veneered with
commercial veneers.
Hollow
Decorative with skins of
HDPV
decorative veneered particle board.
Non-decorative with skins
HNP
of particle boards
unveneered.
Non-decorative with
HNPV
skins of particle boards veneered
with commercial veneers.
5. Requirements
5.1 Face Panels Particle board or veneered particle
board shall not be less than 6 mm thick for cellular core
and not less than 9 mm thick for hollow core shutters.
Hardboard thickness shall not be less than 4 mm for
cellular core and not less than 6 mm for hollow core
shutters.
5.2 Shutter shall be shop-prepared for taking mortice
locks or latches.
6. Workmanship and Finish All the four edges of
the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be
free from twist or warp in its plane. Both faces of door
shutter shall be sanded to a smooth even texture.
7. Tests As per 9 of IS 2191 (Part 1) :1983.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2191 (Part 2) : 1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular
and hollow core type) : Part 2 Particle board and hard board face panels (third revision).
13.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Sl.No. Core
(1)
(2)
Type
(3)
Abbreviation
(4)
i)
Blockboard
Decorative
Non-decorative
BD
BN
ii)
Particle board
with or without
blockboard
Decorative
Non-decorative
PD
PN
iii)
Medium density
fibreboard with
or without
blockboard
Decorative
Non-decorative
MD
MN
3. Sizes
Sl.
No.
Designation of
doors
4. Material
Width
mm
Height
mm
i)
8 DS 20
700
1905 (1945)
ii)
8 DS 21
700
2005 ( 2045)
iii)
9 DS 20
800
1905 (1945)
iv)
9 DS 21
800
2005 ( 2045)
v)
10 DS 20
900
1905 (1945)
vi)
10 DS 21
900
2005 ( 2045)
vii)
12 DT 20
1100*
1905 (1945)
viii)
12 DT 21
1100*
2005 ( 2045)
5. Construction
5.1 Face Panels Thickness of crossbands shall be
between 1 mm and 3 mm. Thickness of face veneers
shall be between 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm for commercial veneer
and 0.35 mm to 1.0 mm for decorative veneers provided
the combined thickness of both is not less than 2.2 mm.
13.12
SP 21 : 2005
6. Workmanship and Finish All the four edges of
the door shutter shall be square. Both faces of the door
shutter shall be sanded to a smooth even texture.
7. Tests Flush door shutters shall be subjected to
the following tests
vii)
Slamming test
x)
Misuse test
xi)
xii)
i)
ii)
iii)
xv)
iv)
v)
Flexure test
vi)
Note For methods of test, refer to IS 4020 (Part 1 to 16) : 1998 Door shutters - methods of test.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2202 : 1999 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type)
Part 1 Plywood face panels (sixth revision).
13.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.1 Thickness
Flush Door Designation
8 DS 20 and 8 DS 21
9 DS 20 and 9 DS 21
10 DS 20 and 10 DS 21
12 DT 20 and 12 DT 21
2.1 Block
board
Width
mm
700
700
800
800
900
900
1100+
1100+
Height
mm
1905 (1945)
2005 (2045)
1905 (1945)
2005 (2045)
1905 (1945)
2005 (2045)
1905 (1945)
2005 (2045)
Thickness of Shutter
25
30 or 35
35
35
+3
1.2 mm. The thickness of the door
0
5. Requirements
5.1 Face Panels Thickness of the face panels of
particle board shall be not less than 4 mm and of
hardboard not less than 3 mm.
5.2 Locks Shutters shall be shop-prepared for taking
mortice locks or latches.
6. Workmanship and Finish All the four edges of
the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be
free from twist or warp in its plane.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2202 (Part 2) :1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core
type) : Part 2 Particle board and har board face panels (third revision).
13.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Timber
3.1 Joinery
Dimensions, mm
Door
Window
Size > 120 cm
(1)
a)
b)
c)
Ventilator
< 120 cm
(2)
(3)
100
90
100
90
90
90
90
90
120
90
60
120
90
60
120
90
50
120
90
50
13.15
(4)
(5)
SP 21 : 2005
combined with those of windows and ventilators, they
shall be designated as illustrated below. However size
of frame for such combination shall be uniform for doors,
windows and ventilators, by choosing the highest
recommended dimension.
4.2 Tolerance
+ 3 mm for width and
0
+2
3
mm for thickness
Example 2
6V6
6V6
6 WS 12 6 WS 12
Two single windows of 6 modules wide and 12 modules
high combined side by side and with two ventilators at
top 6 modules wide and 6 modules high.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4021 : 1995 Timber door, window and ventilator frames (third revision)
13.16
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Materials
3.1 Rolled steel sections shall be of weldable quality
conforming to the prescribed standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4962 : 1968 Specification for wooden side sliding doors.
13.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Material
Width
Thickness
mm
mm
Top and bottom edges 150 1.5
25 1.5
Middle Ledge
200 1.5
25 1.5
Braces
110 to 125
25 1.5
Battens
140 to 160
25 1.5
(depending upon the width of the shutter)
Tolerances of sizes of door shutter shall be 3mm.
5. Workmanship and Finish All battens of the
shutter shall be sanded and finished smooth.
5.1 Defective knots, where permitted in surfaces
exposed to view, shall be completely bored or cut out
and tightly plugged with cross-gained plug (round or
dovetailed) of similar spices of timber and shall be
properly glued. All the surfaces of door shutters which
are required to be painted or polished or varnished
ultimately shall be covered initially before delivery by
protective coat of primer polish or varnish.
6. Tests
8 DS 20
700
1905 (1945)
8 DS 21
700
2005 (2045)
9 DS 20
800
1905 (1945)
9 DS 21
800
2005 (2045)
10 DS 20
900
1905 (1945)
10 DS 21
900
2005 (2045)
12 DT 20
1100+
1905 (1945)
12 DT 21
1100+
2005 (2045)
* Classification of indian timbers for doors and window shutters
and frames.
+
Combined width of double leaf shutter in closed position.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Slamming test,
Shock resistance test,
Edge loading test and
Resistance to buckling test type tests
only.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6198 : 1992. Specification for ledged, braced and battened timber door
shutters (second revision).
13.18
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
ii)
700
2 045
2 070
iii)
800
2 045
2 070
iv)
900
2 045
2 070
v)
1 000
2 045
2 070
vi)
1 000
2 045
2 070
13.19
SP 21 : 2005
7.1.2 Type Tests
The following tests shall constitute product approval
type tests:
(a) Impact indentation test,
(b) Flexure test
(c) Edge loading test,
(e) Shock resistance test:
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
Requirements
(2)
Density, kg/m3
Moisture content, percent Max
Water absorption, percent
After 2 h
After 24 h
Swelling in water, percent, Max
a) General absorption, 24 h:
1) Thickness
2) Length
3) Width
b) Surface absorptiong
Modulus of rupture, N/mm2 Min
Internal bond strength, N/mm2 Min.
a) Dry state
b) Wet state ( 2 h boiling)
Immersion in boiling water at
100 3C for 4 h
Formaldehyde emission
Permissible Limits
(3)
> 1 000
8
Method of Test
(4)
2380 (Part 3)
2380 (Part 3)
2380 (Part 3)
< 16
< 36
2380 (Part 17)
20
0.70
0.70
9
35
1.0
0.3
No.
Disintegration
< 9 mg / 100 g
2380 (Part 4)
2380 (Part 5)
13745
For detailed information, refer to IS 15380 : 2003 Moulded raised high density fibre (HDF) panel doors specification
13.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
8 HS 20
8 HS 21
10 HS 20
10 HS 21
10 HS 9
10 HS 12
10 HS 15
12 HS 9
12 HS 12
12 HS 15
15 HS 9
15 HS 12
15 HS 15
18 HS 9
18 HS 12
18 HS 15
10 HT 6
10 HC 6
12 HT 6
12 HC 6
15 HT 6
15 HC 6
18 HT 6
18 HC 6
3.1 Doors
6 HS 20
6 HS 21
12 HS 20
12 HS 21
3.2 Windows
5 HS 9
5 HS 12
5 HS 15
6 HS 9
6 HS 12
6 HS 15
3.3 Ventilators
5 HT 6
5 HC 6
5 HT 9
6 HT 6
6 HC 6
6 HT 9
10 HF 6 / 10 HF 6
4. Materials
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
6
9
12
15
6
9
12
15
10
10
10
10
12
12
12
12
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
6
9
12
15
6
9
12
15
15
15
15
15
18
18
18
18
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
HF
10 HS 12 / 10 HS 12
6
9
12
15
6
9
12
15
13.21
SP 21 : 2005
5. Fabrication
5.1 Side Hung Shutters Hinges projecting type 65
mm to 75 mm wide. Friction hinges or Non-projecting
type of hinges may also be used.
5.1.1 Handle Shall be of pressed brass, cast brass,
aluminium or steel.
5.2 Centre Hung Windows and Ventilators Windows
shall be hung on two pairs of brass or aluminium cup
pivots riveted to the inner or outer frames of window to
swing to an angle of approximately 850. The opening
portion of the window shall be so balanced that it
remains open at any desired angle under normal weather
conditions.
Note: For details regarding position of holes, fixing screws and lugs see 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1038 : 1983 Specification for steel doors, windows and ventilators
(third revision).
13.22
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.
IN 10 C 10 / IN 10 C 10
IN 10 C 15 / IN 10 C 15
IN 22 C 10
IN 22 T 10
IN 22 B 10
IN 16 C 15
IN 16 T 15
IN 16 B 15
IN 16 C 10
IN 16 T 10
IN 16 B 10
IN 10C 15
IN 10 T 15
IN 10 B 15
IN 22 C 15
IN 22 T 15
IN 22 B 15
IN 10 C 20
IN 10 T 20
IN 10 B 20
IN 22 C 20
IN 22 T 20
IN 22 B 20
IN 22 F 10
IN 22 F 15
IN 22 F 20
IN 16 C 20
IN 16 T 20
IN 16 B 20
IN 10 F 10
IN 10 F 15
IN 10 F 20
IN 22 F 10
IN 22 F 15
IN 22 F 20
5. Materials
5.1 Rolled steel sections shall conform to the
prescribed standard.
5.2 Pivots and Spring Catches Non ferrous metal.
5.3 Glass Shall conform to the prescribed standard.
6. Holes for Fixing, Coupling and Glazing Holes
for fixing and coupling sashes shall be provided in the
web of the outside frame sections (and of outer ventilator
frame sections where these occur at the perimeter of the
sash). Holes for glazing clips shall also be provided.
7. Fittings and Fixing Materials
7.1 Centre-hung ventilators shall be mounted on a pair
of brass cup pivots, each pivot consisting of an inner
and an outer cup, permitting the swinging of the
ventilator through at least 850 and so balanced that the
ventilator shall be capable of remaining open in any
desired position.
7.2 Centre-hung ventilators shall be provided with a
pulley with centre of the bottom section of the ventilator,
and attached with screws.
7.3 Centre-hung and bottom hung ventilators shall have
a bronze spring catch in the centre of the top section,
suitable for operation by hand or pole (and by cord in
case of centre-hung ventilators). The former shall be
provided with a 30 cm peg stay of steel or a 30 cm bronze
cam opener to hold the ventilator open in three different
positions. Bottom-hung ventilators shall have folding
side arms to limit the opening.
13.23
SP 21 : 2005
8. Composite Windows Shall be desptached
unassembled, but complete with necessary coupling
components. Each coupling member will increase the
overall height or width by 25 mm maximum which
includes manufacturing tolerances.
9.
Pane Designation
Width, mm
269 304 292 304 304 292
Height, mm
425 425 460 460 492 492
Note For number of glass panes for each type of window
see Fig. 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1361 : 1978 Specification for steel windows for Industrial buildings
(first revision)
13.24
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Materials
10HF6,
10HT6,
10HC6,
10HF9,
10HS9,
10HF12,
10HS12,
10HF15,
10HS15,
8HS21,
10 HS 12 / 10 HS 12
10 HF 6 / 10 HF 6
12HF6,
12HT6,
12HC6,
12HF9,
12HS9,
15HF6,
15HT6,
15HC6,
15HF9,
15HS9,
18HF6
18HT6
18HC6
18HF9
18HS9
12HF12,
12HS12,
12HF15,
12HS15,
2HS21,
15HF12,
15HS12,
15HF15,
15HS15,
8HF6,
18HF12
18HS12
18HF15
18HS15
8HT6,
5.
Fabrication
Examples
a) A window of width 10 modules (97.5 cm) and height
9 modules (87.5 cm), having horizontal glazing bars
and side-hung shutters is designated by 10 HS 9.
b) Two 10 module wide and 12 module high
13.25
SP 21 : 2005
5.4 Composite Units Doors shall be coupled to
windows or side lights by extruded aluminium sections
made from aluminium conforming to IS Designation HE
9-WP.
5.5 Weather Bar Where a coupling member is fitted
over an external opening shutter, the coupling member
should incorporate an integrally extruded weather bar.
6. Positions of Bolts, Fixing Screws and Lugs Outer
frames shall be provided with fixing holes centrally in
the web of the sections.
7. Finish
7.1 Matt, scratch-brush or polished. May be anodized
additionally.
7.2 A thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on
methacrylates or cellulose butyrate shall be applied by
suppliers to protect the surface from wet cement during
construction. This lacquer coating shall be removed
after installation is completed.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1948 : 1961 Specification for aluminium doors, windows and ventilators.
13.26
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
IN22C10
IN22T10
IN22B10
IN10C15
IN10T15
IN10B15
IN16C15
IN16T15
IN16B15
IN22C15
IN22T15
IN22B15
IN10C20
IN22C20
IN16F15
IN10T20
IN22T20
IN16F15
IN10B20
IN22B20
IN16F20
IN16C20
IN10F10
IN22F10
IN16T20
IN10F15
IN22F15
IN16B20
IN10F20
IN22F20
b) Ventilators (opening part of sash) shall be
of one size and designed to fit into outer
frame IN 10 C 10 and with 1.2 mm clearance.
c) Tolerances for overall dimensions 3mm.
4. Materials
a)
265
420
300
490
290
490
Note For number of glass panes for each type of window see
Fig 5 of the standard.
13.27
SP 21 : 2005
6.3 Bottom-hung and top-hung ventilators shall be
hung on aluminium alloy hinges. The former shall be
provided with a pair of aluminium alloy folding side
arms ( to limt the opening ) and the latter with a 300 mm
long peg stay. Alternatively, top-hung ventilator may
be provided with 30 cm cam opener.
6.4 Two spring glazing clips pane shall be provided.
7. Composite Windows
Shall be despatched unassembled, but complete with
For detailed information, refer to IS 1949 : 1961 Specification for aluminium windows for Industrial buildings.
13.28
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
four for jamb with fan light. For details refer 10.1 of the
standard.
5.2 Hinges - Frames shall be provided with any one
type of the hinges, conforming to the relevant Indian
standards as given in Table 3 of the standard.
5.3 Lock-Strike Plate of Steel A slot suitable for lock
strike plate shall be pierced into the rebate of the frame
and necessary fixing arrangement and mortar guard from
the inside of the frame shall be provided (see Fig. 6A of
the standard).
5.4 Shock Absorbers Minimum 3 buffers, for side hung
door , and 2 buffer for double shutter door.
6. Finish For details refer 11 of the standard.
5. Fittings
5.1 Fixing Lugs There shall be three adjustable lugs
with split end tail to each jamb without fan light, and
For detailed information, refer to IS 4351 : 2003 Specification for steel door frames ( second revision).
13.29
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.2 Lock Plate Made of mid steel sheet not less than
3.15 mm thick, reinforced with mild steel angle section
not less than 35355 mm. Alternatively, it may be
fabricated out of mild steel angles or Tee sections not
less than 5 mm thick.
4.3 Guide Channels and Brackets Plates Fabricated
out of mild steel sheets of minimum, 3.15 mm thickness.
4.4 Hood Covers Made of mild steel sheets not less
than 0.9 mm thick.
4.5 Safety Devices For width up to 2.5 m, a properly
fabricated and reinforced bottom lock plate shall be
provided to give protection. For widths above 2.5 m,
anchorage rods or central hasp and staple, or both may
be provided.
5. Rolling Grills Curtains may be built of aluminium
alloy or cold rolled steel sheet links of 0.9 mm thickness
assembled on tubes or rods, or out of 8 mm dia mild
steel or aluminium alloy round bars.
5.1 Rolling Shutter-cum-Grill In situations where a
certain amount of ventilation combined with safety is
called for the rolling shutter may have a small rolling
grill portion either at top or at bottom or at both places.
Height of grill portion shall be 0.5 m maximum.
6. Painting All components parts (except springs
and the inside of guide channels) shall be given one
coat of a brusing quality ready mixed primer before
despatch. Portions where there is contact between
aluminium and steel shall be painted with zinc chromate
prier.
Note For details regarding types based on position of
fixing, materials, fabrication, optional features, operation,
etc, refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6248 : 1979 Specification for metal rolling shutters and rolling grills
(first revision).
13.30
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.2 Tolerances
Designation
T2
T3
T6
F2
F3
F5
F8
FX6
FZ7
K11B
Mass Designation
Mass
(kg/m)
1.036
1.14
0.839
1.46
2.280
1.55
1.75
2.52
1.90
1.80
(kg/m)
1.955
2.250
1.955
2.840
2.28
1.419
2.31
2.52
2.30
F500
F501
F502
F503
F4B
F7D
FX8
FZ5
K12B
For detailed information, refer to IS 7452 : 1990 Hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators
(second revision).
13.31
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Fabrication
4.1 Angles of size not less than 50505mm for shutter
upto 2 m width and 2.5m height and 65656mm for
bigger sizes shall be used.
4.2 Top track shall be either of the following types
Type A Track made out of 1280 mm flat securely
anchored to the wall,
Type B Cold rolled inverted U type mild steel
track.
4.3 Bottom runner shall be channel of about 50 40
5mm .
4.4 Sliding gear or roller mechanism shall be as given in
5.4 of the standard.
5. Finish The shutters shall be finished with a coat
of red oxide primer.
For detailed information, refer to IS 10451 : 1983 Specification for steel sliding shutters (top hung type).
13.32
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Materials
4.1 Vertical Channels Shall be hot rolled medium
channels of at least 18 9 3 mm and shall be of weldable
quality mild steel conforming to the prescribed standard.
4.2 Crossing or Lacings These shall be flats of mild
steel of at least 18 5 mm size conforming to the
prescribed standard.
4.3 Top and Bottom Runner Tees or E used for
bottom runner shall have minimum web of 40 12 mm
and flange of 40 6 mm, and the flats used for top
runner shall be of minimum size 40 12 mm.
Note For details of mateial, see 5 of the standard.
5.
Fabrication
3. Sizes
3.1 Collapsible gates are recommended for a maximum
height of 3 m. there is no restriction in width.
3.2 When the gate is fitted under the lintel, the width
and height of the gate shall be the same as that of the
opening. But when the gate is fixed inside or outside
the opening, the width of the gate shall be the clear
width of opening plus the width of the gate in the
collapsed position and the height shall be 150 mm more
than the clear height to enable usage of the full opening.
For detailed information, refer to IS 10521 : 1983 Specification for collapsible gates.
13.33
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Sl
No.
1.
90 3
120 3
3.
Bottom rail
150 3
30
35
30
35
30
35
1 or
1
1 or
1
1 or
1
Designation of Doors
Width
8 DS 20
8 DS 21
9 DS 20
9 DS 21
10 DS 20
10 DS 21
12 DT 20
12 DT 21
mm
700
700
800
800
900
900
1100+
1100+
Height
mm
1905 (1945)
2005 (2045)
1905 (1945)
2005 (2045)
1905 (1945)
2005 (2045)
1905 (1945)
2005 (2045)
2.
Thickness
mm
Width
mm
Description
13.34
SP 21 : 2005
Toelrances Tolerances on the sizes of door shutters
shall be
+0
4
mm
25% (Min)
30 BHU(Min)
100(Min)
120(Min)
1500 (Min)
5% (Max)
100 mm length of
the specimen shall
not burn within 60
Seconds.
For detailed information, refer to IS 14856 : 2000 Specification for glass fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) panel
type door shutters for internal use.
13.35
SECTION 14
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
14.3
IS
280 : 1978
IS
432
Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire
for concrete reinforcement
14.4
(Part 2) : 1982
14.6
14.7
IS
1566 : 1982
Hard drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement (second revision)
IS
1785
(Part 1) : 1983
14.8
(Part 2) : 1983
14.9
IS 1786 : 1985
High strength defomed steel bars and wire for concrete reinforcement
(third revision)
14.10
14.12
IS 6003 : 1983
14.13
IS 6006 : 1983
14.14
IS 7887 : 1992
Mild steel wire rod for general engineering purposes (first revision)
14.16
IS 13620 : 1993
14.18
IS 14268 : 1995
14.19
IS
2090 : 1983
14.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Sizes
Diameter in mm
0.04
0.05
0.06
0.125
0.315
0.80
2.00
5.00
0.140
0.355
0.90
2.24
5.60
0.160
0.400
1.00
2.50
6.30
0.180
0.450
1.12
2.80
7.10
0.200
0. 500
1.25
3.15
8.00
0.224
0. 560
1.40
3.55
9.00
0.250
0.630
1.60
4.00
10.00
0.280
0.710
1.80
4.50
11.2
Condition
Annealed
Soft drawn
1/4 hard
1/2 hard
Hard
1 MPa = 1 N/mm2 =
12.5
Note Other sizes by mutual agreement.
Galvanized
500, Max
300-550
550, Max
450-650
600-800
700-950
550-900
1 MN/m2 = 0.102 0 kgf/mm2.
3. Tolerance on Diameter
Applicable to coils only
a)
Note 1 For test procedures, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals. Tensile testing (second revision),
IS 1755 : 1983 Method for wrapping test for metallic wire (first revision). and 8 of the standard.
Note 2
For detailed information, refer to IS 280 : 1978. Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering
purposes (third revision).
14.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Size
Tolerance
Percent
mm
10
16
Up to and
Including
mm
10
16
7
5
3
5. Tolerance
5.1.1 Size
Size
Over
mm
25
35
50
80
100
Tolerance
Up to and
Including
mm
25
35
50
80
100
mm
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.3
6
percent
of dia or
side width
6. Physical Requirements
6.1 Ultimate tensile stress, yield stress andpercentage
elongation shall be as given in Table 1.
6.2 Bend Test Shall withstand the specified test.
14.4
SP 21 : 2005
Sl
No.
i)
ii)
iii)
Elongation
Percent*
Min
410
410
370
370
225
215
23
23
540
540
510
350
340
330
20
20
20
So
250
240
23
23
Note 1
For test procedures , refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals- tensile testing (second revision),
IS 1599 : 1985 Method for bend test (second revision), (IS 2062:1999 Steel for general structural purposes (fifth revision), and 9
of the standard.
Note 2
For chemical composition refer to see 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 432 (Part I) : 1982 Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars
and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement : Part I Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars
(third revision).
14.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Physical Requirements
5.1 Tensile Properties
Length
+2 percent
1 percent
a)
b)
c)
: 6 mm up to 3 m
: 13 mm over 3 m.
Note 1 For test procedures , refer to IS 1608 : 1995. Mechanical testing of metals- tensile testing (Second revision),
IS 1716: 1985. Method for reverse bend testing of metallic wire (second revision) and 8 of the s tandard.
Note 2 For chemical composition see 3 of
the standard
For detailed information, refer to IS 432 (Part 2) : 1982 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn
steel wire for concrete reinforcement : Part 2 hard-drawn steel wire (third revision).
14.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
IS 1566 : 1982 HARD - DRAWN STEEL WIRE FABRIC FOR CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
(Second Revision)
1. Scope Requirements for hard-drawn steel wire
fabric consisting of hard-drawn steel with cross wires
electrically welded to them for use as concrete
reinforcement
7.
2. Types
7.2. Bend Test Test piece shall with stand one complete
cycle of reverse bend around a pin of size indicated
below
a)
b)
Square mesh
Mechanical Properties
Diameter of Pin
Equal to diameter of
specimen
Equal to twice the
diameter of specimen
6. Tolerances
a) Pitch
7 Percent
b) Sizes of Sheet 25 mm for dimensions
upto 5 m. percent
for dimensions over 5 mm.
c) Mass
Percent
i) When neither maximum nor
6
minimum mass is specified
ii) When maximum mass
+0
specified
12
iii) When minimum mass
specified
+12
Note.1 For mesh sizes, weights and sizes of wires for square and oblong welded wire fabric commonly manufactured see Appendix
A of the standard.
Note.2 For test procedures, refer to IS1 608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metalsTensile testing (second revision), IS 1716 :
1985 Method for reverse bend test for metallic wire (second revision) and 11 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1566 : 1982 Specification for hard-drawn steel wire fabric for concrete
reinforcement (second revision).
14.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Physical Requirements
5.1 Tensile Strength
Nominal Diameter
mm
0.05
0.05
0.05
4.00
0.05
8.00
7.00
5.00
4.00
Nominal Mass
1715
1570
1470
8.00
1375
4.00
5.00
7.00
Tolerances
mm
8.00
7.00
5.00
Tensile Strength
Min. N/mm2
Tolerance
g/m
g/m
395
302
154
98.9
2.50
3.00
4.00
5.00
7.00
8.00
Elongation,
Percent
Min
2.5
2.5
3.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.9
4.3
3.1
2.0
Note For test proceedures, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 1785(Part I) : 1983 Specification for plain hard drawn steel for
prestressed concrete : Part I Cold drawn stress relieved wire (second revision).
14.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.1 The ladle analysis shall show that the steel contains
not more than 0.040 percent of sulphur and not more
than 0.040 percent of phosphorus.
2.2 The surface of wire shall be clean, uniform, smooth
and free from harmful scratches and surface flaws, flat
parts, longitudinal or transverse ribs etc.
3. Nominal Sizes 2.50, 3.00, 4.00 and 5.00 mm
diameter (finished).
4.
5.00
4.00
3.00
2.50
3.00
0.02 mm
4.00
0.03 mm
5.00
0.03 mm
g/m
3.1
2.0
1.5
1.25
2.50
154
98.9
55.5
38.5
Tolerance
5. Requirements
Tolerances
Nominal Diameter
mm
Nominal
Mass
g/m
mm
Tensile
Strength
Min
N/mm2
2.50
3.00
4.00
5.00
1
1
1
1
800
765
715
570
Note For test procedures refer to 7 of the standard, and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second
revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1785 (Part 2) : 1983. Specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for
prestressed concrete : Part 2 As drawn wire (first revision).
14.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Fe 415,
Fe 500 and
Fe 550
Percent ,Maximum
Carbon
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.060
0.055
0.055
Phosphorus
0.060
0.055
0.050
0.11
0.105
0.10
Cross-sectional
Area
mm2
12.6
0.099
19.6
0.154
28.3
0.222
38.5
0.302
0.395
50.3
10
78.6
0.617
12
113.1
0.888
16
201.2
1.58
18
254.6
2.00
20
314.3
2.47
22
380.3
2.98
25
491.1
3.85
28
616.0
4.83
32
804.6
6.31
36
1018.3
7.99
40
1257.2
9.85
45
1591.1
12.50
50
1964.3
15.42
+75 mm
25
On minimum length
+50 mm
0
On specified length
1)
Individual
Sample*
Individual
Sample for
Coils only
(4)
(2)
(3)
Up to and
7
including 10
Over 10 upto and 5
including16
Over 16
3
5. Physical Properties
5.1 Proof stress, percentage elongation and tensile
strength for all sizes of deformed bars/wires determined
on effective cross-sectional area shall be as specified in
Table .1
5.2 The bars / wires shall withstand the bend test and
the rebend test.
* For individual sample plus tolerance is not specified.
For coils batch tolerance is not applicable.
14.10
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF HIGH STRENGTH DEFORMED BARS AND WIRES
Sl. No
(1)
Property
Grade
Fe 415
(3)
(2)
i) 0.2 percent proof strees/ yield stress, Min, N/mm2
ii)
0.2
A,
iii)
415.0
14.5
Fe 500
(4)
500.0
12.0
Fe 550
(5)
550.0
8.0
8 pecent more
than the actual 0.2
percent proof
stress but not less
than 545.0 N/mm2
6 percent more
than the actual
percent proof
stress but not less
than585.0 N/mm2
Note For test proceedures, refer to 8 of the standard, IS : 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second
revision) and IS 1599 : 1985 Method for bend test (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1786 :1985 Specification for high strength deformed steel bars and wires
for concrete reinforcement (third revision).
14.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Physical Requirements
Characteristic
5.65
Requirement
980 N/mm2
Notlessthan 80 percent
of minimum specified
tensile strength
10 percent
, Min
NoteFor test proceedures, refer to 7 of the standard and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing
(second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 2090 :1983 Specification for high tensile steel bars usd in prestressed
concrete (first revision).
14.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
6. Physical Requirements
Nominal Diamete
4. Geometrical Characteristics
4.1 The shape and pattern of indentation shall be as
mutually agreed provided the indentations are placed
in two lines, diametrically opposite and are staggered.
5. Tolerances
mm
5.00
4.00
3.00
Nominal
Diameter
rmm
5.00
4.00
3.00
Nominal Mass
g/m
154
98.9
55.5
Min, N/mm2
1 570
1 715
1 865
Tensile Strength
Nominal Diameter
mm
5.00
4.00
3.00
Elongation Percent
Min
4.00
3.00
2.50
Tolerance
g/m
3.1
2.0
1.5
Note For test procedures, refer to 7 of the standard and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals-Tensile testing
(second revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 6003 : 1983 Specification for intended wire for prestressed
concrete (first revision).
14.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
strand. The length of lay for the two and three wire
strands shall be uniform throughout and shall be 24 to
36 times the diameter of element wire. The wires in the
strand shall not unravel when the strand is cut and
they shall not fly out of position when the strand is cut
without seizing.
3. Size and Designation
2. Manufacture
2.1 Wire
2.1.1 The elements wire to be used for strand shall be
cold-drawn from plain carbon steel and shall contain
not more than 0.040 percent of sulphur and not more
than 0.040 percent of phosphorus.
2.1.2 The wire used shall be sound and free from splits,
surface flaws, piping. and any other defects.
2.2 Strand Seven wire strand shall have a centre wire
at least 1.5 percent greater in diameter than the
surrounding wires enclosed tightly by six helically placed
outer wires with a uniform length of lay of at least 12
times but more than 16 times of nominal diameter of the
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS, TOLERANCES AND MASS OF TWO AND THREE WIRE STRANDS
Designation
(1)
Nominal
Diameter of
Element Wire
(2)
mm
Tolerance on
Diameter of
Element Wire
(3)
mm
Nominal Cross
Sectional
Area of Strand
(4)
mm2
Nominal
Mass of
Strand
(5)
kg/m
2-ply 2 mm
2.0
0.03
6.28
2-ply 3 mm
3.0
0.03
14.14
0.111
3-ply 3 mm
3.0
0.03
21.21
0.166
14.14
0.0493
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS, TOLERANCES AND MASS OF SEVEN WIRE STRANDS
Designation
Nominal
Tolerances
Nominal CrossNominal
Diameter
on the Nominal
Sectional Area
Mass of
Class
(1)
5.
of Strand
(3)
mm
(2)
Diameter of Strand
(4)
mm
of Strand
(5)
mm2
Strand
(6)
kg/m
6.3 mm 7-ply
7.9 mm 7-ply
9.5 mm 7-ply
11.1 mm 7-ply
12.7 mm 7-ply
15.2 mm 7-ply
6.3
7.9
9.5
11.1
12.7
15.2
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
23.2
37.4
51.6
69.7
92.9
139.4
0.182
0.294
0.405
0.548
0.730
1.094
9.5 mm 7-ply
9.5
54.8
0.432
11.1 mm 7-ply
11.1
+ 0.66
0.15
+ 0.66
0.15
+ 0.66
0.15
+ 0.66
0.15
74.2
0.582
98.7
0.775
140.0
1.102
12.7 mm 7-ply
12.7
15.2 mm 7-ply
15.2
Physical Requirements
Class
Designation
0.2 percent
Proof load Min
(4)
N
(1)
(2)
2-ply 2 mm
2-ply 3 mm
3-ply 3 mm
12 750
25 500
38 250
10 840
21 670
42 460
6.3 mm 7-ply
7.9 mm 7-ply
9.5 mm 7-ply
11.1 mm 7-ply
12.7 mm 7-ply
15.2 mm 7-ply
40 000
64 500
89 000
120 100
160 100
240 200
34 000
54 700
75 600
102 300
136 200
204 200
9.5 mm 7-ply
11.1 mm 7-ply
12.7 mm 7-ply
15.2 mm 7-ply
102
137
183
260
87 200
117 200
156 100
221 500
300
900
700
700
NoteThe modulus of elasticity is to be taken as 195 10 kN/mm2, unless otherwise indicated by the manufacturer.
Note For test procedures, refer to 7 of the standard and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals-tensile testin
(second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 6006:1983 Uncoated stress relieved strand for prestressed concrete
(first revision).
14.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Chemical Composition
2.1 The ladle analysis : See Table
Constituent, Percent
(2)
Carbon
0.06 Max
0.08 Max
0.10 Max
0.08 to 0.13
0.08 to 0.13
0.10 to 0.15
0.13 to 0.18
0.13 to 0.18
0.15 to 0.20
0.15 to 0.20
0.18 to 0.23
0.18 to 0.23
0.20 to 0.25
0.22 to 0.28
0.22 to 0.28
(3)
Manganese
0.35 Max
0.25 to 0.400
0.70 Max
0.30 to 0.60
0.60 to0.90
0.30 to0.60
0.30to0.60
0.60to0.90
0.30to0.60
0.60to0.90
0.30 to0.60
0.60 to0.90
0.30 to0.60
0.30to0.60
0.60to 0.90
(1)
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulphur
Silicon
Limit, or Maximum
Specified Range,
Percent
(2)
0.25 upto
Over 0.25
Variation Over
Specified
Maximum or
Under the Minimum
limits,percent
Max
(3)
0.02
0.03
0.03
0.005
0.005
0.03
0.05
(4)
Sulphur, Max
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
(5)
Phosphorus, Max
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
0.050
14.16
SP 21 : 2005
5. Sizes and Tolerances
5.1 Size the nominal dia shall be 5mm
with an inceament of 0.5 mm.
on wards
(2)
(3)
(4)
15
0.4
0.60
25
0.5
0.75
30
0.6
0.90
For detailed information, refer to IS 7887 : 1992. Specification for mild steel wire rod for general engineering
purposes (first revision).
14.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
* Plain high strength deformed steel bars, and wires for concrete
reinforcement (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 13620 : 1993 Fusion bonded epoxy coated reinforceing bars (first revision).
14.18
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
II
mm
(2)
kN
(3)
kgs
(4)
kN
(5)
kgs
(6)
9.5
11.1
12.7
15.2
9.5
11.1
12.7
89.0
120.1
160.1
240.2
102.3
137.9
183.7
9078
12250
16330
24500
10434
14065
18737
80.1
108.1
144.1
216.2
92.1
124.1
165.3
8170
11026
14698
22052
9394
12658
16860
15.2
260.7
26592
234.6
23929
(1)
mm
1
II
Nominal
Dia of Strand
(2)
Tolerance
9.5
0.40
51.6
405
11.1
0.40
69.7
548
12.7
0.40
92.9
730
15.2
0.40
139.4
1094
+0.66
54.8
432
74.2
582
98.7
775
140.0
1102
9.5
Nominal
Area of Strand
(4)
mm2
(3)
mm
Nominal
Mass of Strand
(5)
kg/km
0.15
11.1
+0.66
0.15
12.7
+0.66
0.15
15.2
+0.66
0.15
14.19
SP 21 : 2005
4. Mechanical Properties
4.1 Breaking Strength and 0.2 Percent Proof Load It shall be not less than the values specified in Table 1.
4.2 Elongation The total elongation under load shall not be less than 3.5 percent on a minimum gauge length of
600 mm.
4.3 Relaxation Properties Low relaxation strand, when initially loaded to 70 percent of specified minimum
breaking strength of the strand shall have relaxation losses of not more than 1.8 percent after 100 h and not more
than 2.5 percent after 1000 h.
Note For test procedures, refer to 6.2, 6.3, and 6.4 of the standard and IS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals- Tensile
testing (second revision).
14.20
SECTION 15
STRUCTURAL STEELS
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
GENERAL
IS 1977 : 1996
15.3
IS 2062 : 1999
15.4
IS 8500 : 1991
15.6
IS 11587 : 1986
15.7
IS 412 : 1975
15.11
IS 513 : 1994
Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips (fourth revision)
15.13
IS 1079 : 1994
15.15
IS 3502 : 1994
15.16
IS 7226 : 1974
Cold rolled, medium high carbon and low alloy steel strip for general
engineering purposes
Hot dip terne coated carbon steel sheet
15.17
15.18
15.20
High tensile steel rivet bars for structural purposes (third revision)
15.21
IS 12313 : 1988
15.9
BARS WIRES
IS 1148 : 1982
IS 1149 : 1982
15.22
IS 4923 : 1997
15.25
15.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5.
(1)
Fe 290
Fe 330
C
Mn S
P
(2) (3)
(4)
(5)
0.25 1.25 0.055 0.055
0.25 1.25 0.055 0.055
Fe 370
Tensile
Strength
MPa
Yield
Stress
Min
MPa
Percent
Elogation
at Gauge
Length
Internal
Diameter
of Bend
5.65 So
(1)
Fe 290
Fe 330
Fe 370
(2)
290-390
330-430
370-470
(3)
165
170
215
Min
(4)
23
23
23
(5)
2t
3t
3t
Note For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision) and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing
of metals-tensile testing (second revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 1977: 1996 low tensile structural steels. (third revision).
15.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Mechanical Properties :
4.1. Tensile Test As a rule, test pieces with a
proportional guage length complying with the
Designation
Fe 410W A
Fe 410W B
Fe 410W C
4..2 Bend Test For bend test, the test piece at room
temperature shall withstand bending through 1800 to an
internal diameter not greater than that given in Table1
without cracking.
4.3 Impact Test It shall meet therequirements given
in Table 1 provided no individual value shall be less
than 70 percent of the specified value.
Designation
Tensile
Strength
Min,MPa
20-40
>40
Percent Elongation
Diameter
5.65
So
Internal
Charpy V-Notch
Impact Energy
of bend
J, Min
mm
mm
mm
min
min
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
Fe410WA
410
250
240
230
23
3t
Fe410WB
410
250
240
230
23
(9)
27
or equal to 25 mm
thick products
3t for more than
25 mm thick products
C
Fe410WC
410
250
240
230
15.4
23
2t
27
SP 21 : 2005
4.4 Groove Crackability Test Y-Groove crackability
test may be carried out in accordance with IS 10842 for
products of only Grade C material having thickness
above 12 mm and above if specially agreed to between
the purchaser and the manufactuer.
5. Dimensions The nominal dimensions of rolled
products conforming to this standard shall be in
+
Testing and evaluation procedure for Y groove crackability
test.
Note 1 For test procedures, refer IS 599 : 1985. Method of end test (second revision) and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of
metals. Tensile testing (second revision).
Note 2 For chemical composition, see 8 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2062 : 1999 Specification for steel for general structural purposes (fifth
revision).
15.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Tensile
Strength
Min
Elongation
Percent
>63
Min
<16
16-40
41-63
mm
mm
mm
MPa
MPa MPa
MPa MPa
Bend
Internal
Diameter
Charpy V-notch
Impact Toughness,
Joules, Min,
(Average
of 3 Values)
Room
Min**
Temp * -200C
mm
5.65
So
<12 mm 12-25 mm
Fe 440
Fe
Fe
Fe
Fe
Fe
Fe
Fe
Fe
Fe
440B
490
490B
540
540B
570
570B
590
590B
440
440
490
490
540
540
570
570
590
590
300
290
280
300
350
350
410
410
450
450
450
450
290
330
330
390
390
430
430
430
430
280
320
320
380
380
420
420
420
420
By
agreement
22
2t
22
22
22
20
20
20
20
20
20
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
50
50
50
45
45
30
25
25
20
20
For detailed information, refer to IS 8500 : 1991. Specification for structural steel Microalloyed (medium
and high strength qualities) (third revision).
15.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
c) WR-Fe 500
5. Mechanical Properties
a) WR-Fe 480A,
Tensile
Strength MPa
Min
MPa
Up to and
Including
12 mm
Over 25 mm
Up to and
Over 40 mm
Up to and
Including
40 mm
325
Including
50 mm
-
WR-Fe 480A
480
345
Including
25 mm
325
WR-Fe 480B
480
345
345
WR-Fe 500
500
355
5.2 Bend Test The test piece when cold shall with
stand the test without cracking as prescribed in the
standard.
5.3 Impact Test The mean valves after the test shall
be as given in Table 2.
TABLE 2 CHARPY V-NOTCH IMPACT TEST
VALUE
Grade Temperature
Impact Energy,
0
C
Joule
(Min, Average)
WR-Fe 480A
0
27
WR-Fe 480B
0
27
WR-Fe 500
-15
27
Percentage
Elongation
on
Gauge
Length
5.65
min
21
345
340
21
20
So
15.7
SP 21 : 2005
6. Dimensions Shall be in accordance with the
relevant Indian Standards. Currently available Indian
Standards are listed in Table 5 of the standard.
7. Tolerances Rolling and cutting tolerances for
Note 1 For test proceedures, refer to the standard, IS1599 : 1985 method of bend test (second revision),
IS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals-tensile testing (second revision) and
IS 1757:1988 Method of charpy impact test (v notch) for mettallic materials (second revision)
Note 2 For chemical composition refer to the standard
For detailed information, refer to IS 11587 : 1986 Structural weather resistant steels.
15.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Grade of
Coating
(1)
600
450
350
275
220
200
180
120
IS1079/IS 513
(1)
(2)
(3)
GPD
GPED
GPIF
GC
Grade
Grade
Grade
Grade
DD
EDD
IF
O
Grade of
Zinc Coating
200
220
275
350
15.9
SP 21 : 2005
7. Mass See Table 4 of the Standard.
8. Dimensions and Tolerances of Plain Sheets/Coils.
8.1 Sizes of Plain Sheets
a) Length
b) Width
c) Thickness
(uncoated
sheets)
++
Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips (fourth revision)
Hot-rolled carbon steel sheets and strip (fifth revision)
Note :
(2)
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Before
Corrugation
mm
(3)
750
900
1 000
1 200
750
900
1 000
1 200
After
Corrugation
mm
(4)
660
810
910
1 110
680
830
930
1 130
Pitch of
Corrugation
mm
75
75
Depth of
Corrugation
mm
17.5
12.5
Tolerance1
(2)
2.5 mm
5 mm
25 mm
Average of 4 measurements
For detailed information, refer to IS 277 : 2003 Specification for galvanized steel sheets (plain and corrugated)
(fifth revision).
15.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Ref. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Size of Mesh
(Nominal)`
Largest Standard
Size of Sheets
SWM
mm
LWM
mm
LWM
mm
SWM
mm
100
100
100
75
75
75
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
25
25
25
25
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
10
10
10
9.5
9.5
9.5
9.5
6
6
5
3
250
250
250
200
200
200
115
115
75
75
115
75
115
75
75
75
75
75
60
50
60
50
60
50
60
50
50
40
50
50
40
50
40
40
40
40
28.5
28.5
28.5
25
25
25
20
15
3.75
3.75
3.75
3.75
3.75
3.75
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
3.75
2.50
3.75
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
3.75
2.50
3.75
2.50
3.75
2.50
3.75
2.50
3.75
2.50
2.50
3.75
2.50
3.75
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
10.97
14.63
21.97
7.30
7.30
14.60
3.75
4.85
4.85
7.30
7.30
7.30
7.30
7.30
4.85
4.85
4.85
4.85
3.75
3.75
3.75
3.75
3.75
3.75
4.85
3.75
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.50
1.50
15.11
Size of Sheet
Normally Stocked
mm
2.50 3.75
2.50 3.75
and
1.25 3.75
2.50 3.75
2.50 3.75
and
1.25 3.75
2.50 3.75
2.50 3.75
and
1.25 3.75
2.50 2.75
and
1.25 2.75
2.50 1.75
and
1.25 1.75
2.50 1.75
and
1.25 1.75
2.50 1.25
SP 21 : 2005
4. Tolerances
4.1
On nominal specified : 10 mm
dimensions
On minimum specified : + 10 mm
dimensions
0 mm
On mass
: 10percent
Size of Mesh
On SWM
: 1 mm up to 20 mm and
2 mm over 20 mm
On LWM
: 2 mm up to 60 mm and
4 mm over 60 mm and
5. Mechanical Properties
Note 1 For test procedures, refer to IS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals tensile testing (second revision),and IS
1599:1985 Method for bend test (second revision),
Note 2 For chemical composition see 3.1 and 3.2 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 412 : 1975 Expanded metalSteel sheets for general purposes (second
revision).
15.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Tensile
strength
MPa
Ordinary quality
Drawing quality
DD
EDD
3. Chemical Composition
3.1 Ladle Analysis The ladle analysis of steel, shall
be as given in Table 1.
3.2 Product Analysis Permissible variation in the
case of product analysis from the limits specified in
Table 1 shall be as given in Table 2.
TABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
Grade
Constituent, percent, Max
Carbon
(1)
Ordinary (O)
Drawing (D)
Deep drawing (DD)
Extra deep
drawing (EDD)
Manganese
Sulphur Phosphorus
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
0.15
0.12
0.10
0.08
0.60
0.50
0.45
0.40
0.055
0.040
0.035
0.030
0.055
0.040
0.035
0.030
Carbon
Manganese
Sulphur
Phosphorus
--
--
--
See 4.3
270-410
280
28
65
60
DD
270-370
250
32
57
55
EDD
270-350
220
36
50
50
Hardness HRB.
Min.
Max.
Hard (H)
85
--
Half Hard ( H)
75
85
60
75
--
70
Annealed
--
60
(A)
15.13
SP 21 : 2005
4.4.1 For sheets / strips in cut lengths and coils in
Annealed and Skin Pass condition :
Steel Grade
Bend
Angle of
of Bend
Internal
Diameter
180
180
Close
DD
180
Close
EDD
180
Close
6. Dimensions
Angle of Bend
Internal Diameter
of Bend
H
H
-180
-3t
180
2t
SP
180 0
A
Note t
is
180 0
thickness of test piece.
Note For dimensional tolerances applicable to cold rolled sheets and strips See Tables 6 to 16 of the standard.
Note 1 For supply conditions including surface finish refer to the standard.
Note 2 For test procedures, refer to IS 1501 (Part) 1984 Method for Vickers Hardness test for metallic materials : Part 1 HV 5
to HV 100 (second revision), IS 1586 : 2000 Method of Rockwell Hardness test for metallic materials (A-B-C-D-E-G-H-K 15 N, 30
N, 45N. 15 T, 30 T, 45 T) (third revision).
IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision),
IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second revision) ; and
IS 10175 (Part 1) : 1993 Mechanical testing of metals Modified erichsen cupping test Sheet and strip : Part 1 Thickness upto
2 mm (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 513 :1994 Specification for cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips
(fourth revision).
15.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Drawing quality
c) DD
240-400
260-390
260-380
Yield
Stress,
Percent Elongation
at Guage length
MPa
5.65 So Min
25
28
32
Internal Diameter
of Bend
O
2t
D
t
DD
Close
EDD
Close
Note Where is the thickness of test piece.
Note1 For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision).
IS 1608 : 1995. Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second revision)and
IS 10175 (Part 1) :1993.Mechanical testing of metals modified erichsen cupping test-Sheet and strip,Part 1 Thickness upto 2 mm
(first revision).
Note2 For chemical composition, refer to the standard.
For detail information, refer to IS 1079 : 1994 Hot rolled carbon steel sheets and strips (fifth revision).
15.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
++
Note For test procedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Methods of bend test (second revision) and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing
of metals tensile testing (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 3502 : 1994 Specification for steel chequered plates (second revision).
15.16
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Medium Carbon
C40
0.35-0.45
C55
C70
0.50-0.60
C80
0.65-0.75
C85
0.75-0.85
C98
120Cr35
110Cr35W2
1.10- 1.30
1.0 -1.20
Note For manganese, silicon, sulphur, phosphorus, chromium and tungsten contents, refer to 4 of the standard.
HRB
83.4
85.0
87.9
91.6
91.6
94.8
97.5
97.5
Equivalent HV
160
165
175
190
190
205
220
220
HRC
28
35
35
35
35
35
35
35
Equivalent HV
290
350
350
350
350
350
350
350
For detailed information, refer to IS 7226 : 1974 Specification for cold-rolled medium, high carbon and low
alloy steel strip for general engineering purposes.
15.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Terminology
2.1 Terne (Lead Alloy) In the context of this
standard, any lead-based alloy in commercial use for
the hot-dip coating of steel sheet. Tin is the most
common alloying element, but antimony is also
commercially used, or combinations of both elements.
If a specific alloy composition is required, it shall be by
agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
2.2 Designation System
Terne coating and qualities The produced hot-tip
terne coating is designated T0 (the `0 is inserted to fill
a computer space and has no significance in the
designation). The coating mass designation follows
the T0 and three spaces are allocated for coating mass
designation. If only two spaces are required, such as
for designation `75, then the `75 is preceded by a `0 to
fill computer space and is shown as `075. If the product
is skin passed, designation `S is used to indicate the
coating condition. If the pdoduct has not been skin
passed, the designation `N for normal coating (as
produced) is shown. The numbers 01, 02, 03 and 04 are
T0
120
N
01
= terne coating
= coating designation
= normal coating
= ordinary quality
3. Conditions of Manufacture
3.1 Ladle Analysis See Table 1.
3.2 Product Analysis Permissible variation in the
case of product analysis from the limits specified in
Table1shall be given as below:
Constituent
Permissible Variation
Over Specified
Limit,Percent
Carbon
Manganese
Sulphur
Phosphorus
0.02
0.03
0.005
0.005
P
Max
S
Max
T0
T0
T0
T0
0.055
0.04
0.03
0.03
0.055
0.04
0.03
0.03
01
02
03
04
Ordinary
Drawing
Deep drawing
Deep drawing special killed
0.15
0.12
0.10
0.08
15.18
0.60
0.50
0.45
0.45
SP 21 : 2005
3.4 Mechanical Properties See Table 3.
no minimum
50
75
100
120
no minimum
40
60
75
90
TABLE 3 MECHANICALPROPERTIES
Quality
Tensile Strength
Rm Max*
MPa (N/mm 2 )
Percentage Elongation
A min+
Desiganation
Name
T0
T0
T0
T0
Ordinary
Drawing
Deep drawing
Deep drawing
special killed
01
02
03
04
430
410
410
Gauge
length
l0 =60 mm
Gauge
length
l0 =80 mm
24
28
29
23
25
28
180 0, Bend
Mandrel
Diameter, for
All Thickness
la
For detailed information, refer to IS 12313: 1988 Specification for hot-dip terne coated carbon steel sheets.
15.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Below
20
20
22 and 24
Over 24
2. Chemical Composition
2.1 Ladle Analysis Ladle analysis of the steel,shall
be as given below:
Constituent
Per cent,Max
Carbon
Sulphur
0.23
0.050
Phosphorus
0.050
0.02
0.005
phosphorus
0.005
diameter
Variation Over
the Specified Limit
Percent,Max.
Carbon
Sulphur
0.40
0.45
0.50
2 percent of
6. Tests
Total Tolerance
mm
Requirement
410- 530
260
250
240
: Note
For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision), and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical
testing of metals-Tensile testing (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1148 : 1982 Hot rolled rivet bars upto 40mm diameter) for structural
purposes (third revision).
15.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Tests
Per cent,Max
Carbon
Sulphur
Phosphorus
0.23
0.050
0.050
Variation Over
the Specified Limit
Percent, Maximum
Carbon
Sulphur
Phosphorus
0.02
0.005
0.005
Characteristic
Tensile strength, min MPa
Min Yield stress, min, MPa
a)
6mm upto and
including 12 mm
b)
Over 12 mm upto
and including 20 mm
c)
Over 20 mm upto
and including 40 mm
Elongation percent, Min
Requirement
460
310
300
280
Note For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision), IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of
metals-Tensile testing (second revision) and IS 5242 :1979 Method of test for determining shear strength of metals (first revision).
For detailed information , refer to IS 1149 : 1982 Specification for high tensile steel rivet bars for structural
purposes (third revision).
15.21
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
+ 0.4 mm
0.8 mm
2) Over 48.3 mm
1.0 percent
Medium
Heavy
2) 10 tonne lots light
Medium
Heavy
10 percent
5 percent
7.5 percent
* Hot rolled steel strip for welded tubes and pipes (first revision)
+Not limited
10 percent
2) Seamless tubes
+Not limited
12.5 percent
c) Weight
8 percent
1) Single tube light
+10 percent
15.22
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 SIZES AND PROPERTIES OF STEEL TUBES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES
Nominal
Bore
Outside
Diameter
mm
(1)
mm
(2)
15
Class
Thickness
Weight
(3)
mm
(4)
kg/m
(5)
Area of
Cross
Section
cm2
(6)
21.3
Light
Medium
Heavy
2.0
2.6
3.2
0.947
1.21
0.44
1.21
1.53
1.82
235
203
174
20
26.9
Light
Medium
Heavy
2.3
2.6
3.2
1.38
1.56
1.87
1.78
1.98
2.38
390
370
330
25
33.7
Light
Medium
Heavy
2.6
3.2
4.0
1.98
2.41
2.93
2.54
3.06
3.73
638
585
518
32
42.4
Light
Medium
Heavy
2.6
3.2
4.0
2.54
3.10
3.79
3.25
3.94
4.82
1 086
1 017
929
40
48.3
Light
Medium
Heavy
2.9
3.2
4.0
3.23
3.56
4.37
4.13
4.53
5.56
1 418
1 378
1 275
50
60.3
Light
Medium
Heavy
2.9
3.6
4.5
4.08
5.03
6.19
5.23
6.41
7.88
2 332
2 213
2 066
65
76.1
Light
Medium
Heavy
3.2
3.6
4.5
5.71
6.42
7.93
7.32
8.20
10.1
3 814
3 727
3 534
80
88.9
Light
Medium
Heavy
3.2
4.0
4.8
6.72
8.36
9.90
8.61
10.7
12.7
5 343
5 138
4 936
90
101.6
Light
Medium
Heavy
3.6
4.0
4.8
8.70
9.63
11.5
11.1
12.3
14.6
6 995
6 877
6 644
100
114.3
Light
Medium
Heavy
3.6
4.5
5.4
9.75
12.2
14.5
12.5
15.5
18.5
9 004
8 704
8 409
110
127.0
Light
Medium
Heavy
4.5
4.8
5.4
13.6
14.5
16.2
17.3
18.4
20.6
10 930
10 819
10 599
125
139.7
Light
Medium
Heavy
4.5
4.8
5.4
15.0
15.9
17.9
19.1
20.3
22.8
13 410
13 287
13 043
135
152.4
Light
Medium
Heavy
4.5
4.8
5.4
16.4
17.5
19.6
20.9
22.2
25.0
16 142
16 008
15 740
150
165.1
Light
Medium
Heavy
4.5
4.8
5.4
17.8
18.9
21.3
22.7
24.2
27.1
19 128
18 981
18 690
15.23
Internal
Volume
cm3/m
(7)
SP 21 : 2005
Table 1 SIZES AND PROPERTIES OF STEEL TUBES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES (concluded)
Nominal
Bore
Outside
Diameter
mm
(1)
mm
(2)
150
168.3
175
Class
Thickness
Weight
Internal
Volume
kg/m
(5)
Area of
Cross
Section
cm2
(6)
mm
(4)
Light
Medium
Heavy 1
Heavy 2
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.3
18.2
19.4
21.7
25.2
23.1
24.7
27.6
32.0
19 921
19 771
19 473
19 030
193.7
Light
Medium
Heavy
4.8
5.4
5.9
22.4
25.1
27.3
28.5
32.0
34.8
26 606
26 260
25 974
200
219.1
Light
Medium
Heavy
4.8
5.6
5.9
25.4
29.5
31.0
32.3
37.5
39.5
34 454
33 930
33 734
225
244.5
Heavy
5.9
34.7
44.2
42 507
250
273.0
Heavy
5.9
38.9
49.5
53 557
300
323.9
Heavy
6.3
49.3
62.8
76 073
350
355.6
Heavy
8.0
68.6
87.3
90 533
(3)
cm3/m
(7)
Tensile
Strength
Min
Yield Stress
Min
Elongation
on Gauge
Length
MPa
MPa
5.65 So Min
Percent
YSt210
330
210
20
YSt240
410
240
17
YSt310
450
310
14
Note1 For test proceedures, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals-Tensile testing (second revision), IS 2328
: 1983 Method of flattening test on metallic tubes (first revision), IS 2329 : 1985 Method for bend test on metallic tubes (first
revision), IS 4736 : 1986. Hot-dip zinc coating on mild steel tubes (first revision) and the standard.
Note 2 For other
geometrical
For detailed information, refer to IS 1161 : 1998 Specification for steel tubes for structural purposes (fourth
revision).
15.24
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
mm
(1)
Depth
or
Width
(D)
mm
(2)
Thickness
Weight
Area
of
Section
mm
(3)
kg/m
(4)
cm2
(5)
25.025.02.6
25.025.03.2
30.030.02.6
30.030.03.2
30.030.04.0
32.032.02.6
32.032.03.2
32.032.04.0
35.035.02.6
35.035.03.2
35.035.04.0
38.038.02.6
38.038.02.9
38.038.03.2
38.038.03.6
38.038.04.0
40.040.02.6
40.040.0x3.2
40.040.03.6
40.040.04.0
45.045.02.6
45.045.02.9
45.045.03.2
45.045.03.6
45.045.04.5
49.549.52.9
49.549.53.6
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
32.0
32.0
32.0
35.0
35.0
35.0
38.0
38.0
38.0
38.0
38.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
45.0
45.0
45.0
45.0
45.0
49.5
49.5
2.6
3.2
2.6
3.2
4.0
2.6
3.2
4.0
2.6
3.2
4.0
2.6
2.9
3.2
3.6
4.0
2.6
3.2
3.6
4.0
2.6
2.9
3.2
3.6
4.5
2.9
3.6
1.69
1.98
2.10
2.49
2.94
2.26
2.69
3.19
2.51
2.99
3.57
2.75
3.03
3.29
3.63
3.95
2.92
3.49
3.85
4.20
3.32
3.66
3.99
4.42
5.31
4.07
4.93
2.16
2.53
2.68
3.17
3.75
2.88
3.42
4.07
3.20
3.81
4.55
3.51
3.86
4.19
4.62
5.03
3.72
4.45
4.91
5.35
4.24
4.67
5.09
5.63
6.77
5.19
6.28
49.549.54.5
49.5
4.5
5.95
7.58
Designation
mm
(1)
63.563.53.2
63.563.53.6
63.563.54.5
72.072.03.2
72.072.04.0
72.072.04.8
75.075.03.2
75.075.04.0
75.075.04.9
88.988.93.6
88.988.94.5
88.988.94.9
91.591.53.6
91.591.54.5
91.591.55.4
100.0100.04.0
100.0100.05.0
100.0100.06.0
113.5113.54.5
113.5113.54.8
113.5113.55.4
113.5113.56.0
125.0125.04.5
125.0125.05.0
125.0125.06.0
132.0132.04.8
132.0132.05.4
132.0132.06.0
150.0150.05.0
150.0150.06.0
15.25
Continued--Depth
Thickor
ness
Width
(D)
mm
mm
(2)
(3)
63.5
63.5
63.5
72.0
72.0
72.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
88.9
88.9
88.9
91.5
91.5
91.5
100.0
100.0
100.0
113.5
113.5
113.5
113.5
125.0
125.0
125.0
132.0
132.0
132.0
150.0
150.0
3.2
3.6
4.5
3.2
4.0
4.8
3.2
4.0
4.9
3.6
4.5
4.9
3.6
4.5
5.4
4.0
5.0
6.0
4.5
4.8
5.4
6.0
4.5
5.0
6.0
4.8
5.4
6.0
5.0
6.0
Weight
Area
of
Section
kg/m
(4)
cm2
(5)
5.85
6.51
7.93
6.71
8.22
9.66
7.01
8.59
10.30
9.38
11.52
12.44
9.67
11.88
14.01
11.73
14.41
16.98
14.99
15.92
17.74
19.53
16.62
18.33
21.69
18.71
20.88
23.01
22.26
26.40
7.45
8.29
10.10
8.54
10.47
12.31
8.93
10.95
13.12
11.95
14.67
15.85
12.32
15.14
17.85
14.95
18.36
21.63
19.10
20.28
22.60
24.87
21.17
23.36
27.63
23.88
26.59
29.31
28.36
33.63
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES
OF RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS
Designation Depth Width Thick- Weight Area
of
of
ness
of
Section Section
Section
(D)
(D)
(B)
mm
mm
mm
mm kg/m
cm2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
50.0
25.0
2.9
2.98
3.80
50.0
25.0
3.2
3.24
4.13
60.0
40.0
2.9
4.12
5.25
66.0
33.0
2.9
4.07
5.19
66.0
33.0
3.6
4.93
6.28
66.0
33.0
4.5
5.95
7.58
70.0
30.0
2.9
4.12
5.25
30.0
3.2
4.50
5.73
70.0
30.0
4.0
5.45
6.95
80.0
40.0
2.9
5.03
6.41
80.0
40.0
3.2
5.50
7.01
80.0
40.0
4.0
6.71
8.55
96.0
48.0
3.2
6.71
8.54
96.0
48.0
4.0
8.22
10.47
96.0
48.0
4.8
9.66
12.31
50.0
3.2
7.01
8.93
50.0
4.0
8.59
10.95
61.0
3.6
9.67
12.32
61.0
4.5
11.88
15.14
61.0
5.4
14.01
17.85
50.0
3.6
9.34
11.89
50.0
4.6
11.69
14.89
82.0
4.8
15.92
20.28
82.0
5.4
17.74
22.60
92.0
4.8
18.71
23.83
172.0x92.0x5.4 172.0
92.0
5.4
20.88
26.59
10 percent
+ 17.5 percent
- 12.5 percent
1 percent of
length of the side
to be measured
with a minimum of
0.5 mm
b) Outside dimensions of
sides
c) Weight
1) On individual length
2) On lots of 10 tonnes
d) Squareness of corner
e) Radii of cornersOutside
f) Length
1) Exact length
2) Random length
+10 percent
- 8 percent
7.5 percent
900 20
3t, Max where t is
the thickness
of section
6 mm
This may be obtained by arrangement
between the
purchaser and
manufacturer
330
210
20
YSt240
410
240
15
YSt310
450
310
10
NoteFor welded tubes, the strip tensile test specimen shall
not include the weld.
15.26
10 percent
SP 21 : 2005
Note 2 The height of the internal weld fin shall not exceed
60 per cent of the wall thickness.
Grade Tensile
Strength,
Min, MPa
Yield
stress,
Elongation,
percent, Min
Min, MPa
YSt210
330
210
12
20
YSt240
YSt310
410
450
240
310
10
8
15
10
The value shall be applicable for the smaller side of the rectangular
section.
*
Note 1 For test procedures, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals- Tensile testing (second revision)
Note 2 For other geometrical properties, refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4923 : 1997 Specification for Hollow steel sections for structural use
(second revision).
15.27
SECTION 16
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
IS 733 : 1983
IS 736 : 1986
IS 737 : 1986
IS 738 : 1994
IS 739 : 1992
IS 740 : 1977
IS 1254 : 1991
IS 1285 : 2002
IS 2525 : 1982
IS 2676 : 1981
IS 2677 : 1979
IS 2678 : 1987
Title
Page
16.3
16.2
16.4
16.5
16.7
16.8
16.9
16.10
16.11
16.12
16.13
16.14
16.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Designation
Typical uses
45000
Filler wire for brazing.
52000
Panelling and structures, shear metal
work and domestic appliances, marine
applications like sheathing lining of
boat bottom, etc.
53000
Shipbuilding; rivets; pressure vessels
and other processing tanks,
cryogenics, and welded structures.
54300
Welded structures, cryogenic
applications, structural marine
applications, rail and road tank cars,
rivets and missile components.
63400
Architectural uses, such as, windows,
door frames, wall facings, partitions,
hand rails etc. and other similar
applications where surface finish is
important and medium strength
would suffice.
63401
Bus bar application
64401
Conductor application
64423
Applications requiring good strength
and machinability, such as, missile
machinery components.
64430
Structural applications of all kinds,
such as, road and rail transport
vehicles, bridges,cranes, roof trusses,
rivets, etc. Cargo containers, milk
containers, deep-drawn containers,
and flooring.
65032
Similar to 64430
74530
Stressed structural applications
requiring welding, such as bridges,
chequered plates, dump-truck bodies,
pressure vessels and rail coaches, etc.
76528
Stressed structural applications
capable of being used at low
temperature.
Note For chemical composition and mechanical properties see 5 (Tables 1 and 2) of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 733 : 1983 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy
bars, rods and sections for General enginering purposes (third revision).
16.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Designation
51000-A
19700
19600
19500
19000
24345
31000
Typical uses
Jewellery, decorative and novelty
anodized items, auto trim, reflectors,
breweries and some chemical plants.
Similar to 19800
Corrosion resistant cladding on
stronger alloys, impact extruded
containters; food, chemical brewing
and processing equipment, tanks and
pipes, marine fitting, reflectors,
pressed and anodized utilityitems,
jewellery and cable sheathing
Similar to 19600
Panelling and moulding; refrigeration
tubing equipment for chemical, food
and brewing industries; packaging;
cooking utensils. Sheet metal work,
architectural and builders hardware
spun/pressed holloware, deep drawn
parts, cladding, welding wire,
electrical appliances.
Heavy duty forgings, structures
where high mechanical properties are
of utmost importance,aircraft
application of clad sheets, extrusions
and armaments.
General purpose alloy for moderate
strength applications, pressure
51000-B
52000
53000
54300
55000
64430
65032
74530
Typical uses
vessels, irrigation tubing, heat
exchangers, utensils and pressure
cookers,
roffing
sheets,
airconditioning ducting, fan blades
and vehicle panelling.
Appliances and utensils, architectural
trims, consumers durable with
attractive anodized finishes.
Architectural applications; high
anodizing quality kitchen ware and
cooking utensils, consumer durables;
bathroom fittings, autotrim,
airconditioner and TV housing;
chemical equipment, marine
applications and refrigerator trim.
Panelling and structures, sheet metal
work, domestic appliances.
Welded structures, cryogenic
applications, structural marine
applications, rail and road tank cars,
rivets and missile components.
Similar to 53000
Shipbuilding and other applications
demanding moderately high strength
with good corrosion resistance;
rivets, zippers, welding wire, etc.
Structural applications of all kinds,
such as, road and rail transport
vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof
trusses, rivets, etc., cargo containers,
milk containers, deep drawn
containers and flooring.
Similar to 64430
Stressed structural applications
requiring welding such as bridges,
chequered plates, dump-truck bodies,
pressure vessels, rail coaches, etc.
Note For chemical composition and mechanical properties, see 5 (Table 1) and 6 (Table 2) of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 736 : 1989 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys,
plate for general engineering purposes (third revision).
16.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Designation
24345
31000
19800
19700
19600
19500
19000
Typical uses
Electrolytic capacitors, decorative
hollowares, trims and other
applications requring high degree of
finish.
Jewellery, decorative and novelty and
anodized items, auto rim, reflectors,
breweries and some chemical plants
and metallizing.
Corrosion resistant cladding on
and stronger alloys, impact extruded
containters; food, chemical brewing
and processing equipment, tanks and
pipes, marine fitting, reflectors,
pressed and anodized utility items,
jewellery and cable sheathing.
Similar to 19600
Panelling and moulding; refrigeration
tubing equipment for chemical, food
and brewing industries; packaging;
cooking utensils. Sheet metal work,
architectural and builders hardware
spun/pressed holloware, deep drawn
parts, cladding, welding wire,
electrical appliances.
16.5
31500
40800
51000-A
51000-B
51300
Typical uses
Heavy duty forgings, structures
where high mechanical peoperties are
of utmost importance, aircraft
application of clad sheets, extrusions
and armaments.
General purpose alloy for moderate
strength applications, pressure
vessels, irrigation tubing, heat
exchangers, utensils and pressure
cookers, roofing sheets, pilferproof
and detonator caps, airconditioning
ducting, fan blades and vehicle
panelling.
General purpose sheet, roofing and
siding, utensils, sheet metal work,
vehicle panelling, pressure vessels
and lamp caps.
Vehicle panelling, fan blades and
other applications same as of alloys
19000 and 31000 except those for
bright
anodizing
purposes,
detonators, utensils/holloware
containers and closures.
Appliances and utensils, architectural
rims, consumers durable
with
attractive anodized finishes.
Architectural applications; high
anodizing quality kitchen ware and
cooking utensils, consumer durables;
bathroom fittings, auto trim,
airconditioner and TV housing;
chemical equipment, marine
applications and refrigerator trim.
General purpose alloy which can be
used for most of the applications of
alloys 31000 and 19000.
SP 21 : 2005
Designation
Typical uses
52000
Panelling and structures, sheet metal
work, domestic appliances.
53000
Shipbuilding; rivets; pressure vessels
and other processing tanks;
cryogenics and welded structures.
54300
Welded structures, cryogenic
applications, structural marine
applications, rail and road tank cars,
rivets and missile components.
55000
Shipbuilding and other applications
demanding moderately high strength
with good corrosion resistance;
rivets, zippers, welding wire etc.
Designation
64430
65032
74530
Typical uses
Structural applications of all kinds,
such as road and rail transport
vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof
trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers,
milk containers, deep drawn
containers and flooring.
Similar to 64430
Stressed structural applications
requiring welding such as bridges,
chequered plates, dump-truck bodies,
pressure vessels, rail coaches, etc.
Note For chemical composition and mechanical properties see 5 (Table 1) and 6 (Table 2) of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 737 : 1986 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet
and strip for general engineering purposes (third revision).
16.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
19500
24345
Typical uses
Panelling and moulding; equipments
for food, chemical and brewing
industries; architectural and builders
hardwares,fasteners, welding wire,
electrical appliances, refrigeration
tubes and wave guide tubes.
Food, chemical, brewing and
processing equipments, marine
fittings, pressed and anodized utility
items, heat exchanger tubes,
condenser tubes, gas and oil
transmission pipeline.
Stressed parts in aircraft and other
structures where high strength is of
primary consideration, hydraulic
tubes.
Designation
Typical uses
31000
General purpose alloy for moderate
strength applications, pressure
vessels, irrigation tubing, heat
exchangers, utensils and pressure
cookers, roofing sheets, pilferproof
and detonator caps, airconditioning
ducting, fan blades and vehicle
panelling.
52000
Panelling and structures, hydraulic
tube, appliances, refrigeration tubing,
condenser and heat exchanger tubes,
gas and oil transmission pipelines.
63400
Architectural uses and other similar
applications where surface finish is
important and medium strength
would suffice. Electrical conduits,
tubes for wave guides, gas and oil
transmission pipelines.
64430
Structural applications of all kinds,
such as, road and rail transport
vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof
trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers,
milk containers, deep drawn
containers and flooring.
65028
Structural applications of all kinds
such road and rail transport vehicles,
bridges, cranes, roof trusses,
furniture, gas and oil transmission
pipelines, condenser and heat
exchanger tubes, hydraulic tubes.
65032
Similar to 65028
Note For chemical composition and mechanical properties see 8 (Table 1) and 9 (Table 2) of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 738 : 1994 Specifications for wrought aluminium and its alloys-drawn
tubes for general engineering purpose (third revision).
16.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
19500
24345
31000
Typical Uses
Panelling and moulding; equipments
for food, chemical and brewing
industries; architectural and builders
hardwares, fasteners, welding wire,
electrical appliances, rivet wires, spray
gun wires.
Food, chemical, brewing and
processing equipments, marine
fittings, pressed and anodized utility
items, jewellery, rivet for aircraft
purpose, filler rods for inert gas are
welding.
Structures where high mechanical
properties are of utmost imprtance,
screw machine products, fasteners
and rivets for aircraft purposes.
General purpose alloy for moderate
strength applications, pressure
vessels, builders hardware, vehicle
panelling, rivet wires, fasteners, filler
rods for inert gas arc welding.
Designation
Typical Uses
43000
Filler wires for brazing and soldering,
welding rods, sprays gun wires.
46000
Filler wires for brazing, welding rods,
spray gun wires.
52000
Panelling and structures, rivet wires,
zippers, grills, fasteners, filler rods for
inert gas arc welding.
53000
Shipbuilding, rivets, pressure vessels,
welding rods, zippers, screen wires,
grills fasteners.
55000
Shipbuilding and other applications
demanding moderately high strength
with good corrosion resistance;
rivets, zippers, welding wire, screen
wires, grills, fasteners.
55380
Filler wires for welding rivets, screen
wires.
63400
Architectural uses and other similar
applications where surface finish is
important and medium strength
would suffice, builders hardware.
64430
Structural applications of all kinds,
such as, road and rail transport
vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof
trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers,
milk containers, deep drawn
containers and flooring.
65032
Structural applications of all kinds
rivets, builders hardwares and
fastener rods
Note For chemical composition and mechanical properties see 8 (Table 1) and 9 (Table 2) of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 739 : 1992 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloyswire for general engineering purpose (third revision).
16.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Designation
New
53000
Old
NR 5
55000
NR 6
64430
HR 30
65032
HR 20
24345
HR 15
Typical use
Rivets used in equipment for food,
chemical, brewing and processing,
cooking, utensils, architectural and
builders hardwares and in aircraft
manufacture.
Rivets used in structures where high
mechanical properties are of utmost
importance, aircraft structures.
Typical use
Rivets used in ship building, pressure
vessels and other processing tanks
and in aircraft manufacture.
Rivets used in ship building, aircraft
manufacture and other applications
demanding moderately high strength
with good corrosion resistance.
Rivets used in structures of all kinds,
such as, road and rail transport
vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof
trusses, cargo containers, flooring.
Structural applications of all kinds
such as, road and rail transport
vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof
trusses, rivets, etc, cargo containers,
milk containers, deep drawn
containers and flooring.
For detailed information, refer to IS 740 : 1977 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy rivet
stock for general engineering purposes (second revision).
16.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Pitch
mm
75
125
190
Width
General purpose : 650 to 800 mm overall
Industrial
: 795 mm overall
Building
: 830 mm overall
4.2.1 A tolerance of 10 mm for sheets of 0.45 mm
and above in thickness. The tolerance on width for
sheets less than 0.45 mm thick, shall be subject to
agreement.
4.3 Length Preferred lengths are 1800, 2400, 3000 and
3600 mm subject to a tolerance of 6 mm.
Depth
mm
19
38
38
For detailed information, refer to IS 1254 : 1991 Specifications for Corrugated aluminium sheet (third revision).
16.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Designation
52000
53000
54300
Designation
19000
19500
24345
31000
Typical use
Panelling and moulding, equipment
for food, chemical and brewing
industries, architectural and builders
hardwares, fasteners, welding wires
and electrical guide tubes.
Food, chemical, brewing and
processing equipment, marine fittings,
pressed and anodized utility items,
heat exchanger tubes, condenser
tubes, gas and oil transmission
pipeline.
Stressed parts in aircrafts and other
structures where high strength is of
primary consdieration, hydraulic
tubes air-conditioning ducting fan
blades and vehicle panelling.
General purpose alloy for moderate
strength applications for chemical
equipment, irrigation tubing, heat
exchangers furniture, condenser, air-
62400
63400
64423
64430
65032
74530
Typical use
conditioning, utensils, detonator
caps, pressure vessles, fan blades
and vehicle panelling.
Panelling and structures, hydraulic
tube appliances, refrigeration tubing
condenser and heat exchanger tubes,
gas and oil transmissino pipelines.
Ship building; rivets; pressure
vessels and other processing tanks;
cryogenics, and welded structures.
Welded structures, cryogenic
applications, structural marine
applications, rail and road tank cars,
rivets and missile components.
Further where appearance and
bending characteristics are important,
such as furniture applications.
Architectural uses and other similar
applications where surface finish is
important and medium strength
would suffice. Electrical conduits,
tubes for wave guides, gas and oil
transmission pipelines.
Applications requiring good strength
and machinability such as textile
machinery components.
Structural applications of all kinds,
such as road and rail transport
vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof
trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers,
milk containers, deep drawn
containers and flooring.
Similar to 64430
Stressed structural applications
requiring welding, such as bridges,
chequered plates, dump-truck bodies,
pressure vessels and rail coaches.
Note For chemical composition and mechanical properties, see 5 (Table 1 and 2) of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1285 : 2002 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy
extruded round tube and hollow sections for general engineering purposes (third revision).
16.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
mm
1.00
1.12
1.25
1.40
1.60
1.80
2.00
2.24
2.50
2.80
mm
3.15
3.55
4.00
4.50
5.00
5.60
6.30
7.10
8.00
9.00
Tolerance
mm
0.04
0.07 or 1.5 percent
of width across flats
which ever is higher.
Tolerance
mm
0.05
0.08
0.10 or 2 percent
of width / thickness
which ever is higher.
Tolerance, mm
0.015
0.025
0.05 or 1 per cent
of diameter which
ever is higher.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2525 : 1982 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy, wire
(first revision).
16.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.2 Thickness
0.15
0.19
0.23
0.28
0.32
0.36
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.56
0.63
0.71
0.80
0.90
1.0
1.12
2. Dimensions
2.1. Lengths and Widths
Length
mm
Width
mm
Length
mm
Width
mm
1 800
1 800
1 800
1 800
600
900
1 000
1 200
3 600
3 600
3 600
3 600
900
1 000
1 200
1 500
2 000
2 000
2 000
2 000
2 000
600
900
1 000
1 200
1 500
4 000
4 000
4 000
4 000
900
1 000
1 200
1 500
2 400
2 400
2 400
2 400
2 400
600
900
1 000
1 200
1 500
1.25
1.40
1.60
1.80
2.00
2.24
2.50
2.80
3.15
3.55
4.00
4.50
5.00
5.60
6.00
3. Tolerances
3.1 For shearing tolerances, general and fine for sheets
and strips and the tolerances, general and fine on
thicknesses of sheets and strips, refer to tables 1 to 6 of
the standard.
3.2 Squareness Tolerances for Sheets The difference
of the two diagonal distances between opposite corners
of any sheet shall not exceed the total tolerance of the
sheet, that is, sum of positive and negative tolerance.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2676 : 1981 Specifications for dimensions for wrought aluminium and
aluminium alloys, sheet and strip (first revision).
16.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
STANDARD
THICKNESS
(1)
2. Dimensions
2.1 Lenghts and Widths
(2)
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
18.0
20.0
22.5
25.0
30.0
35.0
40.0
45.0
50.0
65.0
mm
mm
mm mm
mm mm
1 800 300
2 400 300
3 600 300
1 800 600
2 400 600
3 600 600
1 800 900
2 400 900
3 600 900
1 800 1 200
2 400 1 200
3 600 1 200
2.2 Thickness and Tolerances See Table 1.
2.3 Shearing Tolerance on Length and Width See
Table 2.
TABLE 2
FOR WIDTHS UP TO
AND I NCLUDING1200
0.43
0.43
0.43
0.38
0.38
0.38
0.38
0.38
0.38
0.42
0.46
0.49
0.52
0.54
0.58
0.64
0.69
0.73
0.76
1.0
1.15
1.20
1.30
1.45
1.50
FOR WIDTH
1201 TO 2000
(3)
0.46
0.46
0.46
0.46
0.46
0.46
0.46
0.46
0.46
0.46
0.48
0.51
0.53
0.56
0.58
0.64
0.69
0.73
0.76
1.0
1.15
1.20
1.30
1.50
1.55
THICKNESS
Plus
Minus
For Lengths
Over 6 300,
Up to and
Including
8 000
Plus
For Lengths
Over 8 000,
Up to and
Including
10 000
Minus
Plus
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Up to and
including 12.50
10
13
10
11
13
13
Over 25.0
13
13
13
13
(1)
Minus
For Lengths
Over 2 400,
Up to and
Including
6 300
Minus
Note The shearing tolerance on width of hot-rolled coil having thickness between and including 4.0 mm to 6.00 mm shall be
5mm for widths up to and including 1200 mm and 6.5 mm for width over 1200 mm.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2677 : 1979 Specifications for dimensions for wrought aluminium and
aluminum alloys, plates and hot-rolled sheets (first revision).
16.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal
Outside
Daimeter
4.0
5.0
6.3
8.0
10.0
12.5
16.0
20.0
25.0
31.5
40.0
50.0
63.0
80.0
100
125
160
200
250
}
}
}
}
}
}
0.50,
0.63,
0.80 ,
1.00,
0.50,
0.63,
0.80,
1.00,
1.25,
1.60,
2.00,
0.50,
0.63,
0.80,
1.00,
1.25,
1.60,
2.00,
0.80,
1.00,
1.25,
1.60,
2.00,
2.50,
3.15,
0.80,
1.00,
1.25,
1.60,
2.00,
2.50
3.15,
4.0 ,
5.0,
0.80,
1.00,
1.25,
1.60,
2.00,
2.50
3.15,
4.0 ,
5.0,
6.3
1.60,
2.00
2.50,
3.15,
4.0,
5.0,
6.3,
8.0,
10.0,
12.5
2.00,
2.50,
3.15,
4.0,
5.0,
6.3,
8.0,
10.0,
12.5
3.15,
6.3,
8.0,
4.0,
8.0,
10.0,
5.0,
10.0,
12.5,
6.3
12.5
16.0
8.0,
10.0,
12.5,
2.50,
Tolerance on
Mean Thickness
mm
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.13
0.20
0.26
0.33
0.40
0.51
0.63
0.80
16.15
Tolerances on
Thickness at Any Point
mm
0.09
0.11
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.22
0.28
0.36
0.46
0.61
0.74
0.99
1.21
1.50
1.89
2.40
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 3
Nominal
Outside
Diameter
4.0
5.0
6.3
8 .0
10.0
12.5
16.0
20.0
25.0
31.5
40.0
50.0
63.0
80.0
100
125
160
200
250
0.80
1.00
1.25
1.60
2.00
2.50
3.15
4.0
5.0
6.3
8.0
10.0
12.5
16.0
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.23
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.15
0.15
0.18
0.23
0.28
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.15
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.35
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.28
0.43
0.61
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.35
0.51
0.64
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.15
0.15
0.23
0.30
0.46
0.56
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.13
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.41
0.48
0.64
0.13
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.23
0.36
0.40
0.58
0.13
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.23
0.33
0.38
0.58
0.94
0.15
0.15
0.20
0.23
0.33
0.38
0.58
0.94
0.15
0.20
0.23
0.30
0.36
0.56
0.92
1.37
0.15
0.20
0.23
0.30
0.36
0.56
0.92
1.37
0.20
0.23
0.28
0.33
0.51
0.86
1.32
0.84
1.30
Nominal outside
Diameter
Tolerance on
straightness
From 10 up to and
including 150
1.25 mm/m
Over 150
2.00 mm/m
For detailed information, refer to IS 2678 : 1987 Specification for dimensions and tolerances for wrought
aluminiu and aluminium alloy drawn round tubes (second revision).
16.16
SP 21 : 2005
SECTION 17
STRUCTURAL SHAPES
17.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
page
ALUMINIUM SECTIONS
IS
3908 : 1986
17.3
IS
3909 : 1986
17.4
IS
3921 : 1985
17.5
IS
5384 : 1985
17.6
IS
6445 : 1985
17.7
17.8
STEEL SECTIONS
IS
808 : 1989
Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column, channel and angle sections
(third revision)
IS
811 : 1987
17.11
IS
1173 : 1978
17.15
IS
1730 : 1989
Dimensions for steel plates, sheet strips and flats for general engineering
purposes (second revision)
17.16
IS
1732 : 1989
17.18
IS
1863 : 1979
Dimensions for round and square steel bars , for structural and general
engineering purposes
Hot rolled steel bulb flats (first revision).
IS
2314 : 1986
17.20
IS
3443 : 1980
17.21
IS 3954 : 1991
17.22
IS
17.23
IS 8081: 1976*
Slotted sections.
17.24
IS 12778 : 2004
17.25
3964 : 1980
17.2
17.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
ALE 30303.0
ALE 30304.0
ALE 30305.0
ALE 50503.0
ALE 50504.0
ALE 50505.0
ALE 50506.0
ALE 15 151.5
ALE 15 152.0
ALE 15 153.0
ALE 35353.0
ALE 35354.0
ALE 30305.0
ALE 60604.0
ALE 60605.0
ALE 60606.0
ALE 20202.0
ALE 20203.0
ALE 40403.0
ALE 40404.0
ALE 40405.0
ALE 70705.0
ALE 70706.0
ALE 70707.0
ALE 15015010.0
ALE 15015012.0
ALE 15015016.0
ALE 25252.0
ALE 25253.0
ALE 25254.0
ALE 45453.0
ALE 45454.0
ALE 45455.0
ALE 80806.0
ALE 80808.0
ALE 808010.0
ALE 20020012.0
ALE 20020016.0
ALE 20020020.0
4. Materials
4.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall
be manufactured from the following alloys in appropriate
temper:
For detailed information, refer to IS 3908 : 1986. Specifications for aluminium equal leg angles (first revision)
17.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Dimensions
ALU
ALU
ALU
ALU
ALU
20 10 1.5
20 10 2.0
20 15 1.5
20 15 2.0
20 15 3.0
ALU 50 25 3.0
ALU 50 25 4.0
ALU50 30 5.0
ALU 30 15 2.0
ALU 50 30 3.0
ALU 50 30 4.0
ALU 50 30 5.0
30 15 3.0
30 20 2.0
30 20 3.0
30 20 4.0
ALU 60 30 3.0
ALU 60 30 4.0
ALU 60 30 5.0
ALU 40 20 2.0
ALU 40 20 3.0
ALU 40 20 4.0
ALU 60 40 4.0
ALU 60 40 5.0
ALU 60 40 6.0
ALU 40 25 2.0
ALU 40 25 3.0
ALU 40 25 4.0
ALU 65 45 4.0
ALU 65 45 5.0
ALU
ALU
ALU
ALU
ALU 45 30 3.0
ALU 45 30 4.0
ALU 45 30 5.0
ALU 80 60 4.0
ALU 80 60 6.0
ALU 80 60 8.0
ALU150 80 8.0
ALU150 80 10.0
ALU150 80 12.0
ALU 90 60 6.0
ALU100 50 6.0
ALU100 50 8.0
ALU100 50 10.0
ALU100 80 6.0
ALU 100 80 8.0
ALU100 80 10.0
ALU120 80 8.0
ALU120 80 10.0
ALU120 80 12.0
ALU 75 50 5.0
ALU 75 50 6.0
Material
For detailed information, refer to IS 3909 : 1986 Specifications for aluminium unequal leg angles (first revision)
17.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Dimensions
4.1 Designation and size
ALC 40
ALC 40
20 - 0.63
20 - 0.44
ALC
ALC
ALC
ALC
ALC
ALC
50
50
50
60
60
60
30
30
30
30
30
30
1.55
0.88
1.14
1.13
1.55
1.95
ALC
ALC
ALC
ALC
ALC
60
60
80
80
80
40
40
40
40
40
1.87
2.38
2.10
2.67
3.21
ALC 100
ALC 100
40 - 2.95
40 - 3.55
ALC 100
ALC 100
50 - 4.98
50 - 3.39
ALC 100
50 - 4.09
ALC 120
ALC 120
50 - 4.43
50 - 3.68
ALC 120
ALC 120
60 - 4.98
60 - 6.08
ALC 150
ALC 150
60 - 5.51
60 - 6.77
ALC
ALC
ALC
ALC
150
150
150
150
80
80
80
80
ALC 200
ALC 200
80 - 9.28
80 - 11.74
ALC 200
ALC 200
100 - 15.33
100 -3.47
6.59
6.59
8.07
0.26
For detailed information, refer to IS 3921 : 1985 Specifications for aluminium channels (first revision).
17.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Dimensions
4.1 Designation
ALB 40 20 - 0.4
ALB 40 20 - 0.6
ALB 50 30 - 0.9
ALB 50 30 - 1.2
ALB 60 30 - 1.1
ALB 60 30 - 1.5
ALB 60 30 - 1.9
ALB 60 40 - 1.9
ALB 60 40 - 2.4
ALB 80 40 - 2.1
ALB 80 40 - 2.7
ALB 80 40 - 3.2
ALB 100 x 50 - 3.4
ALB 100 x 50 - 3.9
ALB 100 x 60 - 3.9
ALB 100 x 60 - 4.1
For detailed information, refer to IS 5384 : 1985 Specifications for aluminium I-beam (first revision).
17.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Dimensions
4.1 Designation
ALT 25 25 - 0.4
ALT 30 30 - 0.5
ALT 30 30 - 0.7
ALT 40 50 - 0.8
ALT 50 50 - 1.2
ALT 50 50 - 1.6
ALT 65 65 - 1.6
ALT 65 65 - 2.1
ALT 65 65 - 2.7
ALT 65 65 - 3.3
ALT 75 75 - 2.4
ALT 75 75 - 3.1
ALT 75 100 - 2.8
ALT 75 100 - 3.7
ALT 100 75-2.0
ALT 100 75 - 3.1
ALT 100 75 - 4.5
For detailed information, refer to IS 6445 : 1985 Aluminium tee-section (first revision).
17.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.1 Beams
a)Indian Standard junior beams (ISJB),
b)Indian Standard light beams (ISLB),
c)Indian Standard medium weight beams (ISMB)
and
MB100
MB225
MB450
MB125
MB250
MB500
MB150
MB300
MB550
MB175
MB350
MB600
MB200
MB400
JB 150
JB200
JB175
JB225
LB 75
LB100
LB(P)100
LB125
LB150
LB175
LB(P)175
LB200
LB(P)200
LB225
LB250
LB275
LB300
LB(P)300
LB325
LB350
LB400
LB450
LB500
LB550
LB600
17.8
WB150
WB175
WB200
WB200*
WB225
WB250
WB300
WB350
WB400
WB450
WB500
WB550
WB600
WB600
SP 21 : 2005
4.1.5
SC180
SC200
SC220
SC250
HB300
HB300*
HB350
HB350*
HB400
HB400*
HB450
HB450*
JC150
LC(P)200
LC100
LC225
LC125
LC250
LC(P)125
LC300
LC150
LC(P)300
LC(P)150
LC350
LC175
LC400
MCP250*
MCP150
MCP300
MCP150*
MCP300*
MCP175
MCP300*
MCP175*
MCP350
MCP200`
MCP400
3
4
25 25 3
4
5
30 30 3
4
5
35 35 3
4
5
6
40 40 3
4
5
6
65 65 4
5
6
8
70 70 5
6
8
10
75 75 5
6
8
10
80 80 6
8
10
12
90 90 6
8
10
12
JC200
MCP250
MCP125*
20 20
MC225
MC225*
MC250
MC250*
MC250*
MC300
MC300*
MC300*
MC350
MC400
JC175
MCP125
JC125
MCP225*
4.2 Channels
JC100
MCP225
MCP100
MCP200*
MC 75
MC100
MC125
MC125*
MC150
MC150*
MC175
MC175*
MC200
MC200*
MCP 75
45 45 3
4
5
6
50 50 3
4
5
6
55 55 4
5
6
8
60 60 4
5
6
8
100 100 6
8
10
12
110 110 8
10
12
16
130 1308
10
12
16
150 150 10
12
16
20
200 200 12
16
20
25
LC200
Note (P) stands for provisional section.
17.9
SP 21 : 2005
8
10
12
15
4.4 Unequal Leg Angles
120 120
3
4
5
40 25 3
4
5
6
45 30 3
4
5
6
50 30 3
4
5
6
60 40 5
6
8
100 75 6
8
10
12
125 75 6
8
10
125 95 6
8
10
12
30 20
150 75
5
6
8
10
75 50 5
6
8
10
80 50 5
6
8
10
90 60 6
8
10
12
100 65 6
8
10
150 115 8
10
12
16
200 100 10
12
16
70 45
10
12
16
20
90 65 6
7
8
10
100 50 6
7
8
10
100 65 7
120 80 8
10
12
125 75 12
135 65 8
10
12
150 75 9
15
150 90 10
12
15
200 100 15
18
200
150
For detailed information, refer to IS 808 :1989 Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, columns, channel and
angle sections (third revision).
17.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
20 1.25
20 1.60
60
60
60
2.55
20
20 2.00
60
60
3.15
30
30 1.60
60
60
4.00
30
30 2.00
70
70
3.15
30
30 3.15
70
70
4.00
40
40 1.60
70
70
5.00
40
40 2.00
80
80
3.15
40
40 2.55
80
80
4.00
40
40 3.15
80
80
5.00
50
50 2.00
80
80
6.00
50
50 2.55
100
100
3.15
50
50 3.15
100
100
4.00
50
50 4.00
100
100
5.00
100
100
6.00
60
t in mm
60 30 2.00
60 30 3.15
80 30 2.00
80 30 2.55
80 30 3.15
80 50 3.15
80 50 4.00
80 50 5.00
100 30 3.15
100 30 4.00
100 30 5.00
100 50 3.15
100 50 4.00
100 50 5.00
100 50 6.00
h h t in mm
2.00
h h t in mm
20 20 1.25
20 20 1.60
20 20 2.00
25 25 1.25
25 25 1.60
25 25 2.00
25 25 2.55
30 30 1.60
30 30 2.00
30 30 3.15
40 40 1.60
40 40 2.00
40 40 2.55
40 40 3.15
50 50 2.00
50 50 2.55
Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips (fourth revision)
17.11
h x h x t in mm
50 3.15
50 4.00
60 60 2.00
60 60 3.15
60 60 4.00
80 80 2.00
80 80 3.15
80 80 5.00
80 80 6.00
100 100 2.00
100 100 3.15
100 100 5.00
100 100 6.00
50
50
SP 21 : 2005
4.4 Channels without Lips Rectangular
4.4.1 Designations
h b t in mm
h b t in mm
80 50 5.00
30 15 1.25
80 60 2.00
30 15 1.60
30 20 1.25
80 60 3.15
30 20 2.00
80 60 4.00
40 15 1.25
90 40 1.60
40 15 2.00
90 40 2.00
40 20 2.00
90 40 3.15
40 20 3.15
90 50 1.60
40 25 1.60
90 50 2.00
40 25 2.00
90 50 3.15
40 25 2.55
50 25 1.60
100 40 1.60
50 25 2.00
100 40 2.00
50 25 2.55
100 40 3.15
50 25 3.15
100 40 4.00
50 40 1.60
100 50 2.00
50 40 2.00
100 50 3.15
50 40 2.55
100 50 4.00
50 40 3.15
100 50 5.00
100 60 2.00
60 30 1.60
100 60 3.15
60 30 2.00
100 60 4.00
60 30 3.15
100 60 5.00
60 30 4.00
60 40 2.00
120 50 3.15
60 40 3.15
120 50 4.00
60 40 4.00
120 50 5.00
60 50 2.00
120 60 4.00
60 50 3.15
120 60 5.00
120 60 6.00
70 30 1.60
70 30 2.00
140 60 4.00
70 30 3.15
140 60 6.00
70 40 2.00
150 50 3.15
70 40 3.15
150 50 4.00
70 40 4.00
150 50 5.00
80 25 1.60
180 50 3.15
80 25 2.00
180 50 5.00
80 25 3.15
200 50 4.00
80 25 x 4.00
200 50 5.00
80 40 x 1.60
200 50 6.00
80 40 x 2.00
200 80 4.00
80 40 x 3.15
200 80 5.00
80 40 4.00
200 80 6.00
80 50 2.00
250 50 4.00
80 50 3.15
250 50 5.00
80 50 4.00
250 50 6.00
250 80 4.00
250 80 5.00
4.5 Designations Channels Without Lips Square
h x h x c x t in mm, where c is lip length
25 25 8 1.25
25 25 8 1.60
30 30 101.25
30 30 101.60
35 35 101.25
35 35 101.60
40 40 101.25
40 40 1.0 1.6
40 40 15 2.00
50 x 50 x 15 x 2.00
50 x 50 x 10 x 1.60
60 60 15
60 60 15
60 60 20
80 80 15
80 80 20
80 80 25
80 80 25
100 100 15
100 100 20
100 100 25
100 100 25
2.00
2.55
3.15
2.00
3.15
4.00
5.00
2.00
3.15
4.00
5.00
17.12
Designations
h b c t in mm, where c is lip length
15 10 1.15
15 10 1.60
40 20 10 1.25
40 20 10 1.60
50 25 10 1.25
50 25 10 1.60
50 25 15 2.00
50 40 10 1.25
50 40 10 1.60
50 40 15 2.00
50 40 15 3.15
60 30 10 1.60
60 30 15 2.00
60 30 20 3.15
60 30 20 4.00
60 40 15 2.00
60 40 20 3.15
60 40 20 4.00
70 25 10 1.60
70 25 15 2.00
70 25 20 3.15
70 30 15 2.00
70 30 20 3.15
70 40 15 2.00
70 40 20 3.15
70 40 25 4.00
80 40 10 1.60
80 40 20 3.15
80 40 15 4.00
80 50 10 1.60
80 50 15 2.00
80 50 20 3.15
80 50 25 4.00
90 40 10 1.60
90 40 15 2.00
90 40 20 3.15
90 50 10 1.6
30
30
50 15 2.00
50 20 3.15
100 40 10 1.60
100 40 15 2.00
100 40 25 3.15
100 50 15 2.00
100 50 20 3.15
100 50 25 4.00
100 25 25 4.00
100 60 15 2.00
100 60 20 3.15
100 60 25 4.00
100 60 25 5.00
120 50 15 2.00
120 50 20 3.15
120 50 25 4.00
120 50 25 5.00
120 60 20 3.15
120 60 25 4.0
120 60 25 5.0
140 60 20 3.15
140 60 25 4.00
140 60 25 5.00
150 50 20 3.15
150 50 25 4.00
150 50 25 5.00
180 50 20 3.15
180 50 25 4.00
180 50 25 5.00
180 80 20 3.15
180 80 25 4.00
180 80 25 5.00
200 50 20 3.15
200 50 25 4.00
200 50 25 5.00
200 80 20 3.15
200 80 25 4.00
200 80 25 5.00
250 50 20 3.15
250 50 25 4.00
250 50 25 5.00
250 80 20 3.15
250 80 25 4.00
250 80 25 5.00
90
90
SP 21 : 2005
95
h x h x d x t in mm
60
60
60
60
x
x
x
x
60
60
60
60
x
x
x
x
10 x1.60
15 x 2.00
20 x 3.15
25 x 4.00
80
80
80
80
x
x
x
x
80
80
80
80
x
x
x
x
15
20
25
30
x
x
x
x
2.00
3.15
4.00
5.00
x
x
x
x
x
15
20
25
30
30
x
x
x
x
x
2.00
3.15
4.00
5.00
6.00
100
100
100
100
100
x100
x100
x100
x100
x100
h x b x d x t in mm
40 10 1.60
80 50 15 2.00
80 50 20 3.15
40 15 2.00
80 50 25 4.00
40 20 3.15
80 60 15 2.00
40 15 2.00
80 60 20 3.15
40 20 3.15
80 60 25 4.00
50 15 2.00
50 20 3.15
100 80 15 2.00
50 25 4.00
100 80 20 3.15
100 80 25 4.00
40 15 2.00
100 80 30 5.00
40 20 x 3.15
4.9 Hat Sections Rectangular b>h:
50
50
50
60
60
60
60
60
80
80
4.9.1 Designation
h x b x d x t in mm
50 10 1.25
50 10 1.60
50 10 1.25
30
30
40
h x b x d x t in mm
40 50 10 1.60
40 60 15 2.00
40 60 20 3.15
40 20 1.60
40 10 2.00
40 20 2.30
40 20 2.55
40 20 3.15
40 20 1.60
40 20 2.00
40 20 2.30
40 20 2.55
85
90
90
90
90
90
95
95
95
95
40 20 3.15
40 20 1.60
40 20 2.00
40 20 2.30
40 20 2.55
40 20 3.15
40 20 1.60
40 20 2.00
40 20 2.30
40 20 2.55
17.13
100
100
100
100
100
105
105
105
105
105
110
110
110
110
110
115
115
115
115
120
120
120
120
120
125
125
125
125
125
130
130
130
130
130
140
140
140
140
140
150
150
150
150
150
160
160
160
160
160
170
170
170
170
170
180
180
180
180
180
40 20 3.15
40
40
40
40
40
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
190
190
190
190
190
200
200
200
200
200
210
210
210
210
210
220
220
220
220
220
230
230
230
230
230
240
240
240
240
240
250
250
250
250
250
260
260
260
260
260
270
270
270
270
270
280
280
280
280
280
290
290
290
290
290
300
300
300
300
300
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
1.60
2.00
2.30
2.55
3.15
SP 21 : 2005
4.11 90 Corner Refer to Table 11 of the standard.
5. Tolerances
5.1 Straightness The straightness of any length shall
be such that the offset does not exceed 1/600 of that
length, when measured along both the X-X and Y-Y
axis.
5.2 Profile The deviation of the profile dimensions
shall not exceed 0.5 mm. The deviation from the
angle of 90 shall not exceed 1
17.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
c)
2. Classification
d)
e)
a)
b)
Weight
Normal size
(kg/m)
(Depth Width)
mm mm
Moments of Inertia
Ixx
106 mm4
Iyy
106 mm4
20 20
30 30
40 40
50 50
60 60
75 75
100 100
150 150
0.005
0.018
0.061
0.123
0.214
0.620
1.64
5.41
0.002
0.008
0.029
0.057
0.097
0.292
0.768
2.50
20
30
40
50
60
75
100
150
1.1
1.8
3.5
4.4
5.4
10.0
14.9
22.7
8.1
100 50
0.990
0.096
ISDT 150
15.7
150 75
4.50
0.370
12.7
27.7
3.58
5.32
0.108
0.218
0.412
0.756
1.16
0.177
0.192
0.234
0.384
0.750
0.962
1.94
4.15
5.74
2.30
4.97
10.0
11.0
28.4
37.5
200 165
250 180
50
62.5
75
87.5
100
5.8
6.7
7.5
9.8
12.7
50 70
62.5 70
75 75
87.5 87.5
100 100
75
100
125
150
15.3
20.0
27.4
29.4
75
100
125
150
150
200
250
250
Note For detailed dimensions and properties, namely, sectional area, section moduli, etc. see Table 1 of the standard.
For detailed information,refer to IS 1173 : 1978 Specifications for hot rolled and sllit steel Tee bars (second
revision)
17.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
25
28
32
36
40
45
50
56
63
900
J
L
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
950
1000
1100
1200
1250
1400
1500
1600
1800
2000
2200
2500
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
50
45
40
36
32
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
50
45
40
36
32
28
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
50
45
40
36
32
28
25
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
50
45
40
36
32
28
25
25
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
50
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
50
50
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
50
45
17.16
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
50
45
40
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
50
50
40
40
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
56
50
45
40
36
SP 21 : 2005
4. Sheets
5. Strips
Size
mm mm
1800 600
750
900
950
1000
1100
1200
1250
1400
1500
2000 600
750
900
950
1000
1100
1200
1250
1400
1500
2200
600
750
900
950
1000
1100
1200
1250
1400
1500
2500
600
750
900
950
1000
1100
1200
1250
1400
1500
2800 600
750
900
950
1000
1100
1200
1250
1400
1500
3200 600
750
900
950
1000
1100
1200
1250
1400
1500
4000600
750
900
950
1000
1100
1200
1250
1400
1500
8.0
10.0
12.0
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
40.0
50.0
3600 600
750
900
950
1000
1100
1200
1250
1400
1500
Flats
45
50
60
65
70
75
80
90
100
120
130
140
150
160
180
200
250
300
400
For detailed information, refer to IS 1730 : 1989 Steel plates, sheets, strips and flats structural
and general engineering purposes Dimensions (second revision).
17.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
25
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
28
30
32
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
ISRO
70
75
80
90
100
110
120
140
160
180
200
5
6
8
10
12
14
16
ISSQ
ISSQ
ISSQ
ISSQ
ISSQ
ISSQ
ISSQ
18
20
22
25
30
35
40
ISSQ 50
ISSQ 60
ISSQ 70
ISSQ 80
ISSQ 100
ISSQ 120
Note For sectional areas and mass of bars, refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1732 : 1989 Specifications for steel bars, round and square for structural
and general engineering purposes-Dimensions (second revision).
17.18
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
120
140
160
180
220
280
6
10
10
11
9
10
13
320 14
340 13
15
370 16
400 15
430 14
20
5. Tolerances
200 x 9
10
11.5
220 10
11.5
240 10
11
12
260 10
300 x 11
12
13
320 12
13
340 12
14
370 x 13
15
811
400 14
9
180 8
12
280 11
16
430 15
12
17
10
* Steel for general structural purposes (fourth revision)
Structural steel for construction of hulls of ships
(second revision)
Structural steel microalloyed - (medium & high strength qualities)
(first revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 1863 : 1979 Specifications for rolled steel bulb flats (first revision)
17.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
ISPS 2222 U
ISPS 2770 U
Type
Z- Type
ISPS 1888 Z
ISPS 2322 Z
4. Tolerances
4.1 On Length The sections shall be supplied in
lengths between 9 m and 13.4 m subject to a tolerance
of + 75 mm and -50 mm.
Note For detailed toleances, refer to 6 of the standard.
17.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
ISCR
ISCR
ISCR
ISCR
ISCR
ISCR
50
60
80
100
120
140
CrossSectional
Area
(cm2)
38.0
51.0
81.8
113.0
151.0
187.0
Weight Bottom
(kg/m) Width/
Height
(mm)
Ixx
(cm4)
Iyy
(cm4)
29.8
40.8
64.2
89.0
118.0
147.0
357.5
654.6
1524
2806
479
5528
111.4
195.9
468.6
920.0
1672.0
2609.0
90
105
130
150
170
170
6.1 Tolerance
Head Width
Height
Length of rail
+ 100 mm, 0 mm
Weight
Note 1 For detailed dimensions, tolerance and sectional properties, See Tables 2 to 4 of the standard.
Note 2 Dimensions of some of the rail sections commonlly used in country (non-metric sections) alongwith relevant tolerances
and sectional properties are covered in Appendix A of the standard.
Note 3 For method of tests refer to IS 1500 : 1983 Method of Brinell hardness test (second revision), and IS 1608 : 1995
Mechanical testing of metals - Tensile testing (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 3443 : 1980. Specifications for crane rail sections (first revision).
17.21
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
CHG 16
CHG 20
CHG 40
Designation
Mass
kg/m
0.76
0.86
4.82
Sectional
Area
cm2
0.971
1.099
6.144
0.29
0.53
13.59
0.075
0.081
5.752
For detailed information, refer to IS 3954 : 1991. Specifications for hot rolled steel channel sections for general
engineering purposes Dimensions (first revision).
17.22
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Tolerances
2 mm
Web thickness
+1.0
0.5 mm
Head width
So Where So
Height
1 mm
2 mm
Length of rail
50 mm
3 Percent
10
12
15
25
Head
width
mm
34.93
35.72
41.28
52.39
Bottom
width
mm
63.50
68.00
76.20
100.01
Height
mm
63.50
69.85
79.38
104.78
Sectional
Area
cm 2
12.74
15.24
18.98
31.68
6.
Freedom from Defects Rail should be
reasonably free from twist, camber, etc.
Note 1 For detailed dimensions and sectional properties of rail sections, refer to Table-1 and 2 of the standard.
Note 2 For method of test, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metalsTensile testing (second revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 3964 : 1980 Specifications for light rails (first revision).
17.23
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope
7. Tolerance of Dimensions
Over
mm
40
50
75
Up to and
Including
mm
40
50
75
Tolerance
Percent
5
4
3
2
For detailed information, refer to IS 8081 : 1976 Specifications for slotted sections
17.24
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
17.25
SECTION 18
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
18.3
IS
814 : 2004
IS
1278 : 1972
18.7
IS
1395 : 1982
Low and medium alloy steel covered electrodes for manual metal
arc welding (third revision)
18.8
IS
4972 : 1968
18.10
IS
5511 : 1991
Covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of cast iron (first revision)
18.12
IS
5897 : 1985
18.14
IS
5898 : 1970
Copper and copper alloy bare solid welding rods and electrodes
18.15
IS
6419 : 1996
Welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded are welding of
structural steel (first revision)
18.16
IS
6560 : 1996
18.18
IS
7280 : 1974
18.20
IS
8363 : 1976
18.21
18.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Classification
2.1 Coding
Classification of electrodes shall be indicated by the
coding system of letters and numberals as given below
to indicate the specified properties or characteristics of
the electrodes.
C Cellulosic
R Rutile
RR Rutile, heavy coated
S
Designating
Digit
(1)
4
5
2.4
18.3
Ultimate Tensile
Strength
N/mm2
(2)
410-510
510-610
Yield Strength
Min
N/mm2
(3)
330
360
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 3 WELDING CURRENTAND VOLTAGE
CONDITIONS
Percentage
Elongation
on Gauge
Length 5.65 S 0 ,
Min
(2)
(1)
20
2
3
4
22
24
24
Digit
Impact
Strength
J/C, Min
(1)
0)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
(3)
No impact
requirements
47J/+27 C
47J/+0 C
47J/-20 C
27J/-30 C
Direct Current
Recommended
Electrode
Polarity1)
(2)
1)
1
2
3
4
5
6
18
18
20
20
20
20
NOTE-
2)
No impact
requirements
47J/+27 C
47J/+0 C
47J/-20 C
27J/-30 C
27J/-40 C
27J/-460 C
Alternating Current
Open Circuit Voltage
V, Min
(3)
+
Not recommended
+ or
50
50
+
50
+ or 70
70
+
70
+ or
90
90
+
90
Positive polarity (+) Negative polairity ()
Symbol 0 reserved for electrodes used exclusively
on direct current,
= 110129 percent,
All positions.
1.6
2.0
2.5
3.15
4.0
5.0
6.3
8.0
150
200
250
350
350
350
350
350
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
or
200 or 250
250 or 300 or 350
300 or 350
450
450
450
450
450
18.4
SP 21 : 2005
5. Tests
4.2 Bare Length (Contact End)
Bare Length, mm
Electrode size, mm
Minimum Maximum
1.6 to 3.15
4.0 to 8.0
15
20
30
40
core wire
diameter
OR 2.0 mm
whichever is less
Mn
Si
EAXXXX
Not specified
ECXXXX
do
ERXXXX
do
ERRXXXX
do
EBXXXX
ESB XXXX
1.12 1.6
0.75
0.035 0.035
Ni
Cr
Mo
0.30
0.20
0.30
0.08
Same as EBXXXX
18.5
1.75
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 6 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF WELD METAL
Classification Ultimate Tensile Yield Strength,
Strength
Percentage E longation
on Gauge
Length 5.65
Temperature
for Impact 0C
Impact
Strengths
So
MPa
MPa
Min
EX40XX
EX41XX
EX42XX
EX43XX
EX44XX
410-540
410-540
410-540
410-540
410-540
330
330
330
330
330
16
20
22
24
24
+ 27
0
20
30
EX50XX
EX51XX
EX52XX
EX53XX
EX54XX
EX55XX
EX56XX
510-610
510-610
510-610
510-610
510-610
510-610
510-610
360
360
360
360
360
360
360
16
18
18
20
20
20
20
+27
0
20
30
40
46
J, Min
No impact requirement
47
47
47
27
No impact requirement
47
47
47
27
27
27
Note In view of the possible scatter in welding and testing, the upper limit of ultimate tensile strengths may be exceeded
by 40MPa.
Note For method of tests, refer to the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 814 : 2004 Specifications for covered electrodes for manual metal arc
welding of carbon manganese steel (sixth revision).
18.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Structural steels,
Austenitic stainless steels,
Cast irons (excluding spheroidal graphite and
malleable iron castings),
d) Copper and copper alloys,
e) Nickel and nickel alloys,
f) Aluminium and aluminium alloys, and
g) Magnesium and magnesium alloys.
2. Dimensions and Tolerances
2.1 Size
Diameter
mm
1, 1.25,1. 6, 2, 2.5
3.15,4, 5, 6.3
8, 10, 12.5
Tolerance on
Cast Iron
Filler Rods
mm
0.08
0.08
Diameter
Other
gas welding
Filler Rods
mm
0.05
3. Requirements
3.1 Shall be free from surface imperfections, corrosion
products, grease, excessive oxide, etc.
3.2 Structural steel filler rods shall have a protective
copper coating; copper content not exceeding
0.4 percent by weight.
3.3 Aluminium, aluminium alloy and magnesium alloy
filler rods shall be supplied in as manufactured condition.
3.4 In case of austenitic stainless steel filler rods, the
inter crystalline corrosion test may be conducted. The
test piece shall show no sign of cracking.
+ 0.05
- 0.10
For detailed information, refer to IS 1278 : 1972 Specifications for filler rods for gas welding (second
revision).
18.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.6 Part Six The sixth part is a symbol for the welding
characteristics of the electrodes:
Symbol
Direct Current
Recommended
Polarity
2. Classification
2.1 Part One Prefix letter E indicates the suitability
of the electrodes for manual metal arc welding.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
41
49 55
63 68
Tensile
Strength
Min, MPa
410
76
83
760 830
C
R
O
B
( see Note-1)
50
50
50
70
70
70
90
90
90
+
+ or
+
+ or
+
+ or
+
Alternating Current
Minmum Open- Circuit
Voltage, V
Fe
J
K
L
All positions
2.
3.
4.
5.
2
2.5
3.15
4
5
6.3
8
Diameter of the
Electrode Core Wire
mm
2.00
2.50
3.15
4.00
5.00
6.30
8.00
18.8
SP 21 : 2005
dimension shall not exceed the minimum core plus on
covering dimension by more than:
3.1 Length
Electrode Size
Length
mm
250
300
350
2.5
250
300
350
Above 2.5
5.
350
450
For detailed information, refer to IS 1395 : 1982 Specifications for low and medium alloy steel covered
electrodes for manual metal arc welding (third revision).
18.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
IS 4972 : 1968
I
II
III
Material
2. Materials Recommended
Conductivity Percent
(that for Standard
Annealed Copper)
Vickers
Pyramid
Hardness
(HV)
Application
85
90
80-85
110
45-50
180
Major
Dia
mm
13.0
16.0
20.0
25.0
Engage
Dia
mm
12.7
15.5
19.0
24.5
05
06
07
08
09
10
13.0
16.0
20.0
25.0
31.5
40.0
12.7
15.5
19.0
24.5
31.0
39.0
Cooling Hole
Dia
mm
7.0
8.5
10.5
13.5
Taper
(Inclusive)
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
7.0
8.5
10.5
13.5
14.0
16.0
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/5
1/5
18.10
Load
SP 21 : 2005
3.1.6 Caps and adapter shanks Types A to F. Nominal
sizes 1 to 3.
Note 1 For dimensions of shanks of electrodes, refer to Fig. 3 and for taper ring and plug gauges, refer to Table 9 of the standard.
Note 2 For electrode designations and other dimensional details, refer to Tables 10 to 14 and Fig. 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4972 : 1968 Specifications for resistance spot - welding electrodes.
18.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Symbol
Type of Alloy
Iron Base
FeC1
FeC2
Fe
NiFe
NiCu1
NiCu2
Ni
Nickel-iron
Nickel-copper
Nickel-copper
Nickel
Nickel Base
Copper Base
CuA1
CuSn1
CuSn2
Z
Direct Current
Recommended
Polarity
+
+ or
+
+ or
+
+ or
3. Dimensions
3.1 Size Shall be designated by the diameter of the
core wire expressed in mm. as given in Table 1.
TABLE 1 SIZE OF ELECTRODES
Size Designation
Copper-aluminium
Copper-tin
Copper-tin
Other type
2.5
3.15
4
5
6.3
Diameter of Core
Wire, mm
2.50
3.15
4.00
5.00
6.30
18.12
SP 21 : 2005
4. Quality Requirements
4.1 The contact end of the electrode shall be bare and
clean to a length of 20 to 30 mm.
4.2 The arc striking end of the electrode shall be
sufficiently bare to permit easy striking of the arc. The
distance from the arc and to the first point where the full
cross-section of the covering prevails shall not exceed
the diameter of the core wire subject to a maximum of
2.5 mm.
4.3 The covering shall be free from harmful defects
and shall be sufficiently robust to withstand normal
handling storage and use, without damage.
For detailed information, refer to IS 5511 : 1991 Specifications for covered electrodes for manual metal are
welding of cast iron (first revision).
18.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Wire
Wire and rod
Rod
Diameter
Tolerances
mm
Plus
mm
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.6
2.0
2.4
3.2
4.0
5.0
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
Minus
mm
0.03
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
0.07
For detailed information, refer to IS 5897 : 1985 Specifications for aluminium and aluminium alloy welding rods
and wires and magnesium alloy welding rods (first revision).
18.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5.0
2.1 Diameter
Form
Diameter
mm
(0.5)
0.6
Wire
(0.8)
0.9
1.0
Wire and rod
Plus
mm
Minus
mm
0.01
0.03
0.01
0.04
0.01
0.07
(1.2)
(1.6)
(2.0)
2.4
2.5
(3.2)
Rod
Tolerances
4.0
Note 1 For requirement of spools and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard
Note 2 For chemical composition, refer to 10.3 to 10.16 of the standard
For detailed information, refer to IS 5898 : 1970 Specifications for copper and copper alloy bare solid welding
rods and electrodes.
18.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY
200-230
305
380
13
25
25
18.16
SP 21 : 2005
A. Symbol Indicating Tensile Strength and Elongation
Symbol
50
420
MPa
5.65
500-640
So
1
2
3
4
R
I
M
C
F
22
Symbol
, Min
5. Tests
5.1 Chemical Composition See 12 of the standard
5.2 Soundness Radiographs shall reveal no cracks or
Zone of incomplete fusion.
5.3 All Weld Metal Mechanical Test Ultimate tensile
strength, yeild stress, percentage elongation and impact
values shall be as specified in 4.
Note For requirements of reels and reeling conditions refer to 6 and 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6419 : 1996 Specifications for welding rods and bare electrodes for gas
shielded arc welding of structural steel (first revision).
18.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Diameter
Nominal Diameter
Tolerance, mm
mm
Plus
Minus
0.6
0.01
0.03
0.8
0.01
0.04
0.9
0.01
0.04
1.0
0.01
0.04
1.2
0.01
0.04
1.6
0.01
0.04
1.8
0.01
0.04
2.0
0.01
0.07
2.4
0.01
0.07
2.5
0.01
0.07
2.8
0.01
0.07
3.0
0.01
0.07
3.2
0.01
0.07
4.0
0.01
0.07
5.0
0.01
0.07
1 100
1 100
1 000
950
18.18
1.2
1.6 - 2.0
900
700
2.4 - 3.2
600
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 DIAMETER OF CAST HELIX
Type of package
Standard size
mm
Cast
mm
Maximum Helix
mm
100mm spool
Al except 100mm
spool
100130
305
380
13
25
25
Reducing gas
Inert gas
Mixed gas
Carbon dioxide
Nitrogen hydrogen mixture
5. Tests
Symbol
50
53
56
B.
Yield
Tensile
Strength, Min Strength
Percetage
Elongation at
Gauge Length
MPa
5.65
420
460
500
MPa
500 - 640
530 - 680
560 - 720
So , Min
20
18
16
Symbol
1
2
3
4
Note For requirements of reels and reeling conditions refer to 6 and 7 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6560 : 1996 Specifications for molybdenum and chromium-lybdenum,
low alloy steel welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded arc welding (first revision).
18.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Note 1 For requirements of reels for wires and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard.
Note 2 For chemical composition details, refer to 9 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 7280 : 1974 Specifications for bare wire electrodes for submerged arc
welding of structural steels.
18.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
+0
0.05 mm
Note 1 For requirements of coils for wires and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard.
Note 2 For chemical composition details, refer to 9 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 8363 : 1976 Specifications for bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding
of steels.
18.21
SP 21 : 2005
SECTION 19
THREADED FASTENERS
AND
RIVETS
19.1
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
IS
207 : 1964
19.4
IS
723 : 1972
19.5
IS
724 : 1964
Mild steel and brass cup ruler and square hooks and screw eyes (first revision)
19.6
IS
725 : 1961
19.7
IS
730 : 1978
19.8
IS
1120 : 1975
19.9
IS
1363 : 2002
IS
1364 : 2002
19.10
19.11
19.12
19.13
19.14
19.15
Part 4 Hexagon thin nuts (chamfered) (size range M1.6 to M64) (third revision)
19.16
Part 5 Hexagon thin nuts (unchamfered) (size range M1.6 to M64) (third revision)
19.17
IS
1365 : 1978
19.18
IS
1366 : 2002
19.19
IS
1929 : 1982
Hot forged steel rivets for hot closing (12 to 36 mm diameter)(first revision)
19.20
IS
2016 : 1967
19.21
IS
2155 : 1982
Cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision)
19.23
IS
2585 : 1968
Black square bolts and nuts (dia range 6 to 39 mm) and black
square screws (dia range 6 to 24 mm) (first revision)
19.24
IS
2687 : 1991
19.25
IS
2907 : 1998
19.26
IS
2998 : 1982
Cold forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision)
19.27
IS
3063 : 1994
19.28
IS
3121 : 1989
19.29
IS
3468 : 1991
19.30
IS
3757 : 1985
19.31
IS
4762 : 1984
19.32
IS
5369 : 1975
General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)
19.33
19.2
SP 21 : 2005
Title
Page
IS
5372 : 1975
19.34
IS
5373 : 1969
19.35
IS
5374 : 1975
19.36
IS
5624 : 1993
19.37
IS
6113 : 1970
19.38
IS
6610 : 1972
19.39
IS
6623 : 2004
19.40
IS
6639 : 1972
19.41
IS
6649 : 1985
19.42
IS
6733 : 1972
19.43
IS
6736 : 1972
19.44
IS
6739 : 1972
19.45
IS
6760 : 1972
19.46
IS
8033 : 1976
19.47
IS
8412 : 1977
19.48
IS
8869 : 1978
19.49
IS 10238 : 2001
19.50
IS 12427 : 2001
19.51
19.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.
3.1
4. Tolerances
For length upto size
For length upto size
For average Diameter of
cast brass hooks
250 2 mm
300 3 mm
0.5 mm
Note For detailed dimensions and shapes, refer to Table 1 and 11, Fig.1 and 2 of the standard
For detailed information, refer to IS 207 : 1964 Specification for gate and shutter hooks and eyes (revised).
19.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.1 Dimensions
Shank
Diameter
Length
Head
Diameter
1.25
20
3.4
1.4
20
3.8
1.6
15, 20, 25
1.8
25, 30
4.5
2.24
40
4.5
2.5
50
2.8
60
5.6
3.15
60
5.7
3.55
80
6.4
100
7.2
4.5
8.1
6.3
150
11.3
200, 225
14.4
250
18
10
1.25 to 2.24
2.5
2.8 to 10
15 to 20
25 to 30
40
50 to 60
80
90
100
125 to 150
200 to 250
0.04
0.05
0.06
1
1.2
1.5
2.1
2.6
3.1
3.4
3.8
4.4
For detailed information, refer to IS 723 : 1972 Specification for steel countersunk head wire nails (second
revision).
19.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
IS 724 : 1964 MILD STEEL AND BRASS CUP, RULER AND SQUARE
HOOKS AND SCREW EYES
(Revised)
1. Scope Requirements for mild steel and brass cup,
ruler and square hooks and screw eyes.
2. Types
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
4. Dimensions
4.1 Shouldered cup, ruler and square hooks
Dimension
D(mm)
T(mm)
4.2
Designation
15No.3
2.39
4.7
20No.4
2.74
6.5
35No.7
3.81
12.5
40No.8
4.17
14.0
50No.10
4.88
17.5
50No12
5.59
20.0
Dimension
D(mm)
T(mm)
4.3
25No.5
3.10
8.0
Designation
25No.5
3.10
8.0
30No.7
3.81
10.0
40No.8
4.17
12.0
45No.8
4.17
15.0
5oNo.8
4.17
18.0
Dimension
D(mm)
T(mm)
Designation
20No.4
2.74
8.0
25No.5
3.10
10.0
30No.6
3.45
14.0
40No.7
3.81
15.0
50No.9
4.52
20.0
60No.12
5.59
24.0
25No.4
2.74
9.0
30No.5
3.10
12.0
75No14
6.30
28.0M
D(mm)
T(mm)
Designation
16No.0
1.52
5.5
20No.1
1.78
6.5
30No.6
3.45
11.0
35No.8
4.17
12.0
Dimension
D(mm)
T(mm)
20No.2
2.08
7.5
25No.3
2.39
9.5
Designation
40No.10
4.88
12.5
45No.12 50No.14
5.59
6.30
15.0
19.0
19.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
110 (4)
80(4)
60 (2.5)
40(3.15)
30 (2)
100(5)
80(3.15)
60 (2)
40(2.5)
25(5)
100 (4)
80 (2.5)
50 (3.15)
40(2)
25 (2.5)
100(3.15)
70 (4)
50 (2.5)
35(3.15)
25 (2)
90 (5)
70 (3.15)
50 (2)
35(2.5)
25(1.6)
90 (4)
70 (2.5)
45(3.15)
35 (2)
90(3.15)
60 (4)
45 (2.5)
30(3.15)
80 (3.15)
30 (3.15)
70 (5)
25 (3.15)
100 (4)
60 (3.15)
100 (3.15)
50(3.55)
90(3.55)
50(3.15)
80 (5)
40 (3.15)
Note 1 Head diameter of side of square shall be 2.5 times the size of shank in case of Types (a), (b) and (c) and shall be
3 times the size of shank in case of types (d) and (e) copper nails.
Note 2 For detailed dimensions, approximate count of copper nails and tolerances refer to 4 (Table 1) with Fig. 1 to 5
of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 725 : 1961 Specification for copper wire nails (revised).
19.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Type
J-Type Hook Bolts
(Types I and II)
Size (Dia)
M6
M8
M10
Inside Width
12
14
16
Preferred Length
70 to 150 in steps of 10
70 to 200 in steps of 10
70 to 200 in steps of 10
M8
M10
50, 60, 70
80, 95
110
M8
50, 60, 80
90
50, 60, 80
90
M10
Note In regard to requirements not covered in the standard, including grade and mechanical properties refer to IS 1367
Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners.
For detailed information, refer to IS 730 : 1978 Specification for hook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing (second
revision).
19.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Range of Preferred
Length (See Note 1)
Nominal
Max
Min
10
4.88
5.00
4.72
20 - 35
14
6.33
6.43
6.05
20 - 100
18
7.72
7.85
7.47
25 - 110
24
9.86
9.98
9.00
25 - 200
28
11.28
11.40
11.02
25 - 200
Note 1 Preferred lengths 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160,
170, 180, 190 and 200mm.
Note 2 Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to two-thirds times the total length of the screw.
Note 3 For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the standard.
Note 4 For tolerances, refer to 3 (Fig. 1) of the standard .
Note In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, refer to IS 451 : 1999 Technical supply conditions for wood
screws (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 1120 : 1975 Specification for coach screws (first revision).
19.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Material
General requirements
Thread
a)
Mechanical properties
International Standards
Tolerance
Finish
in
Product grade
International Standard
2) Requirement for non electrolytically applied
zero flake coategs are
covered in ISO 10683.
Acceptability
d 39 mm : ISO 898-1
d > 39 mm : as agreed
C
ISO 4759-1
As processed
(1)Requirements for electroplating are covered
ISO 4042. (2)If different electroplating
requirements are desired or if requirements are
needed for other finishes, they should be
agreed between customer and supplier
For acceptance procedure see ISO 3269
For detailed information, refer to IS 1363 (Part I) : 2002 ISO 4016 : 1999. Specification for Hexagon head
bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part I Heaxagon head bolts (size range M5 to M64) (fourth revision).
19.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Material
General requirements
Thread
Mechanical properties
International Standards
Tolerance
Finish
Product grade
International Standard
2) Requirement for non electrolytically applied
zero flake coategs are
covered in ISO 10683.
Acceptability
Note For corresponding Indian standards of cerain International standard referred, along with their degree of
equivalence, refer , the National Forewrd of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1363 (Part 2) : 2002 ISO 4016 : 1999 Specification for hexagon head bolts,
screws and nuts of product grade C : Part 2 Hexagon head screws (size range M5 to M64) (fourth revision).
19.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Material
General requirements
Thread
Mechanical properties
International Standards
Tolerance
Finish
Product grade
International Standard
2) Requirement for non electrolytically applied
zero flake coategs are
covered in ISO 10683.
Acceptability
Note For Corresponding Indian standards of cerain International standards referred, along with their degree of equivalence,
refer, the National Foreward of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1363 (Part 3) : 2002 ISO 4034 : 1986. Specification for hexagon head
bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part 3 Hexagon nuts (size range M5 to M64) (third revision).
19.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
St e e l
International Standard
ISO 8992
Tolerance
International Standards
Property classa
6g
ISO 724, ISO 965-1
d 24 m: A2-70, A4-70
24 mm < d mm:
A2-50, A4-50
d > 39 mm: as agreed
d 39 mm: ISO 3506-1
d > 39 mm: as agreed
International Standard
Tolerance
Product grade
International Standard
Finish and/or coating
Acceptability
Stainless steel
Non-ferrous metal
a For other property classes see ISO 898-1 for steel and ISO 3506-1 for stainless steel respectively.
b
Whichever is shorter.
Note For Corresponding Indian standards of cerain International standard referred, along with their degree of equivalence,refer
, the National Foreward of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 1) :1992. Specification for ISO 4014 : 1998. Hexagon head bolts,
screws and nuts of product grades A and B Part I Hexagon head bolts (size range M1.6 to M64) (third
revision).
19.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Dimensions
St e e l
International Standard
ISO 8992
Tolerance
International Standards
Property class a
6g
ISO 724, ISO 965-1
d 24 m: A2-70, A4-70
24 mm < d mm:
A2-50, A4-50
d > 39 mm: as agreed
d 39 mm: ISO 3506-1
d > 39 mm: as agreed
International Standard
Tolerance
Product grade
International Standard
Finish and/or coating
Acceptability
Stainless steel
Non-ferrous metal
Materials
specified
ISO 8839
a For other property classes see ISO 898-1 for steel and ISO 3506-1 for stainless steel respectively.
b
Whichever is shorter.
Note For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of
equivalence refer to the National foreward of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1364(Part 2) :1992 ISO 4017 : 1998. Specification for Hexagon head
bolts,screw and nuts of product grades A and B - Part 2- Hexagon head screws (Size range M1.6 to M64) (third
revision).
19.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
St e e l
International Standard
ISO 8992
Tolerance
International Standards
Property classa
6H
ISO 724, ISO 965-1
d M24: A2-70, A4-70
M24 < d M39:
A2-50, A4-50
d > M39: as agreed
d M39: ISO 3506-2
d > M39: as agreed
International Standard
Tolerance
Product grade
International Standard
Finish and/or coating
Acceptability
Stainless steel
Non-ferrous metal
Materials
specified
ISO 8839
d < M16:A
d < M16: B
ISO 4759-1
As processed
Plain
Plain
Requirements for
Requirements for
electroplating are covered in
electroplating are
ISO 4042
covered in ISO 4042
Requirements for
non-electrolytically applied
zinc flake coating are
covered in ISO 10683
If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are needed
for other finishes, thy should be agreed between customer and supplier.
Limits for surface
discontinuities are covered
in ISO 6157-1
For acceptance procedure, see ISO 3269.
a For other property classes see ISO 898-1 for steel and ISO 3506-1 for stainless steel respectively.
Note For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of equivalence,
after to the National foreward of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1364(PART 3) :1992.Specification for ISO 4032:1986 Hexagon head
bolts,screw and nuts of product grades A and B Part 3 Hexagon nuts (Size range M1.6 to M64) (third
revision).
19.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Material
General
requirements
Thread
Mechanical
properties
St e e l
International Standard
ISO 8992
Tolerance
International Standards
Property class a
6H
ISO 724, ISO 965-1
d M24: A2-35, A4-35
M24 < d M39: A2-25
A4-025
International Standard
Tolerance
Product grade
International Standard
Finish and/or coating
Acceptability
Stainless steel
Non-ferrous metal
Materials
specified
ISO 8839
d M16:A
d < M16: B
ISO 4759-1
As processed
Plain
Plain
Requirements for
Requirements for
electroplating are covered in
electroplating are
ISO 4042
covered in ISO 4042
Requirements for
non-electrolytically applied
zinc flake coating are
covered in ISO 10683
If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are needed
for other finishes, thy should be agreed between customer and supplier.
Limits for surface
discontinuities are covered
in ISO 6157-1
For acceptance procedure, see ISO 3269.
Note For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of
equivalence, refer to National Foreward of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 4):1992. - ISO 4035: 1986 hexagon head bolts, screw and nuts
of product grades A and B - Part 4 Hexagon thin nuts (chamfered) (size range M1.6 to M64) (third revision).
19.16
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Steel (S)
General
requirments
International
Standard
Thread
Tolerance
International
Standards
Mechanical
Hardness min.
International
Standard
Tolerances
Product grade
International
Standard
ISO 4759-1
As processed
Plain
Note For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of
equivalence, refer to National foreward of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 5) :1992 - ISO 4036 : 1979 Hexagon head bolts,screw and nuts
of product grades A and B Part 5 Hexagon thin nuts (unchamfered) (Size range M1.6 to M10) (fourth revision).
19.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Requirements
Diameter
Nom
M1
M1.2
(M1.4)
M1.6
(M1.8)
M2
(M2.2)
M2.5
M3
(M3.5)
M4
(M4.5)
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
(M14)
M16
(M18)
M20
1.9
2.3
2.6
3.0
3.4
3.8
4.2
4.7
5.6
6.5
7.5
8.3
9.2
11
14.5
18
22
25
29
33
36
Length
Max
Min
1.90
2.30
2.60
3.00
3.40
3.80
4.20
4.70
5.60
6.50
7.50
8.30
9.20
11.0
14.5
18.00
22.00
25.00
29.00
33.00
36.00
1.76
2.16
2.46
3.00
3.10
3.50
3.90
4.40
5.30
6.14
7.14
7.94
8.84
10.57
14.07
17.57
21.48
24.48
28.48
32.38
35.38
1.10
1.12
1.14
2.16
2.18
2.52
2.52
3.25
4.30
4.35
5.40
7.45
7.50
7.55
9.80
11.100
14.120
18.140
22.160
28.180
28.200
For detailed information, refer to IS 1365 : 1978 Specification for slotted countersunk head screws
(third revision).
19.18
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Material
General requirements
Steel
International Standard
Stainless steel
Non-ferrous metal
ISO 8992
Tolerance
6g
Thread
International Standards
Property class
A2-70, A2-50
ISO 898-1
ISO 3506
Mechanical properties
International Standards
Product grade
ISO 8839
Tolerance
International Standard
ISO 4759-1
Plain
Requirements for electroplating are covered in ISO 4042.
Finish
Acceptability
For detailed information, refer to IS 1366 : 1982. Specification for Slotted cheese head screws (third revision).
19.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Range of Preferred
Lengths (See Note 2)
mm
28-80
32-95
35-110
40-120
45-125
50-140
55-160
65-180
70-200
85-225
95-225
Diameter of
Rivet Hole
mm
13.5
15.5
17.5
19.5
21.5
23.5
25.5
29
32
35
38
Note 1
For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard.
Note 2
For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks on rivets,
tolerances, methods of tests, refer to IS 10102 : 1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1929 : 1982 Specification for hot forged steel rivets for hot closing (12 to 36
mm diameter) (first revision).
19.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Requirements
External
Diameter
4
5
5
6
6.5
7
8
9
10
10
12.5
14
17
21
24
28
30
Thickness
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.8
1
1
1.6
1.6
1.6
2
2.5
2.5
3
For Bolt/
Screw Size
M1.6
(M1.8)
M2
(M2.2)
M2.5
M3
(M3.5)
M4
(M4.5)
M5
M6
(M7)
M8
M10
M12
(M14)
M16
19.21
Size
External
(Diameterof Hole) Diameter
(19)
34
21
37
Thickness
3
3
(23)
39
25
44
M24
(28)
50
(M27)
31
56
M30
(34)
60
(M33)
M36
37
66
(40)
72
(M39)
43
78
M42
(46)
85
(M45)
50
92
M48
(54)
98
(M52)
58
105
M56
(62)
110
(M60)
66
115
M64
(70)
120
10
(M68)
74
125
10
M72
(78)
135
10
(M76)
M80
82
140
12
(87)
145
12
(M85)
93
160
12
M90
(98)
165
12
(M95)
104
175
14
M100
(109)
180
14
(M105)
114
185
14
M110
(119)
200
14
(M115)
(124)
210
16
(M120)
M125
129
220
16
(134)
230
16
(M130)
144
240
18
M140
(155)
250
18
(M150)
SP 21 : 2005
4.2 Punched Washers, Type A, for Hexagonal Bolts
and Screws
(Diameter
External Thickness
For Bolt/
Size of Hole) Diameter
Screw
1.8
0.4
M1.6
(2.1)
0.4
(M1.8)
2.4
0.4
M2
(2.6)
0.5
(M2.2)
2.9
6.5
0.5
M2.5
3.4
0.5
M3
0.8
(M3.5)
0.8
M4
10
(M4.5)
5.5
10
M5
6.6
12.5
1.6
M6
14
1.6
(M7)
17
1.6
M8
11
21
M10
(4)
4.5
(5)
(7.6)
14
24
2.5
M12
(16)
28
2.5
(M14)
18
30
3.15
M16
(20)
34
3.15
(M18)
22
37
3.15
M20
(24)
39
3.15
(M22)
26
44
M24
(30)
50
(M27)
33
56
M30
(36)
60
(M33)
39
66
M36
(42)
72
(M39)
45
78
M42
(48)
85
(M45)
52
92
M48
External
Diameter
3.5
Thickness
For Bolt/
Screw
0.4
M1.6
(M1.8)
(2.1)
3.5
0.4
2.4
4.5
0.4
M2
(2.6)
4.5
0.4
(M2.2)
2.9
0.5
M2.5
3.4
0.5
M3
(4)
0.5
(M3.5)
4.5
0.8
M4
(5)
0.8
(M4.5)
5.5
9.5
M5
6.6
11
1.6
M6
(7.6)
13
1.6
(M7)
14
1.6
M8
11
18
M10
14
20
2.5
M12
(16)
24
2.5
(M14)
18
27
3.15
M16
(20)
30
3.15
(M18)
22
33
3.15
M20
For detailed information, refer to IS 2016 : 1967 Specification for Plain washers (first revision).
19.22
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Tolerances
2. Dimensions
+ 1.5
Range of Preferred
Lengths (See Note 2)
mm
Diameter of
Rivet Hole
mm
12-55
6.3
14-70
8.4
10
18-85
10.5
12
20-100
13
14
22-110
15
16
24-110
17
4. Tests
for l > 20
For detailed Information, refer to IS 2155 : 1982 Specification for cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing
(6 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision).
19.23
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
3. Designation
Fastener
Thread
Size
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
27
30
33
36
39
6.48
8.9
10.9
13.1
15.1
17.1
19.1
21.5
23.3
25.3
28.3
31.3
34.6
37.6
40.6
Length
(mm)
M10
M10
M10
M10
M10
30
30
30
30
Minimum
Diameter
Designation
Square bolt
Square bolt
Square screw
Square nut
Square bolt
Thickness
of Head
5.7
7.64
9.64
11.57
13.57
15.57
17.57
19.48
21.48
23.48
26.48
29.48
32.38
35.38
38.38
4
5.5
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
17
19
21
23
25
M1030N
M1030
M1030
M10
M1030HN
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS
Length of
of Head Bolt*
25-100
30-120
35-150
40-300
45-300
50-300
55.300
60-400
65-400
70-400
80-400
90-400
100-400
110-400
110-400
2585
2585
2585
2585
2585
Length of
Screw
16-40
16-50
16-60
20-80
25-80
25-80
40-80
45-80
50-80
55-80
-
1 Preferred lengths for bolts 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160,
180, 190, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300, 320, 340, 360, 380, and 400.
2 Preferred lengths for screws 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75 and 80
3 Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.
4 For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 2 and 3 of the standard.
* Range of preferred lengths for bolts (bolts with lengths less than the minimum preferred lengths are to be treated as screws).
For detailed information, refer to IS 2585 : 1968 Specification for black square bolts and nuts (diameter range
6 to 39 mm) and black square screws (diameter range 6 to 24 mm) (first revision).
19.24
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Product Grade
Screw Threads
Tolerance
Material
Mechanical
Properties
A
6H
Steel
Property
Class
Stainless Steel
<M36 : 5
>M36: as agreed
by purchaser
and supplier
<36 : Al 50
>M36 : as agreed
Non-ferrous Metal
Brass or
Al. Alloy
by purchaser
and supplier
Min
300 N/mm2
As produced
As produced or
Bright
electroplated
Finish
coatings
Hot-dip galvanized
coatings
3. Dimensions M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, 4.2.1 A Cap Nut of thread size M10 and made of brass
M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, and M48.
shall be designated asCap Nut IS 2687: M10 Brass
Note For details See Table 1 of the standard.
5. General Requirements
4. Designation
4.1 The Cap Nuts shall be designated by the
nomenclature, thread size and number of this standard.
4.1.1 A Cap Nut of thread size M8 shall be designated
as Cap Nut IS 2687 : M8
4.2 When stainless steel, brass or aluminium alloy is
used for manufacture of cap nuts, the word `Stainless
Steel, `Brass and `Aluminium shall be added at the
end of the designation.
Note1 Refer to various Parts of IS 1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners.
Note2 For references to corresponding Indian standards for tolerences, screw threads, mechanical properties and finish, refer to
3.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2687 : 1991. Specification for cap nuts (second revision)
19.25
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 2907 : 1998 Specification for non-ferrous rivets (1.6 to 10 mm) (first
revision).
19.26
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Tolerances
+0.5mm for 10
0
2. Material
+1.0
+1.5
for1 > 20
0
Dimensions
Range of Preferred
Lengths (See Note 2)
mm
3-6
4-7
4-8
5-10
6-12
6-16
6-35
7-40
8-45
10-45
12-55
14-65
14-70
18-85
20-100
22-110
24-110
Diameter of
Rivet Hole
mm
1.05
1.25
1.45
1.65
2.1
2.6
3.1
3.6
4.2
5.3
6.3
7.3
8.4
10.5
13
15
17
5.
Tests
for10 < 1 20
16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 35, 38, 40, 42, 45, 48,
50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105 and
110 mm.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2998 : 1982 Specification for cold forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to
16 mm diameter) (first revision).
19.27
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
8. Tests
For detailed information, refer to IS 3063 : 1994 Specification for fasteners-single coil rectangular section
spring lock washers (second revision).
19.28
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Length
Closed/mm
330
370
400
475
550
550
600
600
660
700
750
775
800
1 070
1 120
1 270
1 360
1 440
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Open/ mm
525
550
570
700
825
825
875
875
960
960
000
025
050
450
590
700
760
860
100
125
160
200
225
250
315
355
400
450
450
450
450
Proof
Load
kN
10.0
18.0
28.0
36.0
44.0
63.0
75.0
86.0
100.0
112.0
144.0
194.0
214.0
286.0
342.0
400.0
500.0
624.0
3. Requirements
3.1 Galvanizing All components of assembled
stretching screw shall be galvanized as per
IS 4759 : 1996
All screw threads shall be `brush or `spun galvanized.
3.2 Workmanship
3.2.1 Rigging screw The tubular body shall be neatly
and clearly made and finished. The screwed eye,
screwed fork and screwed stud eye shall be cleanly
forged and finished. The thimble, when in place in the
fork, shall be capable of free movement.
3.2.2 Stretching screw The body, the screw eye and
the swivel eye shall be solid forging without weld, neatly
and cleanly made and finished.
3.2.3 Each component of the completed rigging screw
or stretching screw shall be free from any visible flaw or
defect.
4. Tests
Proof
kN
2.0
3.0
6.0
9.0
12.0
15.2
22.4
32.4
40.0
63.0
90.0
142.0
190.0
For detailed information, refer to IS 3121 : 1981 Specification for ringging screws and stretching screws
(first revision).
19.29
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Specifications
3. DimensionsThread sizes
G
3
1
5
3
7
1
1
1
, G , G , G , G , G ,G1, (G1 ) , (G1 )
8
2
8
4
8
8
4
4
1
3
1
1
(G1 ) , (G1 ) , G2, (G 2 ) , (G 2 ) , G3, G4,
2
4
4
2
G5
and G6.
Product grade
Tolerances
Indian Standard IS 1367 (Part 2) : 1979 *
Type
: Pipe threads
Threads
Material
Mechanical
Property Class
properties
Stainles Steel
14 H
A2-50
Brass
Minimum
tensile strength
300 MPa
IS 1367(Part 14)+
3. Designation
3.1 The pipe nuts shall be designated by
nomenclature, thread size and number of this standard.
3.1.1 A pipe nut of thread size G6 shall be designated
as Pipe Nut G 6 IS 3468
3.2 When the pipe nuts are manufactured from
stainless steel or brass, the word `stainless steel or
`Brass shall be added at the end of the designation.
3.2.1 A pipe nut of thread size G 3/8 and made from
brass shall be designated as
Pipe Nut G 3/8 IS 3468-Brass
4. General Requirements
4.1 With respect to surface discontinuities, the pipe
nuts shall conform to IS 1367 (Part 10).
4.2 In respect of requirements not covered in this
standard, the nuts shall conform to IS 1367 (Part 1) :
For detailed information, refer to IS 3468 : 1991 Specification for pipe nuts (second revision).
19.30
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
General Requirements
For detailed information, refer to IS 3757 : 1985 Specification for high strength structural bolts (second
revision).
19.31
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Tests
For detailed information, refer to IS 4762 : 1984 Specification for worm drive clamps for general purposes (first
revision).
19.32
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.
Requirements
Note For permissible deviation on main dimensions and concentricity of the hole with respect to outside diameter of
precision grade washers as well as of ordinary grade washers, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 5369 : 1975 Specification for general requirements for plain washers and
lock washers (first revision)
19.33
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
LB
(See Note 1)
22
26
32
40
44
56
56
62
68
75
80
22
30
36
44
50
56
56
62
68
75
80
Thick
End
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4.3
5.7
6.8
8.1
9.2
9.9
9.9
10.5
11.2
11.9
12.4
For Bolt
Size
M10
M12
M16
M20
(M22)
M24
(M27)
M30
(M33)
M36
(M39)
For detailed information, refer to IS 5372 : 1975 Specification for taper washers for channels (ISMC) (first
revision).
19.34
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For Bolt
Size
39
110
M36
(42)
125
(M39)
45
135
M42
48
140
M45
52
150
10
M48
56
160
10
M52
11.5
30
M10
14
40
M12
18
50
M16
23
60
M20
24
70
M22
27
80
M24
(30)
90
(M27)
33
95
M30
(36)
100
(M33)
Note Other Requirements not covered in the standard shall conform to IS : 5369-1975 General requirements for plain
washers and lock washers (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 5373 : 1969 Specification for square washers for wood fastenings.
19.35
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal L B
Thickness
Size
(See Note 1)
(Diameter
Thin
Thick
of Hole)
End
End
11
14
18
22
(24)
26
(30)
33
(36)
39
(42)
22 22
26 30
32 36
40 44
44 50
56 56
56 56
62 62
68 68
75 75
80 80
1.5
2
2.5
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4.6
6.2
7.6
9.2
10
10.8
10.8
11.7
12.6
13.6
14.2
For Bolt
Size
M10
M12
M16
M20
(M22)
M24
(M27)
M30
(M33)
M36
(M39)
For detailed information, refer to IS 5374 : 1975 Specification for taper washers for I-beams (ISMB) (first
revision).
19.36
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Material
Thread
Mechanical
Properties
Tolerance
Tolerances
Indian
Standards
Property Class
Indian Standard
Produce Grade
Indian Standard
Steel
8g
IS 4218 (Part 5) : 1979 *
IS 4218 (Part 6) : 1978 +
4.6
IS 1367 (Part 3) : 1991 ++
C
IS 1367 (Part 2) : 1979 t
As produced or Hot-dip galvanized,IS 1367**
(Part 13):1983,+ if agreed between supplier and purchaser.
dimensions
For detailed information, refer to IS 5624 : 1993 Specification for foundation bolts (first revision)
19.37
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
Size of Nut
M6
M8
6
8
25
25
M6
M8
M10
10
25
M10
Preferred Lengths
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140 and 150
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150,
160, 170, 180, 190 and 200
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150,160,
170, 180, 190 and 200
Size
Size of Nut
M5
M6
5
6
3
4
M5
M6
M8
M8
10
M10
M10
Preferred Lengths
12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 and
12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,
60, 70, 80, 90 and 100
12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50,
60, 70, 80, 90 and 100
12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 and
50
55,
55,
50
For detailed information, refer to IS 6113 : 1970 Specification for aluminium fasteners for building purposes.
19.38
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.
Tolerance on
Size
+0.43
+0.43
+0.52
+0.52
+0.52
+0.52
+0.62
+0.62
+0.62
+0.62
Outer Dia
24
30
37
39
44
50
56
60
66
72
2.
Tolerance
on Outer
Dia
-1.30
-1.30
-1.60
-1.60
-1.60
-1.60
-1.90
-1.90
-1.90
-1.90
Thickness
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Suitable for
Bolt Size
M12
M16
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
M33
M36
M39
Note Other requirements of washers shall be as specified in IS 5369 : 1975 General requiremens for plain washers and lock
washers (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 6610 : 1972 Specification for heavy washers for steel structures.
19.39
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
*
+
5. Finish : Shall be supplied in the dull black heattreated condition with a residual coating of light oil.
For detailed information, refer to IS 6623 : 2004 Specification for high strength structural nuts (second revision).
19.40
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Diameter
M12
M16
M20
(M22)
M24
(M27)
M30
(M33)
M36
(M39)
Nom
12
16
20
22
24
27
30
33
36
39
Max
12.70
16.70
20.84
22.84
24.84
27.84
30.84
34.00
37.00
40.00
Distance Between
Parallel Side, Nom
Min
11.30
15.30
19.16
21.16
23.16
26.16
29.16
32.00
35.00
38.00
19
24
30
32
36
41
46
50
55
60
Length of Bolts
Nom (see Note 1)
30-120
35-150
40-175
40-200
45-200
60-200
80-200
100-200
100-200
110-200
3.
Requirements
(various Parts)
For detailed information, refer to IS 6639 : 1972 Specification for hexagon bolts for steel structures.
19.41
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 6649 : 1985 Specification for hardened and tempered washers for high
strength structural bolts and nuts (first revision).
19.42
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Wall nail
Wall nail
Size
(Dia of
Shank)
4.00
4.50
5.60
6.30
Dia of
Head
8.0
9.0
13.4
15.1
Length
30
40
50
60
70
80
Approx
No. of
Nails/kg
260
190
95
80
60
50
6. Test
6.1 Bend Test Nails when cold shall not break or
crack when doubled over either by pressure or by blows
from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the
diameter of the test piece
For detailed information, refer to IS 6733 : 1972 Specification for wall and roofing nails.
19.43
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
12
14
16
18
20
24
Designation)
Nom Max
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1.52
1.78
2.08
2.39
2.74
3.10
3.45
3.81
4.17
4.52
4.88
1.55
1.85
2.16
2.46
2.87
3.23
3.58
3.94
4.29
4.65
5.00
Min
1.47
1.70
1.98
2.29
2.64
2.97
3.33
3.68
4.04
4.39
4.72
Range of
Preferred
Lengths
(see Note1)
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-12
12-25
12-30
12-40
12-40
12-75
15-75
15-75
5.59
6.30
7.01
7.72
8.43
9.86
5.72
6.43
7.14
7.85
8.56
9.98
5.38
6.05
6.76
7.47
8.18
9.60
20-75
25-75
30-75
30-75
30-75
30-75
Note 1 Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40
45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70 and 75mm
Note 2 Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to
2/3 times the total length of the screw.
Note 3 Dia of head (Max) shall be 2 times the diameter of
unthreaded shank (Nom).
Note 4 For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1of the
standard.
Note 5 For tolerances, see Fig 1 of the standard.
Note In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, Refer to IS 451 : 1999 Technical supply conditions for wood
screws (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 6736 : 1972 Specification for slotted raised countersunk head wood screws.
19.44
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1.52
1.78
2.08
2.39
2.74
3.10
3.45
3.81
4.17
4.52
4.88
1.55
1.85
2.16
2.46
2.87
3.23
3.58
3.94
4.29
4.65
5.00
1.47
1.70
1.98
2.29
2.64
2.97
3.33
3.68
4.04
4.39
4.72
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-12
12-25
12-30
12-40
12-40
12-75
15-75
15-75
12
5.59
5.72
5.38
20-75
14
6.30
6.43
6.05
25-75
16
7.01
7.14
6.76
30-75
18
7.72
7.85
7.47
30-75
20
8.43
8.56
8.18
30-75
24
9.86
9.98
9.60
30-75
Note 1 Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40,
45, 50, 55, 60,65, 70 and 75 mm
Note 2 Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to
2/3 times the total length of the screw.
Note 3 Dia of head (Max) shall be 2 times the diameter of
unthreaded shank (Nom).
Note 4 For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1of the
standard.
Note 5 For tolerances, see Fig 1 of thestandard.
Note In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, Refer to IS 451 : 1999. Technical supply conditions for wood
screws (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 6739 : 1972 Specification for slotted round head wood screws.
19.45
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
12
14
16
18
20
24
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Dia of Unthreaded
Shank
Range of
Preferred
Nom
Max
Min
Lengths
(See Note1)
1.52
1.78
2.08
2.39
2.74
3.10
3.45
3.81
4.17
4.52
4.88
1.55
1.85
2.16
2.46
2.87
3.23
3.58
3.94
4.29
4.65
5.00
1.47
1.70
1.98
2.29
2.64
2.97
3.33
3.68
4.04
4.39
4.72
8-12
8-12
8-12
8-12
12-25
12-30
12-40
12-40
12-75
15-75
15-75
5.59
6.30
7.01
7.72
8.43
9.86
5.72
6.43
7.14
7.85
8.56
9.98
5.38
6.05
6.76
7.47
8.18
9.60
20-100
30-100
30-200
30-200
30-200
30-200
Note 1 Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25,30, 35, 40,
45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 125, 150,
175 and 200 mm
Note 2 Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equalto
2/3 times the total length of the screw.
Note 3 Dia of head (Max) shall be 2 times the diameter of
unthreaded shank (Nom).
Note 4 For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the
Standard
Note 5 For tolerances, see Fig 1 of the Standard.
Note In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, Refer to IS 451 : 1999 Technical supply conditions for
wood screws (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 6760 : 1972 Specification for slotted countersunk wood screws.
19.46
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3.
Size (Side of
of Internal
Square)
6.6
9
11
14
18
22
26
External
Thickness
Dia / Side
22
28
34
45
58
68
92
Suitable
Bolt Size
1
2
2
3.15
4
4
4
M6
M8
M10
M12
M16
M20
M24
For detailed information, refer to IS 8033 : 1976 Specification for round washers with square hole for wood
fastenings.
19.47
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal Dia
10
12
16
20
22
24
Range of Preferred
Lengths (See Note 1)
20-160
25-160
30-160
50-160
55-160
60-160
Note 1 Preferred lengths 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60,
65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 and 160 mm.
Note 2 For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to Table
1 of the Standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 8412 : 1977 Specification for slotted countersunk head bolts for steel
structures.
19.48
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
Thickness
Suitable
Bolt Size
1.6
M6
10
1.6
M8
12
1.6
M10
6. General Requirements
6.1 Steel washers shall be galvanized by hot dipping.
6.2 Bituminous felt washers shall be suitably
impregnated. These washers when heated and
maintained at a temperature of 75 10C for 1 hour shall
not get separated and flow out.
* General requirements for plain washers and lock
washers (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 8869 : 1978 Specification for washers for corrugated sheet roofing.
19.49
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1.
Scope
For detailed information, refer to IS 10238 : 2001 Specification for Fasteners Threaded steel fasteners Step
bolt for steel structures.
19.50
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
5. Mechanical Properties
5.1 The bolts shall be of property class 5.6, 5.8 or 8.8 as
specified in IS : 1367 (Part 3)* and shall be tested full
size.
5.2 Shear Strength
5.2.1 The Bolts with shank lengths ls more than the
nominal diameter shall withstand a minimum shear stress
as given below
Property Class
Minimum Shear Stress
(MPa)
5.6
5.8
8.8
310
322
515
6. Finish
4.2 Washers
4.2.1 The plain washers used with these bolts shall
be of type A, punched washer type and shall conform
to the requirements of the prescribed standard to except
the thickness of the washer which shall be 5 1 m m.
The washers supplied along with these bolts shall be
hot-dip galvanised.
For detailed information, refer to IS 12427 : 2001 Specification for fasteners Threaded steel fasteners
hexagon head transmissiom tower bolts (first revision).
19.51
SECTION 20
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
IS
278 : 1978
20.3
IS
2140 : 1978
20.4
IS
2365 : 1977
Steel wire suspension ropes for lifts, elevators, and hoist (first revision)
20.5
IS
2721 : 2003
20.6
20.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1.
Nominal Diameter
Line
Wire
Point
Wire
2.50
2.50
Mass of
Complete
Barbed
Wire
g/m
136-155
Distance
Between
Two
Barbs
2.50
2.50
108-120
3.
2.50
2.00
108-125
7512
15012
2.50
2.00
89-103
5.
2.24
2.00
97-106
7512
6.
2.24
2.00
78-85
15012
15012
4.
6. Tests
7512
2.
Sizes
Designation
Note For methods of tests refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metalstensile testing (second revision), IS 1755 :
1983 Method for wrapping test of mettalic wire (first revision) and IS 4826 : 1979 Hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel
wires (first revision).
For detailed infomation, refer to IS 278 : 1978 Specifications for galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing. (third
revision).
20.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Dimensions
2.1 Wire Strand, 3-Ply Construction
Length of
Lay
Completed
Strand*
N
3078
6156
7695
9234
12312
15390
Tolerance on
Length of Lay
mm
mm
40
50
60
60
70
80
10
10
10
10
10
10
*The minimum breaking load of the completed strand is 95 percent of the minimum aggregate breaking load.
Length of
Lay
Tolerance on
Length of Lay
Completed
Strand **
N
mm
mm
898
1796
4888
7182
14362
17955
21546
28728
35910
40
50
60
60
70
80
80
90
100
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
**The minimum breaking load of the completed strand is 95 percent of the minimum aggregate breaking load.
3. Material
3.1 Shall be manufactured from galvanized mild steel wire
conforming to IS 280 : 1978*. The wire shall have a tensile
strength of 540 N/mm2, Min.
3.2 The galvanized Mild steel wire used shall conform to
the requirements for galvanizing as laid down for the
heavily- coated wire or medium coated wire as per the
prescribed standard.
* Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 2140 : 1978 Specifications for stranded galvanized steel wire for fencing
(first revision).
20.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.2 The actual diameter of rope shall be within +4 and1 percent of the nominal diameter.
3. General Requirements The wire ropes shall
conform to IS 6594 : 1977* and also meet the following
requirements of 3.1 to 3.3.
Tensile Disignation
1230
619(12/6/1)
619(9/9/1)
619(12/6+6F/1)
819(9/9/1)
819(12/6+6 F/1)
1420
Core
1570
Size Range
Fibre Steel
mm
------
6
6
6
8
8
to
to
to
to
to
12
20
20
20
20
3.3 The mass of ropes given in 2.1 are for fully greased
ropes.
* Technical supply conditions for wire ropes and strands
(first revision).
Nominal
Diameter
Approximate
Mass Range
mm
kg/100m
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
18
19
20
12.5
17.0
22.1
28.0
34.6
41.9
49.8
58.9
68.3
89.2
113
126
139
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
13.7
18.6
24.3
30.8
38.0
46.0
54.7
64.3
74.5
97.3
123
137
152
1420
1570
kN
kN
kN
13.6
18.5
23
29
35
43
51
60
69
90
114
127
141
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
15
20.4
27
34
42
50
60
70
81
106
135
150
166
15.7
21
26
33
41
49
59
69
80
104
132
147
163
to
to
t
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
17.3
23
31
39
48
58
69
81
94
123
155
173
192
17.4
24
29
37
45
55
65
76
88
115
146
161
180
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
19.1
26
34
43
53
64
76
90
104
136
172
191
212
For detailed information, refer to IS 2365 : 1977 Specifications for steel wire suspension ropes for lifts,
elevators and hoists (first revision)
20.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal
Dia of
Mesh Wire
Diameter
mm
mm
mm
(1)
(2)
(3)
25 3
2.00
2.50
3.15
2.50
3.15
4.00
2
2
2
3
3
5
2.00
2.50
3.15
4.00
2.50
3.15
4.00
4.50
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2.00
2.50
3.15
4.00
2.50
3.15
4.00
4.50
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3.15
4.00
4.50
4.00
4.50
5.00
2
2
2
3
3
3
3.15
4.00
4.50
5.00
4.00
4.50
5.00
5.50
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3.15
4.00
4.50
5.00
4.00
4.50
5.00
5.50
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
125 5
4.00
4.50
5.00
4.50
5.00
5.50
2
2
2
3
3
3
150 5
4.00
4.50
5.00
4.50
5.00
5.50
2
2
2
3
3
3
40 4
50 4
63 4
75 4
100 5
Line Wire
Number of wires
Up to and Above 2 m
including
width
2 m width
(4)
(5)
20.6
SP 21 : 2005
6. Test
6.1 Tensile Test Tensile strength shall be within the
range of 400 to 550 N/mm2.
6.2 Wrapping Test Wires shall not break or split when
wrapped eight times round its own diameter and
subsequently straightened.
6.3 Twist Test Mesh and line wires shall withstand
not less than 18 twists on a length equal to 100 diameters
between rices.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2721 : 1979 Specifications for galvanized steel chain link fence fabric (first
revision).
20.7
SECTION 21
GLASS
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
21.3
IS 2835 : 1987
21.5
IS 3438 : 1994
21.7
IS 5437 : 1994
21.8
21.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
b)
c)
d)
3. Requirements
3.1 General
3.1.1 Material Safety glass shall be made of
A A and A quality [see IS 2835 : 1987*] from flat
transparent glass.
Note Safety glass may also be made from float glass, if
agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser.
Note Safety glass made from float glass shall not have
waviness more than 8 mm (Refer IS 2835:1987* test for
waviness) both in central and outer area and for other defects it
shall not have more than those specified for AA quality of sheet
glass of IS 2835 : 1987.
Note This test shall apply to the toughened safety glasses hav
ing a thickness of 5.0 mm and above. For glasses having a
thickness of less than 5.0 mm, adoption of the test and
interpretation of the results shall be as agreed to between the
purchaser and the manufacturer.
21.3
SP 21 : 2005
3.3.1 Thickness Laminated safety glass shall be of
thickness as specified in Table 1.
3.3.1.1 If agreed between the purchaser and the
supplier, nominal thickness of laminated safety glass,
other than those specified in Table 1 may also be supplied.
In such cases the range of thickness shall be those
which are applicable to immediately lower thickness as
specified in Table 1.
TABLE 1 NOMINAL THICKNESS, RANGE OF
THICKNESS, DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCE ON
LENGTH AND WIDTH OF LAMINATED SAFETY
GLASS (CLAUSES 3.3.1, 3.3.1.1 AND 3.2)
SL. Nominal
No Thickness
(1)
(2)
mm
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
3.5
4.0
5.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
Range of
Thickness
(3)
mm
3.1
4.0
5.0
6.0
8.0
9.8
to 3.7
to 4.8
to 5.8
to 6.8
to 8.8
to11.0
Dimensional
Tolerance on
Cut Size Length
and Width
(4)
mm
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.5
For detailed information, refer to IS 2553 (Part1) :1990 Specifications for safety glass :
Part 1 General Purposes (third revision).
21.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
tolerance on cut size shall be those which are applicable to immediate lower thickness specified in Table 1.
TABLE 1 NOMINAL THICKNESS, RANGE OF THICKNESS OF SHEET GLASS AND DIMENSIONAL
TOLERANCE ON CUT SIZES
SL No.
Nominal Thickness
Range of Thickness
(1)
(2)
mm
(3)
mm
Dimensional Tolerance
on Cut Sizes
(4)
mm
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
3.5
4.0
5.0
5.5
6.3
8.0
10.0
12.0
15.0
19.0
25.0
32.0
0.85-1.15
1.35-1.65
1.80- 2.20
2.80- 3.20
3.30- 3.70
3.80- 4.20
4.70- 5.30
5.20- 5.80
5.90- 6.70
7.50- 8.50
9.50-10.50
11.00-13.00
13.50-16.50
17.00- 21.00
22.00- 28.00
28.50- 35.50
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
21.5
SP 21 : 2005
3.3.1
Allowable cluster of defects Sheet glass
shall not have cluster of defects more than those
specified in Table 2A.
Defects
(1)
i)
(2)
iv)
Gaseous
inclusion
max size, mm
Opaque
Gaseous
inclusion,
max, size in mm
Knots, dirts
and stones*,
maxsize,mm
Scratches,
v)
ii)
iii)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
Reams
strings and
lines
Waviness,mm
Sulphur
stains
Corner
breakage
and chip
Cenral
( 3)
AA Quality
Outer Cenral
(4)
(5)
A Quality
BQuality Remark
Outer Cenral Outer
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
1.0
2.0
3.0
6.0
12.0
18.0
Seperated
by at least
30.0cm
Seperated
by at least
60.0cm
Nil
0.5
3.0
6.0
6.0
12.5
Nil
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
Faint
Faint
Faint
Light
Light
Medium
0.25
0.25
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
Light
Light
Light
Light
Medium
Heavy
10
10
15.0
15.0
20.0
20.0
Nil
Nil
Nil
Nil
Inconspicuous
one allowed
Not more than
nominal thickness
of sheet glass
Seperated
by at least
60.0cm
Seperated
by atleast 60.0cm
(see Appendix A
of the standard)
--
Note C quality sheet glass may have defect of any size or intensity but shall have no stones or knots which may cause breakage.
*There shall be none which hinders serviceability for automobile industry.
SL.
No
(1)
(2)
(3)
i)
AA
Nil
ii)
iii)
(4)
One cluster of maximum 3 defects comprising
only one from (iii) and 2 from either (i) or (ii),
or one each from (i) and (ii) in an optional
circle of 30 cm dia.
Note For methods of measurement and test refer to 5, Annex A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2835 : 1987 Specifications for flat transparent sheet glass (third revision).
21.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
a)
b)
c)
d)
For detailed information, refer to IS 3438 : 1994 Specifications for silvered glass mirrors for general purposes
(second revision).
21.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. General Requirements
Nominal
Thickness
(mm)
(2)
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
Thickness
Tolerance
(mm)
(3)
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.3
Dimensional
Tolerance
(mm)
(4)
4.3 Wire Mesh The wire mesh used in the wired glass
or wired figured glass shall be made of steel wire 0.46 to
0.56 mm in diameter. The pattern of mesh shall be
square or diamond with wires welded or hexagonal with
wires twisted. In the case of welded mesh, the wire
running across the manufacturing width shall be
measured.
4.4 Position of Wire Mesh The wire mesh shall be
embedded completely in the glass sheet at least 1mm
from the surface and shall not be exposed at any place.
4.5 Broken Wires Wire mesh shall not contain more
than 3 broken wires per square metre of the wired glass
or wired figured glass.
4.6 Flame Proofness Shall satisfy the prescribed test.
1.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
For detailed information, refer to IS 5437 : 1994 Specifications for figured, rolled and wired glass (first revision).
21.8
SECTION 22
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
IS
110 : 1983
Ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for enamels for use over primers
Page
22.3
(second revision)
IS
419 : 1967
22.4
IS
423 : 1961
22.5
IS
3709:1966
22.6
22.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR READY MIXED PAINT,BRUSHING, GREY FILLER, FOR ENAMELS,
FOR USE OVER PRIMERS
SL
(1)
Characteristic
(2)
i)
Drying Time
a) Surface dry
b) Hard dry
Requirement
(3)
Not more than 20 minutes
Not more than 8 hours
ii)
Consistency
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Colour
Residue on sieve,
percent by weight, Max
Grey
2.0
vii)
viii)
Flash point
ix)
Keeping properties
Note For test procedures, refer to the standard and IS 101: 1964 Methods of test for ready mixed paints and enamels
(second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 110 : 1983 Specifications for ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for
enamels, for use over primers (second revision).
22.3
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Residue on sieve,
5.0
IS 101 (Part 8/Sec 1):19891)
percent by weight, Max
ii) Water content, percent
1.5
IS 101 (Part 2/Sec 1):19882)
by weight, Max
iii) Keeping properties
Not less than 6 IS 101 (Part 6/Sec2): 19893)
months
i)
Method of sampling and test for paints, varnishes and related products : Part
8 Tests for pigments and other solids. Section 1 Residue on sieve (third revision)
1)
Method of sampling and test for paints, varnishes and related products : Part
2 Tests on liquid paints (chemical examination), Section 1 Water content (thrid
revision).
2)
Method of sampling and test for paints, varnishes and related products : Part
6 Durability tests on paint films, Section 2 Keeping properties (third revision)
3)
NoteFor methods of tests, refer to IS 85 : 1950 Methods of test for oil pastes for paints; and for method of determination
of calcium carbonate content and setting time, refer to Appendix A and B of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 419 : 1967 Specifications for putty, for use on window frames (first revision).
22.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
77
Remainder
For detailed information, refer to IS 423 : 1961 Specification for plastic wood for joiner filler (revised).
22.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.2 Composition
a) Whiting
b) Oils
80 to 85 percent by weight
15 to 20 percent by weight
Note For Methods of test, refer to IS 85 : 1950 Methods of test for oil pastes for paints.
For detailed information, refer to IS 3709 : 1966 Specification for mastic cement for bedding of metal windows.
22.6
SECTION 23
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
IS
3677 : 1985
Unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation (second revision)
23.3
IS
4671 : 1984
23.5
IS
6598 : 1972
23.7
IS
7509 : 1993
23.8
IS
8154 : 1993
23.9
IS
8183 : 1993
23.11
IS
9428 : 1993
23.13
IS
9742 : 1993
23.15
IS
9743 : 1990
23.16
IS
9842 : 1994
23.18
IS 11128 : 1984
23.20
IS
23.21
IS 11308 : 1985
23.22
IS 12436 : 1988
23.23
IS 13204 : 1991
23.25
11307: 1985
23.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Load
Kg/cm2
At Factory
Kg/m3
At Site
Kg/m3
0.01
0.02
95
105
115
130
0.05
0.07
0.10
136
150
165
165
185
200
2. Types
2.1 Type 1 Loose rock and slag wool, shall be a fluffy,
light weight material.
2.2 Type 2 Stitched rock and slagwool mats. Shall be
in the form of stitched mats provided with a confining
media on one or both sides. If the confining medium
provided is of metallic cage, it shall be attached to the
mat either stabbing at not more than 250 mm centres of
by stitching at not more than 250 mm along the width
and 150 mm along the length with twine or metallic wire
of 0.7 mm or 0.56 mm diameter or as agreed. If the
confining medium provided is of hessian cloth, scrim
cloth, kraft paper or glass tissue, it shall be stitched to
the mat with a suitable twine.
3. Requirements
3.1 Apparent Density The apparent density of Type
2 of the material shall be as agreed to between the
purchaser and the supplier. A tolerance of 15 percent
shall be allowed on the manufacturers declared value.
3.2 Apparent Density Under Specified Load The
apparent density under specified load of both types of
the material shall be not more than the following values.
Mean Temperature
500-micron
250-micron
5
10
(1)
200 Kg/m3
(2)
150 Kg/m3
(3)
120 Kg/m3
(4)
mW/cm deg C
mW/cm deg C
mW/cm deg C
50
100
150
200
250
0.42
0.50
0.60
0.72
0.83
0.46
0.52
0.62
0.75
0.88
0.48
0.54
0.66
0.78
0.89
23.3
100 Kg/m3
(5)
mW/cm deg C
0.50
0.56
0.68
0.80
1.02
SP 21 : 2005
3.7 Sulphur Content The material, after removal of
the confining media, if any, shall not contain more than
0.6 percent of sulphur.
3.8 Width Type 2 material shall be supplied in width
of 90 5 cm or any other width mutually agreed upon
between the buyer and the supplier.
3.9 Thickness Type 2 material shall be supplied in
thickness of 25, 40, 50, 60, 75, 90 and 100 mm or as
agreed upon between the purchaser and the supplier.
The usual tolerance allowed is 5 mm.
3.10 Optional Requirements
3.10.1 Moisture content Shall not contain more than
2 percent moisture.
3.10.2 Resistance to micro-organisms Shall not show
any mould or bacterial growth.
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials-Methods of tests (second revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 3677 : 1985 Specifications for unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal
insulation (second revision).
23.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
Type 1 Non-self extinguishing type and,
Type 2 Self extinguishing type
0C
0.34
0.32
0.30
0.29
0.28
10C
0.37
0.35
0.33
0.32
0.31
3. Requirements
3.1 Bulk Density The bulk density of the material,
calculated at nominal thickness, excluding facing, shall
be 15, 20, 25, 30 or 35 kg/m3. A tolerance of 5 percent
shall be allowed on bulk density.
3.2 Dimensions
3.2.1 Size 1.0 x 0.5 m or other agreed sizes. Pipe sections
/ segments 1.0 m or 0.5 m in length, or other agreed
length.
3.2.2 Thickness 15, 20, 25, 40, 50, 60, 75 and 100 mm
unless otherwise agreed.
Tolerance
2 mm
Kilocolories / m h C
Milliwalts / cm C
1
0.085 985
11.630 0
1
3.2.3 Tolerance
Pipe Laggings
Outside diameter
Inside diameter
Thermal Conductivity
mW/cm0C
3 mm
2 mm
23.5
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE
Sl.
No.
Characteristic
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Compressive strength at
10 percent deformation,
at kg/cm2, Min
Cross-breaking
strength, kg/cm 2, Min
Water vapour permeance,
in g/m2 .24 h, Max
Thermal stability,
percent, Max
Moisture absorption,
percent
20
25
30
35
0.7
0.9
1.1
1.4
1.7
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.2
2.6
50
40
30
20
15
Note For method of tests, refer to Appendices A to F of the standard and IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal
conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guard hot-plate method) (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 4671 : 1984 Specifications for expanded polystyrene for thermal insulation
purposes (first revision).
23.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Requirements
4.1 Density
Grade A
Grade B
Grade C
3. Materials
A
B
C
Min 320
321 to 400
401 to 500
Grade
A
B
C
Type 2
2.5
4.5
8.0
Light weight
Medium weight
Heavy weight
Grade
Grade
Thermal Conductivity
at 50C Mean Temp, Max
mW/cmC
A
B
C
0.7
0.85
1.0
Note For method of test refer to Appendix A of the standard and IS 3346 : 1980 Method for determination of thermal
conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method) (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 6598 : 1972 Specifications for cellular concrete for thermal insulation
23.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Types
Type 350 for use of temperatures up to 350 C,
Type 750 for use of temperatures up to 750C,and
Type 950 for use of temperatures up to 950 C.
Characteristic
Requirements
Type 350
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
Service temperature
Consistency, percent
a) Method A
b) Method B
Dry covering capacity m2, 1 cm,
in thickness per 100 kg of
dry cement, Min
Compressive strength at 5
percent deformation,
kg/cm2, Min
Volume change (shrinkage)
upon drying, percent, Max
Linear shrinkage (length)
after heat soaking at service
temperature, percent, Max
Dry adhesion to steel, kg/cm2 , Min
Thermal conductivity
W/mK, Max
Mean Temp, 0C
100
200
300
400
Type 750
Type 950
3500 C
7500 C
9500 C
35 to 45
175 to 230
17.5
35 to 45
175 to 235
20.0
14.0
3.5
3.5
5.0
25
25
30
2.0
3.0
3.0
0.35
0.35
0.50
0.09
0.11
0.07
0.09
0.11
0.14
0.16
0.18
0.20
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 3346 : 1980 Method for determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation
materials (two slab, guarded hot plate method) (first revision) IS 5724 : 1970 Method of tests for thermal insulation cements; and
IS 9490 : 1980 Method for determination of thermal conductivity of insulation material (water calorimeter method)
For detailed information, refer to IS 7509 : 1993 Specification for thermal insulating cements (first revision).
23.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
2.1 Material Shall be predominantly composed of
reacted hydrous calcium silicate reinforced with suitable
fibres such that the physical requirements prescribed in
2 are satisfied.
2.2 Bulk Density Average value shall be between 200
to 280 kg/m3. For any particular density, a tolerance of
10 percent shall be allowed on the purchasers declared
value and shall be within the range specified above.
2.3 Compressive Strength The reduction in thickness
under the following conditions shall not exceed 5
percent.
a) dry under a load of 415 kN/m2, and
b) wet (after 18 h immersion in water) under a load
of 170 kN/m2.
Note For compressive strength for pipes / curved segments
Mean
Temperature
Thermal
Conductivity, Max
0
C
100
150
200
300
W/m.K
0.060
0.070
0.080
0.100
23.9
Thickness
Major width
75 mm to 166 mm
Thickness
40 mm, 50 mm, 60 mm or 75
mm
Diameter
SP 21 : 2005
Thickness
40 mm, 50 mm or 75 mm
a)
b)
Flat blocks
1) Length and width
2) Thickness
Pipe sections
1) Length
2) Inside diameter
3) Thickness (average)
3 mm
-1.5 mm
+ 3 mm
3 mm
0 mm
+5 mm
-1.5 mm
+3 mm
Note For method of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, IS 3846 : 1980 Methods for determination of thermal
conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method) (first revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Methods of test
for preformed block-type and pipe covering type thermal insulation (first revision), IS 5724 : 1970 Method of test for thermal
insulating cement, and IS 9490 : 1980 Method for determination of thermal conductivities of insulating materials (water
calorimeter method)
For detailed information, refer to IS 8154 : 1993 Specifications for preformed calcium sillicate insulation (for
temperatures upto 650C) (first revision).
23.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
12-50
51-80
81-120
121-160
Up
Up
Up
Up
to
to
to
to
250
400
550
750
500 micron
250 micron
5
15
Thermal Conductivity
mW/cm C
Group1
0.49
0.69
0.95
Group2
0.43
0.52
0.64
0.78
0.93
1.10
Group3
0.43
0.52
0.62
0.73
0.84
0.95
Group4
0.43
0.52
0.62
0.68
0.80
0.90
23.11
SP 21 : 2005
2.10.3 Resistance to vibration Shall show not more
than 1 percent height of settlement.
2.10.4 Resistance to jolting Shall show not more than
3 percent height of settlement.
2.10.5 Heat resistance Shall not suffer any visible
deterioration of the fibrous structure and shall not show
Note For method of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation
materialsMethods of tests (second revision) and IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal
insulating materials (two slab guarded hot plate method) (first revision).
For detailed information, refer to IS 8183 : 1993 Specifications for bonded mineral wool (first revision)
23.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
2.1 Bulk Density The average value shall be between
220 and 280 kg/m 3. For any particular product, a
tolerance of 10 percent shall be allowed on the
purchasers declared value and shall be within the range
specified above.
2.2 Compressive Strength The reduction in thickness
under the following conditions shall not exceed 5
percent.
a)
b)
2 percent
b) Loss in mass,
percent, Max
15 percent
c) Compressive
Thermal
Conductivity, Max
W/mK
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
0.080
0.088
0.097
0.110
0.121
0.135
0.148
Mean
Temperature
0
C
Bevelled lags
Length
Major width
Thickness
c) Pipe sections
Length
Diameter
Thickness
b)
Reduction in thickness
strength not exceeding 5
percent under a load
of 345 kN/m2
23.13
SP 21 : 2005
2.8.2.1 Curved segments (radiused and bevelled
lags) Shall be furnished in lengths of 600 mm or 900
mm and in thickness of 40 mm, 50 mm, or 75 mm for
curved surface having external radius greater than
110 mm.
2.8.3 Dimensional Tolerance
a)
Flat blocks
Length and width
Thickness
3 mm
1.5 mm
3 mm
b)
Pipe sections
Length
Inside diameter
Thickness (average)
3
0
+ 5
1.5
+ 3
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
Note For method of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, IS 5688 : 1982 Method of test for preformed block-type
and pipe covering type thermal insulation (first revision), IS 5724 : 1970 Methods of tests for thermal insulating cements and
IS 9490 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductivity of insulation materials (water calorimeter method).
For detailed information, refer to IS 9428 : 1993 Specifications for preformed calcium silicate insulation (for
temperatures upto 950C) (first revision).
23.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Requirements
Compresive Strength,
Min Pa (N/m2)
10
15
4 550
6 460
3.3
Optional Requirements
Thermal Conductivity
Mean
Temperature
Thermal
Conductivity, Max
C
100
150
200
250
370
W/mK
0.066
0.072
0.079
0.085
0.101
Note For methods of tests, refer to IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials methods of tests (second
revision), IS 3346 : 1980 Methods of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab guarded
hot plate method) (first revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Methods of test for preformed block -type and pipe covering type thermal
insulation (first revision) and IS 5724 : 1970 Methods of tests for thermal insulating cements.
For detailed information, refer to IS 9742 : 1993 Specifications for sprayed mineral wool thermal insulation (first
revision).
23.15
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope
1.1 Requirements for thermal insulation finishing
cements, prepared by mixing with water for application
to insulating materials after they have been applied at
site to the plant of piping systems.
Note Some of these finishing cements are used for
services at temperatures below ambient, in which case a
vapour barrier is required. This standard does not prescribe
requirements for setting time.
3. Requirements
3.1 Description Shall be thoroughly permixed and
free from unopened or badly distributed fibres or coarse
constituents.
3.2 Bulk Density The average value shall be as given
below :
Type of the
Finishing Cement
1
2
3
4
Density
kg/m3, Max
1
1
1
1
500
800
600
300
23.16
Type of the
Material
1
2
3
4
Compressive Strength
kN/m3, Min
1 030
1 720
820
1 800
SP 21 : 2005
3.6 Flexural Strength For Type 1 shall be not less
than 2000 kN/m2.
For detailed information, refer to IS 9743 : 1990 Specifications for thermal insulation finishing cement
(first revision).
23.17
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
2.1 Description Shall be mineral wool made from rock,
slag or glass, processed from a molten state into fibrous
form and bonded with a suitable binder. The sections
shall normally be supplied unfaced. Certain applications
may require an applied finish of aluminium foil, paper,
roofing felt or other material.
Thermal Conductivity
mW/cm0C
Group 1
50
100
150
200
250
300
0.43
0.52
0.64
0.78
0.93
1.10
0.43
0.52
0.62
0.70
0.8 5
1.00
0.43
0.52
0.62
0.68
0.80
0.90
Bulk Density,
kg/m3
1
2
3
4
50-80
81-120
121-160
161-250
Maximum
Recommended
Hot Face
Temperature, C
Up
Up
Up
Up
to
to
to
to
400
550
650
750
Shot Content,
Percent by
Mass, Max
500 micron
250 micron
5
15
2.4
Moisture Content and Moisture Absorption
Shall not contain more than 2 percent moisture and shall
not gain in mass by more than 2 percent.
2.5 Incombustibililty Shall be found to be
incombustible. The loss in total mass, when tested for
incombustibility, shall not exceed 5 percent.
23.18
SP 21 : 2005
2.10 Recovery After Compression The recovery,
after compression to 75 percent of the original thickness,
shall be not less than 90 percent of the original thickness.
2.11 Sulphur Content Shall not contain more than 0.6
percent of sulphur.
2.12 Optional Requirements
2.12.1 Alkalinty The the pH of the solution of the
material shall be between 7.0 and 10.0.
Note For method of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials
Methods of test (second revision), IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulating
materials (two slab guarded hot plate method) (first revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Methods of test for preformed block-type and pipe
covering type thermal insulation (first revision), and IS 5724 : 1970 Method of test for thermal insulating cements.
For detailed information, refer to IS 9842 : 1994 Specifications for Preformed fibrous pipe insulation
(first revision).
23.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Compressive Strength,
kPa (kN/m2), Min
285
10
500
Thermal Conductivity
W/m.K
100
200
300
400
500
0.069
0.081
0.097
0.117
0.144
2 percent, Max
b) Loss in mass
15 percent, Max
c) Compressive strength
10 percent, Max
reduction in thickness
under a load of 345 kN/m2
2.7 Incombustibility Shall be found to be
incombustible.
2.8 Moisture Content Shall not exceed 7.5 percent.
2.9 Optical Requirement
Note For method of tests, refer to IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials Methods of test (second
revision), IS 3346 : 1980 method of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulating materials (two slab guarded hot
plate method) (first revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Methods of test for preformed block-type and pipe covering type thermal
insulation (first revision), and IS 5724 : 1970 Method of test for thermal insulating cements.
For detailed information, refer to IS 11128 : 1984 Specificatiosns for spray - applied hydrated calcium silicate
thermal insulation.
23.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Thermal Conductivity,Max
W/mK
150
65
0
-65
0.082
0.064
0.048
0.043
450 or 600 mm
Width
300 or 450 mm
Thickness
Length
450 or 600 mm
Diameter To fit standard pipes of external
dia up to 219 mm
Thickness 20, 25, 40, 50, 60, 75 or 100 mm
2.7.3 Special Shapes Dimensions and tolerances on
nominal dimensions of special shapes shall be as agreed
to between the purchaser and the supplier.
For detailed information, refer to IS 11307 : 1985 Specifications for cellular glass block and pipe thermal
insulation.
23.21
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Requirements
2. Types
Characterstic
i)
Requirements
Type 1 050
Type 1 250
1 000
1 400
ii)
1 350
3 000
iii)
0.23
0.30
0.30
0.46
0.51
0.58
1.5
1.5
15
900
15
2000
iv)
a)
b)
c)
Note For method of tests, refer to Appendix A of the standard, IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials Methods of test (second revision), IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulating
materials (two slab guarded hot plate method) (first revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Methods of test for preformed block-type and pipe
covering type thermal insulation (first revision), and IS 5724 : 1970 Method of test for thermal insulating cements, and IS 9490
: 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductiviy of insulation materials (water calorimeter method).
For detailed information, refer to IS 11308 : 1985 Specification for hydraulic setting thermal insulating
castables for temperatures up to 1250C.
23.22
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Characterstic
Requirements
PUR 1
PUR 2
PIR 1
PIR 2
i)
ii)
5.5
5.5
8.5
8.5
iii)
85
85
85
85
iv)
Compressive strength at 10
percent deformation, Min, kN/m2
115
205
115
205
v)
0.023
0.023
0.023
0.023
vi)
125
125
25
25
23.23
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 2 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES FOR
PIPE SECTIONS AND LAGS
Sl
No.
Dimensions
i)
ii)
Lengths
Bores less than 150 mm
iii)
iv)
Outside diameters
less than 150 mm
Outside diameters
150 mm and above
v)
Permissible
Deviations Moulded/
Cut Pipe
Sections
and Lags
mm
3
2
0
3
0
2
0
3
0
i) Up to and
2
including 1000
ii) Over 1000 up
4
to and including
2500
For detailed information, refer to IS 12436 : 1988 Specifications for Preformed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and
polyisocyanurate (PIR) foams for thermal insulation.
23.24
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Requirements
TABLE 2 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES FOR
PIPE SECTIONS AND LAGS
Sl Dimensions
NO.
Permissible Deviations
Moulded
Characteristic
i) Lengths
ii) Bores less than 150 mm
Requirement
Density, kg/m3
Compressive strength at
10 percent deformation,
Min, kPa
Dimensional stability; percent
linear change after 7 days at
7020 C and 955 percent RH,Max
Water vapour permeability rate
at 380C and 88 percent RH,
ng/Pa.s.m, Max
Apparent water absorption
percent by volume, Max
Horizontal burning, mm, Max
Closed cell content, percent, Min
Thermal conductivity at 53 0C
after 30 days of manufacture
W/m, 0K, Max
32-60
100
1.5
mm
Cut Pipe
Section
and Lags
mm
3
+2
0
+3
0
+2
0
+3
0
3
+2
0
+3
0
+2
0
+3
0
5.5
Sl
No
7.5
25
60
0.034
Permissible
Deviations
of Lengths
or Widths
mm
Up to and
including 1000
ii) Over 1000 up
to and including
2000
i)
Lengths
or
Widths
23.25
Max
Thickness
Differences Tolerance
in the Lengths
of the
Diagonals of
Rectangular Slab
mm
2
mm
5
mm
2
SP 21 : 2005
4. Workmanship and Finish
4.1 General Shall not have visible defects that would
adversely affects its service qualities.
4.2 Profiled Sections
4.2.1 Pipe Sections Pipe sections shall be supplied
in two semicircular pieces with the longitudinally mating
surfaces flat and in the same plane, so that when the
Note1
Note2 For method of tests, refer to IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials Methods of tests (second
revision), IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulating materials (two slab guarded
hot plate method) (first revision) and relevant parts of IS 11239 : 1985 Method of test for cellular thermal insulating
materials.
For detailed information , refer to ISI 13208 : 1991 Specifications for rigid phenolic foam for thermal insulation.
23.26
SECTION 24
PLASTICS
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
Page
IS
2036 : 1995
24.3
IS
2046 : 1995
24.5
IS
2508 : 1984
24.8
IS
6307 : 1985
24.10
IS 10889 : 1984
24.11
IS 12830 : 1989
24.13
IS 12994 : 1990
24.14
IS 14182 : 1994
Solvent cement for use with unplasticized PVC plastic pipe fittings
24.15
IS 14443 : 1997
Polycarbonate sheets
24.17
IS 14643 : 1999
24.19
IS 14753 : 1999
24.20
24.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope
Thickness
2. Classification
a)
b)
c)
3 to 8 inclusive
Over 8
500 mm
Straight-edge
2
1.5
3.3
Nominal Thickness and Permissible
Deviations Preferred nominal thickness shall be 0.4,
0.5, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0,
12.0, 14.0, 16.0, 20.0, 25.0, 30.0, 35.0, 40.0, 45.0, 50.0, 60.0,
70.0, 80.0, 90.0 and 100.0 mm.
Note Thickness of the sheet at any point shall not deviate
by more than the value given in Table 3 of the standard.
3. Requirements
24.3
SP 21 : 2005
5.3 Insulation Resistance Shall not be less than
following
Types
Values, m
P2/1
P3
P3/1
P4
30
500
100
1000
Note For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to K of the standard, IS 1998 : 1962, Methods of test for thermosetting
synthetic resin bonded laminated sheets, and, IS 13411 : 1992 Glass reinforced polyster dough moulding compound (DMC).
For detailed information, refer to IS 2036 : 1995 Specifications for phenolic laminated sheets (second revision).
24.4
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Sl No.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
As
0.10
0.15
0.18
0.20
0.25
0.30
agreed
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
Surface defects
Edge defects
Broken corners
Sanding defects
Warping (Flatness)
Length and width of a full size laminate
Straightness of edges
Squareness of the laminate
24.5
SP 21 : 2005
TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM AND TYPICALAPPLICATIONS
Sl
Performance
No.
Category
(1)
(2)
Type
Index Number
Wear
Impact
(4)
(5)
Scratch
Equivalent
Typical
Alphabetical
Applications
Classification
i)
ii)
(3)
Thick materials of
high performance
for special use in
horizontal and vertical applications
requiring particularly high
impact and moisture
resistance.
Compact S or
Compact F
S or F
(6)
3
CGF
(Compact
general
purpose
flame retardant)
High resistance to
surface wear
S, F or F
High resistance to
impact
HGS (Horizontal
general
purpose
standard)
HGP (Horizontal
general purpose fire
retandant)
High resistance to
scratching
iv)
HDS (Horizontal
heavy duty standard)
High resistance to
surface wear
Moderate resistance
to impact
(8)
Doors, partitions, walls,
various self-supporting
components, construction and transportation
Countertops, flooring
on special substrate
HDF (Horizontal
heavy duty flame
retardant)
(7)
CGS (Compact general purpose standard)
S, F or P
S or F
High resistance to
scratching
v)
Moderate resistance
to surface wear
High resistance to
impact
Moderate resistance
to scratching
vi)
vii)
Post
forming
material
with
moderate resistance
to impact
viii)
Low resistance to
surface wear
Moderate resistance
to
impact
and
scratching
S, F or P
Low resistance to
surface wear and
scratching
Moderate resistance
to impact
24.6
Front
panels
for
kitchen, office and bathroom furniture, wall coverings, shelves
Special decorative surface effects for vertical
use in kitchen, showroom, etc.
Exposed side components of cupboards
SP 21 : 2005
3.5 Other Properties Shall satisfy the requirements
given below
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
Resistance to scratching.
Resistance to staining.
Resistance to colour change in xenon arc light.
Resistance to cigarette burns
Formability
Resistance to blisterning
Resistance to steam.
Resistance to crazing (thick laminates)
Resistance to moisture (Double faced compact
laminates)
xviii)Flexural modulus
xix) Flexural strength
xx) Tensile strength
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
For detailed information, refer to IS 2046 : 1995 Decorative thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated
sheets (second revision).
24.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope
1.1 Requirements and methods of sampling and test
for natural and black colour (carbon black pigment) low
density polyethylene films intended for packaging, canal
lining, agricultural operations and post harvest uses,
construction work and allied purposes.
Clarity
Low
Normal
High
Impact
Low
Normal
High
Nominal Thickness
Tolerance, percent
Up to and including 40 m
25
Above 40 m
20
Slip Property
Low
Medium
High
Extra High
2.1 For example, Grade 210 shall mean that the film is of
normal clarity, low impact strength and slip has not been
tested.
3. Requirements
One roll
Lots of 250 kg
Lots over 250 kg and
upto 1 250 kg
Lots over 1 250 kg
3.1 General
3.1.1 Appearance Shall be uniform is colour, texture
and finish and free from pin-holes and substantially free
from undispersed raw materials, streaks and particles of
foreign matters. Shall have no other defects, such as
holes, tears, or blisters. The edges shall be free from
24.8
10 percent
10 percent
5 percent
3 percent
SP 21 : 2005
3.3 Tensile Strength at Break Not less than 11.77MN/
m2 (120 kgf/cm2) in length wise directionand 8.33 Mn/
m2.( 85 kgf /cm2 ) in crosswise direction.
40
50
75
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
Elongation at Break,Min.
Lengthwise,
Percent
Crosswise,
Percent
From 12.5 m
up to but not including
75 m
100
350
75 m and above
200
400
Average Thickness
m
50
75
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
Grade
45 Gloss Haze
Low clarity film
Below 30 Greater than 15 Per.
Normal clarity film 30 to 55
10 to 15 percent
Greater
6 to 10 percent
than 55
12.5
20
25
40
0.4 (40)
0.6 (60)
0.8 (80)
1.25 (125)
(55)
(70)
(100)
(120)
(160)
(185)
(210)
(235)
(260)
(300)
Average thickness
of film,m
0.55
0.70
1.00
1.20
1.60
1.85
2.10
2.35
2.60
3.00
Note For method of tests, refer to A of the standard and IS 2530 : 1963 Methods of test for polyethylene moulding materials
and polythylene compounds.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2508 : 1984 Specifications for low density polyethylene films (second
revision).
24.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
.
rectangular
sheets shall be within the tolerance
i) Vicat softening
temperature, oC, Min
ii) Impact strength,
number of failures
iii) Tensile stress at
yield, kg/crn2,Min
iv) Dimensional change at
120oC, percent, Max:
a) Extruded or calendered
b) Calendered and
laminated
Tolerance on Thickness,
Percent
Extruded Calendered Calender
and
Laminated
0.10 to 0.24
20
12
0.25 to 0.49
15
10
0.50 to 0.74
12
10
0.75 to 1.24
10
20
1.25 to 1.49
10
18
1.50 to 1.99
10
18
2.00 to 4.99
10
15
5.00 to 9.99
10
10
10.00 to 12.50
10
10
Requirement
Type1 Type2 Type3
3.2 Thickness
mm
mm
Nominal
Thickness
0
+5
75
450
20
5
65
50
No
failure
380 380
20
5
*
15
For detailed information, refer to IS 6307 : 1995 Specifications for rigid PVC sheets (first revision).
24.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Up to and including 40
Tolerance, percent
Grade 1 film
Grade 2 film
25
25
20
20
3.1 General
Above 40
Tolerance, mm
Grade 1 film
Grade 2 film
Up to to 50
20
20
40
40
Above 300
65
65
Grade 2 film
One roll
10 percent
10 percent
Lots of 250 kg
10 percent
10 percent
5 percent
5 percent
3 percent
3 percent
upto 1 250 kg
Lots over 1 250 kg
24.11
SP 21 : 2005
3.4.1 Tensile Strength at Break The minimum tensile
strength at break for all thickness of polyethylene film
shall be as under:
Grade 1 film Grade 2 film
Machine direction, kgf/cm
300
250
250
200
Grade 2 film
Machine direction
300
300
Transverse direction
300
300
Grade 1 film
Grade 2 film
12.5
25.0
50.0
100.0
35
70
140
280
25
50
100
For detailed information, refer to IS 10889 : 1984 Specifications for high density polythylene films.
24.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
For detailed information, refer to IS 12830 : 1989 Specifications for Rubber based adhesives for fixing PVC tiles
to cement.
24.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
and P 100
At 27 C (N/mm )
14
14
At 50 C (N/mm 2)
10
14
At 100 C (N/mm2 )
12
For detailed information, refer to IS 12994 : 1990 Specificsations for epoxy adhesives, room temperature curing,
general purpose.
24.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Requirement
i)
48.3
ii)
34.7
iii)
2.758
iv)
70
v)
Chemical resistance
Change in mass
Increase, percent by mass, Max
Decrease, percent by mass, Max
5.0
0.1
5.0
25.0
1.0
1.0
a)
b)
vi)
24.15
SP 21 : 2005
ii)
i)
Note 1 A guide for PVC solvent cement selection is given at Annex D of the standard.
Note 2
For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard, IS 2267 : 1995 Polystyrene moulding and
extrusion materials (second revision), IS 5210 : 1995 High impact polystrene sheet (first revision), IS 6746 : 1994.
Unsaturated polyster resin systems (first revision) and IS 8543 (Part 4/Sec 1) : 1984 Methods of testing plastics : Part 4 Short
term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile properties.
For detailed information, refer to IS 14182 : 1994 Specifications for solvent cement for use with unplasticized
polyvinyl chloride plastic pipes and fittings.
24.16
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
1. Scope
3rd Position
4th Position
Code No. of
Code
Profile
Layers/Walls
5th Position
Code Texture
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
1
2
One
Two
S
N
R
F
Three
Ribbed
Fine
grain
Coarse
grain
Four
Not
specified
Solid section
Hollow N
profile
Hollow
rectangular
profile
Hollow tunnel
profile
Not
specified
C
P
Polished
Not
specified
Example:
For a twin wall hollow sheet with N profile and polished
surface texture the Block 2 will be represented by PC 2
NP.
Block 3 This block accommodates four letters. The
first letter indicates whether the material used to
manufacture the sheet is light stabilized or not. The next
letter indicates whether any special coating has been
applied on the sheet or not. Third letter is to indicate
whether the sheets is transparent, translucent or opaque
and the last letter takes care of colour. Table 2 describes
the codes for Block 3.
Example:
An opaque colourd sheet made out of polycarbonate
grade containing UV stabilizer and having a hard
abrasion resistance surface coating is designated by
LHQC in Block 3.
Block 4 Combination of four digits form this block.
Each digit indicates the following properties in order:
a) Weight per sq. metre of the sheet/film as per
the codes given in Table 3.
b) Dart drop impact strength at 27C.
c) Light transmission.
d) Flammability rating codes listed in Table 3.
24.17
SP 21 : 2005
Example :
For a sheet with 1.3 kg/m2, dart drop impact value of 12J,
light transmission of 55 percent and flammability rating
not specified, the block 4 will be represented by 1530.
Block 5 This block is provided for any additional
specific performance requirements, if required to be
specified. These specific performances include
resistance to vandalism, resistance to forced entry,
resistance to bullet and resistance to explosion. In case,
there is no specific requirement for the sheet the
designation ends at Block 4 with an asterisk mark.
2nd Position
3rd Position
4th Position
Code
Coating
Code
Transparency
Code
Colour
(1)
Light
Stabilization
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
L
X
O
Yes
No
Not specified
H
U
O
Hard
UV
Not specified
T
R
Q
O
Transparent
Transparent
Opaque
Not specified
C
N
O
Coloured
Natural
Not specified
Wt./Sq. metre
(kg/m2)
(2)
Up to 1.5
Above 1.5 up to
and including 3.0
Above 3.0 up to
and including 4.5
Above 4.5 up to
and including 6.5
Above 6.5 up to
and including 8.5
Above 8.5 up to
and including 12.0
Above 12.0 up to
and including 15.0
Above 15.0
Not specified
2nd Position
Code
(3)
1
2
3rd Position
Dart Drop
Impact
(4)
Above 150
Above 100 up to
and including 150
Above 60 up to
and including 100
Above 15 up to
and including 60
Up to 15
Not specified
3
4
4th Position
Code
Flame
Retardancy
(7)
(8)
1
2
UL 94 HB
UL 94 V2
UL 94 V1
UL 94 V0
Above 85
Above 70 up to
and including 85
Above 50 up to
and including 70
Above 35 up to
and including 50
Up to 35
UL 94 5V
Not specified
Not specified
3
4
For detailed information, refer to IS 14443 : 1997 Specifications for polycarbonate sheets.
24.18
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Note For methods of tests and method of measurements, refer to Appendices A to D of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 14643 : 1999 Specifications for unsintered polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
tape for threads sealing applications.
24.19
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2.2 Appearance
Classification
Surface Defects
(2)
Inclusion Defects
(3)
Negligible
Acceptable
2 to 5 mm2
1 to 4 mm2
24.20
SP 21 : 2005
Thickness
Tolerance (mm)
Size I
Size II
(1)
(2)
(3)
2.0
0.43
0.6
2.5
0.43
0.6
3.0
0.5
0.6
4.0
0.5
0.7
5.0
0.6
0.8
6.0
0.8
0.9
8.0
0.9
1.0
10.0
1.0
1.1
12.0 - 13.0
1.1
1.3
15.0
1.4
1.4
18.0
1.4
1.4
20.0 - 25.0
1.4
1.4
30.0
1.8
1.8
YI for Sheet
YI/t Sheet
3.6 to 4.2
1.80 to 2.10
2.5
3.7 to 4.3
1.8 to 1.72
3.8 to 4.4
1.27 to 1.47
L 20 + L 70
2L 5
where
L5, L20 and L70 are the luminance values of the surface
when viewed at 5, 20 and 70 to the normal.
For detailed information, refer to IS 14753 : 1999 Specifications for polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) (acrylic)
sheets.
24.21
SECTION 25
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
IS
694 : 1990
Page
25.3
IS
25.6
IS
25.8
IS
25.2
25.10
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Note 1 For out door use, the cables shall meet the requirements
of additional ageing test. [see 15.4 of the standard]
Note 2 The cables intended for low-temperature conditions
shall meet the requirements of cold bend or cold impact test
whichever is applicable. [see 15.4 of the standard]
25.3
2. Requirements
2.1 Material
2.1.1 Conductor The conductor shall be composed
of plain annealed high conductivity copper wires and
aluminium wires in case of copper and aluminium
conductors respectively.
2.1.2 Insulation/ Sheath Shall be composed of PVC
compound.
2.1.3 Filters It shall consist of vulcanized /
unvulcanized rubber, thermoplastic compound or textile
materials.
2.1.4 Binder Tape It shall consist of plastic or
proofed textile material.
2.2 Construction
2.2.1 Conductor Conductors for cables for fixed
wiring shall be solid and / or stranded type depending
upon nominal cross-sectional area of conductors. For
cables having nominal area less than 16 mm2 shall be
circular only and for nominal area 16 mm2 and above,
these may be circular or shaped.
2.2.2 Insulation It shall be of PVC compound.
2.2.3 Laying-up of cores
a)
b)
c)
SP 21 : 2005
between cores may be filed with fillers. A binder
tape may be applied over laid-up cores.
d) Circular twin, three,four and five core flexible
cordsTwo, three, four or five cords shall be
twisted together with a suitable right-hand
lay. The interstices may be filled with
sheathing material fillers or strengthening
cords of textile or any other suitable material.
e) Parallel twin (unsheathed) flexible cordsTwo
conductors shall be laid parallel and insulated
simultaneously such that the cores can be
separated readily without damage.
f) Twisted twin (unsheathed) flexible cordsTwo
cores shall be twisted together with a suitable
right hand lay.
g) Flat twin (sheathed) flexible cords Two cores
shall be laid side by side.
2.2.4 Sheathing Shall be applied by extrusion.
3. Tests
3.1 Type Tests
i)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
j)
Sl. No.
Type
ii)
Code Letter
Aluminum conductor
A
PVC insulation
Y
PVC sheath
Y
Earth continuity conductor
(ECC)
Suitable for outdoor use
OU
Suitable for low temperature
SZ
Note No code letter is required when the conductors material
is copper.
Range of Nominal
Thickness of
Sheath
mm2
-
0.5-40
0.6-0.8
6.50
0.8-1.4
1-50
0.6-1.4
0.8-1.8
0.5-4.0
0.6-0.8
0.9-1.1
Note 1 Nominal cross-sectional area of conductor- 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300,
400, 500 and 630 mm2 .
Note 2 For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 2 to 6 of the standard.
25.4
SP 21 : 2005
3.2 Acceptance Tests Tests specified in (a) to (d), (h)
and ( j ) of 3.1 and following:
a) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath
b) Tensile strength and elongation at break of
insulation and sheath.
c) Insulation resistance test
3.3 Routine Tests
For details information, refer to IS 694 : 1990 Specification for PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto
and including 1 100 volts (third revision).
25.5
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
(Third Revision)
1. Scope Requirements and tests for armoured and
unarmoured single-core, twin-core, three-core and multicore PVC insulated and sheathed cables for electric
supply and control purposes.
General purpose
Heat resisting
Normal
Continuous
Operation
Short
Circuit
Condition
70C
85C
160C
160C
a) Unvulcanized rubber, or
b) Thermoplastic materials, or
c) Proofed tape (for inner sheath only)
2.1.4 Armouring Shall be of the following:
a) Galvanized round steel wire,
b) Galvanized steel strip, or
c) Any metallic non-magnetic wire/strip.
2.1.5 Outer Sheath Shall be of Type ST1 & ST2
PVC compound conforming to IS 5831: 1984 for Cables
with general purpose insulation and with heat resisting
insulation respectively.
2.2 Construction
2.2.1 Conductor Shall be as follows :
NOMINAL CROSS SECTIONAL AREA
Copper
mm2
Aluminium
mm2
1.5
1.5 to 6
2.5 to 10
10 and above
16 and above
Solid/
Flexibility
Stranded
Class
Solid
Solid/
Stranded
Stranded
Class 1
Class1 for
Solid
Class2 for
Stranded
Class 2
25.6
SP 21 : 2005
2.2.3 Core Identification Shall be identified by
different colouring of PVC insulation.
(a) 1 core:red, black, yellow, blue or natural (nonpigmented)
(b) 2 cores red and black
(c) 3 cores red , yellow and blue
(d) 4 cores red, yelow and blue and black
(e) 5 cores red,yellow, blue, black,and grey
(f) 6 cores and above Two adjacent cores
(counting and direction core) in each layer,blue
and yellow, remaining Cores grey
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
4. Identification
4.1 Cable Code The following code shall be used for
designating the cable :
Constituent
Code Letter
Aluminium conductor
A
PVC insulation
Y
Steel round wire armour
W
Steel strip armour
F
Steel double round wire armour
WW
Steel double strip armour
FF
PVC outer sheath
Y
Note No code letter for conductor is required when the
conductor material is copper.
3. Tests
3.1 Type Tests
a) Tests on conductor:
1) Annealing test (for copper),
Note For method of tests, refer to the relevent parts of IS 10810. Methods of tests for cables.
For detailed information, refer to IS 1554 (Part I) : 1988 Specification for PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric
cable: Part I For working voltages up to and including 1 100 volts (third revision).
25.7
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
(First Revision)
1. Scope
1.1 Requirements for both armoured and unarmoured
single, twin, three, four and multi-core crosslinked
polyethylene (XLPE) insulated and PVC sheathed cables
for electric supply and control purpose.
1.2 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for
use on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or
unearthed) systems for rated voltages up to and
including 1 100 volts. These cables may be used on dc
systems for rated voltage up to and including 1 500
volts to earth.
Note The cables conforming to this standard may be
operated continuously at a power frequency voltage 10
percent higher than rated voltage.
2.2 Construction
Copper
mm2
-1.5- 6
10 and
above
2. Requirements
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 Conductor Shall be composed of plain copper
or aluminium wires complying with IS 8130: 1984+.
Mining cables to be used in gassy mines shall be of
copper conductor only.
2.1.2 Insulation Shall be of cross linked
polyethylene conforming to the requirements given in
Table 1 of the standard.
Solid /
stranded
Flexiblitity
class
Alluminium
mm2
1.5
2.5-10
16 and
above
Solid
Solid/
Stranded
Stranded
1
1 for solid
2 for
stranded
2
25.8
SP 21 : 2005
3.1 Types Tests
a) Tests on conductor:
i) Annealing test (for copper)
ii) Tensile test (for aluminium)
iii) Wrapping test (for aluminium)
iv) Resistance test
b) Test for armouring wires/strips.
c) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath
d) Physical tests for insulation :
i) Tensile strength and elongation at break
ii) Ageing in air oven
iii) Shrinkage test
iv) Hot set test
v) Water absorption (gravimetric)
e) Physical tests for outer sheath
i) Tensile strength and elongation at break
ii) Ageing in air oven,
iii) Loss of mass in air oven
iv) Shrinkage test, and
v) Hot deformation
vi) Heat shock test
vii) Thermal stability
f) Insulation resistence (Volume resistivity Test)
g) High voltage test,
h) Flammability test,
4. Identification
4.1 The following code shall be used for designating
the cable:
Sl. No.
Constituent
Code Letter
i)
Aluminium conductor
A
ii)
XLPE insulation
2X
iii)
Steel round wire armour
W
iv)
Non-magnetic round wire armour
Wa
v)
Steel strip armour
F
vi)
Non-magnetic strip armour
Fa
vii)
Double steel strip armour
FF
viii)
Double steel round wire armour
WW
ix)
PVC outer sheath
Y
Note No code letter for conductor is required when the conductor
material is copper. Cables with heat resisting insulation suitable
for 85C conductor temperature shall be identified by the letters
HR 85 marked on it.
Note For methods tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 10810 Methods of test for cables.
For detailed information, refer to IS 7098 (Part I) : 1988 Specification for crosslinked polyethylene insulated
thermoplastic sheathed cables: Part I For working voltages upto and including 1100 volts (first revision).
25.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
(First Revision)
1. Scope Requirements of elastomeric insulated
cables for fixed wiring, flexible cables and flexible cords
for electric power and lighting for operation at voltages
up to and including 1100 volts.
1.1 The following types of cables and cords are
covered in this standard.
1.1.1 Cables for fixed wiring
a) Braided and compounded/varnished,
b) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty), and
c) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty) with earth
continuity conductor.
1.1.2 Flexible cables
a) Braided and varnished, and
b) Elastomer sheathed (heavy duty).
1.1.3 Flexible cords
60C
90C
150C
2.1 Conductor
2.1.1 Copper conductor Shall be tinned annealed
copper wires complying with the requirement of IS 8130
: 1984*.
2.1.2 Aluminium Conductor The conductor shall be
composed of aluminium wires complying with the
requirements of IS 8130: 1984*.
2.2. Insulation
2.2.1 Insulation for general services The insulation
shall be of elastomer compound conforming to Type IE
2 of IS 6380 : 1984.
2.2.2 Heat resisting insulation Shall be of elastomer
compound conforming to Type IE 2 of IS 6380 : 1984.
a) Braided
b) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty),
c) Unkinkable flexible cords braided and
compounded (workshop type), and
d) Unkinkable flexible cords braided and
compounded.
1.2 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for
use on single-phase or three-phase (earthed or
unearthed) system for rated voltages up to and including
1 100 volts. These cables may be used on dc system for
rated voltages up to and including 1500 volts to earth.
Type of Insulation
2. Materials
Short-Circuit
Condition
200C
Condutors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords
(first revision).
250C
350C
(first revision).
25.10
SP 21 : 2005
2.6.1 General service insulated cables and flexible
cords Cables for fixed wiring and flexible cords shall
cosists sheath of elastomeric compounds of type SE1
of IS 6380 : 1984 Flexible cables sheath shall also be of
elastomeric compound of type SE2 of IS 6380 : 1984.
2.6.2 Heat resisting insulated cables Cables for
fixed wiring and flexible cords shall consist sheath of
elastromeric compounds of Type SE3 of IS 6380 : 1984.
Flexible cables sheath shall also be of elastomeric
compound of Type SE4 of IS 6380: 1984.
3. Construction
3.1 Conductors
3.1.1 Cables for fixed wiring Shall be as follows:
Nominal Cross Sectional
Area ,mm2
Solid /
Stranded
Flexiblitity
class
test
Copper
1and 1.5
2.5 to 6
Alluminium
1.5
2.5 to 10
solid
solid/ stranded
stranded
Class 1
Class1 for solid
Class2 for stranded
Class 2
3.1.2
Flexible cables and cords Shall be
according to class 5 of IS 8130 : 1984.
3.2 Insulation Shall have the average thickness not
less than nominal value specified in respective tables of
the standard.
3.3 Core identfication Shall be identified either by
colours or numbers using any one of the following
methods:
a)
b)
c)
d)
Numbered tapes,
Coloured insulation,
Coloured tape, and
Numbered printed on cores.
Legend
HR 90
Silicon rubber
HR 150
Constituent
Aluminium conductor
Elastomer insulation
Braiding, compounding or
varnishing
Elastomer sheath
Earth continuity conductor
Code Letter
A
R
B
R
ECC
Note For method of test refer to IS 6380 : 1984 Elastomeric insulation and sheath of electric cables (first revision) and IS 8130
: 1984 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords (first revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 9968 (Part I) : 1988 Specification for elastomer insulated cables Part I For working voltages up to and including 1 100 volts (first revision).
25.11
SECTION 26
WIRING ACCESSORIES
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
IS
371 : 1999
IS
1293 : 1988
IS
2086 : 1993
Page
26.3
Plugs and Socket Outlets of Rated Voltage upto and Including 250 Volts and
Rated Current upto and Including 16 Amperes (second revision)
26.5
Carriers and Bases Used in Rewirable Type Electric Fuses for Voltages upto
650 Volts (third revision)
26.7
26.9
IS
2412 : 1975
IS
2667 : 1988
Fittings for Rigid Steel Conduits for Electrical Wiring (first revision)
26.10
IS
3419 : 1989
26.12
IS
3480 : 1966
26.13
IS
3837 : 1976
Accessories for Rigid Steel Conduits for Electrical Wiring (first revision)
26.14
IS
3854 : 1997
26.15
IS
4160 : 1967
26.17
IS
4615 : 1968
26.19
IS
4649 : 1968
26.21
IS
6538 : 1971
26.22
IS
8828 : 1996
IEC 898 (1995) Circuit Breakers for Over Current Protection for House-Hold
and Similar Installations (second revision)
26.24
IS
9537
IS 14772 : 2000
26.27
26.29
26.30
26.31
26.32
26.33
26.2
SP 21 : 2005
SU MMARY OF
1. Scope
1.1 This standard covers ceiling roses of surface and
semi-recessed types for use with simple or multiple
pendant lighting fitting and for the use in circuits in
which the nominal voltage does not exceed 250V and
the current does not exceed 6A and intended to be
used in final circuits with rated current 16A maximum
for ceiling roses with screw type supply terminals.or 10
A maximum for ceiling roses with screwless supply
terminals. The requirements specified in this standard
have particular reference to safety in use.
1.2 The ceiling roses are intended for use with cables
complying with IS 694 : 1990.
1.3 The ceiling roses incorporating means other than
rewirable terminals to facilitate the connection and
disconnection of lampholders or luminaries, are not
covered by this standard.
2. Conditions of Use Shall be suitable for use under
the following conditions:
a) An ambient temperature having a peak value not
exceeding 45C with an average value not
exceeding 40C in a period of 24 h, but not subject
to exposure to direct radiation from the sun or
any other source of heat likely to raise the
temperature above the specified ambient
temperature.
b) An ambient temperature having a value not less
than 5C; and
c) An atmposphere not subject to excessive
pollution by smoke chemical fumes, salt laden
spray, prolonged periods of high humidity or
other abnormal conditions.
3. General requiremnts Shall be so design and and
constructed that when installed in the proper manner
and in normal use they function reliable and cause no
danger to person or surrounding ceiling roses shall be
capable of meeting all the relevard requirements and
tests specified in the standard.
26.3
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Marking,
Dimensions,
Accessibility of live parts,
Provision of earthing,
Terminals,
f)
g)
h)
j)
Construction,
Resistance to moisture and humidity, insulation
resistance and electric strength,
Temperature rise,
Mechanical strength,
k) Resistance to heat,
l) Resistance to abnormal heat fire and tracking,
m) Screws, current carrying parts and connector,
n) Creepage distances and clearances, and
o) Ressistance to excessive residual stress and to
rusting.
Note For detailed requirements and methods of tests refer to the standard
For detailed information, refer to IS 371 : 1999 Specification for ceiling roses (third revision).
26.4
SUMMARY OF
5. Dimensions
Reference
to Fig 1
Rating
6A
mm
A
B
C
D
E
F
G.min.
H
26.5
22.2
19.1
+0.025
7.06
0.050
+0.025
5.08
0.050
+1.04
15.9
0.13
+1.04
20.06
0.13
7.94
5.16 to 7.54
16A
mm
28.6
25.4
+0.025
8.71
0.050
+0.025
7.06
0.050
+1.04
20.6
0.13
+1.04
28.6
0.13
9.52
6.76 to 9.12
SP 21 : 2005
6. Materials
Part
a) Plug base, plug
cover, socketoutlet cover
shutter
b) Socket base
c) Pins, terminals
and currentcarrying parts,
including
earthing-pin and
earthing contact
d) Noncurrent
carrying parts
7. Tests
Material
Though, non-ignitable
insulating material
Tough, non-ignitable
insulating material or
vitrified ceramic material
Phosphor-bronze,
brass aluminium alloy
or suitable material
a) Visual examination,
b) Checking of dimensions,
c) Protection against electric shock,
d) Construction,
e) Interchangability,
f) Resistance to ageing and moisture,
g) Insulation resistance and electric strength,
h) Effectiveness of contact,
j) Temperature rise,
k) Breaking capacity,
m) Endurance test for shutters,
n) Withdrawal pull,
p) Cord grip,
q) Mechanical strength,
r) Resistance to heat,
s) Screws and connections,
t) Water absorption,
u) Resistance to rusting,
v) Resistance to abnormal heat and fire,
Note 1 For constructional requirements with regard to aspect such as protection against electric shocks, provisions for earthing,
terminal and screw, construction of fixed socketoutlets and construction of plugs and portable socket outlets refer to 9 to 13 of
the standard.
Note 2 For detailed requirements and methods of tests refer to the standard
For detailed requirements refer to IS 1293 : 1988 Specification for plugs and socket-outlets-rated voltage up
to and including of 250 volts and rated current up to and including 16 amperes (second revision).
26.6
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Withdrawal Force
N
5 to 35
15 to 55
30 to 100
40 to 160
26.7
SP 21 : 2005
3.3.1.1 The glaze, which shall show no signs of crazing,
shall be leadless and shall cover at least those surface
which are exposed when the fuse has been mounted in
the intended manner.
3.3.2 Temperature cycle When fuse-bases and fusecarrier are subjected to the temperature cycle test the
ceramic material shall withstand the series of tests
without breaking, cracking or crazing. In addition, the
fuse-base and fuse-carrier shall comply with the
requirements of the standard when subjected to high
voltage test at the end of the temperature cycle tests.
240 single-phase
415 three-phase
2 000
2 500
5. Tests
Note For detailed requirements and method of tests refer to the standard
For detailed information, refer to : IS 2086: 1993. Specification for carriers and bases used in rewirable type
electric fuses for voltages up to 650 volts (third revision).
26.8
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Size (Length)
Thickness
Width
Distance of
fixing hole
Spacing of
fixing hole
16
Thickness
Width
0.32
8
40
0.32 0.32
8
50
0.40
8
63
63
80
0.4
8
20
0.4
8
25
80
0.40 0.40
8
50
4. Tests
32
40
25
32
Size (Length)
25
4.1.2 Dimensions
For detailed information, Refer to IS 2412 : 1975 Specification for link clips for electrical wiring (first revision).
26.9
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMAY OF
2. Requirements
26.10
SP 21 : 2005
3.6 Tees Nominal Size in mm 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50 and
63.
75.0
100.0
Length
Breadth
37.5
75
100
100
150
150
150
75
100
100
150
150
150
75
75
100
75
100
150
75
75
100
75
100
150
50.0
150.0
100
150
150
150
100
150
100
75
100
150
100
150
100
100
4. Tests
a)
b)
c)
d)
Note For method of tests refer to 4 and Appendix C of the standard and IS 9537 (Part 2) : 1981 Condiuts for electrical in
stallations Part 2 Rigid steel conduits.
For detailed information, refer to IS 2667 : 1988 Specification for fitting for rigid steel conduits for electrical
wiring (second revision).
26.11
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Tests
2. Requirements
For detailed information, refer to IS 3419 : 1989 Specification for fittings for rigid nonmetallic conduits
(second revision).
26.12
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Tests
4.1 Tests for Dimensions
4.2 Linear Breaking Test Shall show no indication of
yielding under a load less than that specified in above
table maintained for 3 minutes when undergone the
prescribed test.
4.3 Test for Flexibility Shall show no crack or flaws
and shall return to normal position without damage to its
outer or inner diameter.
4.4 Bend Fracture Test Radius of bend shall be
decreased until the yield point is reached under a load,
not less than that specified in Table given in 3.
4.5 Crushing Test There shall be no permanent
distortion.
Note For test details, refer to 8 of the standard.
INTERNAL
DIAMETER
TOLERANCE
ON INTERNAL
DIAMETER
EXTERNAL
DIAMETER
IN NORMAL
POSITION
Max
TURNS
METRE IN
NORMAL
POSITION
Min
*BENDING
DIAMETRE
+LINEAR
BREAKING
LOAD
BENDING
FRACTURE
LOAD
(1)
mm
(2)
mm
(3)
mm
(4)
mm
(5)
mm
Min
Min
MIN
(6)
mm
(7)
mm
(8)
mm
6.5
6.5
9.0
315
55
35
11.5
10
10.0
0.5
13.0
235
16
16.0
-0.8
20.0
200
63
60
18.0
90
110
35
25
25.0
31.0
160
150
210
45
40
40.0
46.0
100
225
330
70
63
63.0
+1.0
70.0
100
350
430
125
100
100.0
0.0
108.0
100
450
500
190
For detailed information, refer to IS 3480 :1966 Specification for flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring
26.13
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Size of Conduit/Bush
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.25
1.25
1.25
1.25
15
20
20
25
25
25
25
22
26
31
38
46
56
69
22
27
36
41
50
65
80
17
22
30
36
41
55
10
13.5
19
26.2
31
44.4
20
24
29
36
44
56
11.1
14.3
19
26.2
31.8
44.4
4. Tests
a)
b)
c)
Visual examination,
Dimensional check, and
Test for protective coating (for medium and
heavy protection).
For detailed information, refer to IS 3837 : 1976 Specification for accessories for rigid steel conduits for
electrical wiring (first revision).
26.14
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
user or surroundings.
26.15
SP 21 : 2005
Unenclosed switches.
Enclosed switches.
d) According to the degree of protection against
harmful ingress of water
Ordinary switches having no special protection
against harmful ingress of water; IPXO
Splash-proof switches with degree of protection
IPX4.
Jet-proof switches with degree of protection
IPX5
e) According to the method of activating the
switch
Rotary
Tumbler
Rocker
Push-button
Cord-operated
f) According to the method of application :
Surface type
Flush type
Semi flush type
Panel type
Architrave type
g) According to the method of Installtion,as a
consequence of the design :
Switches with screw the cover or cover plate
can be removed without displacement of the
conductors (Design A)
Switches where the cover or cover plate cannot
be removed without displacement of the
conductors (Design B)
h) According to ttype of terminal
Switches with screw type terminals
Switches with screwless terminals for rigid
conductors only
Switches with screwless terminals for rigid and
flexible conductors only
5. Protection Against Electric Shock Switches shall
be so designed that when they are mounted and wired
as in normal use, live parts are not accessibl even after
removal of parts which can be removed without the use
of a tool.
Rating
Classification
Marking
Checking of dimensions
Protection against electric shock
Provision for earthing
Terminals
Constructional requirements
Mechanism
Resistance to ageing, to harmful ingress of water
and to humidity
m) Insulation resistance and electric strength
n) Temperature rise
p) Making and breaking capacity
q) Normal operation
r) Mechanical strength
s) Resistance to heat
t) Screws, current carrying parts and connections
u) Creepage distance, clearance and distance
through sealing compound
v) Normal operation for fluorescent lamp circuits
w) Resistance to abnormal heat and fire
x) Resistance to tracking
y) Resistance to rusting.
8.2 Acceptance Tests Tests specified in 8.1c,) k), n),
p), r) and t).
8.3 Routine Tests Tests specified in 8.1c) and electric
strength.
Note For details requirements and method of tests refer to the standard
For detailed information, refer to IS 3854 : 1997 Specification for switches for domestic and similar purposes
(second revision).
26.16
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4. Tests
4.1 Type Tests
5
3.5
3.5
2.5
0.6
15 30
4
6
4.5 7
3
4
0.6 1.2
26.17
a) Visual Examination
b) Dimensional Check
c) Interlocking Action
d) Insulation resistance (dry)Shall not be less
than 100 megohms.
e) High voltage Shall withstand AC voltage of
1500 V rms for a period of one minute under the
specified test.
f) Moisture resistance Insulation resistance shall
not be less than 2 megohms.
g) Contact resistance and temperature raise
Shall be capable of carrying rated current for half
an hour without voltage drop in a switched pole
of switch socket outlet measured from the
terminal of the switch to the corresponding plug
pin exceeding 0.1 volt and without temperature
rise exceeding 25C.
h) Overvoltage and overcurrent capacity 130
percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated
voltage 10 times in succession at intervals of 30
seconds.
j) Endurance 15 000 witch cycles for 5 and 15 A
and 10 000 for 30 A.
k) Test for switch socket outlets for AC inductive
SP 21 : 2005
circuits
l) Screws and connections.
m) Mechanical strength
n) Water absorption Shall not exceed 0.5 percent
for ceramic material and 1 percentfor moulded
insulating material.
o) Resistance to heat
p) Resistance to rusting Shall show no sign of
rust after the prescribed ammonium chloride test.
4.2 Acceptance Tests Tests specifiedin 4.1 (a) 4.1 (k)
and 4.1 (n)
4.3 Routine Tests Tests specified in 4.1 (a) to 4.1 (e).
Note 1Test for tracking shall be applicable to mould insulating materials only and be carried out by manufacturer for proper
selection of raw materials.
Note 2 For detailed requirements and methods of test, refer to 11 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4160 : 1967 Specification for interlocking switch socket outlet.
26.18
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
15
3.5
3.5
4.5
2.5
0.6
0.6
1.2
15
3.5
7
3
8.5
3
3.5
4. Tests
30
3. Requirements:
Rated current, A
3.5
30
26.19
a) Visual examination
b) Dimensional check
c) Effectiveness of contact Voltage drop between
terminals of switch socket outlet and
corresponding plug pin shall not exceed 25 and
60 millivolts in unswitched neutral pole and
switched pole respectively.
d) Withdrawal pull Between 3 to 60, 4 to 80 and
7 to 100 Newtons for 5, 15, and 30A rating
respectively.
e) Insulation resistance (dry) Shall not be less
than 100 megohms.
f) High voltage Shall withstand ac voltage of
1500 V rms for a period of one minute under
specified test conditions.
g) Moisture resistance Insulation resistance
shall not be less than 2 megohms after moisture
treatment.
h) Contact resistance and temperature Rise Not
more than 25c
j) Overvoltage and overcurrent capacity 130
percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated
voltage, 10 times in succession at intervals of
30 seconds.
k) Endurance 15 000 switch cycles for 5 and 15
A and 10 000 for 30 A.
SP 21 : 2005
m) Switch socket outlets for ac inductive
circuits125 percent or rated current at 110
percent of rated voltage at 0.3 power factor, 100
times, at a rate approximate 7.5 switch cycles per
minute.
n) Screws and connections
o) Mechanical strength
p) Water absorption
q) Resistance to heat
Note 1 Test for tracking shall be applicable to mould insulating materials only and be carried out by manufacturer for proper
selection of raw materials.
Note 2 For detailed requirement and methods of tests, refer to 10 of the standard.
For detailed information, refer to IS 4615 : 1968 Specification for switch socket- outlets (non-interlocking type)
26.20
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
3. Tests
3.1 Type Tests
a) Visual examination,
b) Dimension check, and
c) Test for protective-coating (for medium and
heavy protection)
3.2 Acceptation Tests
a) Visual examination, and
b) Dimension check
Note For test details, refer to 10 of the standard.
26.21
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
16A
28.6
19.1
25.4
7.06
5.08
15.9
8.71
7.06
20.6
20.6
28.6
4. Tests
4.1 Type Tests
6A
22.2
16A
4.0 mm
4.0 mm
3.0 mm
0.6 mm
26.22
a) Visual examination,
b) Test for interchangeability,
c) Test for effectiveness of contact
d) Test for insulation resistance (dry),
e) High voltage test,
f) Test for moisture resistance,
g) Temperature-rise test,
h) Breaking capacity test,
j) Test for mechanical strength,
k) Test for mechanical strength,
m) Ageing test,
n) Plug pin deflection test,
SP 21 : 2005
p) Test for water absorption
q) Test for screws and connections
(not applicable for moulded-on type plugs),
r) Test for cord grip,
s) Test for resistance to heat, and
t) Test for resistance to rust.
Note For test details, refer to 9 of the standard and IS : 1293-1988 Three-pin plugs and socket-outlets (second revision)
For detailed information, refer to IS 6538: 1971 Specification for three-pin plugs made of resilient material.
26.23
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. Classification
2.1 According to the number of poles:
single-pole circuit-breakers
two-pole-circuit-breakers with one protected
pole;
two-pole circuit-breakers with two protected
poles;
three-pole circuit-breakers with three protected
poles;
four-pole circuit-breakers with three protected
poles;
four-pole circuit- breakers with four protected
poles.
2.2 According to the protection against external
influences :
enclosed-type (not requiring an appropriate
enclosure);
unenclosed-type (for use with an appropriate
enclosure);
2.3 According to the method of mounting :
26.24
surface-type;
flush-type;
panel board type, also referred to as distribution
board type.
SP 21 : 2005
2.4 According to the method of connection :
Single-pole
Two-pole
Three-pole
Four-pole
Rated Voltage
230 V
120 V
230/400 V
230 V
400 V
120/240 V
240 V
400 V
26.25
SP 21 : 2005
5. Tests
g) 28 days test,
h) Tripping characteristic
j) Mechanical and electrical strength,
k) Short-circuit*,
m) Resistance to mechanical shock and impact
n) Resistance to heat
p) Resistance to a abnormal heat and to fire
q) Resistance to rusting.
a) Indeliblity of marketing,
b) Reliability of screws,current-carrying, Parts and
connections
c) Reliability of terminals for external conductors
d) Protection against electric shock
e) Di-electric properties
f) Temperature-rise test,
For detailed information, refer to IS 8828 : 1996 Specification for circuit breakers for over current protection
for house-hold and similar installations (second revision).
26.26
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
26.27
SP 21 : 2005
iii)
For detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part I) : 1980 Specification for conduits for electrical installations
: Part I General requirements.
26.28
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
4.
Dimensions
Nominal Size
of Conduit
(Outside
Diameter)
mm
Tolerance Wall
on Outside
mm
mm
16
0
0.3
0
0.3
0
0.4
0
0.4
0
1. 4 to 1.8
0
0.5
0
1.6 to 2.2
20
3. Classification
25
32
40
0.4
50
63
Thickness
of Conduits
1.4 to 1.8
1.4 to 1.8
1.4 to 1.8
1.6 to 2.2
1.6 to 2.2
0.6
6. Mechanical Properties
Note 1 For requirement regarding gauge for checking minimum and maximum outside diameter of conduits, measurement of
thickness and screw threads, refer to the standard.
Note 2 For test details and provisions regarding external influences, refer to the standard and IS 9537 (Part 1) : 1980 Conduits
for electrical installations Part I General requirements.
For detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part 2) : 1981 Specification for conduits for electrical wiring: Part 2
Rigid steel conduits.
26.29
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal Size
Diameter
Outside
Diameter
Tolerance on
Outside Diameter
Light
Medium
Heavy
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
16
16
- 0.3
13.7
13.0
12.2
20
20
- 0.3
17.4
16.9
15.8
25
25
- 0.4
22.1
21.4
20.6
32
40
32
40
-0.4
- 0.4
28.6
35.8
27.8
35.4
26.6
34.4
50
50
- 0.5
45.1
44.3
43.2
63
63
- 0.6
57.0
5. Test
a) Bend Test Only conduits of sizes16, 20 and 25
shall be subjected to the bending test. After the
test, the sample shall show no cracks visible to
normal or corrected
vision without
magnification.
b) Compression Test The difference between
the initial diameter and the diameter of the
flattened sample shall not exceed 25 percent of
the initial diameter while the compression force
is still applied.
For detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part 3): 1983. Specification for conduits for electric installations Part 3 Rigid plain conduits of insulation materials.
26.30
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Nominal size
of Conduit
(1)
(2)
mm
mm
16
20
16
20
25
32
40
25
32
40
50
63
50
63
(3)
Preferred
Length when
Delivered as
Coil
(4)
(5)
mm
mm
mm
- 0.3
- 0.3
10.7
14.1
50 and 100
- 0.4
- 0.4
- 0.4
18.3
24.3
31.2
50
- 0.5
- 0.6
39.6
52.6
25
5. Tests
a) Bending Test After the test, the samples shall
show no cracks visible to normal or corrected
vision without magnification.
b) Compression Test After the test, the samples
shall show no cracks visible to normal or
corrected vision without magnification:
c) Impact test As given in IS 9537 ( Part 1) : 1980
For detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part 4) : 1983 Specification for conduits for electrical installations
:Part 4 Pliable self- recovering conduits of insulating materials.
26.31
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Temperature not
Normally less Than
Permanent
Application
Temperature
Range
Storae and
Transport
o
C
Use and
Installation
o
C
45
45
15
15 to + 60
25
25
15
15 to + 60
5 to + 60
+ 90
5 to 601
+ 90/25
25
15
15 to + 601
1
These types, for use in prefabricated concrete, will temporarity withstand temperatures
up to + 900C.
For detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part 5): 1983. Specification for conduits for electric installations Part 3 Rigid plain conduits of insulation materials.
26.32
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
2. General Requirements
26.33
SP 21 : 2005
4.1 Category of Test Tests are classified as type,
acceptance and routine test.
Table 3 Scheduled of Test
(Clause 18.1)
furniture
3.4 The temperature range during installation
3.4.1 from 5oC to + 60oC
3.4.2 from 15oC to + 60oC
3.4.3 from 25oC to + 60oC (see Note)
Sl. No.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
Test
Making
Dimensions
Protection against electric shock
Provision for earthing
Construction
Resistance to ageing, to humid conditinos, ingress
of solid objects and to harmful ingress of water
Mechanical strenghs
Resistance to heat
Resistance of insulating material to abnormal heat
and fire
Resistance to rusting
Resistance of tracking
Test
Making
Protection against electric shock
Provision for earthing
Construction
Resistance to ageing, to humid condition, to ingress of
solid objects and to harmful ingress of water
Mechanical Strength
4.3 Routine Test
Test
Protection against electric shock
Provision for earthing
4. Tests
Note For detail requirements refer to the standard
For detailed information, refer to IS 14772 : 2000. Specification for conduits for electric installations - Part 3
Rigid plain conduits of insulation materials.
26.34
SECTION 27
GENERAL
SP 21 : 2005
CONTENTS
Title
IS 875 :
(Part-1): 1987
27.2
Page
.27.2
SP 21 : 2005
SUMMARY OF
Ceilings
Cement concrete, plain
Cement concrete, reinforced
Damp-proofing
Earth filling
27.3
Finishing
Flooring
Roofing
Walling
SP 21 : 2005
4. Store and Miscellaneous Materials Unit weights
of the following store and miscellaneous materials are
given in Appendix A of the standard.
Agricultural and
food products
Fuels
Ores
Textiles paper
For detailed information, refer to IS 875 (Part 1) : 1987 Code of practice for design loads (other than earth
quake) for building and structures. Part 1 Dead codes - Unit weight of building materials and stread materials.
27.4